Platinum Frame and System EditionAD - 20160504

Installation and Operation Manual
Platinum™
Frame and Modules
April 2016
Edition AD
Platinum™ Frame and Modules Installation and Operation Manual
Publication Information
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp.
Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential.
Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this
publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other
than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of
this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This
publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to
which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in
equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve
the performance of the product.
Trademarks
Platinum™, Platinum™ IP3, Magellan™ Remote Control Panels, Magellan CCS Navigator™ are trademarks
or trade names of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and
trade names are the property of their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For domestic and international location
and contact information, visit our Contact page
(http://www.imaginecommunications.com/company/contact-us.aspx).
Support Contact Information

For domestic and international support contact information see:
 Support Contacts (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/how-buy/contact-us)
 Worldwide Support e-mail (mailto: service@imaginecommunications.com)
 Customer Community Portal (http://app.imaginecommunications.com/customercommunity)
 Warranty & Contract Information
(http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/customer-care)
 Academy Training (http://www.imaginecommunicationsacademy.com)
 Product Manuals (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/product-manuals)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. April 2016 | Page 2
iii
Contents
Publication Information ................................................................................................ ii
About This Manual .............................................................................................. xvii

Audience ................................................................................................................. xvii
Revision History ....................................................................................................... xvii
Writing Conventions .................................................................................................xx
Obtaining Documents ...............................................................................................xx
Applications ................................................................................................................. xxi
Unpacking/Shipping Information .............................................................................. xxii
Unpacking a Platinum Product ................................................................................ xxii
Returning a Platinum Product .................................................................................. xxii
Standards ................................................................................................................... xxiii
Platinum Product Standards ................................................................................... xxiii
EMC Compliance Standards ................................................................................... xxiv
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance ....................................... xxiv
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance ....................... xxv
Safety Standards .................................................................................................... xxvi
Safety Information ..................................................................................................... xxvi
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual .............................................................. xxvii
Chapter 1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1

Product Description ....................................................................................................... 1
Main Features ................................................................................................................ 2
Frame Architecture ........................................................................................................ 3
Frame Matrix Functional Arrangement ..................................................................... 10
Frame-Specific Components ..................................................................................... 10
Module-Specific Components .................................................................................. 11
Front Panel LED Indicators ........................................................................................... 15
Control Features .......................................................................................................... 17
Physical..................................................................................................................... 17
Parametric ................................................................................................................ 17
Signal ....................................................................................................................... 17
iv Contents
CCS Control System Integration Requirements ......................................................... 18

Real-time Requirements ........................................................................................... 18
Applications Integration ........................................................................................... 18
Frame Specifications..................................................................................................... 21
Chapter 2 Frame Modules ....................................................................................................... 23

PM-MI-5/PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 Module Interconnect .................................... 23
Operation ................................................................................................................ 23
Installation ............................................................................................................... 24
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 24
PM5-CBP/PT-CBP: Communications Back Panel Module ........................................... 24
Operation ................................................................................................................ 24
Installation ............................................................................................................... 27
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 27
PT-RES: Platinum Resource Module ............................................................................ 27
Operation ................................................................................................................ 27
Installation ............................................................................................................... 28
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 28
Using PX-RES in a Platinum Frame ............................................................................ 29
PM-ALARM-5: Alarm Module for 5RU Frames ........................................................... 30
Operation ................................................................................................................ 30
Pinout Diagram ........................................................................................................ 33
Installation ............................................................................................................... 33
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 33
Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 34
PT-ALARM: Alarm Module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames .................................. 35
Operation ................................................................................................................ 35
Pinout Diagram ........................................................................................................ 37
Installation ............................................................................................................... 37
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 37
PT-PS: AC Power Supply Module
PT-PS-DC: DC Power Supply Module
Operation ................................................................................................................ 39
Installation ............................................................................................................... 40
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 40
Specifications ...........................................................................................................40
PM5-PD/PT-PD: Power Distribution Module .............................................................. 42
Operation ................................................................................................................ 42
Installation ............................................................................................................... 43
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 43
PT-EXPS: External Power Supply Frame ..................................................................... 44
Operation ................................................................................................................ 44
Installation ............................................................................................................... 44
Platinum Frames and Modules v
Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 45
Connecting External Power Supplies ........................................................................ 45
PM-FAN-5: 5RU Frame Fan Modules ........................................................................... 47
Operation ................................................................................................................ 47
Installation ............................................................................................................... 48
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 48
PM-FAN-8/PT-FAN-14/PT-FAN-16: 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frame Fan Modules ........ 49
Operation ................................................................................................................ 49
Installation ............................................................................................................... 49
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 49
PT-SYNC: Sync Module ................................................................................................ 50
Operation ................................................................................................................ 50
Installation ............................................................................................................... 52
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 52
Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 53
Specifications ...........................................................................................................53
PT-SYNC-MI: Sync Module Interconnect Module ...................................................... 54
Operation ................................................................................................................ 54
Installation ............................................................................................................... 54
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 54
Chapter 3 Input Modules ........................................................................................................ 55

Input Module General Description ............................................................................. 57
Control Requirements ..............................................................................................58
Applications Integration ........................................................................................... 58
Controllable Parameters List ..................................................................................... 59
Submodules ............................................................................................................. 59
PX-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input Module .......................................................... 60
Operation ................................................................................................................ 60
LEDs ........................................................................................................................ 61
Technical Specifications ............................................................................................ 63
PX-HSR8C-IBG Controllable Parameters ................................................................... 63
PT-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input Module .......................................................... 66
Operation ................................................................................................................ 66
LEDs ........................................................................................................................ 67
Technical Specifications ............................................................................................ 69
PT-HSR8C-IBG Controllable Parameters .................................................................... 69
PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules ........................................... 73
Operation ................................................................................................................ 73
Installation ............................................................................................................... 74
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 74
vi Contents
Specifications ...........................................................................................................77
PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules ............................................... 77
Operation ................................................................................................................ 77
Installation ............................................................................................................... 78
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 79
Specifications ...........................................................................................................80
PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules ................................................ 81
Operation ................................................................................................................ 81
Installation ............................................................................................................... 82
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 82
Specifications ...........................................................................................................85
PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules ..................................................... 85
Operation ................................................................................................................ 85
Installation ............................................................................................................... 86
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 86
Specifications ...........................................................................................................88
PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules
PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules
Operation ................................................................................................................ 89
Installation ............................................................................................................... 90
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 90
Pinout Diagram ........................................................................................................ 93
Specifications ...........................................................................................................94
PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM Capability
PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability
Operation ................................................................................................................ 96
Installation ............................................................................................................... 97
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 98
Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................100
Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................100
Specifications .........................................................................................................101
PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules ....................104
Operation ..............................................................................................................104
Installation .............................................................................................................106
Configuration ........................................................................................................106
Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................106
Platinum Frames and Modules vii
Specifications .........................................................................................................109
PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules ..................................................110
Operation ..............................................................................................................110
Installation .............................................................................................................113
Configuration ........................................................................................................113
Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................117
Specifications .........................................................................................................117
PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM Capability ..........120
Operation ..............................................................................................................120
Installation .............................................................................................................123
Configuration ........................................................................................................123
Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................128
Specifications .........................................................................................................128
PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Receiver Modules ....................130
Operation ..............................................................................................................130
Installation .............................................................................................................131
Configuration ........................................................................................................131
Specifications .........................................................................................................133
PT-HSO-IB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and
SD-SDI Serial Video Receiver Modules .....................................................................134
Operation ..............................................................................................................134
Installation .............................................................................................................135
Configuration ........................................................................................................136
SFP Specifications ...................................................................................................137
Specifications .........................................................................................................139
PT-DMX-3G: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability
PT-DMX: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with
1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI Capability
Operation ..............................................................................................................140
Installation .............................................................................................................142
Configuration ........................................................................................................142
Specifications .........................................................................................................147
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input and
Receiver Modules ......................................................................................................148
Operation ..............................................................................................................148
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module .............................................................................148
viii Contents
PT-HSR1D-IBG Input Module ..................................................................................149

Input Expansion .....................................................................................................150
Installation .............................................................................................................150
Configuration ........................................................................................................151
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Parameters .................................................................................151
Specifications .........................................................................................................155
LED Indicators ........................................................................................................155
Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Input Module ..................156
PT-MADI4X-IBG MADI Input Module ......................................................................157
Controlling the MADI Input Module through Navigator ..........................................159
TDM Mapping .......................................................................................................161
Sample MADI to TDM Mapping Scenarios ..............................................................162
PT-MADI4C-IBG Specifications ...............................................................................166
PT-MADI4O-IBG Specifications ...............................................................................166
PT-MADI4X-IBG Parameters ...................................................................................166
PT-HSR2D-IBG Distributed Input Matrix Expansion Module ..................................169
Operation ..............................................................................................................169
Specifications .........................................................................................................170
Installation .............................................................................................................171
PT-HSR2D-IBG Parameters ......................................................................................171
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Fiber Optical Matrix Expansion Input Module ...........................172
Operation ..............................................................................................................172
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Input Module .............................................................................172
Installation .............................................................................................................173
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Parameters .................................................................................174
Specifications .........................................................................................................176
LED Indicators ........................................................................................................177
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG, PT-FSD-
MXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG) ...................................................178
Back Module Variants ............................................................................................179
Electrical/BNC Back Module (PT-FSDMX-IBG) ..........................................................179
Optical/SFP Back Module (PT-FSDMXO-IBG) ...........................................................180
Electrical Back Module (HD-BNC) with DensiShield (PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG) ..................180
Optical Back Module (SFP) with DensiShield (PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG) ............................181
Technical Specifications for PT-FSDMX/O-IBG and PT-FSDX8C/O1D-IBG .................183
Video Processing Features ......................................................................................184
Audio Processing Features ......................................................................................185
PT-FSDMX-IBG Licensing ........................................................................................187
Controllable Parameters (PT-FSDMX-IBG and its variants) .......................................190
LED Indicators .........................................................................................................205
Platinum Frames and Modules ix
Power-Up sequence ...............................................................................................205

Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image ....................................................................205
Chapter 4 Output Modules ...................................................................................................207

Output Module General Description ........................................................................209
Controllable Parameters Lists .................................................................................210
Submodules............................................................................................................211
Signal Flow Diagram ..............................................................................................212
PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules 213
Operation ..............................................................................................................213
Installation .............................................................................................................215
Configuration ........................................................................................................215
Specifications .........................................................................................................217
PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules .....218
Operation ..............................................................................................................218
Installation .............................................................................................................220
Configuration ........................................................................................................220
Specifications .........................................................................................................222
PT-HSRO-OB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video
Transmitter Module
PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR8O-OBG+: Fiber Optical 3G/1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial
Video Transmitter Module With Power Saving ......................................................224
Operation ..............................................................................................................224
Installation ..............................................................................................................226
Configuration ........................................................................................................226
Specifications .........................................................................................................231
PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking and
Dual Output Modules ................................................................................................232
Operation ..............................................................................................................232
Installation .............................................................................................................234
Configuration ........................................................................................................235
Specifications..........................................................................................................237
PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules ...................238
Operation ..............................................................................................................238
x Contents
Installation .............................................................................................................239
Configuration ........................................................................................................239
Specifications .........................................................................................................241
PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules ........................242
Operation ..............................................................................................................242
Installation .............................................................................................................243
Configuration ........................................................................................................243
Specifications .........................................................................................................245
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules
PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB: SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules .......247
Operation ..............................................................................................................247
Installation .............................................................................................................248
Configuration ........................................................................................................248
Specifications .........................................................................................................250
PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules
PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules ..........................................252
Operation ..............................................................................................................252
Installation .............................................................................................................253
Configuration ........................................................................................................254
Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................255
Specifications .........................................................................................................256
PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules with TDM Capability
PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules with TDM Capability ..258
Operation ...............................................................................................................258
Installation .............................................................................................................259
Configuration ........................................................................................................260
Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................263
Specifications .........................................................................................................264
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules
PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules
with Dual Output ......................................................................................................265
Operation ..............................................................................................................265
Installation .............................................................................................................267
Configuration ........................................................................................................267
Platinum Frames and Modules xi
Specifications .........................................................................................................270
PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules ........271
Operation ..............................................................................................................271
Installation .............................................................................................................272
Configuration ........................................................................................................273
Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................275
Specifications .........................................................................................................276
PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter
Output Modules with TDM Capability .....................................................................278
Operation ..............................................................................................................278
Installation ..............................................................................................................279
Configuration ........................................................................................................279
Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................283
Specifications .........................................................................................................284
PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Transmitter Module ............286
Operation ..............................................................................................................286
Installation .............................................................................................................287
Configuration ........................................................................................................287
Specifications .........................................................................................................289
PT-MUX-3G: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability
PT-MUX: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI
and SD-SDI Capability ...............................................................................................291
Operation ..............................................................................................................291
Installation .............................................................................................................293
Configuration ........................................................................................................293
Specifications .........................................................................................................298
PT-MADI4X-OBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Output
Module .......................................................................................................................299
PT-MADI4X-OBG Output Module ...........................................................................300
Controlling the MADI Output Module through Navigator .......................................301
Reference Locking ..................................................................................................304
TDM Input .............................................................................................................304
TDM Output Mapping ...........................................................................................304
Specifications .........................................................................................................305
Power Consumption ..............................................................................................306
PT-MADI4X-OBG Parameters .................................................................................306
PT-HSRMX8C/PT-HSRMX8O-OBG Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output Module 309
PT-HSRMX8C-OBG Electrical Output Module .........................................................309
PT-HSRMX8O-OBG Optical Output Module ............................................................310
xii Contents
Power-Up sequence ...............................................................................................310

Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image ....................................................................311
Operation Modes ...................................................................................................311
MUX only mode (Without Framesync License) ........................................................311
Framesync Mode and Delay Mode (with Framesync License) ...................................313
Features .................................................................................................................314
Features based on Licensing ...................................................................................314
Audio Processing ...................................................................................................315
Video Processing ....................................................................................................316
Support for Quiet Audio Switching ........................................................................317
LED Indicators ........................................................................................................317
Jumpers and DIP Switches ......................................................................................318
Failsafe Module Upgrade .......................................................................................318
Block Diagram .......................................................................................................334
Specifications .........................................................................................................335
Power Consumption ..............................................................................................335
Chapter 5 Crosspoint Modules ...........................................................................................337

Crosspoint Module General Description ..................................................................338
Controllable Parameters Lists .................................................................................339
PM-40×32-3G5: 40x32 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules ..........................................342
Operation ...............................................................................................................342
Installation ..............................................................................................................342
Configuration .........................................................................................................342
Specifications..........................................................................................................343
PM-64x64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9: 64x64 Crosspoint Modules .....................................344
Operation ...............................................................................................................344
Installation ..............................................................................................................344
Configuration .........................................................................................................345
Specifications..........................................................................................................345
PM-72×64-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules ..........................................346
Operation ...............................................................................................................346
Installation ..............................................................................................................346
Configuration .........................................................................................................346
Specifications..........................................................................................................347
PM-128x128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9: 128x128 Crosspoint Module ...........................348
Platinum Frames and Modules xiii
Operation ...............................................................................................................348
Installation ..............................................................................................................348
Configuration .........................................................................................................349
Specifications..........................................................................................................349
PT-128x256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28: 128x256
Crosspoint Module ....................................................................................................350
Operation ...............................................................................................................350
Installation ..............................................................................................................351
Configuration .........................................................................................................351
Specifications..........................................................................................................351
PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/
PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint Modules ..............352
Operation ...............................................................................................................352
Installation ..............................................................................................................355
Configuration .........................................................................................................355
Specifications..........................................................................................................356
Chapter 6 Controlling Modules ..........................................................................................357

Controlling Modules through Navigator .................................................................357
Navigator Build Mode v/s Control Mode .................................................................357
Create a new Routing System Via Poll ....................................................................358
Control your Module in Navigator Build Mode .......................................................359
Control your Module in Navigator Control Mode ...................................................360
Chapter 7 Installation ..........................................................................................................361

Before You Begin ......................................................................................................362
Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Cros-
spoint Module Firmware ...........................................................................................363
Installing Input and Output Modules ......................................................................367
Installing Crosspoint Modules ..................................................................................369
Module Placement .................................................................................................369
Installing Modules ..................................................................................................370
Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB,
PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules ...............................371
Installing Modules ..................................................................................................371
Removing Modules ................................................................................................372
Inspecting and Cleaning Fiber Optic Connections ...................................................373
xiv Contents
Installing Output Monitoring Modules ....................................................................376

Installing Sync Modules .............................................................................................376
Installing Alarm Modules...........................................................................................377
Installing Back Panel Modules ..................................................................................378
Installing Resource Modules .....................................................................................379
Replacing Resource Module Firmware......................................................................379
Use Cases ...............................................................................................................379
Installing Power Supplies ..........................................................................................383
Replacing Fans ...........................................................................................................385
Configuration .........................................................................................................388
Installing a Platinum Frame .......................................................................................388
Common Issues and Things to Check .....................................................................388
Commonly Performed Procedures ..........................................................................389
Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum Components .....................................390
Chapter 8 Configuration........................................................................................................391
Card-Edge Controls ....................................................................................................392
Using the Card-Edge Controls ................................................................................392
Read-Only and Adjustable Parameters ....................................................................392
Card-Edge Screen Saver .........................................................................................393
Controllable Parameters List Appearance ...............................................................393
Navigating the Parameters List ...............................................................................393
Frame Controllable Parameters ................................................................................394
Default Settings .....................................................................................................394
Application Parameters ..........................................................................................395
Fail-Safe Parameters ...............................................................................................395
Configuring via Navigator or RouterMapper ..........................................................398
Adding Platinum Frames by Polling ........................................................................399
Adding Platinum Frames by Discovering .................................................................399
Adding Platinum Frames using the Create or Add Command .................................399
Frame Application Parameters Available Through Navigator or RouterMapper ........399
Configuring Sync Reference Switch Points ..............................................................404
Sync Reference Switch Modes ................................................................................404
Configuring TDM Audio Matrices .............................................................................411
Routing Configuration (Analog Stereo/AES/Multiplex) ..........................................411
Adding a TDM Matrix to the Database ...................................................................411
Configuring Outputs for Audio Partitions ...............................................................416
Editing the Logical Database ..................................................................................422
Chapter 9 Output Monitoring Modules ..........................................................................431

Output Monitoring Module General Description ...................................................432
Controllable Parameters List ...................................................................................436
Platinum Frames and Modules xv
PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module ....................................................437

Operation ...............................................................................................................437
Installation ..............................................................................................................438
Configuration .........................................................................................................438
Specifications..........................................................................................................439
PT-HSRAEC-OM: 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI Serial Video
Output Monitoring Module ......................................................................................441
Operation ...............................................................................................................441
Monitoring ............................................................................................................442
Installation ..............................................................................................................443
Configuration .........................................................................................................443
Specifications..........................................................................................................448
Chapter 10 Terminal Operation ............................................................................................449

Establishing Terminal Operations Session................................................................449
Establishing Terminal Operation Sessions for Serial Control Interface Products .450
Establishing Telnet Sessions for Ethernet Control Interface Products ...................450
Protocol Support for Platinum Routers.....................................................................451
Appendix A Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances ...............................453

Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual ..............................................................454
Safety Terms and Symbols on the Product...............................................................454
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge ...........................................................................455
Injury Precautions ......................................................................................................456
Product Damage Precautions ....................................................................................458
EMC and Safety Standards .......................................................................................460
Additional EMC Information ..................................................................................460
Appendix B Laser Safety Guidelines ..................................................................................463

General Laser Information .........................................................................................463
Lasers and Eye Damage ............................................................................................464
Classification of Lasers ...............................................................................................464
Laser Safety Precautions for Optical Fiber Communication Systems .....................464
Laser Safety ...........................................................................................................465
Precautions for Enclosed Systems ...........................................................................465
Precautions for Unenclosed Systems .......................................................................466
Labels .........................................................................................................................467
xvi Contents
Specifications ..............................................................................................................467
Index .........................................................................................................................469
xvii
About This Manual
This manual provides information on the features and applications for the Platinum
wideband digital multirate routing switcher.
Audience This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for installation,
setup, maintenance, and/or operation of the product, and is useful to operations personnel
for purposes of daily operation and reference.
Revision History
Table P-1 Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A March 2006 Initial production release
B October 2006  Added PT-A2-DTB connector information
 Added PT-AEC-BOC connector information
 Added pinout diagrams for PT-ADC-IB and
PT-DAC-OB modules
C December 2006  Added 9RU support
 Added new crosspoint sizes
 Added pinout information for RS-232 and RS-422
serial ports
D October 2007  Updated PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB and PM-DAC-OB/
PT-DAC-OB specifications
 Added TDM support
 Added PT-SYNC information
E December 2007  Added PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB information
 Updated PT-EXPS information
 Added 3 Gb/s input/output module information
F January 2008  Updated specification information for PM-HSIB+
and PT-HSIB+ modules
 Updated specification information for
PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ modules
G February 2008  Updated RouterMapper-configurable parameters
list
 Added fiber-optical module information
xviii About This Manual
Table P-1 Revision History of Manual (Continued)

H March 2008  Updated PM-ADCT-IB and PT-ADCT-IB linearity
deviation
 Updated crosspoint installation procedures
I June 2008  Added 5RU support
 Added DC power supply information
 Updated fiber optical modules information
 Added firmware upgrade procedures for 3 Gb
input, output, and crosspoint modules
J October 2008  Added 3 Gb fiber optical modules
 Added configuration of TDM audio matrices
information
 Updated DC power supply information
K December 2008  Added information concerning upgrading
Platinum resource module firmware
 Updated information concerning fan replacement
 Added information concerning Platinum power
saving modules
L February 2009  Updated information concerning the PT-SYNC
module
 Updated information concerning return loss
M August 2009  Added information concerning PT-DX-SB and
PT-MX-SB modules
 Added information concerning switch reference
point configuration
N October 2009  Added information concerning PT-HSRO-OBG+
modules
 Updated 9RU frame output monitoring
architecture
 Added information concerning Navigator
O April 2010  Updated PT-DEC-IB parameter list
 Added information concerning PT-HSRAEC-OM
modules
 Removed information concerning audio delay
parameter
P August 2010  Added new parameter to PT-DACT-OB parameter
list
 Updated parameters in PT-ADCT-IB parameter list
Q November 2010  Added PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG
module support
R February 2011  Added directions for connecting cables on
external power supplies.
S July 2011  Added Platinum MADI Input and Output Modules
(PT-MADI4C-IBG and PT-MADI-OBG).
 Added PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital
Multirate Matrix Expansion Input and Receiver
Modules.
Platinum Frames and Modules xix
Table P-1 Revision History of Manual (Continued)

T November 2011  Added information on SFPs for PT-HSO-IB+ and
PT-HSRO-OBG+ - Fiber Optical Serial Video
Receiver and Transmitter Modules (3G HD-SDI/
1.5G HD-SDI/SD-SDI).
U March 2012  Added information for PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Frame
Sync Input Module with Matrix Expansion
V June 2012  Added information on PT-HSR2D-IBG Distributed
Input Matrix Expansion Module
 Added information on PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Fiber
Optical Matrix Expansion Module
W July 2012  Added information on Platinum MADI Optical
Input and Output Modules (PT-MADI4O-IBG and
PT-MADI4O-OBG)
X December 2012  Added information on PT-HSRMX8C/PT-HSRMX8O
Platinum Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output
Module
Y May 2013  Added information on PX-HSR8C-IBG Digital
Multirate Input Module
Z September 2013  The PX-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input module
is now available in a PM variant (PM-HSR8C-IBG)
for 5 RU and 9 RU Platinum frames.
AA February 2014  Combined content for PT-FSDMX-IBG,
PT-FSDMXO-IBG, and PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG input
modules
 Edits to PT-FSDMX-IBG, PT-FSDMXO-IBG, and
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG input modules for v 3.3
software updates
 New PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG input module
AB November 2014  Updated Power Specs
AC February 2015  Support for PX-RES as the control module in a

Platinum 9 RU or 15 RU Frame.
See Using PX-RES in a Platinum Frame
 Updates and configuration information for the

PT-HSRAEC-OM output monitoring module, when
the Platinum frame is controller by a PX-RES
module.
See PT-HSRAEC-OM: 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI Serial
Video Output Monitoring Module
AD May 2016  New Module PT-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input
Module
 Minor edits to parameters for Input Modules and
Output Module
xx About This Manual
Writing Conventions
To enhance your understanding, the authors of this manual have adhered to the following
text conventions:
Table P-2 Writing Conventions

Term or
Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields, buttons, check boxes,
list boxes, combo boxes, menus, submenus, windows, lists, and
selection names
Italics Indicates email addresses, the names of books or publications, and
the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need
emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER, TAB, CTRL,
ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a DOS entry or
something you type into a field
> or  Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus
and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document
or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a website or URL
Indicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot
problems
To perform a Indicates the introduction to a procedure or series of procedural
procedure steps
Obtaining Documents
The installation and operation manuals for most Imagine Communications products are
included on your Documentation and Product Resources DVD as individual Adobe Acrobat
PDF files. Most of the software applications contained on the DVD include Online Help
(electronic documents integrated into their respective software applications). While working
in the application, you can open the Online Help and print out individual topics. The most
up-to-date documentation and software is always available on our website.
Platinum Frames and Modules xxi
Applications
 SDTV/HDTV/AES core routing: The Platinum wideband digital multirate routing
switcher can be used as an on-air router for up to 512x512 applications; for example,
core facility routing, master control distribution, transmission solutions, etc.
 SD to HD migration: The Platinum wideband digital multirate routing switcher will
pass and reclock both standard SD (including 143, 177, 270, 360, and 540 Mb/s) and
HD (1.485 Gb/s) signals, which allows you to route both SD and HD signals in the same
router. Consequently, it provides you with a high degree of investment protection, in
that an SD facility could easily migrate to HD without the need to replace the router.
 AES/EBU digital audio, SD, and HD in the same platform: The Platinum wideband
digital multirate routing switcher can switch signals from 3 Mb/s to 1.5Gb/s, thereby
providing a truly digital signal diagnostic solution. The Platinum I/O boards will route
digital audio, SD and HD. Now you can route nearly any digital audio or video signal
within the same router platform.
 Analog audio conversion
 Analog video conversion
 ASI / SSI routing applications
 Digital signal monitoring
 Distributed routing
 Central casting: Link two or more Platinum routers together between facilities, and
control and operate as if using one large routing system from your central facility.
xxii About This Manual
Unpacking/Shipping Information
Unpacking a Platinum Product

All products have been carefully inspected, tested, and calibrated before shipment to ensure
years of stable and trouble-free service.
1 Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred during transit.
2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list.
3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing.
4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged.
5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated components before you
install the unit.
Returning a Platinum Product

In the unlikely event that a product fails to operate properly, please contact our Customer
Service Department to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number, then send the unit back
for servicing.
Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned
for service. If the original package is not available, you can supply your own packaging as
long as it meets the following criteria:
 The packaging must be able to withstand the product’s weight.

 The product must be held rigid within the packaging.
 There must be at least 2 in. (5 cm) of space between the product and the container.
 The corners of the product must be protected.
If the product is still within the warranty period, we will return it to you by prepaid ground
shipment after servicing.
Platinum Frames and Modules xxiii
Standards There are three sets of standards used in the development of the Platinum product line:
product standards, compliance standards, and safety standards.
Platinum Product Standards

The following product standards apply to the Platinum router. Please reference the pertinent
standard for more information.
Professional Video
SMPTE 259M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals
- Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE Standard for Television - Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High Definition Television
Systems
SMPTE 344M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 540 Mb/s Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 424M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcasting Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and Similar Professional
Equipment
SMPTE-170M
For Analog Video Signal quality
FCC 73.699
U.S. Federal guidelines for NTSC analog composite video
ITU-R.BT 470
Guidelines for PAL analog composite video
ITU-R BT601-4
For Serial Digital Video
Digital Audio
AES3-2003
AES Recommended Practice for Digital Audio Engineering - Serial Transmission Format for
Two-Channel Linearly Represented Digital Audio Data
AES3id-2001
AES Information Document for Digital Audio Engineering - Transmission of AES3 Formatted
Data by Unbalanced Coaxial Cable
xxiv About This Manual
SMPTE 276M-1995
SMPTE Standard for Television - Transmission of AES-EBU Digital Audio Signals Over Coaxial
Cable
PT-PS Power Supply

Safety
TUV approved to latest revision of UL 60950-1 and CSA 22.2 complete with CB Report with
all country deviations1
CE Mark
EMC Compliance tested under EN 55103-1, 2 as a Class A Device in an E4 environment
NEBS
Level 3 Certification, Type 4 Environment, SBC Special Requirements, AT&T NEDS
EMC Compliance Standards

The following EMC compliance standards apply:
 EN 50081-1
 EN 55022
 EN 50082-1
 IEC 1000-4-2 1995-01
 IEC 801-3 1984
 IEC 1000-4-4 1995-01
 Part 15 of the FCC Rules
 ICES-003 of the Canadian Department of Communications
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance

Directive 2002/95/EC — commonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on
Hazardous Substances (RoHS) — sets limits on the use of certain substances found in
electrical and electronic equipment. The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of
hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the
environment during end-of-life recycling. The Directive, which took effect on July 1, 2006,
refers to the following hazardous substances:
 Lead (Pb)
 Mercury (Hg)
 Cadmium (Cd)
 Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)
 Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)
 Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)
1 A total of 8 PT-PS power supplies can be used in the Platinum chassis. TUV will test for chassis leakage
currents using all 8 power supplies operating simultaneously to determine the total chassis leakage
current. This total chassis leakage current value must meet EN60950 and CSA 22.2.
Platinum Frames and Modules xxv
In accordance with this EU Directive, all products sold in the European Union will be fully
RoHS-compliant and “lead-free.” Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of
equipment sold before July 1, 2006 are exempt from the legislation. Equipment that
complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem, as shown in
Figure P-1.
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance

The European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection, treatment, recovery, and recycling of electrical
and electronic waste products. The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the
responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users
of these products. As of August 13, 2005, producers or users are required to recycle
electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life, and may not dispose of the
equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods. (Some EU member states
may have different deadlines.)
In accordance with this EU Directive, companies selling electric or electronic devices in the
EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled. Contact your
Sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling. Equipment
that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem, as
shown in Figure P-2.
xxvi About This Manual
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
Safety Standards
The following safety standards apply (full descriptions of these standards can be found in
Appendix A, Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances on page 453):
 IEC-950
 UL 60950-1
 EN60950: 1992 + A1: 1993 + A2: 1993 +A3: 1995 A4: 1997 +A11: 1997 EMKO-TSE
(74-SEC) 207/94
 UL1419
 CSA C22.2 No. 1
Safety Information
Carefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or
any products connected to it. You will find a complete list of safety precautions in
Appendix A, Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances on page 453. Any
user-serviceable components (such as fuses or batteries) are only replaceable by those
components listed in the manual.
IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.

Platinum Frames and Modules xxvii
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual

WARNING: Statements identifying conditions or practices that may result in
personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is present.
CAUTION: Statements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage

to the equipment or other property.
T
xxviii About This Manual
1
1 Introduction
The Platinum routing switcher system extends both the matrix size and functionality of our
routing switcher product line. Its flexible modular architecture accommodates both standard
definition and high definition digital video signals while keeping a versatile frame and
control system. This combination allows high performance, multi-format video routing
within a single, flexible frame.
This chapter covers the following topics:
 Control Features on page 17

 Frame-Specific Components on page 10
 Frame Specifications on page 21
 Front Panel LED Indicators on page 15
 Main Features on page 2
 Module-Specific Components on page 11
 Product Description on page 1
Product Description
The Platinum routing switcher system provides matrix expandability beyond 8×8, to
512×512 in a single frame. The 8×8 building block provides ideal growth and flexibility for
mixed applications such as high definition and serial digital interface, and other integrated
processing opportunities such as analog and/or digital conversion. With its ability to route
signals ranging from 3.0 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s, the Platinum router offers a clear growth path
from lower bit rate signals to high bandwidth, high definition format signals. This router will
also handle both AES and polarity sensitive ASI/SSI signal formats.
The Platinum router is available in these frame sizes:
 The 5RU (PM-FR-5) frame supports matrices up to 72×64.

 The 9RU (PM-FR-9) frame supports matrices up to 128×128.
 The 15RU (PT-FR-15) frame supports matrices up to 256×256.
 The 28RU (PT-FR-28) frame supports matrices up to 512×512.
All of these frames use common, front-loadable, and hot-swappable input and output
modules. The 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames use common crosspoint modules. (The 5RU
frame uses a different crosspoint module). Each frame has a passive module interconnect
(MI) signal distribution module interconnecting the routing system.
2 Chapter 1
Introduction
The frames support user-friendly, self guiding insertion and extraction: No module can be
inserted into the wrong area where damage (electrical or physical) may occur. The frames
are designed so that, during module insertion or extraction, damage to other modules is
prevented. All modules ground before any active components are energized. This includes
standard make-before-break power connectors and grounding tabs, where necessary, on
modules.
Each frame is accessible from the front via sectioned, removable doors. Status LEDs can be
viewed through these doors; these LEDs indicate power supply presence (and status),
resource module usage, and link light indicators for Ethernet communications ports. Two
tri-color LEDs that indicate user-defined alarm conditions are also viewable through the
door. (See Figure 1-8 on page 16.)
The frames are designed to be compliant with NEBS certification requirements (for example,
non-removable door option, locking power supplies, etc.).
Platinum frames are compatible with all of Imagine Communications’ router control
software products, such as CCS Navigator™ and RouterMapper™.
A key advantage of the Platinum router is that it provides redundant crosspoint paths in the
5RU, 9RU, and 15RU frames. This function, a common concern of professional broadcast
customers, is not offered by many current competitive products. By using redundant
crosspoint modules, a fully redundant path through the system is available. While the 5RU,
9RU, and 15RU Platinum frames provide complete hardware crosspoint redundancy, all
frames offer redundant path operation based on advanced rule sets integrated into the
control system, thus providing a more robust operation than typically found in competitive
offerings.
Main Features
 Routing for large systems
 72×64 in a 5RU frame
 Video routing
 HD-SDI digital multirate from 3.00 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s
 Digital video signals including SMPTE 310, SDI, ASI, HD-SDI
 Analog video via conversion to/from SDI on I/O modules
 Audio routing
 Digital audio signals including balanced and unbalanced (coaxial) AES
 Analog stereo audio via conversion to/from AES on I/O modules
 Module I/O in groups of 8
 Route to/from digital and analog signals with no external processing
 Front-loading, hot swappable modules
 Redundancy (power supplies, resource modules, signal paths) throughout
 Enhanced control and monitoring capabilities
 Secure access rights with restrictions by level, source, and destination
 CCSP, SNMP, and third-party protocol support
Platinum Frames and Modules 3
Frame Architecture
Platinum routing switchers are available in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frame sizes. Each
size can accommodate any signal format or combination of signal formats, and has
different options available for customizing. (Some aspects of frame customization and
matrix size specifics will be discussed in detail in each signal format’s individual section). For
illustrations of each frame size’s physical architecture, see Figure 1-1 on page 4 through
Figure 1-4 on page 6.
Table 1-1 Platinum Series Architectural Information
Architecture 5RU 9RU 15RU 28RU

(PM-FR-5) (PM-FR-9) (PT-FR-15) (PT-FR-28)
Dimensions
Width 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm)
Depth 18.4 in.(46.7 cm) 18.4 in.(46.7 cm) 18.4 in.(46.7cm) 18.4 in.(46.7cm)
8.75 in. (22.2 cm) 15.75 in.(40.0 26.25 in.(66.7 cm) 49.0 in.(124.5 cm)
Height
cm)
Weight fully loaded 68 lb (31 kg) 125 lb (57 kg) 210 lb (95 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
(approx.)
Matrix size 72×64 128×128 256×256 512×512
Matrix module capacity
Input slots 9 16 32 64
Output slots 8 16 32 64
Crosspoint slots 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 4 (2 redundant) 8
Resource slots 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
TDM slots 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
Sync slots 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
PSU slots 2 4 4 8
Monitoring slots 2 4 4 4
Alarm slots 1 1 1 1
Streaming slots 1 1 1 1
Standard equipment
Power supply 1 1 2 4
Fan module 1 1 1 2
Upgrade options
Redundant power supply Yes Yes Yes Yes
Redundant resource Yes Yes Yes Yes
module
Redundant sync options Yes Yes Yes Yes
Redundant crosspoint Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Chapter 1
Introduction
Figure 1-1 72×64 Physical Architecture (Front View)
Power supplies
Crosspoint module
MI module (128×128)
2 1
Outputs 1-128 Inputs 1-128
Output modules Input modules

Reclocker Driver
EQ
Resource (2), TDM XPT (2), Sync (2), OM (4)

Power supplies
Crosspoint module
MI module
(128×256)
2 1
Outputs 1-128 Inputs 1-128
Outputs 129-256
4 3 Inputs 129-256

Reclocker Driver
EQ
Resource (2), TDM XPT (2), Sync (2), OM (4)

6 Chapter 1
Introduction
Power supplies
Crosspoint module
(128×256)
Outputs 1-128 2 1
Inputs 1-128
MI module
Outputs 129-256 4 3 Inputs 129-256
Resource (2), TDM XPT (2),

Sync (2), OM (4)
Outputs 257-384 6 5 Inputs 257-384

Reclocker Driver
EQ
Outputs 385-512 8 7 Inputs 385-512
Power supplies

The Platinum router's modular architecture consists of separate input and output modules,
each of which contains eight inputs or outputs; and crosspoint matrixes (redundant
crosspoint paths can be configured for robust operation). Depending on the configuration,
one or more modules may be present in the frame for various optional functions. See Table
1-1 on page 3 for frame population information.
 Detailed information about input modules (such as configuration, installation, block

diagrams, and specifications) is outlined in Chapter 3.
 Detailed information about output modules is outlined in Chapter 4.
 Detailed information about crosspoint modules is outlined in Chapter 5.
 Detailed information about output monitoring submodules is outlined in Chapter 9.
A resource module (PT-RES) is required for system control. A second resource module may
be added for redundancy. See page 27 for detailed information about the resource module.
A single power supply supplies the core components for each frame size. Frames with
conversion or advanced processing options may require additional power supplies; or
additional power supplies may be added for redundancy. Table 1-1 on page 3 shows the
number of total power supplies required for each frame size. See page 39 for detailed
information about the power supply module.
The Platinum router supports several output monitoring modules, which are available as
options. See page 14 for brief descriptions of these options. Detailed information about
these options (such as configuration, installation, block diagrams, and specifications) is
outlined in Chapter 9.
Status LEDs, viewable through the door, indicate power supply presence and status,
resource card usage, and link light indicators for Ethernet communications ports. Two
bicolor LEDs, also viewable through the door, indicate user-defined alarm conditions. Since
the door is removable, frame cooling is fully functional whether or not the door is present.
(For maximum cooling, we recommend leaving the door closed.)
Frame modular components include the following items. These items are illustrated in
Figure 1-5 on page 8, Figure 1-6 on page 8, and Figure 1-7 on page 9.
 Input modules are located on the right side of the frame, and output modules are
located on the left side, as viewed from the front when the front panel door is opened.
Both module types are visible from the front when the front panel door is opened. (See
Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.)
 The resource module and optional redundant resource module are located in the
middle of the frame in 28RU frames, and below the output modules in 5RU, 9RU and
15RU frames. Resource modules are visible when the front panel door is opened. (See
Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.)
 The sync module and optional redundant sync module are located below the resource
modules in 5RU frames and above the resource modules in 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU
frames. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.) Sync modules are visible when the front panel
door is opened.
8 Chapter 1
Introduction
Figure 1-5 Platinum 5RU Frame Modular Components
Figure 1-6 Platinum Frame Modular Components (15RU Shown)
 Power supply modules are located at the bottom of the frame in 5RU frames, at the top
of the frame in 9RU and 15RU frames, and at the top and the bottom of the frame in
28RU frames. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.)
 Back panel I/O modules mount to the rear of the frame (behind the input and output
modules) and provide input and output connections for the system. (See Figure 1-7.)
The same BNC back panel I/O module is used for the inputs as well as the outputs.
 Fans are located on the rear of the frame and are individually removable in case of a
failure. (See Figure 1-7.)
 The communications back panel is located bottom of the frame, below the back panel
connectors for the output modules. (See Figure 1-7.)
Figure 1-7 Platinum 15RU Frame Showing Back Panel

10 Chapter 1
Introduction
Frame Matrix Functional Arrangement
Frame-Specific Components
Table 1-2 Platinum Frame-Specific Modules

Part Number Description
PM-ALARM-5 Alarm module for 5RU frames; monitors power supplies and fans;
provides both LEDs and relay alarm contacts for both and allows
custom alarm configurations based on parameters within a Platinum
frame (for example, signal presence, etc.) (see page 30 for more
information)
PT-ALARM Alarm module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames; monitors power
supplies and fans; provides both LEDs and relay alarm contacts for
both and allows custom alarm configurations based on parameters
within a Platinum frame (for example, signal presence, etc.) (see
page 35 for more information)
PM5-CBP Communications back panel module for 5RU frames; interfaces
between communications connectors and resource modules (see
PT-CBP Communications back panel module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU
frames; interfaces between communications connectors and
resource modules (see page 24 for more information)
PM-FAN-5 Fan module for 5RU frames; cools all modules (see page 49 for more
information)
PM-FAN-8 Fan module for 9RU frames; cools all modules (see page 49 for more
information)
PT-FAN-14 Fan modules for 15RU and 28RU frames; cool input, output, and
PT-FAN-16 resource modules (see page 49 for more information)
PM-MI-5 Module interconnect; passive central signal distribution modules for
PM-MI-9 Platinum frames (see page 23 for more information)
PT-MI-15
PT-MI-28
PT-PD Power distribution module; interfaces with power supplies and
distributes power to a Platinum system (see page 42 for more
information)
PT-PS AC power supply module (see page 39 for more information)
PT-PS-DC DC power supply module (see page 39 for more information)
PT-RES Resource module; provides control logic for a Platinum frame (see
PT-SYNC Sync module; allows for distribution of 1-4 independent channels of
sync signals to input and output modules placed within a Platinum
frame (see page 50 for more information)
PT-SYNC-MI Module interconnect; central signal distribution module for a
Platinum frame (see page 54 for more information)
Module-Specific Components
Input modules, output modules, and crosspoint modules are available in PM and PT series.
PM-series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT-series modules operate in 5RU,
9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
Input Modules
Note: See Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output,
and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 363 and Installing Input and Output
Modules on page 367 for information about installing input modules. See Specialized
Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and
PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules on page 371 for information about installing
PT-HS1310S-IB fiber optical modules.
Table 1-3 Input Modules

PM-ADC-IB Audio A/D input module (see page 110)
PT-ADC-IB
PM-ADCT-IB Audio A/D input module with TDM capability (see page 120)
PT-ADCT-IB
PM-AEB-IB AES input front module (see page 89)
PM-AEC-IB
PT-AEB-IB
PT-AEC-IB
PM-AEBT-IB AES input front module with TDM capability (see page 96)
PM-AECT-IB
PT-AEBT-IB
PT-AECT-IB
PM-DEC-IB Video A/D input module (decoder) (see page 104)
PT-DEC-IB
PT-DMX-3G Submodule designed to de-embed embedded audio and distribute
PT-DMX audio and video signals to separate crosspoints (see page 140)
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Frame Sync Input Module with Matrix Expansion
(see page 190)
PT-FSDMX-IBG Frame synchronizer and demultiplexing input modules (see
PT-FSDMXO-IBG page 190)
PT-HS1310S-IB Fiber optical receiver module (see page 130)
PM-HS-IB Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital
PT-HS-IB signal between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s (see page 73)
PM-HS-IB+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital
PT-HS-IB+ signal between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s (see page 77)
PT-HSO-IB+ Fiber optical 3 Gb HD-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI serial video receiver (see
page 134)
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input and Receiver Modules (see
PT-HSR1D-IBG page 148)
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Fiber Optical Matrix Expansion Input Module (see page 172)
PT-HSR2D-IBG Distributed Input Matrix Expansion Module (see page 169)
12 Chapter 1
Introduction
Table 1-3 Input Modules (Continued)

PM-S-IB Digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal
PT-S-IB between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s (see page 85)
PM-S-IB+ Digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal
PT-S-IB+ between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s (see page 81)
PT-MADI4C-IBG Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Input Module
(see page 156)
PX-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input Module
(New) (see page 60)
Output Modules
and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 363 and Installing Input and Output
Modules on page 367 for information about installing output modules. See Specialized
Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and
PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules on page 371 for information about installing
PT-HSR1310S-OB fiber optical modules.
Table 1-4 Output Modules

PM-AEB-OB AES balanced/unbalanced (coaxial) output front module (see
PM-AEC-OB page 218)
PT-AEB-OB
PT-AEC-OB
PM-AEBT-OB AES output front module with TDM capability (see page 224)
PM-AECT-OB
PT-AEBT-OB
PT-AECT-OB
PM-DAC-OB AES to analog audio converter output module (see page 237)
PT-DAC-OB
PM-DACT-OB Audio D/A output module with TDM capability (see page 244)
PT-DACT-OB
PM-ENC-DOB SDI to analog video encoder module and dual output back panel
PT-ENC-DOB (see page 231)
PM-ENC-OB SDI to analog video encoder module (see page 231)
PT-ENC-OB
PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber optical transmitter module (see page 252)
PM-HSR-DOB Dual wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
PT-HSR-DOB digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s with reclocking for all
standard SMPTE data rates in this range; dual outputs (see
page 198)
PM-HSR-OB Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
PT-HSR-OB digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s with reclocking for all
standard SMPTE data rates in this range (see page 198)
Table 1-4 Output Modules (Continued)

PM-HSR-OB+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
PT-HSR-OB+ digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s with reclocking for
270 Mb/s, 1.5 Gb/s, and 3 Gb/s data rates (see page 186)
PM-HSR-OBG+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
PT-HSR-OBG+ digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s with reclocking for
270 Mb/s, 1.5 Gb/s, and 3 Gb/s data rates (see page 181)
PT-HSRO-OB+ Fiber 3 Gb HD-SDI/HD-SDI/ SD-SDI optical transmitter module (see
page 192)
PT-HSRO-OBG+ Fiber 3 Gb HD-SDI/HD-SDI/ SD-SDI optical transmitter module with
power saving (see page 192)
PT-MUX-3G Submodule designed to embed audio and video signals (see
PT-MUX page 257)
PT-MADI4C-OBG Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Output
(New) Module (see page 299)
PM-SR-DOB Digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals
PT-SR-DOB between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for all standard
SMPTE data rates in this range; dual outputs (see page 213)
PM-SR-OB Digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals
PT-SR-OB between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for all standard
SMPTE data rates in this range (see page 213)
PM-SR-OB+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
PT-SR-OB+ digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for
270 Mb/s data rate (see page 208)
PM-SR-OBG+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
PT-SR-OBG+ digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for
270 Mb/s data rate (see page 204)
Crosspoint Modules
and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 363 and Installing Crosspoint Modules on
page 369 for information about installing crosspoint modules.
Table 1-5 Crosspoint Modules

PM-40×32-3G5 33 Gb HD-SDI 40×32 crosspoint module for 5RU frames (see
PM-64×64-X9 64×64 crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 344 for more
information)
PM-128×128-X9 128×128 crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 346 for more
information)
14 Chapter 1
Introduction
Table 1-5 Crosspoint Modules(Continued)

PT-128×256-X15 128×256 crosspoint module for 15RU and 28RU frames (see
PT-128x256-XPT page 350 for more information)
PT-128×256-3G15 3 Gb HD-SDI 128×256 crosspoint module for 15RU and 28RU
PT-128×256-3G28 frames (see page 350 for more information)
PM-ATDM9-X5 9×8 TDM crosspoint module for 5RU frames (see page 352 for more
information)
PM-ATDM16-X9 16×16 TDM crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 352 for
more information)
PT-ATDM16-X15 16×16 TDM crosspoint module for 15RU frames (see page 352 for
more information)
more information)
more information)
more information)
Output Monitoring Modules

Note: See Installing Output Monitoring Modules on page 376 for information about
installing output monitoring modules.
Table 1-6 Output Monitoring Modules

PT-HSR-OM HD/SD output monitoring input/output module (see page 437 for
more information)
PT-HSRAEC-OM 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI serial video and AES audio output monitoring
module (see page 441 for more information)
Back Panel Input/Output (I/O) Modules

Note: See Installing Back Panel Modules on page 378 for information about installing
back panel modules.
Table 1-7 Back Panel Modules

PT-A2-BP Analog stereo audio back module
PT-A2-DTB Terminal block adapter, accommodates wiring of individual signals
to a frame (see page 112 and page 237 for more information)
PT-AEB-IBP AES balanced input back module (see page 90 and page 97 for
corresponding input modules)
Table 1-7 Back Panel Modules (Continued)

PT-AEB-OBP AES balanced output back module (see page 219 for corresponding
output module)
PT-AEC-BOC Coaxial AES break-out cable for use with PM-AEC-IBP,
PM-AEC-OBP, PT-AEC-IBP, and PT-AEC-OBP back modules (see
page 90, page 97, and page 219 for more information)
PT-AEC-IBP AES coaxial input back module (see page 90 for corresponding input
module)
PT-AEC-OBP AES coaxial output back module (see page 219 for corresponding
output module)
PT-AECT-IBP Coaxial AES audio input back module with PT-AEC-BOC (requires
PT-x-ATDM-XPT)
PT-AECT-OBP Coaxial AES audio output back module with PT-AEC-BOC (requires
PT-x-ATDM-XPT)
PT-FO-BMI Fiber optical input back module (see page 131)
PT-FO-BMO Fiber optical output back module (see page 253)
PT-HS-BP+ Back panel module for Platinum power saving modules (see
page 186 for corresponding output modules)
PT-SFP2X4+BM Fiber optical input back module (see page 135 and page 193 for
corresponding modules)
PT-V-BP 8-BNC back module (HS, S, ENC, DEC)
Front Panel LED Indicators

The front panel LED indicators originate on the resource module(s) and power supply
module(s).
 Status LEDs indicate power supply status, resource module usage, and link light
indicators for Ethernet communications ports.
 Alarm LEDs indicate user-defined alarm conditions.
The LEDs on the front of these two module types shine through a lens in the front panel
door. These LED indicators are shown in Figure 1-8.
16 Chapter 1
Introduction
These front panel LED indicators reflect the status of subsystems inside the frame. The
indicators for each power supply provide information on each voltage rail and the power
supply’s fan. The indicators from each resource module provide status information of the
frame’s resource module. These indicators are lit green when the system is functioning
properly and red if a failure condition exists.
CAUTION
Both alarm LEDs simultaneously flashing red indicates that the PT-RES resource
module has experienced a failure condition and needs to be rebooted. Reboot the
PT-RES module as soon as possible, and then notify Customer Service
Figure 1-8 Front Panel LED Indicators

Control Features
Your Platinum router makes use of the most innovative control systems available on the
market today. The operating system used for the Platinum router is a real-time embedded
operating system that uses an interrupt-driven and priority-based task scheduling algorithm
to control the operations of the router. This means that switches will occur in a timely
manner, which allows the Platinum router to be used in broadcast facilities where timing is
crucial to the success of the facility.
Physical The control system reports information related to the physical properties of the control
subsystem components, such as
 Number of control modules actually installed

 Hardware revision(s) of installed modules
 Number of coprocessors actually installed
 Type, number and revision of internal control communications network components
that are installed.
Parametric The control system reports information related to the control system itself, such as
 Number of operational logic/resource modules

 Condition of operation (for example, active/standby, etc.)
 Installed firmware/software version(s)
 Available memory (volatile/nonvolatile/internal or external)
 Installed communications ports
 Configuration parameters important to the control system (for example,
communication port parameters, condition of ports, ports in use)
 Installed file systems/memory devices
Signal Physical
The control system reports information related to the physical components involved in
switching, monitoring and/or processing signals/data streams, such as
 Number of components (for example, input/output modules, etc.) that may be installed
 Number of components installed (for example, number of crosspoint modules,
processing modules, other signal handling components)
 Type of components installed
 Hardware, software, and firmware revision(s) for each installed component
 Condition (operational/standby/fault) of each device
Parametric
The control system can report and set, as appropriate, information about configuration (or
can provide the status) of all components involved in signal switching, processing, or
monitoring, such as
18 Chapter 1
Introduction
 Status of all controllable or readable settings/values on installed components

These settings and values include all parameters affecting the signal path (e.g.
processing settings such as EQ, gain, reclocker) or otherwise related to the signal path
(for example, signal presence; reclocker lock; sync signal presence, type, and lock).
Note: Other than physical frame failure alarms (fans, power supplies, and so forth), no
default alarms are specified.
 “Logical” configuration of the signal components (e.g. partitioning, offsets)

 All parameters may be defined as alarms with user-definable alarm states.
 All alarms support user-settable threshold and hysteresis with local and remote alarm
acknowledgement and disable functionality.
CCS Control System Integration Requirements

The Platinum router is supported by the CCS Navigator architecture with the router module
installed. Also, support for SNMP interface is routed directly to the frame; no gateway is
required.
Real-time Requirements
All switches referenced to the same sync signal will occur within the same vertical interval. If
multiple sync signals are provided to the frame, all switches will occur within the same
number of frames as there are sync signals (i.e., if three sync signals are provided, all
switches will occur within three frames). If no sync signals are present, the switches occur
asynchronously after a reasonable time-out period (less than 0.1 seconds from reception of
command), resulting in deterministic operation. If a sync signal was present and then
removed, the switches will remain timed to that sync for a specified period of time (based
on sync type); this provides robust operation in case of sync failure in the system (for
example, wiring fault, etc.).
Applications Integration
The CCS control system supports the Platinum router via the new Navigator architecture
with the Router module installed, and is available for control and monitoring from any
Imagine Communications-or SNMP-supported control application. And with RouterMapper,
the frame supports upload/download of configurations and macro/salvo commands.
All reportable/controllable information is available through a central/core Programming

interface that allows any or all protocol interfaces (terminal, message-based or otherwise) to
monitor, control, or query these values, to the extent that is provided for by each protocol
or interface and that satisfies product feature requirements.
Frame
The “frame” is the physical frame that houses the router and provides the physical structure
to which all hardware components are mounted, power supplies and their associated fans
and means of distributing power, and all fans responsible for airflow through the frame.
Physical information related to this system involves the presence/absence and type of the
installed components. Parametric information related to this system generally describes
status of the physical components operation.
Physical
The control system allows the reporting of physical frame components installed in the
system, such as
 Frame size and frame firmware revision(s)

 Number of cooling fans installed
 Number of power supplies installed
Parametric
The control system allows the reporting (as simple status parameters) the condition of all
frame related status information, such as
 Upper-, lower-, and control-fan group alarms

 Power supply operation for all installed power supplies
 Condition of power supply voltage rails
 Internal temperature of frame
 External ambient temperature
Control Subsystem
The control subsystem consists of components such as resource modules and associated
firmware/software programs, coprocessor hardware and associated firmware/software
programs, and the internal (to the product) networks responsible for their communications.
Control Panels
You can control the Platinum routing system with the Imagine Communications standard
line of control panels via X-Y over serial, coax, or Ethernet. You can find control panel
operating information in the following manuals:
 NUCLEUS network control panel – NUCLEUS Control Panel Installation and Operation
Manual
 LCD programmable control panel – RCP-IDe Control Panels Installation, Configuration,
and Operation Manual
 ABA control panels – RCP-ABA Programmable Control Panel Series Configuration and
Operation Manual and RCP-ABAe Alphanumeric Breakaway Programmable Control
Panel Series Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
 Programmable control panels – RCP-p Programmable Control Panel Series
Configuration and Operation Manual
Configuration and System Status Information

Card-edge controls located on the front of the resource modules provide configuration and
basic system status information. The card-edge controls replace DIP switches. You can find
more information about card-edge controls in Chapter 8, Configuration.
20 Chapter 1
Introduction
Protocol Support
The Platinum router supports X-Y (serial, coax, and Ethernet) and SNMP directly to the
frame. Other protocol modules supported within the standard protocol architecture are
uploadable for use in the Platinum router.
Integration Required With Other Products, Applications, Services

Platinum routers coexist in our CCS control system, and can be controlled and monitored
from any Imagine Communications-or SNMP-supported control application.
Software Control Applications

There are several software options available to control your Imagine Communications
products through the Platinum router.
CCS Pilot™
CCS Pilot is an integrated software application that contains the tools you need to
configure, control, monitor, and secure access to our equipment on your network,
regardless of how geographically dispersed your equipment is.
CCS Navigator™
CCS Navigator software provides graphical tools that will enable you to create easy-to-use
graphical pages that visually represent your network’s many devices, systems, and
environments. These graphical pages allow you to consolidate and ease network-wide
status monitoring, leading to more efficient deployment of human resources for monitoring
and troubleshooting tasks.
RouterMapper™
RouterMapper configuration utility software is an easy-to-use Microsoft®
Windows®1-based application for programming RouterWorks®, other router frames,
control panels, and the Opus™ master controller.
For a more information about these software products, contact our Sales Department or
visit the Imagine Communications website.
Operating Modes
Imagine Communications also offers a wide variety of programmable control panels that
can be used to control your Platinum router. The Programmable Panel Series uses Navigator
and/or RouterMapper to program a panel for customization. Visit the Imagine
Communications website, see your dealer, or contact us for more information on the
Programmable Panel Series of control panels.
See Chapter 8, Configuration, for more information on the control and configuration of
the Platinum routing system.
1 “Windows”
is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Frame Specifications
The specifications in this section are for the Platinum frame and system-wide components.
Specifications for individual modules are listed with their detailed descriptions.
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 1-8 Power Supply Specifications

Item Specification
Power Maximum 750 W power supply
Output V1 = +5 VDC @ 10A
V2 = +24 VDC @ 12A
V3 = +24 VDC @ 12A
Current sharing Diode isolated
Hot swappable
Performance temperature 41°F (5°C) to 104°F (40°C) at 100% power rating
Operating temperature 32° F (0°C) to 122°F (50°C) at 100% power rating
Table 1-9 Frame Indicators

Item Specification
Control Indicators
5RU CPU2: PWR, ACTV, FAN
9RU CPU1: PWR, ACTV, FAN
15RU
28RU
Power Supply Indicators for Fully-Configured Frame*
5RU PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
9RU PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
15RU PS4: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS3: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
28RU PS8: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS6: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS4: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS7: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS5: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS3: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
* A “fully-configured” frame is one that has encoders and decoders, as well as all other modules and
options, installed.
22 Chapter 1
Introduction
23
2 Frame Modules
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the frame-specific modules available for the
Platinum router. Each module is described in terms of its individual operation, controllable
parameters (if applicable), installation, configuration, functional block diagram (if
applicable), and specifications (if applicable).
This chapter covers the following topics:
 PM-ALARM-5: Alarm Module for 5RU Frames on page 30

 PT-ALARM: Alarm Module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames on page 35
 PM5-CBP/PT-CBP: Communications Back Panel Module on page 24
 PT-EXPS: External Power Supply Frame on page 44
 PM-FAN-5: 5RU Frame Fan Modules on page 47
 PM-FAN-8/PT-FAN-14/PT-FAN-16: 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frame Fan Modules on
page 49
 PM-MI-5/PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 Module Interconnect on page 23
 PM5-PD/PT-PD: Power Distribution Module on page 42
 PT-PS: AC Power Supply Module PT-PS-DC: DC Power Supply Module on page 39
 PT-RES: Platinum Resource Module on page 27
 PT-SYNC: Sync Module on page 50
 PT-SYNC-MI: Sync Module Interconnect Module on page 54
PM-MI-5/PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 Module Interconnect
Operation
The PM-MI-5 (for 5RU frames), PM-MI-9 (for 9RU frames), PT-MI-15 (for 15RU frames), or
PT-MI-28 (for 28RU frames) module interconnect is the central signal distribution module for
the Platinum frame. This module provides all of the signal distribution between the input,
output, and crosspoint modules. Along with the signal distribution, this module
interconnects the control infrastructure and distributes the required power to the
appropriate signal modules. There are no active components on the module interconnect.
24 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
Installation
The module interconnect is installed at our manufacturing facility. This module is not
user-replaceable. If you need to upgrade or replace this module, please contact our
Customer Service Department.
Configuration
This module requires no specialized configuration procedures.
PM5-CBP/PT-CBP: Communications Back Panel Module
Operation
Figure 2-1 PM5-CBP/PT-CBP Communications Back Panel
The PM5-CBP (for 5RU frames) or PT-CBP (for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames)
communications back panel provides the interface between all communications connectors
and the resource modules. All control ports remain mute until, and only if, the router has
fully booted and has established communications. Even in a powered-down state, a router
connected to any communications system must not interfere with that system, and
therefore must not violate the communications standard (RS-232, RS-422, IEEE 802, etc.)
when in this state. A temperature sensor on the PM5-CBP/PT-CBP monitors the external
ambient temperature.
These connector types are available on every PM5-CBP and PT-CBP module:
 Two X-Y ports

 Four sync ports
 Two serial ports
 Two Ethernet ports
 One USB port
 One alarm port
X-Y Ports
Each PM5-CBP/PT-CBP module includes two isolated coaxial X-Y ports with auto-switchover
functionality in redundant X-Y operation. (When used with a safe hub in a star
configuration, the frame automatically switches over to the second X-Y port when failure is
detected on the first; this implies that only one is active at any given time). In standard
operation, both X-Y ports are active and repeat communications on the X-Y bus between
each other. This function can be set via the card-edge control interface on the resource
module.
Sync Ports
Each PM5-CBP/PT-CBP module includes four looping sync inputs. Each sync input
automatically detects and locks to NTSC, PAL, analog HD Tri-Level, or AES signals. The
control system reports the presence and type of sync signal detected on each of the four
inputs. These synchronization signals are made available to and are distributed by the
resource modules to every crosspoint and output monitoring I/O module in a frame. The
sync signals distributed from the resource module will remain undisturbed when switching
over to a redundant resource module. In addition, the resource modules automatically
generate and distribute an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is
present. If needed, optional sync distribution modules may be added to the frame to
distribute external and internal sync signals to all input and output modules. These sync
distribution modules also support redundant operation, and have the capability to
seamlessly switch over when the redundant module is removed.
Table 2-3 on page 51 shows the Sync Reference types and default switch points supported
by Platinum.
Serial Ports
Frames support two serial ports with either RS-232 or RS-422 communication standards.
This setting is configurable via the card-edge control interface on the resource module.
Standard baud rates (9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200) are supported on the frame, and
are configurable via the card-edge control interface on the resource module.
Table 2-1 RS-232 Signal Format Pin Assignments
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Pin Function
1 Frame Ground
2 RxD (Data received by router)
3 TxD (Data sent by router)
4 Data Terminal Ready*
5 Ground
6 Data Set Ready (DSR)*
7 Request to Send (RTS)**
26 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
Table 2-1 RS-232 Signal Format Pin Assignments (Continued)
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Pin Function
8 Clear to Send (RTS)**
9 Frame Ground
* Pins 4 and 6 connected internally.
** Pins 7 and 8 connected internally
Table 2-2 RS-422 Signal Format Pin Assignments
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Connection to
Signal
Pin (Tributary) Description Remote Computer
(Controller)
1 FG Frame ground Frame ground
2 Ta (Tx-) Transmitted data Ra (Rx-)
(twisted pair)
7 Tb (Tx+) Rb (Rx+)
6 Tc Received data shield Received data shield
8 Ra (Rx-) Received data Ta (Tx-)
(twisted pair)
3 Rb (Rx+) Tb (Tx+)
4 Rc Transmitted data shield Transmitted data shield
9 FG Frame ground Frame ground
5 SP (Not connected) (Not connected)
Ethernet Ports
Frames support two isolated Ethernet ports, and one of these ports supports Fast Ethernet
(10/100 full and half duplex communications). The connectors follow IEEE standards for the
interface.
Note: The resource module provide one host-based USB-A port for file transfer (USB flash
module interconnect).
USB Port
The PM5-CBP/PT-CBP contains a peripheral USB-B port used for application interface and
terminal emulation.
Alarm Port
An alarm relay port on the PM5-CBP/PT-CBP supports normally open and normally closed
operation for frame alarms (for module failure, fan failure, or power supply failure). In
addition to these standard ports, an additional “ready line” port is available to synchronize
operations in a multi-frame system where other synchronization support is unavailable (for
example, NTP).
Installation
All communications back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. This
module is not user-replaceable. If you need to upgrade or replace this module, please
contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
PT-RES: Platinum Resource Module
Operation
Figure 2-2 PT-RES Module
The resource module (PT-RES) provides control logic for the Platinum frame. All parameters
and settings are stored in non-volatile memory to prevent any changes from occurring due
to a power interruption. Consequently, no power-down condition or sequence will affect
the router control system in such a way as to prevent full recovery.
Each Platinum frame can have up to two PT-RES modules operating redundantly. If one
module detects failure of the other module, it will switch over control and continue router
operation.
28 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
The PT-RES module also provides the sync processing necessary to determine the switch
timing for the frame. This includes the standard sync separators for AES, PAL, NTSC, or
Tri-Level HD reference inputs, along with support for Network Time Protocol (NTP), if an NTP
server is available in the system. The NTP functionality supports time-sensitive operations,
logging, and security. Each sync input automatically detects and locks to NTSC, PAL, analog
HD Tri-Level, or AES signals. The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal
detected on each of the four inputs. These synchronization signals are available to and
distributed by the PT-RES module to every crosspoint, streaming, and output monitoring
module in the frame. Since the PT-RES module distributes these sync signals, it can tristate
its sync outputs when a redundant module is present, and seamlessly switch over when the
redundant module fails or is removed. In addition, the PT-RES module automatically
generates and distributes an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is
present.
The PT-RES module, and necessary communications between the crosspoint and I/O,
support line accurate switching per RP-168. Switch setting resolution is in banks of 8
outputs (for example, outputs 1-8 switches referenced to sync 1, outputs 9-16 switches
referenced to sync 2, outputs 17-512 switches referenced sync 3, etc.). For customers not
using RP-168, the Platinum router supports “advanced” reference configuration, allowing
the customer to set the time from the incoming sync pulse for switching.
Each PT-RES module contains a card-edge control interface for frame configuration, and has
LED indicators for the following:
 The green LED labeled “POWER” is the power supply indicator. It shows that power is
present on the module and that the +24V power rails are operational.
 The green LED labeled “ACT RES” is the active resource module indicator This LED
shows which module is active in redundant configurations. It also blinks to indicate
when the inactive module is downloading information from the active module.
 The green LED labeled “ENET LINK” displays the standard Ethernet link LED (in addition
to the Link LED present on the connector at the rear of the frame).
 The two yellow and red LEDs labeled “ALARM” indicate user-defined alarm conditions.
CAUTION
Both alarm LEDs simultaneously flashing red indicates that the PT-RES resource
module has experienced a failure condition and needs to be rebooted. Reboot the
PT-RES module as soon as possible, and then notify Customer Service.
Along with these LEDs, there are labeled power and ground test points accessible on the
front portion of the board for troubleshooting and verification.
Installation
All PT-RES modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See page 379 for information
about replacing the PT-RES module. If you need to purchase additional components, please
contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
Using PX-RES in a Platinum Frame

When a Platinum PX-RES module is installed in a Platinum frame, it becomes part of the
Platinum IP3 Control System where the web-based IP3 Controller GUI is used for
configuration, control, and monitoring of the entire system. The IP3 Controller must be
version 1.3.3 or higher and the PX-RES module(s) must be version 1.5 or higher. To
configure & control your Platinum Router using the IP3 Controller, you need to add your
Platinum Frame to the routing system in the IP3 Controller web interface, along with other
setup details. Please refer to the Platinum IP3 Controller User Manual for details.
The following is a module compatibility matrix with details on supported and unsupported
PT/PX modules when PX-RES is used a Platinum frame.
Module PX-RES in Module PX-RES in

Platinum Platinum
(PX) Input Modules (PT) Input Modules
PX-HSR9C-IBG PT-ADCT-IB
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG PM-ADCT-IB
PX-HSR9O-IBG PT-AEBT-IB
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG PM-AEBT-IB
PX-HSR8C-IBG PT-AECT-IB
PM-HSR8C-IBG PM-AECT-IB
PX-HSR2C2D-IBG PT-DEC-IB
PX-HSR1C1D-IBG PM-DEC-IB
PT-FSDMX-IBG/ PT-FSDMXO-IBG
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG
PT-HS-IB+
PT-HSO-PIN-IB+ (PT-HSO-IB+)
PT-HSR1D-IBG/ PT-HSR2D-IBG
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG
PT-MADI4C-IBG/ PT-MADI4O-IBG
(PX) Output Modules (PT) Output Modules
PX-HSR16C-OBG PT-AEBT-OB
PX-HSR8C2D-OBG PM-AEBT-OB
PX-HSR8O2D-OBG PT-AECT-OB
PX-HSR16O-OBG PM-AECT-OB
PX-HSRSXP2D-OBG PT-DACT-OB
PX-HSRMX8C2D-OBG PM-DACT-OB
PX-HSRMX8O2D-OBG PT-ENC-OB
PX-HSR8CMX8C-OBG PM-ENC-OB
PX-HSR8OMX8O-OBG PT-HSR-OB+
PM-HSR-OB+
PT-HSR-OBG+
PM-HSR-OBG+/ PT-HSRO-OBG+
PT-HSRMX8C-OBG
PT-HSRMX8O-OBG
PT-MADI4C-OBG/PT-MADI4O-OBG
PT-SR-OBG+/ PM-SR-OBG+
30 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
(PX) Frame Modules (PT) Frame Modules

PX-576x1024-3G PM-64x64-3G9
PX-ALARM-ATDM PM-128x128-3G9
PX-ALARM-DATA PT-128x256-3G15
PX-ATDM64-X28 PT-ALARM
PX-FRONT-FAN PM-ATDM16-X9
PX-HSRAEC-OM PT-ATDM16-X15
PX-RES PT-HSRAEC-OM
PT-SYNC
Multiviewer Modules
PX-SXP-16x3
PX-SXP-32x6
PX-SXP-64x6
PX-SXP-16x3-O
PX-SXP-32x6-O
PX-SXP-64x6-O
PX-SXP-16x3-OD
PX-SXP-32x6-OD
PX-SXP-64x6-OD
Note: If you’re looking for a module that’s not listed in this table, it’s likely not supported if
PX-RES is used in a Platinum frame.
PM-ALARM-5: Alarm Module for 5RU Frames
Operation
Figure 2-3 PM-ALARM-5 Module

The alarm module for 5RU frames (PM-ALARM-5) monitors the core operating components
of the Platinum system, and reports critical component failures via an external interface, so
that you can take any actions necessary to maintain system integrity.
 PM-ALARM-5 modules can control PM-FAN-5 fan speed and report fan failures.
 PM-ALARM-5 modules can externally report four user-defined alarms comprised of any
mix of signals reported to the alarm module.
 In addition to internal alarms, PM-ALARM-5 allows you the ability to monitor legacy
equipment via two remote inputs.
The PM-ALARM-5 module is accessible from the rear of the frame, located at the bottom. It
provides normally open and normally closed alarm relay contacts for all frame- and
user-configurable alarm options. This setup allows you to configure alarm contacts based
on internal frame/port information (for example, signal presence on output 1 fails).
The module is hot swappable and interconnects between the fan module and the module
interconnect. (See page 377 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm modules.) The
module reports alarms through the RouterMapper or Navigator software interface, and
through hardware via relay contact closures and illuminated LEDs.
Controlling Fan Speed

The PM-ALARM-5 module allows you to control the speed of PM-FAN-5 via Navigator or
RouterMapper. The selectable fan speeds are OFF, low, medium, and high. To set the fan
speed, you must access the Fan_Speed_x parameter. Follow the appropriate steps (as
described in the Navigator or RouterMapper manual) to open the Module Parameters list
box, and then change the Fan Speed_x parameter instance to the desired setting.
Reporting Alarms and Fan Failures

The PM-ALARM-5 monitors the status signal of core components and report any instance of
a critical failure. Reporting is done internally (through controls) and externally (via relay
contact closure and illuminated red LEDs).
Figure 2-4 PM-ALARM-5 LEDs
The PM-ALARM-5 module provides eight alarm outputs:

32 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
 Four user-definable internal alarms

On user-defined outputs 1 through 4, the alarm module communicates directly to the
resource module via the PRTI interface. This communication provides you with access to
any status signal reported within the entire Platinum system.
 Two user-definable remote input failure alarms
User-defined inputs 1 and 2 provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/
failures and opens the ability to report these failures through the latest versions of
control software such as Navigator and RouterMapper.
 One power supply failure alarm
Each power supply will provide a presence signal and four critical alarm signals: +24VA,
+24VB, +5VL, and PS-FAN. All four components are critical to power supply and frame
operation. If any the components reports a failure, a red LED will be illuminated to
signal the critical fault. An LED that is not illuminated indicates that no alarm conditions
exist.
 One fan failure alarm
The PM-FAN-5 fan module reports an alarm for each of 6 fans. On the PM-FAN-5
module, there is one LED for each fan. When a fan failure alarm occurs, you will be able
to determine the fan failure by the color of the corresponding LED.
 A green LED indicates that all fans are operational.
 A red LED indicates that at least one fan is not operational.
 An LED that is not illuminated indicates that fans have been turned off.
The DB-25 alarm/comm port reports alarms as they occur in the frame.
 Normally open/normally closed

 “Normally closed” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm condition
does not exist and the frame is powered
 “Normally open” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm condition
exists
 Relay common
The alarm port provides indication of these alarm conditions:
Table 2-3 Alarm Conditions

Alarm Condition Description
PS fail Alarm asserted in the event of a power supply failure
(in systems with multiple power supplies, the alarm
will be asserted if any power supply fails)
Fan (module) fail Alarm asserted in the event of a failure of the frame
cooling fans
User-defined outputs Provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/
1-4 failures and report those failures through control
software
Remote inputs 1-2 Provide access to any status signal reported within the
Platinum system
The alarm relay circuitry has been designed so the relays are energized when the alarm
condition does not exist. The relay is energized when power is applied to detect when
power is lost and to allow the alarm to be asserted. If a relay fails or if the circuit controlling
a relay fails, the relay will de-energize causing the corresponding alarm to be asserted. If the
frame loses power, the alarm relay will become de-energized, and the alarm condition will
be asserted.
Alarm port
NC = Normally closed;
1
14
2
contact shorted with common
15
3
16
when alarm condition exists
4
NC
17
5
or frame not powered
18
Common
6
19
NO
7
20
8
NO = Normally open;
21
9
22
10
23
11
when alarm does not exist
24
12
Alarm and frame is powered
25
13
condition
detected
Relay closed when alarm not asserted
Relay open when alarm asserted or frame power is off
Figure 2-5 Typical Alarm Operation
Pinout Diagram
Table 2-4 PM-ALARM-5 Pinout Information

1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pin No. Description Pin No. Description

1 Reserved 14 Normally closed (power supply
alarm)
2 Common (user-defined 1) 15 Normally open (power supply alarm)
3 Normally closed (user-defined 1) 16 Common (Power supply alarm)
4 Normally open (user-defined 1) 17 Normally closed (fan alarm)
5 Common (user-defined 2) 18 Normally open (fan alarm)
6 Normally closed (user-defined 2) 19 Common (fan alarm)
7 Normally open (user-defined 2) 20 Floating
8 Common (user-defined 3) 21 Remote In 1
9 Normally closed (user-defined 3) 22 Common In 1
10 Normally open (user-defined 3) 23 Floating
11 Common (user-defined 4) 24 Remote in 2
12 Normally closed (user-defined 4) 25 Common in 2
13 Normally open (user-defined 4)
Installation
All alarm modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Alarm
Modules on page 377 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm modules. If you need
to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
34 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
Controllable Parameters
The PM-ALARM-5 Parameters List includes all of the available parameters that are enabled
and/or changed via RouterMapper’s Configure Module Parameters and/or Module
Parameters list box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described
in the applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting.
Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are “read-only.”
Table 2-5 PM-ALARM-5 Parameters List

[RO] = Read-only parameter
Parameter Description Options
User Configurable Alarm Out (1-4) Provides alarm reporting for any  No alarm
status signal reported within the  Alarm
Platinum system
Fan Speed (1-6) Controls fan speeds on the  Off
PM-FAN-5 module  Low
 Med
 Hi
PS Alarm (1-16) [RO] Trips relay if power to the module is  No
lost  Yes
FAN Alarm [RO] I/O fan fail alarm  No
 Yes
FAN_CRTL Alarm [RO] Control area fans  No
 Yes
Board Level Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
needing it
Power Supply Presence (1-16) [RO] Power supply failure alarm  No
 Yes
+24VA Fail (1-16) [RO] +24 VA alarm failure  No
 Yes
+24VB Fail (1-8) [RO] +24 VB alarm failure  No
 Yes
+5VL Fail (1-16) [RO] +5VL alarm failure  No
 Yes
PS Fan Fail (1-16) [RO] Internal power supply fan alarm  No
 Yes
Power Supply Zon (1-16) [RO] Determines the zone that a power  Zone 1
supply powers  Zone 2
 Zone 3
 Zone 4
External Alarm Enable (1-2) Enables alarms on GPI inputs to  No
alarm module  Yes
1
The Configure Module Parameters list box is available through the Configured Matrices tab. The Mod-
ule Parameters list box is available through the Detected Matrices tab.
Table 2-5 PM-ALARM-5 Parameters List (Continued)

External Alarm Trigger Valve (1-2) Determines value on GPI input that  Low
will trigger alarm  High
External Alarm Alarm reporting based on GPI input  No
 Yes
Fan Control Mode Determines if fan speed is  Auto
automatically- or user-controlled  Manual
PT-ALARM: Alarm Module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames
Operation
Figure 2-6 PT-ALARM Module
The alarm module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames (PT-ALARM) monitors the core
operating components of the Platinum system, and reports critical component failures via
an external interface, so that you can take any actions necessary to maintain system
integrity. PT-ALARM can externally report four user-defined alarms comprised of any mix of
signals reported to the alarm module. In addition to internal alarms, PT-ALARM allows you
the ability to monitor legacy equipment via two remote inputs.
PT-ALARM provides eight alarm outputs:
 Two critical system component failure alarms: power supply and fan
 Four user definable internal alarms
 Two user-definable external alarms
You can control alarm parameters as follows:
 User-defined inputs 1 and 2 provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/
failures and opens the ability to report these failures through the latest versions of
control software such as Navigator and RouterMapper.
36 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
 On user-defined outputs 1 through 4, the alarm module communicates directly to the

resource module via the PIPE interface. This communication provides you with access to
any status signal reported within the entire Platinum system.
The PT-ALARM module is accessible from the rear of the frame, located mid-frame between
the 2 fan modules in a 28RU system, and at the bottom for 9RU and 15RU systems. It
provides normally open and normally closed alarm relay contacts for all frame- and
user-configurable alarm options. This setup allows you to configure alarm contacts based
on internal frame/port information (for example, signal presence on output 1 fails).
The module is hot swappable and interconnects between both fan modules and the
module interconnect. (See page 377 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm
modules.) The module reports alarms through software via the PIPE interface, and through
hardware via relay contact closures and illuminated LEDs.
The DB-25 alarm/comm port reports alarms as they occur in the frame.
 Normally open/normally closed

 “Normally closed” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm condition
does not exist and the frame is powered
 “Normally open” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm condition
exists
 Relay common
The alarm port provides indication of these alarm conditions:
Table 2-6 Alarm Conditions

Alarm Condition Description
PS fail Alarm asserted in the event of a power supply failure
(in systems with multiple power supplies, the alarm
will be asserted if any power supply fails)
Fan (module) fail Alarm asserted in the event of a failure of the frame
cooling fans
User-defined outputs Provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/
1-4 failures and report those failures through control
software
Remote inputs 1-2 Provide access to any status signal reported within the
Platinum system
The alarm relay circuitry has been designed so the relays are energized when the alarm
condition does not exist. The relay is energized when power is applied to detect when
power is lost and to allow the alarm to be asserted. If a relay fails or if the circuit controlling
a relay fails, the relay will de-energize causing the corresponding alarm to be asserted. If the
frame loses power, the alarm relay will become de-energized, and the alarm condition will
be asserted.
Alarm port
NC = Normally closed;
1
14
2
15
3
16
when alarm condition exists
4
NC
17
5
or frame not powered
18
Common
6
19
NO
7
20
8
NO = Normally open;
21
9
22
10
23
11
when alarm does not exist
24
12
Alarm and frame is powered
25
13
condition
detected
Relay closed when alarm not asserted
Relay open when alarm asserted or frame power is off
Figure 2-7 Typical Alarm Operation
Pinout Diagram
Table 2-7 PT-ALARM Pinout Information

1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pin No. Description Pin No. Description

1 Reserved 14 Normally Closed (Power supply
alarm)
2 Common (User-defined 1) 15 Normally Open (Power supply alarm)
3 Normally Closed (User-defined 1) 16 Common (Power supply alarm)
4 Normally Open (User-defined 1) 17 Normally Closed (Fan alarm)
5 Common (User-defined 2) 18 Normally Open (Fan alarm)
6 Normally Closed (User-defined 2) 19 Common (Fan alarm)
7 Normally Open (User-defined 2) 20 Floating
8 Common (User-defined 3) 21 Remote In 1
9 Normally Closed (User-defined 3) 22 Common In 1
10 Normally Open (User-defined 3) 23 Floating
11 Common (User-defined 4) 24 Remote In 2
12 Normally Closed (User-defined 4) 25 Common In 2
13 Normally Open (User-defined 4)
Installation
All alarm modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Alarm
Modules on page 377 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm modules. If you need
Configuration
38 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
The PT-ALARM Parameters List includes all of the available parameters that are enabled and/
or changed via RouterMapper’s Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters
list box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the
applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting.
Table 2-8 PT-ALARM Parameters List

User Configurable Alarm Out (1-4) Provides alarm reporting for any  No alarm
status signal reported within the  Alarm
Platinum system
PS Alarm (1-16) [RO] Trips relay if power to the module is  No
lost  Yes
Upper Fan Alarm I/O fan fail alarm  No
 Yes
FAN_CRTL Alarm [RO] Control area fans  No
 Yes
Power Supply Presence (1-16) [RO] Power supply failure alarm  No
 Yes
+24VA Fail (1-16) [RO] +24VA alarm failure  No
 Yes
+24VB Fail (1-16) [RO] +24VB alarm failure  No
 Yes
+5VL Fail (1-16) [RO] +5VL alarm failure  No
 Yes
PS Fan Fail (1-16) [RO] Internal power supply fan alarm  No
 Yes
Power Supply Zone (1-16) [RO] Determines zone that a power  Zone 1
supply powers  Zone 2
 Zone 3
 Zone 4
Lower Fan Alarm I/O fan fail alarm  No
 Yes
External Alarm Enable Enables alarms on GPI inputs to  No
alarm module  Yes
External Alarm Trigger Value Determines value on GPI input that  Low
will trigger alarm  High
External Alarm Enables alarm reporting based on  No
GPI input  Yes
1
PT-PS: AC Power Supply Module

PT-PS-DC: DC Power Supply Module
Operation
Table 2-1.
PT-PS AC Power Supply Module PT-PS-DC DC Power Supply Module
Figure 2-8 PT-PS Power Supply Modules
Each Platinum 5RU and 9RU frame comes with one power supply module as a standard
feature. A fully-configured1 5RU or 9RU frame needs one power supply.
Each Platinum 15RU frame comes with one power supply module as a standard feature. A
fully-configured 15RU frame needs two power supplies.
Each Platinum 28RU frame comes with two power supply modules as a standard feature. A
fully-configured 28RU frame needs four power supplies.
 PT-PS power supply module: The 750 W universal input (100 to 240 VAC input)
Platinum power supply provides two isolated 24 V rails and one isolated 5 V rail to the
frame. See Installing Power Supplies on page 383 for details on power supply
replacement.
 PT-PS-DC power supply module: The 750 W DC input (-40 to -60 VDC input) Platinum
power supply provides two isolated 24 V rails and one isolated 5 V rail to the frame. See
Installing Power Supplies on page 383 for details on power supply replacement.
1A “fully-configured” frame is one that has encoders and decoders, as well as all other modules and
options, installed.
40 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
Note: The Platinum frame is configured at the factory to operate either from an AC input
voltage or a DC input voltage, but not both. This configuration is based on a
customer’s order and cannot be changed once the frame leaves the factory. The
AC and DC power supply modules are mechanically compatible with all Platinum frames
and are similar in appearance, so you can easily install the wrong power supply module into
a Platinum frame. For your safety, the configurations of both the AC input voltage and DC
input voltage Platinum frames are such that, if the wrong power supply module is installed,
no electrical fault will occur, no circuit breakers will trip, and the power supply module will
not attempt to power up and will not be damaged. Most important, you will not be in any
danger. If you find that either an AC or a DC power supply module will not power up in a
Platinum frame that has been connected to the power mains of a facility, you should first
confirm the correct power supply module was installed. Platinum frames configured to use
100-240 VAC require the AC power supply module; Platinum frames configured to use -40
to -60 VDC require the DC power supply module.
Installation
All power supplies are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Power
Supplies on page 383 for the procedure for field expansion of power supplies. If you need
Configuration
Specifications
Table 2-2 PT-PS/PT-PS-DC Electrical Specifications

Specification
Item PT-PS PT-PS-DC
Input voltage Universal AC input (100 VAC to 240 VAC) -40 VDC to -60 VDC
Input frequency 47 – 63 Hz —
Power factor correction > 97% efficient, active, meets —
EN61000-3-2 as a Class A device when
under 50% load
Inrush current  35 Amps peak at 264 VAC  35 Amps peak at -72 VDC
Power supply efficiency  75% at full load  75% at full load
Output voltages* † V1 = 5 VDC V1 = 5 VDC
V2 = 24 VDC V2 = 24 VDC
V3 = 24 VDC V3 = 24 VDC
Output currents 5 VDC @ 10 amps 5 VDC @ 10 amps
24 VDC @ 15 amps 24 VDC @ 15 amps
24 VDC @ 15 amps 24 VDC @ 15 amps
Output power 750 watts (continuous) 750 watts (continuous)
Line regulation < ± 0.1% < ± 0.1%
Table 2-2 PT-PS/PT-PS-DC Electrical Specifications (Continued)

Specification
Item PT-PS PT-PS-DC
Load regulation ± 2.0% ± 2.0% for both 24 VDC outputs
+6.0/-2.0% for 5 VDC output
Output noise 100 mV P-P (20 Mhz bandwidth, 100 mV P-P (20 Mhz bandwidth,
measured across 0.1 uF and 10 uF measured across 0.1 uF and 10 uF
capacitors connected in parallel) capacitors connected in parallel)
Overcurrent protection Non-destructively limit current to 120% Non-destructively limit current to 120%
rated load, square current limit with auto rated load, square current limit with auto
recovery recovery
Overvoltage protection Entire power supply shuts down if any Entire power supply shuts down if any
output rail reaches 15% above rated output rail reaches 15% above rated
voltage voltage
Input polarity — No damage will occur if the input voltage
protection lines are connected with the incorrect
polarity
Current sharing Active, all outputs, N+1 hot swappable Active, all outputs, N+1 hot swappable
(diode isolation), 20% tolerance on loads (diode isolation), 20% tolerance on loads
greater than 50% greater than 50%
Holdup time 20 milliseconds —
Indicators LEDs indicating 5 V DC, 24 V DC, 24 V DC LEDs indicating 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 24 VDC
present and fan fail on front cover present and fan fail on front cover
LEDs indicate complete failure of voltage LEDs indicate complete failure of voltage
rails or fan not deviation from specified rails or fan, not deviation from specified
voltages or fan speed voltages or fan speed
Alarms PM-ALARM-5/PT-ALARM monitors all PM-ALARM-5/PT-ALARM monitors all
three voltage rails and cooling fan, and three voltage rails and cooling fan, and
makes these four status signals available at makes these four status signals available at
the main connector for remote monitoring the main connector for remote monitoring
MTBF > 250,000 hours @ 30°C (excludes fan > 250,000 hours @ 30° C (excludes fan
life‡) life‡)
* All outputs are isolated both from the chassis and from each other.
† 5 VDC rail should rise to rated voltage 100 ms before the other two voltage rails.
‡ Fan MTBF per manufacturer’s specifications.
42 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
PM5-PD/PT-PD: Power Distribution Module
Operation
Figure 2-9 PM5-PD/PT-PD Module
The PM5-PD (for 5RU frames) and PT-PD (for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames) power
distribution module is the interface between the power supplies and the Platinum system.
The PM5-PD/PT-PD module facilitates 2N power redundancy through a configuration of
internal and/or external power supplies. The PM5-PD/PT-PD also provides the means for
powering the rear fan module(s), and acts as an intermediary point for the power supply
alarm signals.
Power Distribution
On 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames, power is distributed throughout the backplane via a bus
bar. (The 5RU frames do not require a bus bar.) The bus bar distributes power for each zone.
Each zone of the bus bar is divided into four groupings (or distribution points) located
evenly between every four I/O modules.
Note: See Installing Power Supplies on page 383 for more information about power
distribution zones.
Frame
 Platinum 5RU frames use one PM5-PD module, which is located at the bottom of the
frame. Platinum 5RU frames do not require a bus bar.
 Platinum 9RU frames use one PT-PD module, which is located at the top of the frame.
To properly distribute power, Platinum 9RU frames require a single BUS-9 bus bar.
 Platinum 15RU frames use one PT-PD module, which is located at the top of the frame.
To properly distribute power, Platinum 15RU frames require a single BUS-15 bus bar.
 Platinum 28RU frames use two PT-PD modules, located at the top and bottom of the
frame. The top PT-PD module distributes power to zones 1 and 2. The bottom PT-PD
module distributes power to zones 3 and 4.
Fan Module
The PM5-PD/PT-PD supplies power to the fan module(s) via a 6-pin power cable connector.
See page 49 for more information about the fan module.
Power Redundancy
Power redundancy has been designed to meet a 2N criterion; that is, the PM5-PD/PT-PD
provides 2N redundancy as an option to the user. This redundancy allows you to back up
the router based on a fully independent AC line. (For example: A 15RU frame requires two
power supplies, but supports four.) Redundancy within the frame is configurable via PS3
and PS4. (PS3 and PS4 are configured at the factory to power zone 2). PS3-PS4 can be
configured to provide 2N redundancy for zone 1. Call your Customer Service representative
for more information.
Alarm Reporting
While the PM5-PD/PT-PD does not have any control requirements or reportable parameters,
it acts as intermediary device for alarm signals being passed from power supplies to the
alarm module.
Power Requirements
 +24 VA: Each rail can source up to 12 amps. Once combined (including 2N redundancy)
the total power the +24 VA line can source is 1200 W.
 +24 VB: Each rail can source up to 12 amps. Once combined (including 2N redundancy)
the total power the +24 VB line can source is 1200 W.
 +5 VL: Individually the +5 VL rail can source 10 amps. Once combined (including 2N
redundancy) the total power the +5 VL line can source is 200 W.
Installation
All power distribution modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. This module is not
user-replaceable. If you need to upgrade or replace this module, please contact our
Customer Service Department.
Configuration
All power distribution modules are configured at our manufacturing facility. This module is
not user-configurable. If you need a customized configuration for your location, please
contact our Customer Service Department.
44 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
PT-EXPS: External Power Supply Frame
Operation
Note: External redundancy is not needed on 5RU or 9RU frames. These frame sizes already
support the necessary number of redundant power supplies.
Figure 2-10 PT-EXPS External Power Supply Frame
The optional external power supply frame (PT-EXPS) provides 2N power redundancy for
expansion in high power applications. This frame holds up to four power supplies. Each of
these four supplies connect to the Platinum frame via individual cables carrying two +24
volt rails, the +5 VL rail, and alarm signal lines. The 15RU frames support one PT-EXPS, while
the 28RU frame supports two (one connected at the top and the other at the bottom of the
28RU frame). Call your Customer Service representative for more information.
Installation
For a standard PT-EXPS unit installation, the units should be located as follows:
 15RU – directly above the Platinum unit

 28RU – 1 PT-EXPS unit installed directly above and 1 PT-EXPS unit installed directly
below the 28RU frame
This installation offers the optimal connection scheme. For non-standard installation,
extension cables are also available that allow the PT-EXPS unit to be located up to 5 feet
from the connection point of the Platinum frame. Consult you Customer Service
representative for non-standard installations.
This option is not user-upgradeable. For further assistance regarding PT-EXPS installation,
please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
The Platinum frame must be configured to interface with the PT-EXPS unit. All new Platinum
orders that include a PT-EXPS unit will be configured at the manufacturing facility. For
existing in-field Platinum units, please consult your Customer Service representative to
arrange proper frame configuration.
Connecting External Power Supplies

Follow these instructions to connect the cables on the external power supplies.
Top Power Supplies Connections

Connect cables as shown for the top power supplies.
Figure 2-11 PT-FR-EXPS rear view

46 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
Figure 2-12 28 RU/15 RU rear-top view
Bottom Power Supplies Connections

Connect cables as shown for the bottom power supplies.
Figure 2-13 28RU bottom rear view

Figure 2-14 PT-FR-EXPS rear view
Connecting the D-SUB connectors

1 Connect the D-SUB connectors according to their respective labels.
i.e. Label # 1 male connector to # 1 female connector, # 2 male connector to # 2 female
connector etc.
2 Secure the 2 halves by using the thumbscrews on the metal housing.
PM-FAN-5: 5RU Frame Fan Modules
Operation
Note: In case of a fan failure, only individual fans need replacement; the entire fan module
does not need to be replaced.
48 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
Figure 2-15 PM-FAN-5 Module
The fan module for 5RU frames (PM-FAN-5) contains 6 fans per module. A 5RU frame
requires one PM-FAN-5 module. These fans are responsible for cooling all installed modules.
The fans draw air from the front of the frame and exhaust the air to the rear. Each fan is
monitored by the PM-ALARM-5 for rotor movement, which signals an alarm if a rotor stalls.
The fan module will produce two failure alarms: one for failure of control section fans and
one for failure of I/O section fans. You will need to visually inspect the fan module to
determine which fan has failed. Control section fan failure will be reported as a critical
failure alarm. I/O section fan failure will be reported as a general alarm.
The fan speed is variable, and can be adjusted via the control system (see page 30). Each
fan is accessible from the frame rear and connects to the fan module via a three-pin locking
connector to allow for removal and replacement in the event of a fan failure.
Installation
All fan modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Replacing Fans on page
385 for details on individual fan replacement. If you need to purchase additional
components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
PM-FAN-8/PT-FAN-14/PT-FAN-16: 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frame Fan

Modules
Operation
Note: In case of a fan failure, only individual fans need replacement; the entire fan module
does not need to be replaced.
Figure 2-16 Platinum Fan Module (PT-FAN-16 Shown)
The Platinum fan module contains 8, 14 or 16 fans per module.
 A 9RU frame requires one PM-FAN-8 module.

 A 15RU frame requires one PT-FAN-16 module.
 A 28RU frame requires one PT-FAN-14 and one PT-FAN-16 module.
These fans are responsible for cooling all installed modules. The fans draw air from the front
of the frame and exhaust the air to the rear. Each fan is monitored by the PT-ALARM for
rotor movement, which signals an alarm if a rotor stalls. The fan module will produce two
failure alarms: one for failure of control section fans and one for failure of I/O section fans.
You will need to visually inspect the fan module to determine which fan has failed. Control
section fan failure will be reported as a critical failure alarm. I/O section fan failure will be
reported as a general alarm.
Fan modules maintain a constant speed and air flow whenever a frame is powered. The
fans are grouped by power zone, so that each group of fans is responsible for cooling
modules within a particular zone. Each fan is accessible from the frame rear, and connects
to the fan module via a three-pin locking connector to allow for removal and replacement
in the event of a fan failure.
Installation
All fan modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Replacing Fans on page
385 for details on individual fan replacement. If you need to purchase additional
Configuration
50 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
PT-SYNC: Sync Module
Operation
Note: In 5RU Platinum frames with TDM, the sync capability is built into the crosspoint
module. A separate sync module is not required.
Figure 2-17 PT-SYNC Module
As part of the Platinum routing system, the PT-SYNC module allows for the distribution of
up to four independent channels of sync signals to the various input and output modules
placed within the Platinum frame. Using BNC connectors on the communications back
panel (PT-CBP) located on the rear of the frame, you can distribute AES digital audio (DARS),
analog video (black/burst), or HD tri-level sync to be used as required by the various I/O
modules. Card-edge LEDs indicate the presence of sync. If no sync signal is presented to
channel 1, the PT-SYNC module automatically distributes a timing reference signal
(generated on the resource module) to be used for internal lock and switching purposes. If
the TDM subsystem is used to route audio within the Platinum frame, an external AES
reference (on Sync input 1, 2, or 3) is required by I/O modules. Sync 4 is used for internal
synchronization and will be unavailable as an input. The AES reference must come from an
external DARS or any other genlocked AES source. If TDM is present in a 9RU, 15RU, or
28RU Platinum router, a PT-SYNC module is required to distribute synchronizing
information. The 5RU TDM crosspoint integrates all sync functionality, so PT-SYNC modules
are not used in 5RU frames.
Using both a Slot ID scheme and Inhibit signal, the PT-SYNC module is able to establish a
primary/secondary redundancy with a second module. Upon failure of the primary module,
it tri-states its outputs and passes functionality to the secondary module.
Additional card-edge LEDs include the following:
 The green LED labelled “POWER” is the power supply indicator. It shows that power is
present on the module and that the +24 V power rails are operational.
 The LED labelled “ACT CTRL” is the control system acknowledgment. The LED shows a
steady red when the module is being initialized, and then turns green when the FPGA
has configured and the control system is communicating with the module. It flashes
green if there is an alarm condition on this module.
 The LED labelled “ACT CARD” indicates that the PT-SYNC module is in the primary
mode and actively distributing the sync signals. (In certain failure modes, the module
will still distribute sync signal even if the ACT-CARD LED is not lit on either module.
Along with these LEDs, there are power and ground test points accessible on the front
portion of the board for troubleshooting and verification.
All Platinum frames support redundant sync distribution modules. Since the PT-SYNC can
operate in a redundant configuration, it has the capability of “tristating” the sync outputs
when the redundant card is present, and to seamlessly switch over when the redundant
card fails or is removed.
Table 2-3 shows the sync reference types and default switch points supported by Platinum.
Table 2-3 Sync Reference Types and Default Switch Points

Sync Reference Type Default Switch Point
Analog 525/60 Line 10
Analog 525/60 / 1.001 Line 10
1920×1080/60I Line 7
1920×1080/60I / 1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/50I Line 7
1920×1080/30P Line 7
1920×1080/30P / 1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/25P Line 7
1920×1080/24P Line 7
1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
1920×1080/24P / 1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/24PsF / 1.001 Line 7
1280×720/60P Line 7
1280×720/60P / 1.001 Line 7
1280×720/50P Line 7
Reporting
Each of the four sync channels will provide reporting of signal presence using a LED for each
channel for on-site troubleshooting and via the frame control system. As well, four
additional LEDs will indicate the following:
 Internal / external sync

 Power supply indicator (all power rails are operational)
 Control system acknowledgment (control system is communicating with the module)
 Active module (output is “in use” or “on-air”)
Control Requirements
The PT-SYNC module uses the DA core control system for cost-effective basic functionality,
which adheres to the Platinum Slot ID and PIPE control schemes. All settings for the
redundancy circuitry are reset to a default configuration on module insertion.
52 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
Installation
All sync modules are installed at the manufacturing facility. See Installing Sync Modules
on page 376 for the procedure for field expansion of sync modules. If you need to order
additional components, please contact your dealer or the Sales Department.
Configuration
The PT-SYNC Parameters List includes all of the available parameters that are enabled and/or
changed via RouterMapper’s Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list
box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the
applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting.
Table 2-4 PT-SYNC Parameters List

Distribution Enable (1-4) Determines how sync is distributed  Raw
through the Platinum router  Disable
Reference Lock (1-4) Signifies sync lock on PT-SYNC  No
inputs  Yes
AES Data Rate (1-4) Displays AES Ref data rate (if any)  Unknown
connected to PT-SYNC inputs  192 kHz
 96 kHz
 88 kHz
 48 kHz
 44 kHz
 32 kHz
 TDM sync pulse
Module ID Displays unique module identifier of String
PT-SYNC
1
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 2-18 PT-SYNC Module Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 2-5 PT-SYNC Coaxial Inputs

Item Specification
Number of inputs 4
Output type Unbalanced
Band width Up to 50 MHz
Input connector 75 BNC per IEC 169-8
54 Chapter 2
Frame Modules
Table 2-5 PT-SYNC Coaxial Inputs (Continued)

Item Specification
Impedance Hi-Z, looping
Signal type AES (DARS), analog black/burst, HD tri-level
sync
Input amplitude 1.0 to 4.0Vp-p ± 10% into 75 load
PT-SYNC-MI: Sync Module Interconnect Module
Operation
Figure 2-19 PT-SYNC-MI Module Interconnect
The PT-SYNC-MI module interconnect provides the interface between the PT-SYNC modules
and the central signal distribution module for the Platinum frame (PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/
PT-MI-28 module interconnect). It is located behind the PT-SYNC, and interconnects these
modules with the MI module.
Installation
All PT-SYNC-MI modules are installed at our manufacturing facility.
Configuration
55
3 Input Modules
This chapter contains both a general description and additional detailed descriptions of the
input modules available for the Platinum router.
A General Description section provides a generic view of how a Platinum input module
operates. Each input module is further described in terms of its individual operation,
controllable parameters, installation, configuration, functional block diagram, and
specifications. Where appropriate, a module’s corresponding back panel I/O module is
identified. See Input Module General Description on page 57
This chapter covers the following modules:
 PX-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input Module on page 60

 PT-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input Module on page 66 (NEW)
 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules on page 110
 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM Capability on
page 120
 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES
Coaxial Input Modules on page 89
 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM Capability
PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability on
page 96
 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES
Coaxial Input Modules on page 89
 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM Capability
PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability on
page 96
 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules on page 104
 PT-DMX-3G: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability
PT-DMX: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI
Capability on page 140
 PT-DMX-3G: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability
PT-DMX: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI
 Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG,
PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG)
 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input
and Receiver Modules on page 148
 PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Receiver Modules on page 130
 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules on page 77
56 Chapter 3
Input Modules
 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules on page 73

 PT-HSO-IB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video
Receiver Modules on page 134
 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules on page 85
 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules on page 81
 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input
and Receiver Modules on page 148
 on page 155
 Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Input Module on page
156
 PT-HSR2D-IBG Distributed Input Matrix Expansion Module on page 169
 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Fiber Optical Matrix Expansion Input Module on page 172
Input Module General Description

Signal Input Connectors
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Card-edge
connector
Power Control
Power
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VL
+24V
GND
+5V
?V
?V
?V
?V
?V
Test points
System Signal Presence
ACTCTRL
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
POWER
Handle cutout
ACTIN
System Signal
LEDs Presence
LEDs
Figure 3-1 Typical Platinum Input Module
The hot-swappable Platinum input module contains 8 video input or 16 audio input
channels, each of which are recovered and distributed to the crosspoint matrix module or
audio TDM module.
There are three system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module:
 The green LED labeled “POWER” is the power supply indicator. It shows that +24V is
present on the module.
 The yellow LED labeled “ACTIN” is the input usage warning. It shows that the
controller has recognized that there is an input on this module being used by an
output.
58 Chapter 3
Input Modules
 The LED labeled “ACTCTRL” is the control system acknowledgment. The LED shows a
The green signal presence LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 8” (or to “Input 16” on an
audio module), are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs
illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding input. There are test points near
the front edge of the module for power supply voltages and GND.
Each input module may be inserted into, or extracted from, a frame while a frame is
powered and functioning. The system controller will recognize the addition or removal of
an input module from any of the input module slots, and will update the change
automatically. When the controller recognizes the addition of an input module, it will allow
the user to control the additional inputs to the matrix.
When inserted into the frame, each input module mates with a passive connector assembly
(back module), which is mounted in the rear of the frame. This assembly allows a high
integrity interconnect between the input cables and the input module, without requiring
any active components. Frames that are not fully populated with input modules when
shipped from the factory contain blank covers over the non-populated slots. If an input
module is added to the frame at a future time, the blank cover must be replaced with the
corresponding back module.
Each input module provides signal presence indication via card edge LEDs and the control
software, both of which have the ability to be disabled or enabled through the control
software.
Control Requirements
All settings for the input circuitry are reset to the input slot’s configuration on module
insertion. Settings follow module location, not modules themselves. This way, modules can
be moved from slot to slot without the need to reconfigure the input parameters.
Applications Integration
The CCS Control System supports each input module via the Navigator architecture with
the router module installed, and is available for control and monitoring from any Imagine
Communications- or SNMP-supported control application.
Controllable Parameters List

The Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available
parameters, arranged into groupings. These parameters are enabled and/or changed via
RouterMapper’s Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list box1, or
through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the applicable
reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters
marked with the [RO] designator are “read-only.” Input module parameters lists are
provided on the following pages:
Table 3-1 Input Modules’ User-Controllable Parameters Lists
Module Name Parameter List

Location
PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules Page 113
PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM Page 123
Capability
PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules PM-AEC-IB/ Page 90
PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules
PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM Page 98
Capability PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with
TDM Capability
PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules Page 106
PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Receiver Modules Page 132
PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules Page 79
PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules Page 74
PT-HSO-IB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Page 136
Serial Video Receiver Modules
PX-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input Module Page 63
PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules Page 86
PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules Page 82
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Page 151
Expansion Input and Receiver Modules
PT-MADI4X-IBG MADI Input Module Page 166
PT-HSR2D-IBG Distributed Input Matrix Expansion Module Page 171
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Input Module Page 174
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules Page 190
(PT-FSDMX-IBG, PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG,
PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG)
Submodules
A variety of submodules are available for Platinum input modules. See the pertinent input
module section for a description of its associated submodules.
1 The Configure Module Parameters list box is available through the Configured Matrices tab. The Mod-
60 Chapter 3
Input Modules
PX-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input Module
Figure 3-2 PX-HSR8C-IBG Front Module
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8
Figure 3-3 PX-HSR8C-IBG Back Module
Operation
The PX-HSR8C-IBG is an 8 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 8 BNC
connectors.
The PX-HSR8C-IBG Front Module is a hot-swappable, generic Video Input Module that
supports signals up to 3 Gbps. It accepts digital video signals, equalizes and retimes data
streams, detects standards and formats, and distributes signals to the MI backplane to be
switched by the crosspoint matrix.
The Back Module interfaces with the Front module to accept 8 electrical inputs. The
PX-HSR8C-IBG accepts an input data stream for each of the eight channels. Cable losses are
automatically compensated for, if the cable length is within the maximum length limitation.
The maximum cable length is a system specification, not solely dependent on the input
card. It is measured by bit error limitation (not jitter).
Each of the 8 input channels on the Input Module provides signal presence reporting via
card edge LEDs and the control software. Both have the ability to be disabled or enabled
through the control software.
LEDs
There are 8 input LEDs on the PX-HSR8C-IBG module. Under normal working conditions, all
the LEDs are used to indicate signal presence status. See Signal Presence.
Under certain abnormal conditions, for instance if a module is improperly installed or not
recognized by the system, card edge LEDs are used to show diagnostic information. See
Diagnostics.
Figure 3-4 LEDs on PX-HSR8C-IBG Input Module
Signal Presence
There are 8 Input LEDs that report on signal presence
Table 3-2 LED states

State Description
Off No signal present
On Signal present and reclocker locked to signal
Flashing Signal present but reclocker could not lock to signal
Diagnostics
The Input LEDs also perform diagnostic functions, as detailed below.
Input 1 and Input 2

Table 3-3 LED Inputs 1 and 2
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 Description
Flashing Flashing  Abnormal hardware status in the slot
 Note that they are NOT turning on/off at the same time
62 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Input 3, Input 4, Input 5

These LED inputs indicate module configuration.
Table 3-4 LED Inputs 3, 4, 5

INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 Description
OFF ON OFF  Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
 Works only with specific Back Modules designed for
the Platinum system
ON ON OFF  Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
the Platinum system

These LED inputs indicate Back Module types.
Table 3-5 LED Inputs 6, 7, 8, 9

ON ON ON  No Back Module installed at the back of this slot, OR
 Front Module not correctly mated with Back Module
ON ON OFF  Back Module contains 8x BNC connectors
System LEDs
There are three system indicator LEDs on the input module
Table 3-6 System LEDs

SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
INDICATOR LEDs
POWER Power Supply Indicator
Green +24V power rails are operational
ACT CTRL Active Control
Red Initializing
Solid Green FPGA has configured and the control
system is communicating with the card
Flashing Green Alarm condition on the card
ACT IN Active Input Warning
Yellow Input on card being used by one or more
outputs
Note: The Input Module can lock to 270Mbps, 1.5Gbps and 3Gbps video SDI signals.
Technical Specifications
Table 3-7 PX-HSR8C-IBG Input Module - Technical Specifications

Item Description
Input Connector  75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance  75 Ohms (BNC)

 100 Ohms differential (DensiShield)
Signal type  SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
 SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
 Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3Mb/s to 3.0Gb/s
Maximum input level  880mV (BNC)
 Optical 0dBm typical (based on GO2927/2917)
Return loss (BNC)  > 15dB, up to 1.485GHz
 > 10dB, 1.485GHz to 2.97GHz
Equalization (BNC)  Automatic
 400m Belden 1694A for 270Mb/s data rate
 200m Belden 1694A for 1.485Gb/s data rate
PX-HSR8C-IBG Controllable Parameters

Table 3-8 lists the user-controllable parameters.These parameters are accessible via CCS
Navigator. In Navigator, when in Control mode, double-click the device name to open a
window that displays that device’s parameter list.
Table 3-8 PX-HSR8C-IBG User-Controllable Parameter List

Name Description Type Options
Module Software Version Software version of micro RO <String>
controller
Sync Select Selects which physical RW 0 (Default)
sync port the module 1
uses as a reference 2
(Note: Actual signals are 3
not synchronized to the
reference. This parameter
only affects control
timing)
Temperature Monitor module RO -40 ~ +140 deg C
temperature Unit: deg C
Control FPGA Version Version of FPGA RO <String>
Module Status
64 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-8 PX-HSR8C-IBG User-Controllable Parameter List (Continued)

Inputs Signal Presence Reports presence or RO Yes
absence of valid signal No
Video Standard Detects video standard Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
1035i 60
1035i 59.94
1080i 60
1080i 59.94
1080i 50
1080psf 24
1080psf 23.98
1080p 30
1080p 29.97
1080p 25
1080p 24
1080p 23.98
720p 60
720p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 59.94
1080p 50
1080i 50 295M
720p 50
720p 25
720p 24
720p 23.98
720p 30
720p 29.97
1080p 60 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
1080p 50 DL
Video Error Detects video error in RO Yes
input signal No
N/A
EQ Bypass Sets the EQ mode RW On
Off (Default)
Reclocker Mode Sets the reclock mode to RW Auto (Default)
automatic or bypass or to 3G
one of three manual fixed HD
rates SD
Bypass
Lock Detect Reports if data is relocked RO Yes
by reclocking stage No
Rate Detect Detects data rate RO Unknown
SD
HD
3G
Mute Mutes the output of the RW Yes
board No (Default)
EDH Presence EDH package present in RO Yes
input SD signal No
N/A
Table 3-8 PX-HSR8C-IBG User-Controllable Parameter List (Continued)

Input EDH Error EDH error present in RO Yes
input SD signal No
N/A
CRC/EDH Error Fields Shows CRC/EDH errors RO 0 ~ 65535
CRC/EDH Counter Sets CRC detection mode RW Enable (Default)
Control and EDH detection mode Disable
CRC/EDH Error Clear Clear CRC/EDH error RW Yes
counter No (Default)
Signal Input Range In normal operation, Normal (800mVpp)
input EQ is set to Small (400mVpp)
compensate cable loss
where at the other end of
the cable, the driver
outputs 800mVpp.
If a passive splitter is
inserted between the
cable driver and the EQ,
set this parameter to
Small Range for proper
compensation.
EQ Power Save Mode Puts equalizer into power RW Auto (Default)
save mode Disable
Force
66 Chapter 3
Input Modules
PT-HSR8C-IBG Digital Multirate Input Module
Figure 3-5 PT-HSR8C-IBG Front Module
Figure 3-6 PT-HSR8C-IBG Back Module
Operation
The PT-HSR8C-IBG is an 8 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 8 BNC
connectors.
The PT-HSR8C-IBG Front Module is a hot-swappable, generic Video Input Module that
supports signals up to 3 Gbps. It accepts digital video signals, equalizes and retimes data
streams, detects standards and formats, and distributes signals to the MI backplane to be
switched by the crosspoint matrix.
The Back Module interfaces with the Front module to accept 8 electrical inputs. The
PT-HSR8C-IBG accepts an input data stream for each of the eight channels. Cable losses
are automatically compensated for, if the cable length is within the maximum length
limitation. The maximum cable length is a system specification, not solely dependent on the
input card. It is measured by bit error limitation (not jitter).
Each of the 8 input channels on the Input Module provides signal presence reporting via
card edge LEDs and the control software. Both have the ability to be disabled or enabled
through the control software.
LEDs
There are 8 input LEDs on the PT-HSR8C-IBG module. Under normal working conditions, all
the LEDs are used to indicate signal presence status. See Signal Presence.
Under certain abnormal conditions, for instance if a module is improperly installed or not
recognized by the system, card edge LEDs are used to show diagnostic information. See
Diagnostics.
Figure 3-7 LEDs on PT-HSR8C-IBG Input Module
Signal Presence
There are 8 Input LEDs that report on signal presence
Table 3-9 LED states

State Description
Off No signal present
On Signal present and reclocker locked to signal
Flashing Signal present but reclocker could not lock to signal
Diagnostics
The Input LEDs also perform diagnostic functions, as detailed below.
Input 1 and Input 2

Table 3-10 LED Inputs 1 and 2
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 Description
Flashing Flashing  Abnormal hardware status in the slot
 Note that they are NOT turning on/off at the same time
68 Chapter 3
Input Modules

These LED inputs indicate module configuration.
Table 3-11 LED Inputs 3, 4, 5

OFF ON OFF  Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
the Platinum system
ON ON OFF  Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
the Platinum system

These LED inputs indicate Back Module types.
Table 3-12 LED Inputs 6, 7, 8, 9

ON ON ON  No Back Module installed at the back of this slot, OR
 Front Module not correctly mated with Back Module
ON ON OFF  Back Module contains 8x BNC connectors
System LEDs
There are three system indicator LEDs on the input module
Table 3-13 System LEDs

SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
INDICATOR LEDs
POWER Power Supply Indicator
Green +24V power rails are operational
ACT CTRL Active Control
Red Initializing
Solid Green FPGA has configured and the control
system is communicating with the card
Flashing Green Alarm condition on the card
ACT IN Active Input Warning
Yellow Input on card being used by one or more
outputs
Note: The Input Module can lock to 270Mbps, 1.5Gbps and 3Gbps video SDI signals.
Technical Specifications
Table 3-14 PT-HSR8C-IBG Input Module - Technical Specifications

Item Description
Input Connector  75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance  75 Ohms (BNC)

 100 Ohms differential (DensiShield)
Signal type  SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
 SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
 Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3Mb/s to 3.0Gb/s
Maximum input level  880mV (BNC)
 Optical 0dBm typical (based on GO2927/2917)
Return loss (BNC)  > 15dB, up to 1.485GHz
 > 10dB, 1.485GHz to 2.97GHz
Equalization (BNC)  Automatic
 400m Belden 1694A for 270Mb/s data rate
PT-HSR8C-IBG Controllable Parameters

Table 3-15 PT-HSR8C-IBG User-Controllable Parameter List

Module Software Version Software version of micro RO <String>
controller
Sync Select Selects which physical RW 0 (Default)
sync port the module 1
uses as a reference 2
(Note: Actual signals are 3
not synchronized to the
reference. This parameter
only affects control
timing)
Temperature Monitor module RO -40 ~ +140 deg C
temperature Unit: deg C
Control FPGA Version Version of FPGA RO <String>
Module Status
70 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-15 PT-HSR8C-IBG User-Controllable Parameter List (Continued)

Inputs Signal Presence Reports presence or RO Yes
absence of valid signal No
Video Standard Detects video standard Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
1035i 60
1035i 59.94
1080i 60
1080i 59.94
1080i 50
1080psf 24
1080psf 23.98
1080p 30
1080p 29.97
1080p 25
1080p 24
1080p 23.98
720p 60
720p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 59.94
1080p 50
1080i 50 295M
720p 50
720p 25
720p 24
720p 23.98
720p 30
720p 29.97
1080p 60 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
1080p 50 DL
Video Error Detects video error in RO Yes
input signal No
N/A
Off (Default)
Reclocker Mode Sets the reclock mode to RW Auto (Default)
automatic or bypass or to 3G
one of three manual fixed HD
rates SD
Bypass
Lock Detect Reports if data is relocked RO Yes
by reclocking stage No
Rate Detect Detects data rate RO Unknown
SD
HD
3G
Mute Mutes the output of the RW Yes
board No (Default)
EDH Presence EDH package present in RO Yes
input SD signal No
N/A
Table 3-15 PT-HSR8C-IBG User-Controllable Parameter List (Continued)

Input EDH Error EDH error present in RO Yes
input SD signal No
N/A
CRC/EDH Error Fields Shows CRC/EDH errors RO 0 ~ 65535
CRC/EDH Counter Sets CRC and EDH RW Enable (Default)
Control detection mode Disable
CRC/EDH Error Clear Clear CRC/EDH error RW Yes
counter No (Default)
Signal Input Range In normal operation, Normal (800mVpp)
input EQ is set to Small (400mVpp)
compensate cable loss
where at the other end of
the cable, the driver
outputs 800mVpp.
If a passive splitter is
inserted between the
cable driver and the EQ,
set this parameter to
Small Range for proper
compensation.
EQ Power Save Mode Puts equalizer into power RW Auto (Default)
save mode Disable
Force
72 Chapter 3
Input Modules
PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules
Operation
Note: PM- series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT- series modules operate
in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
Figure 3-8 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ Module
The PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ digital multirate input module receives any AC-coupled digital
signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s terminated with
75. The module automatically compensates the cable loss if the cable length is within the
assigned limitation. The equalized output is split into two identical data streams and fed to
the MI module via a module edge connector. If the amplitude of the input data is smaller
than the limitation (i.e., the cable is longer than the limitation), the output of the equalizer
will be muted and no data will be fed to the MI module. The equalizer function may be
bypassed if EQ is not desired.
The PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ has the capability to support a variety of optional submodules.
Back Panel I/O Modules for PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HS-IB+ and the PT-HS-IB+
modules.
Submodules
The PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodule module corresponds to the PM-HS-IB+ and the
PT-HS-IB+ modules. See page 140 for more information.
Note: Modules marked as PM-HS-IB+DX are PM-HS-IB+ modules equipped with

PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules. Modules marked as PT-HS-IB+DX are PT-HS-IB+ modules
equipped with PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules.
Installation
Input Module Installation

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Special Pre-Installation
Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware
on page 363 and Installing Input and Output Modules on page 367 for the procedure
for field expansion of input modules. If you need to purchase additional components,
please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Back Panel I/O Module Installation

All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Back
Panel Modules on page 378 for the procedure for field expansion of back panel modules.
If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales
Department.
Configuration
This module requires no additional configuration procedures besides those described for
frame configuration.
Table 3-16 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HS-IB+ and PT-HS-IB+ modules.
These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In
RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module
Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name
to open a window that displays that device’s parameter list.
See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
Table 3-16 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List

Signal Presence (1-8) [RO] Reports presence or absence of  Signal absent
valid signal  Signal present
Bypass (1-8) Sets the EQ mode  EQ bypass
 Equalized
Mute (1-8) Mutes the output of the board  Normal operation
 Output of board is muted
Cable Length Adjust (1-8) Sets the equalization cable length  Max: > 350 m Belden 1694A or
(for data rate not higher than 360 equivalent
Mb/s)  Mid: 150 to 200 m Belden
1694A or equivalent
 Short: 50 to 100 m Belden
1694A or equivalent
Proc Enable Enables signal processing (if  No signal processing
submodule is present)  Signal processing enabled
74 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-16 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Pre-Emphasis (1-16) Sets the output pre-emphasis  0 dB
control for the onboard switchers  3 dB
 6 dB
 9 dB
Receiver EQ (1-5) Sets the receiver equalization for  12 dB
onboard switchers  5 dB
Module ID Displays module identifier of String
PM-HS-IB+ or PT-HS-IB+ module

Equalizer Fanout
4×4 crosspoint
HD/SD HD/SD output 1A

input 1 HD/SD output 1B
Feedback
from PT-XP
Equalizer Fanout 4×2 crosspoint

HD/SD output 2A
HD/SD
input 2
HD/SD output 2B

HD/SD output 3A
HD/SD
input 3
HD/SD output 3B
•
Optional
processing
submodule
•
• •
• Equalizer Fanout 2×2 crosspoint
•
HD/SD output 8A
HD/SD
input 8
HD/SD output 8B
TDM output
Sync
inputs IB2IB
Ethernet
EQ 1-8 cable
length adjust
+3.3 V +1.2 V +24 V +3.3 V
+24 VA D/A converters

Power conversion and
+24 VB voltage monitoring
+5 VL DA core FPGA EQ 1-8 bypass/mute
EQ 1-8 signal detect
SLID
PIPE CPLD
Figure 3-9 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ Functional Block Diagram

76 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Specifications
Table 3-17 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ Input Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75
Signal type SMPTE 424M*, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE
259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals,
3 Mb/s to 3.0 Gb/s
Maximum input amplitude 880 mV
Nominal input amplitude 800 mV ± 10%
Return loss > 18 dB, up to 1.485 GHz
> 10 dB, 1.485 GHz to 2.97 GHz
Equalization Automatic
270 Mb/s data rate 1,148 ft (350 m) Belden 1694A
492 ft (150 m) Belden 1694A
1.485 Gb/s data rate 230 ft (70 m) Belden 1694A
2.97 Gb/s data rate
* Tested using JBERT (PRBS 23 and pathogenic signal types). As new test equipment becomes available,
further compliance testing will continue.
PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules
Operation
Figure 3-10 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB Module
The PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB digital multirate input module receives any AC-coupled bi-level
digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s terminated
with 75. The module automatically compensates the cable loss if the cable length is within
the assigned limitation. The equalized output is split into two identical data streams and fed
to the MI module via a module edge connector.
If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the limitation (i.e., the cable is longer than
the limitation), the EQ output will be muted and no data will be fed to the MI module.
Back Panel I/O Modules for PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HS-IB and the PT-HS-IB modules.
Installation

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Input and
Output Modules on page 367 for the procedure for field expansion of input modules.
Department.

Department.
78 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Configuration
Table 3-18 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HS-IB and PT-HS-IB modules.
Table 3-18 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB User-Controllable Parameters List

 Equalized
1694A or equivalent
1694A or equivalent

IN1
OUT1A
EQ 1×2
OUT1B
IN2
OUT2A
EQ 1×2
OUT2B
IN3
OUT3A
EQ 1×2
OUT3B
IN4
OUT4A
EQ 1×2
OUT4B Power-up
IN5 Micro-
System control
OUT5A processor
EQ 1×2
OUT5B
IN6
OUT6A
EQ 1×2 Signal
OUT6B presence
IN7 FPGA
OUT7A Bypass & System control
EQ 1×2 MCL D/A
OUT7B ADJ
IN8
OUT8A +3.3V +24V
EQ 1×2 Power
OUT8B supply
Figure 3-11 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 3-19 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75
Signal type SMPTE 292M SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s
Nominal input amplitude 800 mV ± 10%
492 ft (150 m) Belden 1694A
1.485 Gb/s data rate
80 Chapter 3
Input Modules
PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules
Operation
Figure 3-12 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ Module
The PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ digital multirate input module receives any AC coupled digital signal
with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s terminated with 75. The
module automatically compensates the cable loss if the cable length is within the assigned
limitation. The equalized output is split into two identical data streams and fed to the MI
module via a module edge connector. If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the
limitation (i.e., the cable is longer than the limitation), the EQ output will be muted and no
data will be fed to the MI module.
The PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ has the capability to support a variety of optional submodules.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-S-IB+ and PT-S-IB+ modules.
Submodules
The PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodule module corresponds to the PM-S-IB+ and PT-S-IB+
modules. See page 140 for more information.
Note: Modules marked as PM-S-IB+DX are PM-S-IB+ modules equipped with PT-DMX-3G/
PT-DMX submodules. Modules marked as PT-S-IB+DX are PT-S-IB+ modules equipped with
PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules.
Installation

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Special Pre-Installation
for field expansion of input modules. If you need to purchase additional components,

Department.
Configuration
Table 3-20 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-S-IB+ and PT-S-IB+ modules.
Table 3-20 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List

 Equalized
Mute (1-8) Mutes the output of the board  Normal operation
 Output of board is muted
1694A or equivalent
1694A or equivalent
Proc Enable Enables signal processing (if  No signal processing
submodule is present)  Signal processing enabled
82 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-20 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Pre-Emphasis (1-16) Sets the output pre-emphasis  0 dB
 6 dB
 9 dB
Receiver EQ (1-5) Sets the receiver equalization for  12 dB
Module ID Displays module identifier of String
PM-S-IB+ or PT-S-IB+ module

Equalizer Fanout
4×4 crosspoint
HD/SD HD/SD output 1A

input 1 HD/SD output 1B
Feedback
from PT-XP

HD/SD output 2A
HD/SD
input 2
HD/SD output 2B

HD/SD output 3A
HD/SD
input 3
HD/SD output 3B
•
Optional
processing
submodule
•
• •
• Equalizer Fanout 2×2 crosspoint
•
HD/SD output 8A
HD/SD
input 8
HD/SD output 8B
TDM output
Sync
inputs IB2IB
Ethernet
EQ 1-8 cable
length adjust
+3.3 V +1.2 V +24 V +3.3 V
+24 VA D/A converters

+24 VB voltage monitoring
+5 VL DA core FPGA EQ 1-8 bypass/mute
EQ 1-8 signal detect
SLID
PIPE CPLD
Figure 3-13 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ Functional Block Diagram

84 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Specifications
Table 3-21 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75
Signal type SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to
540 Mb/s
Nominal input amplitude 800mV ± 10%
Return loss > 18 dB, up to 540 MHz
PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules
Operation
Figure 3-14 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Module

The PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB digital multirate input module receives any AC coupled digital signal
with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s terminated with 75. The
module automatically compensates the cable loss if the cable length is within the assigned
limitation. The equalized output is split into two identical data streams and fed to the MI
module via a module edge connector.
If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the limitation (i.e., the cable is longer than
the limitation), the EQ output will be muted and no data will be fed to the MI module.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-S-IB and PT-S-IB modules.
Installation

Output Modules on page 367 for the procedure for field expansion of input modules.
Department.

Department.
Configuration
Table 3-22 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-S-IB and PT-S-IB modules.
86 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-22 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB User-Controllable Parameters List

 Equalized
1694A or equivalent
1694A or equivalent

IN1
OUT1A
EQ 1×2
OUT1B
IN2
OUT2A
EQ 1×2
OUT2B
IN3
OUT3A
EQ 1×2
OUT3B
IN4
OUT4A
EQ 1×2
OUT4B Power-up
IN5 Micro-
System control
OUT5A processor
EQ 1×2
OUT5B
IN6
OUT6A
EQ 1×2 Signal
OUT6B presence
IN7 FPGA
OUT7A Bypass & System control
EQ 1×2 MCL D/A
OUT7B ADJ
IN8
OUT8A +3.3V +24V
EQ 1×2 Power
OUT8B supply
Figure 3-15 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Functional Block Diagram

Specifications
Table 3-23 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75
540 Mb/s
Nominal input amplitude 800mV ± 10%
88 Chapter 3
Input Modules
PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules

PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules
Operation
Figure 3-16 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB Module (Shown with Connector Module)
Figure 3-17 PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB Module (Shown with Connector Module)
The AES input front module receives any AC-coupled digital signal with amplitude not
exceeding 2V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 75 with the coaxial back module
installed, and any digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 7V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
terminated with 110 with the balanced back module installed. The front module recovers,
reslices, and amplifies the signal before distributing it to the crosspoint matrix. It allows for
the connection of 8 channels of AES digital audio. Each of the inputs is presented to
separate input buffers, which perform the basic signal recovery and internal conversion to
balanced Low Voltage Differential Signals (LVDS) for use in the FPGA-based signal presence
detection and router distribution circuitry. Figure 3-19 on page 92 shows the functional
block diagram for the AES input module. The AES input module supports connection of 8
AES channels and performs basic signal presence detection. The optional 16-channel
version includes the time division multiplexed (TDM) AES routing scheme (see page 96).
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB and PM-AEC-IB/

PT-AEC-IB
The PT-AEB-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEB-IB and PT-AEB-IB input
modules. The PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEC-IB and
PT-AEC-IB input modules. DB-25 connectors are used on both the PT-AEB-IBP and
PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC
must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-IBP for connection to coaxial cables.
Figure 3-18 PT-AEC-BOC Cables
Installation

Output Modules on page 367 for the procedure for field expansion of input modules. If
you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales
Department.

Department.
90 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Configuration
Table 3-24 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEB-IB, PT-AEB-IB, PM-AEC-IB,
and PT-AEC-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS
Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters
and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on
the device name to open a window that displays that device’s parameter list.
Table 3-24 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB/PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List

Bypass (1-8) Bypass Platinum auto crosspoint  Off
mute if signal is not present  On
Back Module Type Displays back module type  PT-AEBT-BMI
connected to PM-AEB-IB, PT-AEB-IB,  PT-AECT-BMI
PM-AEC-IB, or PT-AEC-IB module
 PT-AEB-BMI
 PT-AEC-BMI
Figure 3-19 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB and PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB Functional Block Diagram

92 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Pinout Diagram
Table 3-25 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB Pinout Information

1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare 1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8- 1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
J2
DB-25 Pin No. Not Used
(Inputs 1 – 8)
1+ 13
1- 12
1 Gnd 25
2+ 24
2- 23
2 Gnd 11
3+ 10
3- 9
3 Gnd 22
4+ 21
4- 20
4 Gnd 8
5+ 7
5- 6
5 Gnd 19
6+ 18
6- 17
6 Gnd 5
7+ 4
7- 3
7 Gnd 16
8+ 15
8- 14
8 Gnd 2
Spare Gnd 1
Specifications
AES Balanced Digital Audio

Table 3-26 PM-AEB-IB with PM-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Input type Balanced, transformer coupled
Input connector DB-25
Impedance 110
Signal type AES3
AES frame rates 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals
from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
Input amplitude 0.2 Vpp – 7 Vp-p
Nominal input amplitude 5 Vp-p ± 1 V
Table 3-27 PT-AEB-IB with PT-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 110
Signal type AES3
AES Coaxial Digital Audio
Table 3-28 PM-AEC-IB with PM-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Input type AC coupled
Input connector 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adapter)
Impedance 75
94 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-28 PM-AEC-IB with PM-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs (Continued)
Item Specification
Signal type AES3id, SMPTE 276M
AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
Input amplitude 0.1Vp-p to 2Vp-p
Nominal input amplitude 1.0Vp-p ± 10%
Return loss > 30 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
> 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
Table 3-29 PT-AEC-IB with PT-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM

Capability
PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with TDM
Capability
Operation
Figure 3-20 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Module
Figure 3-21 PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB Module
96 Chapter 3
Input Modules
The AES input front module with TDM capability receives AES3 inputs with amplitude not
exceeding 2 V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 75 with the coaxial back module
installed, with amplitude not exceeding 7 V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 110
with the balanced back module installed. The front module recovers, reslices, and amplifies
the signal before distributing it to the router’s matrices. This module provides a TDM version
of all input signals to be distributed to the audio-specific crosspoint module or, optionally, it
can pass the first eight AES inputs to the wideband crosspoint. It allows for the connection
of 16 channels of AES digital audio using either a balanced or unbalanced coaxial back
module, routed within the Platinum platform. Using the optional 8- or 16-channel 110
balanced back module (PT-AEB-IBP), or 8- or 16-channel 75 coaxial unbalanced back
module (PT-AEC-IBP), the AES input front module with TDM will accept up to 16 AES digital
audio signals. Each of the inputs is presented to separate input buffers, which perform the
basic signal recovery and internal conversion to balanced low voltage differential signals
(LVDS) for use in the FPGA-based signal presence detection and router distribution circuitry.
Figure 3-23 on page 100 shows the functional block diagram for the AES input front
module with TDM.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB and

PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB
The PT-AEB-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEBT-IB and PT-AEBT-IB input
modules. The PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AECT-IB and
PT-AECT-IB input modules. DB-25 connectors are used on both the PT-AEB-IBP and
PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC
must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-IBP for connection to coaxial cables.
Installation

Department.

TAll back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Back
Department.
Configuration
Table 3-30 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEBT-IB, PT-AEBT-IB,
PM-AECT-IB, and PT-AECT-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either
RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure
Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control
mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that device’s
parameter list.
Table 3-30 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB User-Controllable

Parameters List
Phase Alarm (1-16) [RO] Alarm set if left and right channels  No phase error
are out of phase  Phase error
Polarity Reversal (1-32) Reverses + and - to correct audio  Normal polarity
polarity in the analog domain  Invert polarity
Tone (1-16) Indicates type of tone to send out  Pass input
AES output  Silence
 500 Hz
 1K
Swap/Copy (1-16) Swap/Copy left and right audio  No swap
channels  Swap left and right
(NOTE: This parameter is always
 Copy left to right
applied after summing)
 Copy right to left
Audio Level Adjustment (1-32) Indicates gain/attenuation applied 10 dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB
to mono channel increments
Clipping Detect (1-32) [RO] Reports if signal on the input  Signal OK
exceeds the maximum input  Signal clipping
amplitude
98 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-30 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB User-Controllable

Parameters List (Continued)
Summing (1-16) Add left and right audio samples,  No summing
divide by 2  Right to left
 Left to right
applied before swap/copy)
 Both
Bypass (1-16) For signals routed to wideband xpt  No bypass
only - tells control to make switch  Ignore signal presence
regardless of signal presence
Src Enable Enables SRC, if licensed  No SRC
 SRC enabled
XPT Type Determines crosspoint matrix  TDM XPT
requirement  Wideband
 Both TDM and wideband
 Undefined
Audio Reference Selects AES reference input for  Sync 4
source  Sync 3
 Sync 2
 Sync 1
Back Module Type Displays the back module type  PT-AEBT-BMI
connected to the PM-AEBT-IB,  PT-AECT-BMI
PT-AEBT-IB, PM-AECT-IB, or
 PT-AEB-BMI
PT-AECT-IB module
 PT-AEC-BMI
Output 1A
AES input 1
Output 1B
AES input 2 Output 2A
AES input 3 Output 2B
Output 3B
AES input 5
Output 4A
AES input 6 Output 4B First 8 inputs distributed
AES input 7 Output 5A to crosspoint matrix
AES input 8 FPGA-based signal Output 5B

presence detection and Output 6A
AES input 9 internal distribution
Output 6B
AES input 11 Output 7B
Output 8B
AES input 13 All 16 inputs distributed
AES input14 to TDM matrix
AES input 15
TDM output
AES input 16
Internal control bus
+24VA in Card status and

from frame +5V signal presence
+24VB in On-board +3.3V LEDs
from frame supply PIPE
+2.5V Control logic
Back module
+5VL in +1.2V ID signals PRTI
from frame
Figure 3-23 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 3-31 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Pinout Information

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8- 1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
DB-25 DB-25
J2 (Inputs 1 – 8) J1 (Inputs 9 – 16)
Pin No. Pin No.
1+ 13 9+ 13
1- 12 9- 12
1 Gnd 25 9 Gnd 25
100 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-31 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Pinout Information (Continued)

2+ 24 10+ 24
2- 23 10- 23
2 Gnd 11 10 Gnd 11
3+ 10 11+ 10
3- 9 11- 9
3 Gnd 22 11 Gnd 22
4+ 21 12+ 21
4- 20 12- 20
4 Gnd 8 12 Gnd 8
5+ 7 13+ 7
5- 6 13- 6
5 Gnd 19 13 Gnd 19
6+ 18 14+ 18
6- 17 14- 17
6 Gnd 5 14 Gnd 5
7+ 4 15+ 4
7- 3 15- 3
7 Gnd 16 15 Gnd 16
8+ 15 16+ 15
8- 14 16- 14
8 Gnd 2 16 Gnd 2
Spare Gnd 1 Spare Gnd 1
Specifications
AES Balanced Digital Audio

Table 3-32 PM-AEBT-IB with PM-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Impedance 110
Table 3-32 PM-AEBT-IB with PM-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Signal type AES3
Table 3-33 PT-AEBT-IB with PT-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Impedance 110
Signal type AES3
102 Chapter 3
Input Modules
AES Coaxial Digital Audio

Table 3-34 PM-AECT-IB with PM-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Impedance 75
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
Table 3-35 PT-AECT-IB with PT-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Impedance 75
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules
Operation
Figure 3-24 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB Module
The PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB analog video to SDI decoder input module converts a block of
eight composite NTSC or PAL video signals to high quality, 10-bit serial digital signals (SDI)
for routing within the Platinum platform. This module also may be used for “analog to
analog” video routing with the optional PM-ENC-OB or PT-ENC-OB encoder output module.
Hardware Reporting
Each of the eight channels will provide standard reporting of signal presence using a
card-edge mounted LED1 in each channel for on-site troubleshooting and via the frame
control system. These additional system LEDs are available:
 Power supply indicator

 Control system acknowledgment
 Input usage warning
Composite Analog Input Processing

The PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB accepts eight 1 Vpp analog NTSC or PAL video signals
terminating into 75 BNC connectors. Using the built-in automatic (AGC) or manual gain
settings, the input signal level can be adjusted ±6 dB in each channel to compensate for
variances in upstream equipment. As well, each input is “back-porch” clamped to the
proper blanking level prior to conversion in the analog to digital converter (ADC) and offers
the ability to handle signals with a luminance pedestal (+7.5 IRE Setup).
1
See page 57 through page 58 for more information about input module LEDs.
104 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Composite Analog to Digital Conversion

Once the analog clamping and level processing has taken place, each channel of video is
presented to a 10-bit analog to digital converter, which is phase and frequency locked by an
internal PLL. Considering that the desired conversion is to component digital on this card,
the analog to digital converters are 2X oversampling at 27MHz (4:2:2 data rate of 13.5MHz
times 2). As a benefit of the 2X oversampling, a half-band decimation filter is applied right
after the digital conversion to reduce the data rate to 1X the pixel rate, which effectively
adds up to 3dB to the overall signal to noise ratio (SNR). Although sampled at a component
data rate, the digitized composite signal is band pass filtered into separate luminance and
chrominance channels (Y/C). The chrominance channel is sent through a quadrature
demodulator for further separation into the base component color difference channels (R -
Y / B - Y). As the color demodulation process is likely to cause artifacts in the video, the R -
Y and B - Y signals are sent through low-pass filters to reduce those artifacts and achieve
optimum bandwidth, and through a five-line adaptive comb filter to compare possible color
phase shift issues from line to line. As the next step in the color demodulation process, a
color space converter is used to convert the red and blue color components to U and V
color difference components (Cr/Cb) as needed for ITU-R 601i and SMPTE-125M type
signals.
The RGB to YUV color space conversion is defined in the following system of equations:
 Y = 0.299R + 0.587G + 0.114B

 U = -0.172R - 0.339G + 0.511B + 512
 V = 0.511R - 0.428G - 0.083B + 512
In cases where the U/V bandwidth needs to be limited, as to prevent aliasing or

chrominance crosstalk, a set of user-adjustable notch filters is provided. Although more of
an issue in the companion encoder / digital to analog (DAC) cards, careful attention has to
be paid to the implementation of these filters as a trade-off between frequency response
and out of band noise is often encountered. In the interest of keeping the luminance or Y
signal bandwidth, a peaking filter is available to the user. There are also controls for the user
to set the brightness, contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and hue of the incoming video
signal. Once the chrominance signals have been processed, they are reunited with the
luminance (Y) channel to complete the 10-bit YUV component digital signal.
Component Digital Packaging

The parallel 10-bit component output of the ADC conversion is presented to the next
process, where it is packaged with the digitized sync information and given the proper start
of active video (SAV) and end of active video (EAV) headers for a SMPTE-125M compliant
parallel output signal. Along with the parallel 10-bit video signal, a 27 MHz clock signal is
provided for latching the data words in the downstream serializer device.
Parallel to Serial Converter

The parallel 10-bit video and clock signal are presented to the FPGA-based serializer for
conversion to SMPTE-259C serial digital component video at 270 Mb/s. The 10-bit parallel
word is latched into the serializer on the rising edge of the accompanying 27 MHz clock
signal and serialized at 10 times the data rate (270 MB/s). As the serial data is used to clock
downstream devices, the serial signal is scrambled and encoded using a non-return to zero
(NRZI) algorithm to ensure that clock transitions occur during long periods of all 1s or 0s to
keep the receiving PLLs locked.
The NRZI / scramble polynomial is defined as

G1 (X) = X9 + X4 + 1 and G2 (X) = X + 1
The completed NRZI serial signal is buffered into two copies of itself for distribution to the
crosspoint module(s) within the Platinum frame.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-DEC-IB and PT-DEC-IB modules.
Installation

Department.

Department.
Configuration
Table 3-36 on page 107 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-DEC-IB and
PT-DEC-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS
106 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-36 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List

valid input signal  Signal present
Video Standard (1-8) Sets video standard  Auto
 NTSC
 PAL B
 PAL M
 Combination PAL N
 NTSC 4.43
 SECAM
 PAL 60
Pedestal Enable (1-8) When Enabled, removes 7.5 IRE  Enabled
video setup level; when Disabled,  Disabled
leaves the incoming signal level as is
Luminance Filter Type (1-8) Enables or disables luminance  Luminance adaptive comb
adaptive comb filter type filter enabled
 Trap filter enabled
 Both filters disabled
Brightness (1-8) Sets brightness level 0 - 255 (128)
Contrast (1-8) Sets contrast level 0 - 255 (128)
Chrominance Saturation (1-8) Sets chrominance saturation level 0 - 255 (128)
Chrominance Hue (tint) (1-8) Sets chrominance hue level –180° to +180° (0°)
Chrominance Adaptive Comb Filter Enables chrominance adaptive  Enabled
(1-8) comb filter  Disabled
Wideband Chrominance Lowpass Color lowpass filter selection  Enabled
Filter (1-8)  Disabled
Chrominance Notch Filter Select Color notch filter selection  Disabled
(1-8)  Notch 1
 Notch 2
 Notch 3
Bypass (1-8) Bypasses Platinum auto crosspoint  No
mute if signal is not present  Yes
Local
I2C
Local
I2C
Bidirectional
frame control ENET Control Card health and
signals PIPE Logic signal presence LEDs
Power failure
monitoring
+5 V
-5 V
+24VA
Power On-board +3.3 V
from frame supply +2.5 V
+24VB
+1.8 V
+1.5 V
Figure 3-25 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB Functional Block Diagram

108 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Specifications
Table 3-37 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75
Signal type NTSC, PAL
Input coupling DC coupled
Maximum input amplitude 2.0 Vpp
Nominal input amplitude 1.0 Vp-p + 10%
Return loss Better than 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz
Clamping Automatic
Quantization 10 bits
Filter Five line adaptive comb, notch, or trap
Output data rate 270 Mb/s per SMPTE 259C
Frequency response ± 0.1 dB to 5.75 MHz
Differential gain < 1%
Differential phase < 1°
Signal to noise ratio > 65 dB
Bulk delay < 80 s typically
PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules
Operation
Figure 3-26 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB Module
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB audio A/D input module provides analog audio to AES digital
audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. Two optional builds (one option with
High Z inputs, the other with 600 terminated inputs) provide 8 stereo channels of
conversion with standard Platinum I/O module features.
To reduce idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters, audio level sensing
circuitry is included that will mute the output (i.e., set all sample data = 0) when the analog
input is lost. The level at which input signal presence is determined is user adjustable, and
includes a minimal level which effectively disables the function. The duration for which this
minimum amplitude is maintained before muting occurs is also user-defined.
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB can automatically detect an external AES reference signal

(DARS), to derive the required sampling clocks and generate AES streams that are locked in
both frequency and phase to this external reference signal. When this reference signal is
absent, the PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB generates the necessary sampling clocks at one of
several of the most common AES frame rates. Users will have the ability to adjust these
internally generated sampling clock frequencies within a specified tolerance.
Analog Inputs
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB provides 8 dual channel balanced analog audio inputs via the
PT-A2-BP back module. The standard option provides high impedance inputs; optional
600 terminated inputs are also available. Input signals are received by high-quality, audio
line receivers containing internal laser-trimmed, matched resistors for maximum common
mode rejection. The signals are converted from balanced to single-ended by the receivers,
and are then attenuated and AC-coupled to the second stage attenuators.
110 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Digitally controlled audio attenuators provide users with the ability to set digital full scale to
a variety of analog audio levels. These low-noise, low distortion attenuators can be software
controlled to provide a wide range of full scale settings.
The output signals from the second stage are then buffered and converted to differential
signals in preparation for presentation to the converters, along with a gain adjustment to
compensate for the first stage attenuation required prior to the digital attenuators.
The final analog stage provides low-pass filtering and the addition of a DC offset before
presenting the audio signal to the A/D converter.
A/D Conversion
Analog-to-digital conversion is provided by quad channel 24-bit oversampling delta-sigma
converters supporting sampling frequencies up to 192 kHz. These converters provide DC
bias voltage outputs, digital decimation and high pass filtering, and audio input clipping
detection.
AES Outputs
The FPGA receives the audio samples from the converters where they are formatted into
AES data streams. The FPGA inserts channel status, parity, and CRC bits, and then encodes
the data into biphase AES signals. Two copies of each AES signal are provided as AC
coupled LVDS for distribution to the Platinum crosspoints.
Reporting
Each channel will provide standard reporting of signal presence using card-edge mounted
LEDs.
 Eight green signal presence LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 8,” are located in a row
on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal is
detected on its corresponding input.
 Eight red signal clipping LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 8,” are located in a row on
the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal on the
input exceeds the maximum input amplitude.
In addition, the usual three system LEDs are included See page 57 through page 58 for a
description of the system LEDs.
Operating Modes
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB operates in one of three modes: External, internal, and auto
mode:.
 In external mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from an external AES
reference (DARS). The resulting AES streams generated from the sampled analog audio
inputs will be locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference.
 In internal mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from internal oscillators.
These oscillators have been chosen to provide for many of the most common AES
frame rates (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, and 192 kHz).
Voltage-controlled crystal oscillators, or VCXOs, allow adjustment of these internally
generated sampling clocks within a specified tolerance.
 In auto mode, the PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB detects whether a usable external reference is

present or not. If it is able to lock to the reference, it will operate as described in
External mode; however, if the reference is lost or becomes unusable, the PM-ADC-IB/
PT-ADC-IB will automatically switch over to operate as described in Internal Mode. If the
reference is restored, the board will again automatically switch over to operate as
described in External Mode.
Analog Level Detection

Analog input level detection is provided in two forms:
 The first implementation is through the use of rectifier and comparator circuits that are
used to detect a user-defined minimum signal amplitude. This minimum amplitude is
conveyed via a nonvolatile, digitally controlled potentiometer that provides the
reference voltage to the comparators. (The reference voltage can be individually set for
channels A and B on all inputs.) If the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the
comparator reference voltage, the green LED for that channel is illuminated.
If the signal level falls below the minimum threshold for a user-defined time duration,
the sampled data output from the A/D converter will be overwritten by all zeroes within
the FPGA. This greatly reduces idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A
converters. Conversely, the detection of a signal above the minimum threshold value
also has an associated time duration before muting is released, providing hysteresis to
this function.
 The second implementation of analog level detection is performed in the A/D converter.
When the analog level exceeds the digital full-scale capability of the converter, the red
Clipping LED for that channel is illuminated, and the condition is reported to the control
system. The user has the option of defining whether this condition constitutes an
alarm.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ADC-IB and PT-ADC-IB
modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The optional PT-A2-DTB terminal
block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame.
112 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Figure 3-27 PT-A2-DTB Terminal Block Adapter
Installation

Department.

Department.
Configuration
Table 3-38 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-ADC-IB and PT-ADC-IB
modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In
Table 3-38 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List

Clipping Detect (1-8)8 [RO] Reports if signal on the input  Signal OK
amplitude
Signal Presence Threshold Sets signal presence threshold for all 0x00 to 0x7F
inputs
0 Dbfs Setting Sets 0 DBFS level  +13 dBu to +28 dBu
 +7 dBm to +22 dBm
Operating Mode Sets PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB  Auto mode
operating mode  Internal mode
 External mode
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Sets the sampling frequency when  32 kHz
Select in internal mode  44.1 kHz
 48 kHz
 88.2 kHz
 96k Hz
 192 kHz
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Adjusts internal mode sampling 0x00 to 0xFF
Adjust frequency
External Reference Frequency [RO] Reports external reference 32 kHz -192 kHz
frequency
Ch. A Presence (1-8) Reports absence or presence of a  Absent
signal on Channel A  Present
Ch. B Presence (1-8) Reports absence or presence of a  Absent
signal on Channel B  Present
Ext. Reference Lock Error Reports lock error on external  No
reference  Yes
Ext. Reference CRC Error Reports CRC error on external  No
reference  Yes
Ext. Reference Validity Error Reports validity error on external  No
reference  Yes
Ext. Reference Confidence Error Reports confidence error on  No
external reference  Yes
Ext. Reference Parity Error Reports parity error on external  No
reference  Yes
Ext. Reference Biphase Error Reports biphase error on external  No
reference  Yes
114 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-38 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Bypass (1-8) Bypasses Platinum auto crosspoint  Off
mute if signal is not present  On
Silence Delay (1-16) Sets the time duration between loss 100 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
of signal presence and audio
muting
Silence Disable (1-16) Disables feature of generating AES  No
silence when signal is not present  Yes

Input Channel 1
Signal
Presence To FPGA
Detection
Receiver A/D Converter 1 FPGA
Attenuator
Analog In 1
Input 1A Serial Data
Vcom12 AES out AES Output 1A
Analog Clip Detect
In 2
Input 1B
0dBFS adjust Buffer, Filter,
Single to DC Bias
Clocks, AES out AES Output 1B
from FPGA control
Diff.
Analog
•
In 3 •
Input Channel 2 Vcom34
Clip Detect
•
Analog In 4 •
Input 2B
•
• •
• AES out AES Output 8A
•
• A/D Converter 4
AES out AES Output 8B
Analog In 1
Analog Clip Detect
In 2
Input 7B
Clocks,
control
Analog
In 3
Analog Clip Detect
In 4
Input 8B
Clocks
AES
Sync Inputs Sync Select Reference
Receiver I2C
Clocks
VCXOs
Control
+24VA Power Conversion

+24VB and
+5VL Voltage Monitoring
Thor Core Control
SLID
PIPE
PRTI PRTI
Figure 3-28 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB Functional Block Diagram

116 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Pinout Diagram
Table 3-39 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB Pinout Information
Inputs DB-44 Inputs DB-44

1–4 Pin No. 5–8 Pin No.
1A+ 15 5A+ 8
1A- 30 5A- 7
1A Gnd 44 5A, 6A 22
Gnd
1B+ 43 5B+ 36
1B- 28 5B- 21
1B Gnd 42 5B Gnd 35
2A+ 14 6A+ 6
2A- 13 6A- 5
2A Gnd 29 6B+ 34
2B+ 41 6B- 19
2B- 26 6B, 7A 20
Gnd Not Used
2B Gnd 40 7A+ 4
3A+ 12 7A- 3
3A- 11 7B+ 32
3A Gnd 27 7B- 17
3B+ 24 7B Gnd 33
3B- 39 8A+ 1
3B, 4A 25 8A- 2
Gnd
4A+ 10 8A, 8B 18
Gnd
4A- 9 8B+ 31
4B+ 23 8B- 16
4B- 38
4B Gnd 37
Specifications
Table 3-40 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input – Standard
Version
Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Input type Balanced
Impedance > 20k
Signal type Stereo analog audio
Table 3-40 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input – Standard
Version(Continued)(Continued)
Item Specification
Maximum input amplitude +28 dBu
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in
1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
CMRR > 75dB rejection @ 60Hz
Conversion type 128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma
Resolution 24 bits
Sampling rates 32 kHz – 192 kHz using external AES
reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators
Gain stability ± 0.01 dB
Frequency response ± 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Linearity deviation < ± 0.5 dB
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +23 dBu
Idle channel noise < –100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical
< –90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS, typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS, worst case
Crosstalk > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all
hostile
(hostile channels driven at
–1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 3-41 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input – 600
Version
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Input type Balanced
Impedance 600
Maximum input amplitude +22 dBm
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in
CMRR > 60 dB rejection @ 60Hz
Resolution 24 bits
118 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-41 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input – 600
Version (Continued)
Item Specification
reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +17 dBm
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS worst case
hostile
–1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM

Capability
Operation
Figure 3-29 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Module
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB audio A/D input module provides analog audio to AES digital
audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. Two optional builds (one option with
High Z inputs, the other with 600 terminated inputs) provide 16 stereo channels of
conversion with standard Platinum I/O module features. This option will provide the user
higher conversion capacity (16 stereo channels), made available via Imagine
Communications’ TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) architecture.
To reduce idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters, audio level sensing
circuitry is included that will mute the output (i.e., set all sample data = 0) when the analog
input is lost. The level at which input signal presence is determined is user adjustable, and
includes a minimal level which effectively disables the function. The duration for which this
minimum amplitude is maintained before muting occurs is also user-defined.
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB can automatically detect an external AES reference signal

(DARS), to derive the required sampling clocks and generate AES streams that are locked in
both frequency and phase to this external reference signal. When this reference signal is
absent, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB generates the necessary sampling clocks at one of
several of the most common AES frame rates. Users will have the ability to adjust these
internally generated sampling clock frequencies within a specified tolerance.
120 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Analog Inputs
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB provides 16 dual channel balanced analog audio inputs via the
PT-A2-BP back module. The standard option provides high impedance inputs; optional
600 terminated inputs are also available. Input signals are received by high-quality, audio
line receivers containing internal laser-trimmed, matched resistors for maximum common
mode rejection. The signals are converted from balanced to single-ended by the receivers,
and are then attenuated and AC-coupled to the second stage attenuators.
Digitally controlled audio attenuators provide users with the ability to set digital full scale to
a variety of analog audio levels. These low-noise, low distortion attenuators can be software
controlled to provide a wide range of full scale settings.
The output signals from the second stage are then buffered and converted to differential
signals in preparation for presentation to the converters, along with a gain adjustment to
compensate for the first stage attenuation required prior to the digital attenuators.
The final analog stage provides low-pass filtering and the addition of a DC offset before
presenting the audio signal to the A/D converter.
A/D Conversion
Analog-to-digital conversion is provided by quad channel 24-bit oversampling delta-sigma
converters supporting sampling frequencies up to 192 kHz. These converters provide DC
bias voltage outputs, digital decimation and high pass filtering, and audio input clipping
detection.
AES Outputs
The FPGA receives the audio samples from the converters where they are formatted into
AES data streams. The FPGA inserts channel status, parity, and CRC bits, and then encodes
the data into biphase AES signals. Two copies of the first eight AES signals are provided as
AC coupled LVDS for distribution to the wideband Platinum crosspoints. The FPGA also
provides a TDM version of all sixteen AES signals for distribution to the audio-specific
crosspoint module(s).
Reporting
Each channel will provide standard reporting of signal presence using card-edge mounted
LEDs.
 The green signal presence LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 16,” are located in a row
on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal is
detected on its corresponding input.
 The red signal clipping LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 16,” are located in a row on
the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal on the
input exceeds the maximum input amplitude or level adjust available through TDM
scales the digital signal beyond AES limits.
In addition, the usual three system LEDs are included See page 57 through page 58 for a
description of the system LEDs.
Operating Modes
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB operates in one of three modes: External, internal, and auto
mode:.
 In external mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from an external AES
reference (DARS). The resulting AES streams generated from the sampled analog audio
inputs will be locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference.
 In internal mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from internal oscillators.
These oscillators have been chosen to provide for many of the most common AES
frame rates (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, and 192 kHz).
Voltage-controlled crystal oscillators, or VCXOs, allow adjustment of these internally
generated sampling clocks within a specified tolerance.
 In auto mode, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB detects whether a usable external reference
is present or not. If it is able to lock to the reference, it will operate as described in
External mode; however, if the reference is lost or becomes unusable, the PM-ADCT-IB/
PT-ADCT-IB will automatically switch over to operate as described in Internal Mode. If
the reference is restored, the board will again automatically switch over to operate as
described in External Mode.
Analog Level Detection

Analog input level detection is provided in two forms:
 The first implementation is through the use of rectifier and comparator circuits that are
used to detect a user-defined minimum signal amplitude. This minimum amplitude is
conveyed via a nonvolatile, digitally controlled potentiometer that provides the
reference voltage to the comparators. (The reference voltage can be individually set for
channels A and B on all inputs.) If the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the
comparator reference voltage, the green LED for that channel is illuminated.
If the signal level falls below the minimum threshold for a user-defined time duration,
the sampled data output from the A/D converter will be overwritten by all zeroes within
the FPGA. This greatly reduces idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A
converters. Conversely, the detection of a signal above the minimum threshold value
also has an associated time duration before muting is released, providing hysteresis to
this function.
 The second implementation of analog level detection is performed in the A/D converter.
When the analog level exceeds the digital full-scale capability of the converter, the red
Clipping LED for that channel is illuminated, and the condition is reported to the control
system. The user has the option of defining whether this condition constitutes an
alarm.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ADCT-IB and PT-ADCT-IB
122 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Installation

Department.

Department.
Configuration
Table 3-42 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-ADCT-IB and PT-ADCT-IB
Table 3-42 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List

valid signal (determined by signal  Signal present
presence threshold, signal absence
before mute, signal presence before
mute release, and tone generation)
Threshold (1-8) Sets signal presence threshold (all 0x00 to 0x7F
inputs)
Silence Delay (1-16) Sets the time duration between loss 7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
of signal presence and audio
muting
Phase Alarm (1-16) [RO] Alarm set if left and right channels  No phase error
Tone Indicates type of tone to send out  Pass input
 500Hz
 1K
Audio Level Adjustment (1-32) Indicates gain/attenuation applied 10dB to -30dB in 0.5dB increments
to mono channel
amplitude
Bypass (1-16) For signals routed to wideband  No bypass
crosspoint only - tells control to  Ignore signal presence
make switch regardless of signal
presence
Xpt Type Determines crosspoint matrix  TDM XPT
 Both TDM and wideband
 Undefined
0dBFS setting Sets 0 dBFS setting for analog to 13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB increments
digital conversion
Operating Mode Sets PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB  Auto mode
operating mode  Internal mode
 External mode
124 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-42 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Sets the sampling frequency when  32 kHz
Select in internal mode  44.1 kHz
 48 kHz
 88.2 kHz
 96k Hz
 192 kHz
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Adjusts internal mode sampling 0x00 to 0xFF
Adjust frequency
External Reference Frequency [RO] Reports external reference  Unlocked
frequency  Out of Range
(NOTE: Must be a sample rate
 192 kHz
supported by TDM)
 96 kHz
 88.2 kHz
 48 kHz
 44.1 kHz
 32 kHz
source  Sync 3
 Sync 2
 Sync 1
Ch. A Presence (1-16) Reports absence or presence of a  Absent
signal on Channel A  Present
Ch. B Presence (1-16) Reports absence or presence of a  Absent
signal on Channel B  Present
Ext. Reference Lock Error Reports lock error on external  No
reference  Yes
Ext. Reference CRC Error Reports CRC error on external  No
reference  Yes
Ext. Reference Validity Error Reports validity error on external  No
reference  Yes
Ext. Reference Confidence Error Reports confidence error on  No
external reference  Yes
Ext. Reference Parity Error Reports parity error on external  No
reference  Yes
Table 3-42 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Ext. Reference Biphase Error Reports biphase error on external  No
reference  Yes
and then divide by 2  Right to left
 Left to right
 Both
Silence Disable (1-8) Disables feature of generating AES  No
silence when signal is not present  Yes
(wideband mode only)
126 Chapter 3
Input Modules

Input Channel 1
Signal
Presence To FPGA
Detection
Receiver A/D Converter 1 FPGA
Attenuator
Analog In 1
Vcom12 AES out AES Output 1A
Analog Clip Detect
In 2
Input 1B
0dBFS adjust Buffer, Filter,
Single to DC Bias
Clocks, AES out AES Output 1B
from FPGA control
Diff.
Analog
•
In 3 •
Clip Detect
•
Analog In 4 •
Input 2B
•
• •
•
• AES out AES Output 8A
•
•
•
• A/D Converter 8
AES out AES Output 8B
Analog In 1
Analog Clip Detect
In 2
Input 7B
Clocks,
control
Analog
In 3
Analog Clip Detect
In 4
Input 8B
TDM Output
Clocks
AES
Sync Inputs Sync Select Reference
Receiver I2C
Clocks
VCXOs
Control
+24VA Power Conversion

+24VB and
+5VL Voltage Monitoring
Thor Core Control
SLID
PIPE
PRTI PRTI
Figure 3-31 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Functional Block Diagram

Pinout Diagram
Table 3-43 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Pinout Information
Inputs DB-44 Inputs DB-44 Inputs DB-44 Inputs DB-44

1–4 Pin No. 5–8 Pin No. 9 – 12 Pin No. 13 – 16 Pin No.
1A+ 15 5A+ 8 9A+ 15 13A+ 8
1A- 30 5A- 7 9A- 30 13A- 7
1A Gnd 44 5A, 6A 22 9A Gnd 44 13A, 14A 22
Gnd Gnd
1B+ 43 5B+ 36 9B+ 43 13B+ 36
1B- 28 5B- 21 9B- 28 13B- 21
1B Gnd 42 5B Gnd 35 9B Gnd 42 13B Gnd 35
2A+ 14 6A+ 6 10A+ 14 14A+ 6
2A- 13 6A- 5 10A- 13 14A- 5
2A Gnd 29 6B+ 34 10A Gnd 29 14B+ 34
2B+ 41 6B- 19 10B+ 41 14B- 19
2B- 26 6B, 7A 20 10B- 26 14B, 15A 20
Gnd Gnd
2B Gnd 40 7A+ 4 10B Gnd 40 15A+ 4
3A+ 12 7A- 3 11A+ 12 15A- 3
3A- 11 7B+ 32 11A- 11 15B+ 32
3A Gnd 27 7B- 17 11A Gnd 27 15B- 17
3B+ 24 7B Gnd 33 11B+ 24 15B Gnd 33
3B- 39 8A+ 1 11B- 39 16A+ 1
3B, 4A 25 8A- 2 11B, 12A 25 16A- 2
Gnd Gnd
4A+ 10 8A, 8B 18 12A+ 10 16A, 16B 18
Gnd Gnd
4A- 9 8B+ 31 12A- 9 16B+ 31
4B+ 23 8B- 16 12B+ 23 16B- 16
4B- 38 12B- 38
4B Gnd 37 12B Gnd 37
Specifications
Table 3-44 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input –

Standard Version
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Input type Balanced
Impedance > 20k
128 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-44 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input –

Standard Version(Continued)(Continued)
Item Specification
Maximum input amplitude +28 dBu
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in
CMRR > 75dB rejection @ 60Hz
Resolution 24 bits
reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
Linearity deviation < ± 0.5 dB typical
< ± 1.0 dB worst case
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +23 dBu
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS, typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS, worst case
hostile
–1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 3-45 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input – 600
Version
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Input type Balanced
Impedance 600
Maximum input amplitude +22 dBm
CMRR > 60 dB rejection @ 60Hz
Resolution 24 bits
Table 3-45 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input – 600
Version (Continued)
Item Specification
reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
Linearity deviation < ± 0.5 dB typical
< ± 1.0 dB worst case
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +17 dBm
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS worst case
hostile
–1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Receiver Modules
Operation
Note: PT- series modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
Figure 3-32 PT-HS1310S-IB Module (PT-FO-BMI Back Panel I/O Module Attached)
130 Chapter 3
Input Modules
The PT-HS1310S-IB is a fiber optical HD/SD serial video receiver module. These modules
have eight fiber optical receiver receptacles mounted on the metal back panel of the back
module. Each receptacle contains an ST connector, a PIN type photodiode, and a
transimpedance amplifier. The receptacle receives light modulated by digital video data in
the range of 1100 nm–1650 nm, and converts it to an electrical signal via the internal PIN.
An internal transimpedance amplifier amplifies this electrical signal to obtain the required
amplitude for the following processing stage. The following stage consists of a limiting
amplifier, which enlarges the electrical data to an 800 mV differential signal and feeds it to
the front module.
The front module receives eight-channel data through the module edge connector. Each
channel is equipped with a 2×2 CML crosspoint switch, which is configured to 1×2. The
outputs of this CML are sent out to PT-MI AND PT-XP for switching. If the input of this 1×2
selects a data from system FB (via an optional 1-8 buffer), the CML outputs to the module
interconnect and crosspoint modules could be used for system test and diagnosis purpose.
The output stage of this switch also provides a function of pre-emphasis. This function
precompensates the transmission line loss for high-speed data, to reduce ISI jitter. The
limiting amplifier in each channel of the back module provides an input data loss report. It is
used to drive LEDs on the front edge of the front module.
An FPGA provides control and communication required. Except for common functions (such
as pipe line port, PRTI port, slot ID, power start trigger) this FPGA also control pre-emphasis
amount for each output, normal/diagnosis selecting and data loss reporting, back module
identification.
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-HS1310S-IB

The PT-FO-BMI back module corresponds to the PT-HS1310S-IB modules.
Installation

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Specialized Installation
and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB
Fiber Optical Modules on page 371 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement
of PT-HS1310S-IB modules. (Also, see Appendix B, Laser Safety Guidelines on page 463,
for more information about lasers.) If you need to order additional components, please

If you need to order additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales
Department.
Configuration
Table 3-46 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-HS1310S-IB modules. These
parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper,
parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list
boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a
Table 3-46 PT-HS1310S-IB User-Controllable Parameters List

[RO] = Read only parameter
Signal presence detect [RO] Reports presence or absence of  Signal absent

Bypass (1-8) Enables or disables the reclock  No bypass
bypass function  Ignore signal presence
PreEmphasis Precompensates the transmission  0%
line loss for high-speed data  25%
 50%
 100%
132 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Figure 3-33 PT-HS1310S-IB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 3-47 PT-HS1310S-IB Specifications

Item Specification
Connector ST
Mode Multimode (62.5m)
Detector PIN
Wavelength 1100 – 1650 nm
Max. input power > –7.5 dBm
Min. input power < –20 dBm for HD
(sensitivity) < –25 dBm for SD
Table 3-47 PT-HS1310S-IB Specifications

Damage threshold +1 dBm
Return loss 20 dB
Bit error ratio 10E-12
PT-HSO-IB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and

SD-SDI Serial Video Receiver Modules
Operation
Figure 3-34 PT-HSO-IB+ Module (PT-SFP2X4+BM Back Panel I/O Module Attached)
The PT-HSO-IB+ fiber optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI serial video receiver
module has 8 SFP-type fiber optical receivers that receive 3 Gb HD, 1.5 Gb HD, and SD serial
digital video data from an LC fiber connector. Four SFP modules, each containing two
channels, are mounted on the metal back panel of the back module. The receivers accept
fiber optical signal within wavelength range of 1260 nm ~ 1610 nm. The SFP module can
be replaced or changed from the back of the frame without removing the front module or
disturbing traffic other than that on the SFP.
The front module receives 8 channel data through the module edge connector. Each
channel is equipped with a reclocker. The reclocker output is split into two identical data
streams by an onboard crosspoint switcher and fed to the MI module via a module edge
connector. The output stage of the switcher also provides a function of pre-emphasis. This
function pre-compensates the transmission line loss for high-speed data, to reduce ISI jitter.
The PT-HSO-IB+ has the capability to support a variety of optional submodules.
The SFP modules provide input data loss report, which is used to drive LEDs on the front
edge of the front module and on the back panel of the back module. The SFP modules also
provide input optical signal power measurement.
134 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Note: Ensure that you upgrade to the latest firmware version (3.5 or later) before installing
an SFP. For details on supported SFPs, see SFP Specifications on page 137.
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-HSO-IB+

The PT-SFP2X4+BM back module corresponds to the PT-HSO-IB+ modules.
Figure 3-35 PT-SFP2X4+BM Back Panel I/O Module
Submodules
The PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodule module corresponds to the PT-HSO-IB+ modules. See
page 140 for more information.
Note: Modules marked as PT-HSO-IB+DX are PT-HSO-IB+ modules equipped with

PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules.
Installation

Output Modules on page 367 for the procedure for field expansion of PT-HSO-IB+
modules. (Also, see Appendix B, Laser Safety Guidelines on page 463, for more
information about lasers.) If you need to order additional components, please contact your
dealer or our Sales Department.
Note: Module fuses are designed to operate throughout normal operations. In the unlikely
event that a fuse fails, return the module to Imagine Communications Engineering for
diagnostic testing. Please contact Customer Service to obtain a return authorization
number, and then refer to page xxii for information about returning a product.

Department.
Configuration
Table 3-48 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-HSO-IB+ modules. These parameters
are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are
found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In
Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that
displays that device’s parameter list.
Table 3-48 PT-HSO-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List

Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the  0
module uses as a reference  1
 2
 3
Main Module ID [RO] Displays the Module Hardware ID.
SFP(1-4) Type [RO] Reports type of SFP that plugged in  OP+SFP+RR
back module See OP+SFP+RR Specifications.
 Unknown
 Invalid SFP
Signal Presence [RO] Reports presence or absence of  On
valid signal  Off
Input Optical Power [RO] Reports input optical signal power  -29 dBm ~ +1 dBm
level  ----
Output Mode Determines if output signal comes  Main module
from main module or submodule (if  Submodule
installed)
 Auto
Pre-Emphasis Sets the output pre-emphasis  0 dB
 6 dB
 9 dB
136 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-48 PT-HSO-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Receiver EQ Sets the receiver equalization for  12 dB
Lock Detect [RO] Reports if data is locked by  Yes
reclocking stage  No
Reclocker Mode Sets the reclock mode to automatic  Auto
or to one of three manual fixed  270 Mb/s
rates
 1.48 Gb/s
 2.97 Gb/s
Rate Detect [RO] Detects data rate  SD
 HD
 Unknown
HD is displayed for both 1.48 &

2.97 Gbps rates and SD is displayed
for 270 Mbps.
SFP Specifications
The following are specifications for the supported SFPs.
Ensure that you upgrade to the latest firmware version 3.5 or later before installing a new
SFP.
OP+SFP+RR Specifications
Table 3-49 OP+SFP+RR specs
Item Minimum Typical Maximum Notes
Number of LC input - - 2
connectors
Input wavelength 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Optical power monitor -2 dB - 2 dB
accuracy
Sensitivity at 270 Mb/s - -22 -20 Pathological*
(SMPTE 259M)
Sensitivity at 1.5 Gb/s - -22 -20 Pathological
(SMPTE 292M)
Sensitivities at 3 Gb/s - -20 -18 Pathological
(SMPTE 424M)
Overload 0 dBm 2.97 Gb/s*
*BER = 1E-12 against SDI matrix. Check field signals for video applications.
Figure 3-36 PT-HSO-IB+ Functional Block Diagram

138 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Specifications
Table 3-50 PT-HSO-IB+ Specifications*

Item Specification
Connector LC
Number of inputs 8
* For optical input performance specifications (Wavelength Range, Overload Input Power, Input
Sensitivity, Maximum Back Reflection, etc.) please refer to individual SFP module specification
datasheets.
Datasheets of customer-replaceable optical SFP parts are available by request. Please

contact your Customer Service representative for more information.
PT-DMX-3G: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s

Capability
PT-DMX: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with
1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI Capability
Operation
Figure 3-37 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX Submodule
When installed on PM-HS-IB+, PT-HS-IB+, PM-S-IB+ or PT-S-IB+ input modules, the

PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodule operates as an audio de-embedder.1 It demuxes up to 4
groups (16 channels) of audio per SDI path, and transmits up to 128 channels to the
Platinum audio TDM crosspoint.
When operating as an audio de-embedder the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX supports an audio TDM

transmitter. In this mode, all 128 channels will be sample rate converted to 48kHz sampling
frequency and locked to the provided reference.
 Each SDI channel supports the following video processing standards:

 SD-SDI
 525i 59.94
 625i 50
 1.5 HD-SDI
 720p 25
 720p 29.97
 720p 30
 720p 50
1
All embedded audio must be synchronous to the video in order to de-embed.
140 Chapter 3
Input Modules
 720p 59.94
 720p 60
 1080p 23.98
 1080p 24
 1080p 29.97
 1080p 30
 1080p 25
 1080i 50
 1080i 59.94
 1080i 60
 1035i 59.94
 1035i 60
 1080sF 23.98
 1080sF 24
 3.0 HD-SDI1
 1080p 50
 1080p 59.94
 1080p 60
 Each SDI channel supports the following audio functionality:

 Embedded 4 groups (16 mono channels)
 Embedded audio at 48 kHz sample rate
 Audio Proc (gain, invert, mute)
 Audio Swap with quiet switching
 Audio Sum
 Provides a simple test pattern generator (75% bars, 100% bars, Equalization Test, and
PLL Test)
Note: All video channels need to be either SD, 1.5 G HD-SDI, or 3.0 G HD-SDI. All video
channels must operate at the same frame rate (that is, 29.97 Hz, or 25 Hz, and so on.), and
must be genlocked.
Operation Notes
A Genlock reference must be applied to the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX.
All SDI channels applied to the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX must be locked to the applied Genlock
Reference.
All signals on an individual input module must have the same format (SD, 1.5G HD, or 3G
HD).
All SDI channels applied to the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX must be of the same data rate (SD,
1.5G HD, or 3G HD) and must have the same frame rate.
1 3G
HD-SDI is available as a licensed option.
The module will determine its data rate by the Input Rate parameter. The user can specify it
to be SD, 1.5HD or 3G HD. If set to Auto, the data rate is determined by the first detected
SDI signal (for example, if signals are applied to SDI 1-8, the data rate is determined by
SDI1. If SDI1 is removed, then SDI2 determines the data rate).
The PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX will automatically bypass a specific SDI channel under the
following conditions:
 No signal is detected and LOV mode is set to Pass Input

 The signal is not locked to the reference and Unlocked SDI Bypass is enabled
 The signal data rate does not match the module’s data rate
Audio Order of Operations

1 Insert Tone (if enabled)
2 Polarity Reversal and Level Adjust
3 Sum
4 Swap/Copy
5 Mute (if enabled)
Installation
This option is not user-upgradeable. For further assistance regarding PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX
hardware/firmware requirements and installation, please contact our Customer Service
Department.
Configuration
Table 3-51 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules.
Note: Because the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX parameter list has multiple levels, Table 3-51
includes a Parameter Tree column. This column indicates the parameter’s location on the
Navigator parameter tree list.
142 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-51 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX User-Controllable Parameters List

[RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection
No. of
Parameter Instance
Parameter Tree Instance Description Options
Name Type
s
GenLock Video Genlock 1 Indicates if a Genlock reference signal • Yes
Present is detected • No
GenLock Video Genlock 1 Indicates if the module is locked to the • Yes
Locked Genlock reference • No
GenLock Standard Genlock 1 Indicates the video standard of the • Unknown
Genlock reference • 525i 59.94
• 625i 50
• 720p 25
• 720p 29.97
• 720p 30
• 720p 50
• 720p 59.94
• 720p 60
• 1080p 23.98
• 1080p 24
• 1080p 29.97
• 1080p 30
• 1080p 25
• 1080i 50
• 1080i 59.94
• 1080i 60
• 1080p 50
• 1080p 59.94
• 1080p 60
• 1035i 59.94
• 1035i 60
• 1080sF 23.98
• 1080sF 24
Group Presence (1-8) Input > Embedded 4 Audio Groups Indicates which audio groups are • Yes
Audio Status > Group 1- 4 present • No
Presence
Group Active Input > Embedded 4 Audio Groups Indicates which channels are active in • CH1
Channels (1-8) Audio Status > Group 1- 4 each audio group • CH2
Active Channels
• CH12
• CH3
• CH13
• CH23
• CH123
• CH4
• CH14
• CH24
• CH124
• CH34
• CH134
• CH234
• CH1234
Group Checksum Error Input > Embedded 4 Audio Groups Indicates if there is a checksum error in • Yes
(1-8) Audio Status > Group 1- 4 each audio group • No
Checksum Error
Group Parity Error Input > Embedded 4 Audio Groups Indicates if there is a parity in each • Yes
(1-8) Audio Status > Group 1- 4 audio group • No
Parity Error
Group DBN Error (1-8) Input > Embedded 4 Audio Groups Indicates if there is a DBN in each audio • Yes
Audio Status > Group 1- 4 group • No
DBN Error
Group ECC Error (1-8) Input > Embedded 4 Audio Groups Indicates if there is an ECC in each • Yes
Audio Status > Group 1- 4 audio group • No
ECC Error
Table 3-51 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

No. of
Parameter Instance
Name Type
s
Group Sampling Rate Input > Embedded 4 Audio Groups Indicates the audio sampling rate for • 48KHz
(1-8) Audio Status > Group 1- 4 each group • N/A
Sampling Rate
Audio Format (1-8) Input > Embedded 16 Audio Indicates if the audio channel is PCM or • PCM
Audio Status > Audio Channels 1-16 non-PCM audio • Non-PCM
Format
Input Rate Input > Video 1 Specifies at which data rate the • Auto
module should operate; if set to Auto, • SD
the data rate is determined by the first
detected input • 1.5 HD
For proper operation all SDI channels • 3.0 HD
must operate at the same data rate
(SD, 1.5G HD or 3G HD) and must be
locked to the applied Genlock
reference
SDI Video Std. Input > Video > SDI 1 Indicates the detected video standard • Unknown
Feedback (1-8) Video Std. Feedback • 525i 59.94
• 625i 50
• 720p 25
• 720p 29.97
• 720p 30
• 720p 50
• 720p 59.94
• 720p 60
• 1080p 23.98
• 1080p 24
• 1080p 29.97
• 1080p 30
• 1080p 25
• 1080i 50
• 1080i 59.94
• 1080i 60
• 1080p 50
• 1080p 59.94
• 1080p 60
• 1035i 59.94
• 1035i 60
• 1080sF 23.98
• 1080sF 24
SDI Video Present Input > Video > SDI 1 Indicates if the a SDI signal is present • Yes
(1-8) Video Present • No
EDH Present (1-8) Input > Video > EDH 1 Indicates if EDH is present (applies to • Yes
Present 525i 59.94 and 625i only) • No
Y CRC Error Counter Input > Video > Y CRC 1 Displays the number of Y CRC errors 0-255
(1-8) Error Counter that have been detected
C CRC Error Counter Input > Video > C CRC 1 Displays the number of C CRC errors 0-255
(1-8) Error Counter that have been detected
EDH Error Counter Input > Video > EDH 1 Displays the number of EDH errors that 0-32767
(1-8) Error Counter have been detected
CRC/EDH Error Clear Input > Video > CRC/ 1 Clears the Y and C CRC Error and EDH • Yes
(1-8) EDH Error Clear Error counters • No
Loss of Video (1-8) Processing > Video > 1 Specifies whether to continue to pass • Pass
Loss of Video the input or switch to black on the loss • Black
of video
144 Chapter 3
Input Modules

No. of
Parameter Instance
Name Type
s
TSG Override Processing > Video > 1 Enables/Disables TSG Override mode • Yes
TSG This mode of operation is used when • No
the PT-DMX is meant to operate as a
standalone TSG; that is, no SDI signals
are applied
When enabled, the data rate and
frame rate is determined by the TSG
Standard 1
For example, if TSG Standard 1 is
720p60, then the data rate is 1.5G HD
and the frame rate is 60Hz
This data rate and frame rate apply for
all 8 SDI channels
However, for 1.5G data rates it is
possible to mix 1080i and 720p
standards
e.g. some can be 720p60 and others
1080i60
You cannot mix SD, 1.5G HD and 3.0G
HD data rates
You cannot mix 50Hz, 59.94Hz and
60Hz modes; all standards need to be
either 1/1 or 1/1.001
This mode should be used with caution
and is intended to be used when the
system is being tested or commissioned
TSG Enable (1-8) Processing > Video > 1 Enables and disables the TSG • Yes
TSG Enable • No
TSG Standard (1-8) Processing > Video > 1 Selects the video standard for the TSG • Follow RX
TSG Standard (default is to follow the detected • 525i 59.94
standard)
• 625i 50
• 720p 25
• 720p 29.97
• 720p 30
• 720p 50
• 720p 59.94
• 720p 60
• 1080p 23.98
• 1080p 24
• 1080p 29.97
• 1080p 30
• 1080p 25
• 1080i 50
• 1080i 59.94
• 1080i 60
• 1080p 50
• 1080p 59.94
• 1080p 60
• 1035i 59.94
• 1035i 60
• 1080sF 23.98
• 1080sF 24
TSG Pattern (1-8) Processing > Video > 1 Selects the test pattern for the TSG • Bar 75
TSG Pattern • Bar 100
• Eq. Test
• PLL Test
Group DeEmbed Processing > 4 Audio Groups Specifies the operation of the audio • Repeat
Control (1-8) Deembedding > 1- 4 de-embedder when an error occurs; it • Mute
Group DeEmbed will either repeat the last audio sample
Control or mute when an error occurs

No. of
Parameter Instance
Name Type
s
Group DBN Error Processing > 4 Audio Groups Specifies the operation of the audio • Alert
Report (1-8) Deembedding > 1- 4 de-embedder when a DBN error occurs • Ignore
Group DBN Error • If set to Alert the de-embedder
Report will operate as defined by the
Group DeEmbed Control
parameter
• If set to Ignore, DBN errors will be
ignored by the audio
de-embedder
Audio Level Adjust Processing > Audio > 16 Audio Adjusts the audio level (gain) for each • -18 dB to +18 dB
(1-8) Level Adjust Channels 1-16 audio channel in 0.1 dB steps (0
dB)
Swap/Copy (1-8) Processing > Audio > 8 Audio Pairs 1-8 Specifies whether to swap or copy the • No Swap
Swap_Copy audio within a pair; able to swap left • Swap
and right channels, copy left channel
to the right channel, and copy the • Left to Right
right channel to the left • Right to Left
Polarity Reversal (1-8) Processing > Audio > 16 Audio Specifies whether the audio channel • Yes
Polarity Reversal Channels 1-16 should be inverted • No
Audio Mute (1-8) Processing > Audio > 16 Audio Specifies whether the audio channel • On
Mute Channels 1-16 should be muted • Off
Fade Rate (1-8) Processing > Audio > 1 Specifies the fade rate 0 - 10 s, in 1 s steps
Fade Rate (1 s)
Summing (1-8) Processing > Audio > 8 Audio Pairs 1-8 Specifies whether to sum the audio • None
Summing within a pair • Left To Right
Left to Right - the summed audio is
placed in the right channel • Right To Left
Right to Left - the summed audio is • Both
placed in the left channel
Both - the summed audio is placed in
both left and right channels
Tones (1-8) Processing > Audio > 16 Audio Enables tones for the audio channels • Pass Input
Tones Channels 1-16 (there are two tone frequencies to • 500 Hz
choose from)
Note that the tones are at 0dBFS by • 1 kHz
default
Unlocked SDI Bypass Output 1 When enabled, if a video input is not • Yes
locked to the applied Genlock • No
reference, this video path will be
automatically bypassed
Sub Module Bypass Output > Sub Module 1 Status indication of the bypass state for • Yes, No Input
(1-8) Bypass each SDI channel • Yes, Not Locked
• Yes, Rate
Mismatch
• No
Parameter Update General 1 Specifies the rate at which the • Slow
Rate parameters are updated • Medium
• Fast
Module ID General 1 Indicates the module serial number String
License Key General 1 Enter license key to enabled licensed String
options
Licensed Options General 1 Indicates which licensed options are String
available
Temperature General 1 Indicates the temperature of the FPGA String
H/W Version General 1 Indicates the hardware version String
146 Chapter 3
Input Modules
SDI IN De-serializer
Video Mux
Serializer SDI OUT
To Crosspoint
TSG
De-embed
Audio Audio
Audio Audio TDM
Invert & Swap/
Sum Crosspoint
Scale Copy
Figure 3-38 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 3-52 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Standard
3.0 HD-SDI SMPTE 424M, 1080p 50, 1080p 59.94,
1080p 60
SMPTE 292M, 720p 25, 720p 29.97, 720p
1.5 HD-SDI 30, 720p 50, 720p 59.94, 720p 60, 1080p
23.98, 1080p 24, 1080p 29.97, 1080p 30,
1080p 25, 1080i 50, 1080i 59.94, 1080i
60, 1035i 59.94, 1035i 60, 1080sF 23.98,
1080sF 24
SMPTE 259M-C, 525i 59.94, 625i 50
SD-SDI
Power consumption 30 W
Max. operating temperature 105°F (40°C)
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix

Expansion Input and Receiver Modules
Figure 3-39 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Front Module
Operation
The PT-HSR8C1D-IBG (see PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module) and PT-HSR1D-IBG (see
PT-HSR1D-IBG Input Module) are 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI input expansion and receiver
modules intended for use together in two separate Platinum frames, to expand the inputs
of one frame to the second frame (see Input Expansion).
The PT-HSR8C1D-IBG module accepts digital video signals, equalizes and re-clocks data
streams, detects standards and formats, and distributes the signals to the MI backplane to
be switched by the crosspoint matrix and to a high density connector for distribution to a
second frame. Signals up to 3 Gbps are supported.
A DensiShield input port on the PT-HSR1D-IBG module accepts signals from compatible
equipment, providing flexibility and feature support for other applications. This card allows
all inputs from a primary frame to be easily wired to a second frame extending the routing
system to more than 512 outputs.
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module

The PT-HSR8C1D-IBG is an SD/HD/3G Input module that provides eight electrical inputs via
HD-BNC connectors. These eight inputs can be routed to a second Platinum frame through
the DensiShield Out connector. Looping the output of all inputs extends the routing system
to more than 512 outputs. A single HD-BNC Out connector is also present but not currently
used. Input 9 is also available but currently unused.
148 Chapter 3
Input Modules
DensiShield
OUT 9 OUT 1-8 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8 IN 9
Unused Unused
Figure 3-40 Inputs on the PT-HSR8C1D-IBG module
PT-HSR1D-IBG Input Module

The PT-HSR1D-IBG is an SD/HD/3G Input Module that is intended for use in conjunction
with the PT-HSR8C1D-IBG module to extend its eight inputs. A DensiShield connector
accepts up to eight electrical inputs. A BNC connector (Input 9) is also present but currently
DensiShield
IN 9 IN 1-8
Unused
unused.
Figure 3-41 Inputs on the PT-HSR1D-IBG module

Input Expansion
The following graphic depicts how the expansion and receiver modules are setup in 2
separate Platinum frames, using a DensiShield cable to route the inputs.
Input Expansion Module Receiver Module

DensiShield
Interconnect
DensiShield DensiShield
512 Video
Inputs OUT 1-8 INPUTS 1-8 IN 1-8
OUT 9 (UNUSED) IN 9 ( UNUSED) IN 9 ( UNUSED)
Crosspoint Module Crosspoint Module
Output Module Output Module

512 Video 512 Video
Outputs Outputs
Platinum Frame 1 Platinum Frame 2

Figure 3-42 Input Expansion
Installation

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to order additional

All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to order
additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
150 Chapter 3
Input Modules
HD-BNC Cable Insertion and Extraction Tool

The PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module currently has 8 HD-BNC connectors. HD-BNC
connectors are higher density connectors, much smaller than BNC connectors and can be
hard to reach into. The HD-BNC Cable Insertion and Extraction Tool (Part Number:
SELOPT-TOOL-CABLE) is a separate tool that aids in inserting or extracting cables into the
HD-BNC connectors.
Configuration
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Parameters
Parameters can be controlled using CCS Navigator.
Table 3-53 lists user-controllable parameters.These parameters are accessible via CCS
Table 3-53 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Parameters

MODULE PARAMETERS
Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the RW 0 (Default)
module uses as a reference. 1
2
3
Temperature Monitor 20x20 temperature Unit: RO -40 ~ +140 deg C
deg C
VERSION PARAMETERS
Software Version Displays the software version RO

FPGA Version Displays the FPGA version RO
DETECTION PARAMETERS
CRC/EDH Error Clear Clear CRC/EDH error counter RW Yes
No (Default)
CRC/EDH Error Count Shows CRC/EDH errors RO 0 - 65535
CRC Error Detection Sets CRC detection mode for HD RW Enable (Default)
signal Disable
SD EDH Detection Sets EDH detection mode for SD RW Enable (Default)
signal Disable
Video Standard Detects video standard RO Unknown
525I/29.97
625I/25
1035I/30
1035I/29.97
1080I/30
1080I/29.97
1080I/25
1080PSF/24
1080PSF/23.98
1080P/30
1080P/29.97
1080P/25
1080P/24
1080P/23.98
720P/60
720P/59.94
1080P/60
1080P/59.94
1080P/50
1080I/25 295M
720P/50
720P/25
720P/24
720P/23.98
Dual-Link 1080i/
25
Dual-Link 1080i/
29.97
Dual-Link 1080i/
30
EDH Presence EDH package present in input SD RO Yes
signal No
N/A
Input EDH Error EDH error present in input SD signal RO Yes
No
N/A
Video Error Detects video error in input signal RO Yes
No
N/A
152 Chapter 3
Input Modules

IN PARAMETERS
Signal Presence Reports presence or absence of valid RO Yes
signal. No
Off (Default)
EQ Power Save Mode
Signal Launch Level Normal
(800mVpp)
Small (400mVpp)
EQ Mute Set The cable length beyond which the RW 50 Meters
equalizer mutes 100 Meters
150 Meters
200 Meters
250 Meters
300 Meters
Never Mute
Cable Length Indicates input cable length RO 0-400 meters
RECLOCK PARAMETERS
Reclocker Mode Sets the reclock mode to automatic RW Auto (Default)
or bypass or to one of three manual 3G
fixed rates HD
SD
Bypass
Rate Detected Detects data rate RO Unknown
SD
HD
3G
Locked Reports if data is relocked by RO Yes
reclocking stage No
Mute Mutes the output of the board RW Yes
No (Default)

Max 1400mVpp
DS BM IN 1 EQ SERDES OUT 1A
OUT 1B
DensiShield
8 Channels
IN 2 EQ SERDES OUT 2A
OUT 2B
OUT 3A
HD-BNC Loop BM IN 3 EQ SERDES
OUT 3B
In 1
OUT 4A
In 2 IN 4 EQ SERDES OUT 4B
In 3 40x40
OUT 5A
In 5
OUT 6A
In 7
OUT 7A
DensiShield
OUT 8A
8 Channels
IN 8 EQ SERDES OUT 8B
IN 9 (UNUSED)
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
Figure 3-43 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Functional Block Diagram

154 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Specifications
Table 3-54 I/O Specifications
Item Specification
Input connector 75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169-8
75 Ohm HD-BNC
LC optical
DensiShield
Impedance 75 Ohms (BNC, HD-BNC)
50 Ohms differential (DensiShield)
Signal type SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3Mb/s to 3.0Gb/s
Maximum input level 880mV (BNC, HD-BNC)
1600mVp-p differential (DensiShield)
Optical depends on SFP used
Return loss (BNC, HD-BNC) > 15dB, up to 1.485GHz
> 10dB, 1.485GHz to 2.97GHz
Equalization (BNC, HD-BNC) Automatic
400m Belden 1694A for 270Mb/s data rate
200m Belden 1694A for 1.485Gb/s data rate
150m Belden 1694A for 2.97Gb/s data rate
LED Indicators
Table 3-55 LEDs

Each of the nine input channels provide signal presence
reporting through card-edge mounted LEDs.
Three system LEDs are also present.

POWER - Power supply indicator – +24V power rails are
operational (Green)
ACT CTRL - Active Control – initializes red, turns green

when the FPGA has configured and the control system is
communicating with the card. Flashes green if there is
an alarm condition on the card.
ACT IN - Active Input warning. Yellow indicates if an

input on the card being used by an output.
Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Input Module

MADI (Serial Multichannel Audio Digital Interface) is an industry-standard electronic
communications protocol that defines the data format and electrical characteristics of an
interface carrying multiple channels of digital audio. MADI supports multi-channel audio
transmission through copper (coaxial) cable or multi mode fiber cable.
MADI is widely used in the audio industry, especially in the professional sector. Its
advantages over other audio digital interface protocols and standards are support of a
greater number of channels per line.
Platinum now offers MADI support enabling seamless integration of Audio Consoles and
other third party Audio equipment with MADI I/O into the Imagine Communications Audio/
Video routing framework. MADI support is offered through the following standard full
length Platinum boards:
 A four channel MADI input board with electrical or optical back module.
See PT-MADI4X-IBG MADI Input Module on page 157.
 A four channel MADI output board with electrical or optical back module
See PT-MADI4X-OBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI)
Output Module on page 299.
MADI Input AES Audio Embedded Audio Analog Audio

Upto 64 channels each
PT-AECT Input PT-FSDMX Input PT-ADCT Input

PT-MADI4X-IBG Input Module
Up to 128 mono channels mapped to TDM

(unused channels muted)
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels
PT-AECT Output PT-MUX Output PT-DACT Output

PT-MADI4X-OBG Output Module
MADI Output AES Output SDI Output Analog Output
Platinum Frame
Figure 3-44 MADI Input and Output Modules (and other audio routing options) in a Platinum Frame
Note: This diagram represents Platinum MADI as well as other audio routing options in the
Platinum frame. For details, refer to the relevant modules in the Input Modules and Output
Modules chapters of this manual.
156 Chapter 3
Input Modules
PT-MADI4X-IBG MADI Input Module

The PT-MADI4C-IBG / PT-MADI4O-IBG input module is an AES10-2008 compliant audio
input board that supports three MADI formats: 32 channel (96kHz sample rate) and 56 or
64 channels (48 kHz sample rate).
The PT-MADI4X-IBG is user configurable between one and four inputs, each up to 64 Audio
mono channels (32 AES stereo pairs) of PCM Audio. The four MADI input streams can
comprise up to 256 mono channels, but a maximum of 128 mono channels can be
mapped to the TDM stream. All inputs are converted to a common 48kHz sample rate
prior to merging 128 mono channels into a single TDM stream.
Figure 3-45 PT-MADI4C-IBG Input Module (with electrical back module attached)
Figure 3-46 PT-MADI4O-IBG Input Module

Electrical Back Module

The electrical back module is an active back module attached to the front module with two
brackets and with Cable Equalizers. The back module has four BNC connectors and stays
attached to the front module when pulling the module from the frame. The back module is
fully MADI compliant in terms of its electrical characteristics.
Figure 3-47 PT-MADI4C-IBG electrical back module
Optical Back Module

The optical back module hosts the cages for up to four Dual-Rx Small Form-factor Pluggable
(SFP) Fiber Optic Receivers. In connection with the PT-MADI-IBG front module, only two of
the four ‘cages’ will be used. The back module has to be mounted onto the Platinum frame
and the Front Module detaches from the Back Module when the Front Module is pulled out
from the frame. One Dual-Rx SFP module is pre-installed. The SFP module complies with the
AES10-2008 requirements for optical interfaces. See PT-MADI4O-IBG Specifications for
details.
Figure 3-48 PT-MADI4O-IBG optical back module

158 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Controlling the MADI Input Module through Navigator

You can access and control PT-MADI4X-IBG parameters through Navigator. Follow these
steps to discover your module:
Discovery
1 Start Navigator. Ensure you are in Build Mode (File > Operational Mode > Build).
2 Click Tools > Discovery and then click the Options button.
3 Click the Add button and provide the IP address to the (Platinum) frame that contains your
PT-MADI-IBG module. Ensure you place a check beside the appropriate checkbox in the
Select Products for Discovery section.
4 Click OK and then OK again. Click the Start button to start the Discovery.
5 Once Discovery is complete, click the Save button.
Using Navigator Control Mode

1 Switch to Control Mode (File > Operational Mode > Control).
Note: If you do not want to use Navigator Control mode (available in the 30 day trial
version and the paid version of Navigator), you can also control your MADI module through
the Build mode (see Using Navigator Build Mode).
2 In the Navigation pane, expand the contents of the Discovery Folder and drill down to your
PT-MADI4X-IBG module under Input Cards in the Platinum frame.
3 Double click the PT-MADI4X-IBG Module to open up the Parameters.
For more details on the parameters, see PT-MADI4X-IBG Parameters on page 166.
Using Navigator Build Mode

Once you discover your PT-MADI module and save the results of your discovery (see Steps
1-5 in Controlling the MADI Input Module through Navigator), follow these steps:
1 in the Navigation pane, expand the Routing Group <Your Platinum Frame IP> icon, then
expand the Routers folder, and double click the Platinum Frame icon.
2 This opens up the Edit Platinum Frame dialog. Go to the Detected Matrices tab.
3 A list of Input and Output modules are displayed on the right of the dialog.Right click the
MADI option under the Input column, and select the View Input Module option.
4 The Module Parameters dialog displays a list of all Input parameters.
Figure 3-49 Module Parameters for PT-MADI4C-IBG
Read only parameters show their status in Gray, for example, the MADI Present
parameters (Inputs 1-4). All other parameters can be set by double clicking and selecting
options from the popup that is displayed. For example, if you double click the Sync Select
parameter, a popup dialog enables you to select from Sync 1, 2, or 3.
160 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Figure 3-50 Sync Select Parameter
MADI Presence
MADI Presence on each of the four input streams is automatically detected and reported in
the MADI Present section of the MADI Input category (Navigator parameter interface).
If MADI is present, the following information is reported:
 The number of channels per input stream (32, 56, or 64) along with the sample rate for
each stream.
 Each MADI input is divided into chunks of 16 channels (1-16, 17-32, 33-48, and 49-64)
and these are reported as active or not.
TDM Mapping
Through the PT-MADI4X-IBG parameter interface (Navigator), channels in MADI inputs can
be manually mapped to the TDM stream and you can select if one or all of the MADI inputs
contribute to the stream. A maximum of 128 mono channels can be mapped to the TDM
stream.
The Mapping parameter category provides a MADI to TDM map section in which you can
select the channels in each stream to map to the TDM. For each of the 4 inputs, you can
choose whether or not its channels contribute to the TDM stream. Unused channels in the
TDM stream are muted. Mapping from MADI inputs to the TDM stream has a granularity of
32 channels, aligned at 32-channel boundaries. 56 channel formats are treated as 64
channel formats, with the unused uppermost channels always muted.
The following table shows how signals are processed, based on the actual input present
and the MADI to TDM map settings.
If the selected MADI input is not present, associated channels on the TDM bus are muted
and marked as inactive.
Table 3-56 Combinations of MADI to TDM map selections and signal status
Input Status MADI to TDM map Result
No input present 32 channels  32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
 All TDM channels are muted and inactive
No input present 56 or 64 channels  64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
 All TDM channels are muted and inactive
32 channel input 32 channels  32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
 All channels within input signal are passed
32 channel input 56 or 64 channels  64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
 Channels within input signal are passed
 The uppermost 32 TDM channels are muted and inactive
 Channels 1 through 32 of input signal are passed
56 channel input 56 or 64 channels  64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
 All channels of input signal are passed
 Uppermost 8 TDM channels are muted and inactive
 Uppermost 8 TDM channels are muted and inactive
 All channels with input signal are passed
Sample MADI to TDM Mapping Scenarios

The following are mapping use cases with different MADI configurations such 32 channel,
56 channel or 64 channel.
 Four 32 channel MADI Inputs, all channels mapped

 Four 64 channel MADI Inputs, #1 and #3 mapped
 Combination (32/56 channel) MADI Inputs, #3 and #4 mapped
162 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Four 32 channel MADI Inputs, all channels mapped

This example depicts 4 MADI inputs with 32 channel inputs each. Since a total of 128
channels mappings are allowed, all four inputs can be mapped to the TDM.
Audio Input
MADI #1 MADI # 2 MADI # 3 MADI # 4

Platinum Frame
(32 channels) ( 32 channels) ( 32 channels) ( 32 channels)

PT-MADI4X-IBG
PT-MADI4O-IBG
Input Module
Channel mapping Channel mapping Channel mapping Channel mapping

1 32 33 64 65 96 97 128
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels
Navigator CONTROL Mode Navigator BUILD Mode

 In the navigation pane, go to your Platinum frame >  Double click the Platinum frame icon in the
Input Cards and double click <Slot#>PT-MADI4X-IBG navigation pane.
 Go to the MADI to TDM map section under the  In the Edit Platinum frame dialog, go to the
Mapping Category Detected Matrices tab. Right click MADI
 Select 32 in each of the four MADI to TDM maps under Input and select View Input Module
 In the MADI to TDM map section, set Inputs
1-4 to 32
Four 64 channel MADI Inputs, #1 and #3 mapped

In this example, all MADI inputs are 64 channel. Since a total of 128 channels mappings are
allowed, a maximum of two inputs can be mapped to the TDM. Inputs from MADI #1 and
#3 have been selected for mapping.
Audio Input
MADI #1 MADI # 3
Platinum Frame
(64 channels) ( 64 channels)

PT-MADI4X-IBG
PT-MADI4O-IBG
Input Module
Channel mapping Channel mapping

1 64 65 128
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels

 Double click the Platinum frame icon in the
 In the navigation pane, go to your Platinum frame > navigation pane.
Input Cards and double click <Slot#>PT-MADI4X-IBG
 In the Edit Platinum frame dialog, go to the
 Go to the MADI to TDM map section under the Detected Matrices tab. Right click MADI
Mapping Category under Input and select View Input Module
 Select 64 against MADI to TDM map 1 and 3  In the MADI to TDM map section, set Inputs
1 and 3 to 64
164 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Combination (32/56 channel) MADI Inputs, #3 and #4 mapped

This example depicts different channel configurations in the incoming MADI. MADI inputs
#1-3 are 32 channel. MADI input #4 is 56 channel. MADI Inputs #3 and #4 have been
mapped to the TDM. All other channels are muted.
Other possible mapping scenarios in this situation include:

(1) mapping channels #1-3 (96 channels)
(2) mapping channel #4 (56 channels considered as 64 channels) plus two of three 32
channel inputs (64 channels).
Audio Input
MADI #3 MADI # 4
MUTED
Platinum Frame
(32 channels) ( 56 channels) UNUSED (MUTED)
PT-MADI4X-IBG
PT-MADI4O-IBG
Input Module
Channel mapping Channel mapping

1 32 33 88 89 96 97 128
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels

 In the navigation pane, go to your Platinum frame >  Double click the Platinum frame icon in the
Input Cards and double click <Slot#>PT-MADI4X-IBG navigation pane.
 Go to the MADI to TDM map section under the  In the Edit Platinum frame dialog, go to the
Mapping Category Detected Matrices tab. Right click MADI
under Input and select View Input Module
 Select 32 against MADI to TDM map 3 and 56 against
MADI to TDM map 4  In the MADI to TDM map section, set Input 3
to 32 and Input 4 to 56.
PT-MADI4C-IBG Specifications
Table 3-57 Electrical Input Specifications

Item Specification
Number of Inputs 4
Connector BNC (IEC169-8)
Impedance 75
Input Level 150mV to 600mV
Link rate 125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI)
Return Loss NA
Equalization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft (300m),
typical, of Belden 8281 coaxial cable
PT-MADI4O-IBG Specifications
Table 3-58 Optical Input Specifications

Item Specification
Number of Inputs 4
Fiber Type Multi-mode
Package 2x Dual Channel Receiver SFP modules
Connector LC with PC/UPC polish
Wavelength Wideband, 1250nm-1380nm
Receiver Sensitivity -30dBm (PIN Receiver)
Qualified devices Optoway SPM-3102W-2RG
Power Consumption
Around 15W (includes front module and back module) for PT-MADI4C-IBG
Around 18W (includes Front Module and 2 Dual Rx SFPs) for PT-MADI4O-IBG
PT-MADI4X-IBG Parameters
Note: You can access MADI parameters through Navigator. Start Navigator and ensure you
are in Build mode. Enter the IP Address of the Platinum frame that contains your PT-MADI
module. Start the Discovery and save the Discovery results. You can control the parameters
either through Build Mode (Using Navigator Build Mode on page 159) or Control mode
(See Using Navigator Control Mode on page 159).
SFP Parameters are applicable to the Optical module only.

166 Chapter 3
Input Modules
The following parameters apply to the PT-MADI4C-IBG:
Table 3-59 Control Parameters for PT-MADI4C-IBG

Functional Block Parameter Name R/W Description Options
General Serial Number R Displays the module's unique <String>
identifier
Temperature R FPGA (V6) temperature <String> in
degrees celsius
Software Version R Embedded software version <String>
Control FPGA Version R Control FPGA design version <String>
Processing FPGA Version R Processing FPGA design <String>
version
Input Type R Input signal media type BNC
Optical
TDM Locking Sync Select R/W Sync Source Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
GenLock Present R Indicates the GenLock signal No
present Yes
GenLock Locked R Genlock is locked No
Yes
GenLock Standard R GenLock Standard Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
MADI Input
MADI Present MADI Present (1-4) R Reports the presence of the No
reference signal Yes
Number of Number of Channels (1-4) Reports the number of 0
Channels channels in the MADI Input 32
56
64
Sample Rate Sample Rate (1-4) R Sample Rate in kHz
Table 3-59 Control Parameters for PT-MADI4C-IBG

Functional Block Parameter Name R/W Description Options
MADI (1-4) Active MADI<1-4> 01-16 R Bit map for each active <String>
Channel channel
MADI<1-4> 17-32 R Bit map for each active <String>
channel
channel
channel
Mapping
MADI to TDM map MADI to TDM map (1-4) Indicates how to map MADI None
signal to TDM 32
56
64
SFP
Input Optical Input Optical Power R Reports Input Optical Power  Too Low
Power <1-4>  Too High
 Unknown
 -31 dBm to 1
dBm
SFP Type SFP Type <1-2> R Reports type of SFP  OP+SFP+MADI+2
plugged in RX
 Unknown
 No SFP
168 Chapter 3
Input Modules
PT-HSR2D-IBG Distributed Input Matrix Expansion Module
Figure 3-51 PT-HSR2D-IBG Front Module
Operation
The PT-HSR2D-IBG is a matrix expansion module for the Platinum frame.
It uses the same front module as PT-HSR8C1D-IBG (see PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module)
and a back module that expands on the existing capability of PT-HSR8C1D-IBG by enabling
the use of more than 2 frames with distributed inputs to all frames.
The Platinum router is now expandable to 1536 outputs in three frames.

The PT-HSR2D-IBG is an SD/HD/3G input module intended for use in conjunction with the
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG module to extend its eight inputs. A DensiShield connector accepts up to
eight electrical inputs. BNC connectors (Input 9 and Output 9) are also present but currently
unused.
IN 9 IN 1-8 OUT 9 OUT 1-8
Unused Unused
Figure 3-52 PT-HSR2D-IBG back module


The PT-HSR1D-IBG is a SD/HD/3G Input Module that is intended for use in conjunction with
the PT-HSR8C1D-IBG module to extend its eight inputs. A DensiShield connector accepts up
to eight electrical inputs. A BNC connector (Input 9) is also present but currently unused.
DensiShield
IN 9 IN 1-8
Unused
Figure 3-53 PT-HSR1D-IBG back module
Specifications
Input Specifications
Table 3-60 PT-HSR2D-IBG Input Specifications
Item Specification
Number of Inputs 8 channels in DensiShield
Input Connector One DensiShield connector
Impedance 100 Ohms differential (DensiShield)
Signal Type SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Maximum Input Level 1600mVp-p differential (DensiShield)
Equalization (DensiShield) Up to 6 meters of 30AWG DensiShield cable
Output Specifications
Table 3-61 PT-HSR2D-IBG Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of Outputs 8 channels in DensiShield
Output Connector One DensiShield connector
Impedance 100 Ohms differential (DensiShield)
Signal Type SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Amplitude 1080mV+/- 10% (DensiShield)
Jitter <0.2UI reclocked 270Mb/s, 1.485Gb/s
<0.3UI reclocked 2.97Gb/s

170 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Installation
You can get a total of 1536 outputs across 3 Platinum frames by doing the following:
 Platinum Frame 1
Install PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module in Frame 1
 Outputs routed to Frame 2 via the DensiShield
Install PT-HSR2D-IBG Input Module in Frame 2
 Outputs routed to Frame 3 via the DensiShield
Install PT-HSR1D-IBG Input Module in Frame 3
In 1-512
Densi Densi Densi Densi

Shield Shield Shield Shield
OUT 9 OUT 1-8 IN 1-9 IN 9 IN 1-8 OUT 9 OUT 1-8 IN 9 IN 1-8
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG PT-HSR2D-IBG PT-HSR1D-IBG
PT-OB PT-OB PT-OB
Platinum Frame 1 Platinum Frame 2 Platinum Frame 3
Out 1-512 Out 513-1024 Out 1025-1536
Figure 3-54 PT-HSR2D-IBG Installation
PT-HSR2D-IBG Parameters
The PT-HSR2D-IBG uses the PT-HSR8C1D-IBG front module. See PT-HSR8C1D-IBG
Parameters.
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Fiber Optical Matrix Expansion Input Module
Figure 3-55 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Front Module
Operation
The PT-HSR8O1D-IBG is a fiber optical input expansion module. It is similar to the
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module, except that it utilizes an optical back module.
The PT-HSR8O1D-IBG module accepts optical video signals , re-clocks data streams, detects
standards and formats, and distributes the signals to the MI backplane to be switched by
the crosspoint matrix and to a high density connector for distribution to a second frame.
A DensiShield input port on the PT-HSR1D-IBG module accepts signals from compatible
equipment, providing flexibility and feature support for other applications. This card allows
all inputs from a primary frame to be easily wired to a second frame extending the routing
system to more than 512 outputs.
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Input Module

The PT-HSR8C1D-IBG has four SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back
module, each containing two channels. The receivers accept fiber optical signals within
wavelength range of 1260 nm ~ 1610 nm. The SFP module can be replaced or changed
from the back of the frame without removing the front module or disturbing traffic other
than that on the SFP.
The eight inputs can be routed to a second Platinum frame through the DensiShield Out
connector. Looping the output of all inputs extends the routing system to more than 512
outputs. Input 9 and Output 9 are also available but currently unused.
172 Chapter 3
Input Modules
DensiShield
UNUSED OUT 1-8 IN 1/2 IN 3/4 IN 5/6 IN 7/8 UNUSED
Figure 3-56 Inputs on the PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Back Module
Unused
Unused
Figure 3-57 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Back Module
Installation

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to order additional

All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to order
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Parameters
The parameters can be controlled using CCS Navigator.
Table 3-62 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG Parameters

Number of Inputs Lists the number of inputs RO 1-8
Number of Outputs Lists the number of outputs RO 0
MODULE PARAMETERS
Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the RW 0 (Default)
module uses as a reference. 1
2
3
Temperature Monitor 20x20 temperature Unit: RO -40 ~ +140 deg C
deg C
OPTICAL PARAMETERS
Input Optical Power Reports input optical signal RO -20dBm ~ 0dBm
(1-8) power level ---
N/A
SFP Type (1-4) Shows the type of optical RO OP+ SFP+ RR
receiver installed No SFP
Invalid SFP
DETECTION PARAMETERS
CRC/EDH Error Clear Clear CRC/EDH error counter RW Yes
(1-8) No (Default)
CRC/EDH Error Fields RO 0 - 65535
(1-8)
CRC/EDH Counter Sets CRC detection mode and EDH RW Enable (Default)
Control (1-8) detection mode Disable
174 Chapter 3
Input Modules

Video Standard Detects video standard RO Unknown
525I/29.97
625I/25
1035I/30
1035I/29.97
1080I/30
1080I/29.97
1080I/25
1080PSF/24
1080PSF/23.98
1080P/30
1080P/29.97
1080P/25
1080P/24
1080P/23.98
720P/60
720P/59.94
1080I/25 295M
720P/50
720P/25
720P/24
720P/23.98
EDH Presence (1-8) EDH package present in input signal RO Yes
No
N/A
Input EDH Error (1-8) EDH error present in input signal RO Yes
No
N/A
Video Error (1-8) Detects video error in input signal RO Yes
No
N/A
VERSION PARAMETERS
Software Version Displays the software version RO
FPGA Version Displays the FPGA version RO
IN PARAMETERS
Signal Presence (1-8) Reports presence or absence of valid RO Yes
signal. No
RECLOCK PARAMETERS
Reclocker Mode (1-8) Sets the reclock mode to automatic RW Auto (Default)
or bypass or to one of three manual SD
fixed rates HD
Bypass

Rate Detected (1-8) Detects data rate RO Unknown
SD
HD
Locked (1-8) Reports if data is relocked by RO Yes
reclocking stage No
Mute (1-8) Mutes the output of the board RW Yes
No (Default)
Max 1400mVpp
DS BM IN 1 EQ SERDES OUT1A
OUT1B
DensiShield
8 Channels
IN 2 EQ SERDES OUT2A
OUT2B
OUT3A
IN 3 EQ SERDES
Fiber Optical BM OUT3B
In 1
OUT4A
In 2 IN 4 EQ SERDES OUT4B
40x40
In 3
OUT5A
In 5
OUT6A
In 7
OUT7A
DensiShield
OUT8A
8 Channels
IN 8 EQ SERDES OUT8B
IN 9 (UNUSED)
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
Figure 3-58 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 3-63 I/O Specifications

Item Specification
Input connector LC optical
Number of inputs 8
For optical input performance specifications (Wavelength Range, Overload Input Power, Input
Sensitivity, Maximum Back Reflection, etc.) refer individual SFP module specification datasheets.
176 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Note: Datasheets of customer-replaceable optical SFP parts are available by request. Please
contact your Customer Service representative for more information.
SFP Specifications
OP+SFP+RR Specifications
Table 3-64 OP+SFP+RR specs
connectors
Input wavelength 1260 nm - 1620 nm
Optical power monitor -2 dB - 2 dB
accuracy
Sensitivity at 270 Mb/s - -22 -20 Pathological*
(SMPTE 259M)
Sensitivity at 1.5 Gb/s - -22 -20 Pathological
(SMPTE 292M)
Overload 0 dBm 2.97 Gb/s*
*BER = 1E-12 against SDI matrix. Check field signals for video applications.
LED Indicators
Table 3-65 LEDs

Each of the nine input channels provide signal presence
reporting through card-edge mounted LEDs.
Three system LEDs are also present.

POWER - Power supply indicator – +24V power rails are
operational (Green)
ACT CTRL - Active Control – initializes red, turns green

when the FPGA has configured and the control system is
communicating with the card. Flashes green if there is
an alarm condition on the card.
ACT IN - Active Input warning. Yellow indicates if an

input on the card being used by an output.
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules

(PT-FSDMX-IBG, PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG)
The 8 Channel Platinum Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Board adds Video and Audio
processing to input boards in the Platinum Frame. Each SDI path is processed independently,
and supports SD, 1.5Gb/s HD, 3Gb/s HD and Dual Link formats.
Note: The PT-FSDMX-IBG boards can consume substantial power, depending on operating
conditions. Refer the Power Consumption section for details on power consumption per
module. Ensure that the Platinum frame system has a sufficient number of power supplies
to meet the demand resulting from the actual number of boards installed.
Figure 3-59 PT-FSDMX-IBG Front Module
 See Video Processing Features and Audio Processing Features for info on features
 See PT-FSDMX-IBG Licensing for license options
 See Back Module Variants for the various back module options.
 Controllable Parameters (PT-FSDMX-IBG and its variants) apply to all variants.
The PT-FSDMX-IBG input board runs in Demux-only mode (PT-FSDMX-IBG without Frame
Sync Option) and Framesync mode (PT-FSDMX-IBG with Frame Sync Option).
Note: Gennum is the supported SFP for all Platinum Framesync Optical Input modules.
Firmware version v3.2 and higher supports all PT-FSDMX-IBG versions. Due to XML file
changes, when compared to older firmware versions, it is strongly recommended to
upgrade all PT-FSDMX-IBG boards (and variants) in the same frame simultaneously.
178 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Back Module Variants

The Platinum PT-FSDMX-IBG SD/HD/3G Framesync Demux Front Module can be used with
the following back module variants:
Table 3-66 Frame Sync and Demux Input Module Variants

Module Type Module Name and Description Connectors
Electrical Back PT-FSDMX-IBG 8 BNC connectors
Module See Electrical/BNC Back Module (PT-FSDMX-IBG)
Optical Back PT-FSDMXO-IBG 8 Fiber Receivers (4 dual Rx SFPs)
Module See Optical/SFP Back Module (PT-FSDMXO-IBG)
Electrical Back PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG 8 HD-BNC connectors
Module with See Electrical Back Module (HD-BNC) with DensiShield and 1 DensiShield connector
DensiShield (PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG)
Optical Back PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG 8 Fiber Receivers and 1
Module with See Optical Back Module (SFP) with DensiShield DensiShield connector
DensiShield (PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG)
Note: For modules with DensiShield, avoid downward pressure on DensiShield cables when
installing, to prevent damage or connectivity issues.
Electrical/BNC Back Module (PT-FSDMX-IBG)

The PT-FSDMX-IBG Input module provides 8 input SDI options via BNC connectors.
Figure 3-60 PT-FSDMX-IBG electrical back module
Figure 3-61 PT-FSDMX-IBG electrical back module

Optical/SFP Back Module (PT-FSDMXO-IBG)

The PT-FSDMXO-IBG back module provides optical inputs through SFP (Small Formfactor
Pluggable) fiber optical receiver modules. Ensure that the Platinum frame system has a
sufficient number of power supplies to meet the demand resulting from the actual number
of boards installed.
IN 1/2 IN 3/4 IN 5/6 IN 7/8
Figure 3-62 PT-FSDMXO-IBG Optical Back Module
Figure 3-63 PT-FSDMXO-IBG Optical Back Module
Note: Back Module shown without SFP modules inserted.
Electrical Back Module (HD-BNC) with DensiShield (PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG)

The PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Input module is based on the PT-FSDMX-IBG module and it provides
8 input SDI options via HD-BNC connectors. In addition, these 8 input SDI signals are
re-clocked and output via a DensiShield connector. This input module enables video matrix
expansion (See Distributing Outputs to 2 Frames using PT-FSDX8C1D/PT-FSDX8O1D).
A high density interconnect cable routes the eight incoming signals to a second frame.
DensiShield
OUT 1-8 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8
Figure 3-64 PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Back Module

180 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Figure 3-65 PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Back Module
WARNING
Ensure you mate the front and back modules before plugging in the DensiShield
cable. This protects your back module from unintended alignment issues
Optical Back Module (SFP) with DensiShield (PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG)

The PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG Input module is based on the PT-FSDMX-IBG module and it
provides 8 input SDI options via SFP connectors. In addition, these 8 input SDI signals are
re-clocked and output via a DensiShield connector. This input module enables video matrix
expansion (See Distributing Outputs to 2 Frames using PT-FSDX8C1D/PT-FSDX8O1D).
A high density interconnect cable routes the eight incoming signals to a second frame.
DensiShield
OUT 1-8 IN 1/2 IN 3/4 IN 5/6 IN 7/8
Figure 3-66 PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG Back Module
Figure 3-67 PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG Back Module
Note: Back Module shown without SFP modules inserted.

Distributing Outputs to 2 Frames using PT-FSDX8C1D/

PT-FSDX8O1D
The following graphic depicts how the PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG/PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG and the
PT-HSR1D-IBG can be used together to distribute the 8 possible SDI inputs to 2 Platinum
frames, expanding the available outputs.
Using a DensiShield cable to connect the DensiShield output of Frame 1 to the DensiShield
input of Frame 2, the eight inputs from Frame 1 can be directly routed (through the
DensiShield out of Frame 1) to the inputs in Frame 2.
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG/PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG Input Module PT-HSR1D-IBG Input Module

DensiShield
Interconnect
512 Video
Inputs OUT 1-8 INPUTS 1-8 IN 9 IN 1-8
Unused
Crosspoint Module Crosspoint Module
Output Module Output Module

512 Video 512 Video
Outputs Outputs
Platinum Frame 1 Platinum Frame 2
Figure 3-68 Using the PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG/PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG to distribute the outputs of one
frame to the inputs of a second frame (28 RU frame in this example).
182 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Technical Specifications for PT-FSDMX/O-IBG and PT-FSDX8C/O1D-IBG

Table 3-67 Technical specifications for PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG/PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG/PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG
PT-FSDMX-IBG PT-FSDMXO-IBG PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG
Number of inputs 8 8 8 8
Package NA 4x Dual Channel NA 4x Dual Channel
Receiver SFP Modules Receiver SFP Modules
Approved SPF module: Approved SPF module:

Dual RX Gennum Dual RX Gennum
GO2927 GO2927
Connector BNC (IEC169-8) LC with PC/UPC polish HD-BNC/DensiShield LC with PC/UPC polish
Impedance 75  NA 75 HD-BNC 100 DensiShield
100 DensiShield
Wavelengths NA 1260nm – 1620nm NA 1260nm – 1620nm
Receiver sensitivity NA -23dBm (PIN Receiver) NA -23dBm (PIN Receiver)
Bit Error Rate NA Complies with SMPTE NA Complies with SMPTE
297-2006 297-2006
Number of outputs NA 1 DensiShield 1 DensiShield
Connector Connector
Power Up to 50 watts Up to 50 watts Up to 52 watts Up to 52 watts
Consumption (max (max consumption, (max consumption, (max consumption,
consumption, depending on depending on depending on
depending on operating conditions) operating conditions) operating conditions)
operating
conditions)
The frame must provide sufficient power in case of densely populated frames.
SD SDI / ASI SMPTE 259M, ASI
(270Mb/s)
Format 525i59.94, 625i50, ASI
Return loss > 18 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
Equalization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft (300m), typical, of Belden 8281 coaxial cable
See Equalization Information for PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s) SMPTE 292M
Format and image SMPTE274M (1080i, 1080sF, 1080p)
sample structure SMPTE296M (720p)
Return loss > 18 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
Equalization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 590 ft (180 m), typical, of Belden 1694A co-axial
cable
HD-SDI (3Gb/s) SMPTE 424M
Format and image SMPTE 425M Level A
sample structure SMPTE 372M
Return loss > 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
> 10 dB (typical) from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz
Equalization Adaptive cable equalization, up to 328 ft (100 m), typical, of Belden 1694A co-axial cable
Equalization Information for PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG

The cable length is 300 meters, Belden 8281, but the following applies in addition:
Note: The PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG uses an extended 3G-reach equalization. When combined

with Belden 8281 coaxial cable, a pathological pattern, and a non-SPMTE424
(6.1.7)-compliant signal with excessive output amplitude excursions, the source
equalization may be reduced to between 200 and 300 m for SD-SDI signal.
This condition typically only occurs with older SD-SDI equipment having a 1uF capacitor on
the output. All recent and multi-rate SD/HD/3G equipment is compliant with the standard
(has at least a 4.7uF capacitor on the output), and can achieve 300 m with 8281 cable and
pathological pattern.
Video Processing Features

 SD-SDI (270Mb/s) standards - 525, 625
 HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s) standards - 720p50, 720p59, 720p60, 1080i50, 1080i59.94,
1080i60, 1080psF24, 1080psF23
 HD-SDI (3Gb/s) standards – 1080p50, 1080p59.94, 1080p60, SMPTE 372M Dual Link
 Framesync mode or Delay mode (when equipped with Framesync option)
 Freeze modes: Frame, Field1, Field2
 High noise immunity (TRS error resilience) and glitch-less processing (fast switching
without freeze) of input feeds, that were asynchronously switched on the
recommended switching point (as defined in SMPTE RP168)
 User selectable Loss-of-Video modes: Black, Freeze, Pass
 Video Frame Synchronizer with H,V Phase control and fixed frame delay on top of
variable delay
 Video Frame Delay: up to 16 Frames (all standards)
 Video ProcAmp: Gain, Offset, Hue, Black/White Clip
 SMPTE 352M Video Payload: Detection, Insertion (HD and 3G only)
 EDH (SD) and CRC (HD): Detection, Insertion
 Automatic ASI detection and bypass
 Bypass mode (no Video/Audio processing)
Video Processing Notes

 VANC/HANC Data other than embedded Audio is not processed. Closed
Captioning data, Teletext data or SMPTE 12M Timecode (LTC, VITC), for instance,
will be dropped or repeated together with the active video content, every time the
Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame.
 VANC/HANC data for Delay mode channels (including embedded Audio), all is
passed through the delay memory unprocessed. Ancillary data remains untouched.
The absolute delay from In to Out can be changed arbitrarily within the predefined
limits.
 SMPTE 372M Dual-Link formats supported, with 16 (mono) channels of Audio
processed. Processed Video/Audio data exits the board as a single 3Gb/s stream.
 Non-PCM Audio data (Dolby-E or Dolby-D) is not processed by the Audio
Synchronizer / Audio Delay / Audio ProcAmp processing blocks. It is passed
alongside the active video content through the Video Frame Synchronizer memory
184 Chapter 3
Input Modules
and a frame's worth of non-PCM data is dropped or repeated - together with the
active video content every time the Video Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a
frame.
Audio Processing Features

The following audio functionality is supported per SDI channel
 De-embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio prior to the Frame/Audio

Synchronizer
 Embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio after the Frame/Audio Synchronizer.
 Sample Rate Conversion (with bypass capability on a per stereo-pair basis)
 Audio Synchronizer
 Audio Delay (up to 3000ms / mono channel)
 Audio Proc (Gain, Mute, Invert)
 Audio Sum (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a pre-defined list of Sums)
 Audio Swap (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a pre-defined list of Swaps)
 Audio Test Tone Generator (Off, 400Hz, 2kHz, 4kHz)
 Quiet Audio Transitions when two sources of same data- and frame-rate are
switched upstream
Audio Processing Notes and Restrictions

 De-embedding: For De-embedding, audio must be embedded synchronously at a
sample rate of 48kHz.
 Embedded Dolby-E frames must be properly aligned with the Video frame in
order to be transferred from the Frame Synchronizer’s input clock domain into the
output clock domain. Proper alignment (position of guard-band) is important since
Dolby-E frames can be dropped or repeated alongside the active video content.
 Embedded Audio: All embedded Audio is embedded synchronously at a sample
rate of 48kHz
 TDMed Audio data (all 128 mono channels) will have a sample rate of 48kHz and
will be in the same Audio clock domain, locked to the applied Video Reference
 SMPTE 372M (Dual link): Only the 16 audio channels de-embedded from Link A
will be processed, re-embedded into the Link A of the outgoing SDI stream and
sent via TDM to the ATDM Crosspoint for further routing.
 Also see Word Length, ADS Clean, and Group Active Channels
The de-embedded, sample rate converted and processed audio data of all 8 SDI channels is
provided to the audio crosspoint for distribution.

3 Sum
4 Swap/Copy
5 Mute (if enabled)
Note: If an Audio channel conveys non-PCM data, such as Dolby-E/D, and a test tone for
such channel gets enabled, the non-PCM data will be replaced with PCM data (the 'tone').
'Mute' also works on non-PCM data, but all other Audio processing operations (Polarity
Reversal, Level Adjust, Sum, Swap/Copy) will have no effect on non-PCM data.
Sample Rate Conversion

 Non-PCM Audio data (such as Dolby-E/D) cannot be sample rate converted, and is
transferred from the input clock domain to the output clock domain by dropping or
repeating a full frame of non-PCM data, every time the Video Frame Synchronizer
reaches its roll-over point.
 The downstream clock for the SRCs will be locked to the applied Video reference.
 The clock transfer of non-PCM data by dropping or repeating a frame worth of data
works if (1) Framesync option is installed (2) The SDI channel(s) with embedded
non-PCM data qualify for Framesync mode (frame-rate of the ingested signal(s) match
the frame-rate of the Reference signal) (3) ADS Clean is set to ‘No’.
Quiet Audio Transitions

 Quiet audio transitions are “popless” transitions when two sources of the same data
and frame rate are switched upstream in the serial domain (e.g. by an upstream router).
 These transitions work independent of whether the two sources are synchronous or
asynchronous to each other or with respect to the reference signal, and it works
regardless of the switching point.
 There are no user controllable parameters for adjusting the timing of the transition.
 The transition is triggered when the video_present flag gets temporarily de-asserted
because of a discontinuity in the incoming SDI stream, caused by the asynchronous
switch in the serial domain. When this happens, the Audio De-embedder has still 32
good audio samples in its output buffer, amounting to roughly 666us worth of audio
data at a 48kHz sample rate. Those samples are being used for a fast, yet clean
fade-out of the audio data, originating from the old source. The following diagram
illustrates the timing of a transition from source A to B (PCM Audio):
186 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Switch
Video from Source A Video from Source B
Video Source A can be frozen for one frame .

This depends on whether the switch happens
during the vertical blanking interval (no freeze )
or in the active area (freeze).
Audio from Source A Audio from Source B

Aud
r ce B
io f rom
om Sou
io fr
Aud
So urc
e
A
mute (200ms) fade-in (400ms)
fast fade -out (≈ 666 µs)

Figure 3-69 Quiet Transitions
The following conditions must be met:
 The two video sources, that get switched upstream, must be of the same data- and
frame-rate. They can be asynchronous with respect to each other and with respect to
the reference signal, that is applied to the board.
 The channel that is supposed to produce a clean and quiet output must be operated in
Frame Sync mode (Frame Sync license is required).
 ADS Clean must be turned on.
PT-FSDMX-IBG Licensing
PT-FSDMX-IBG without Frame Sync Option

Without Framesync, the module behaves like an advanced version of the PT-DEMUX, with
the following differences over the basic PT-DEMUX:
 SDI data going into the PT-FSDMX-IBG no longer has to be of a common data-rate in
order to be processed (de-embedding audio data from the SDI streams and sending
processed Audio data via TDM to the Audio crosspoint). A mix of SD, HD, and 3G
operation between channels of matching frame rate is supported.
 De-embedded PCM Audio of all SDI channels, regardless of their frame and data rate is
sample-rate-converted into a common downstream Audio clock domain (locked to
Video Reference) and can be processed (Gain, Mute, Invert, Sum, Swap) before the
Audio channels get combined into a single 128 channel TDM stream.
 Processed Audio can be re-embedded into the outgoing SDI stream if the incoming SDI
stream is locked to the Video Reference. Re-embedding of the processed Audio data is
controlled via the Group Embedding Mode parameter. See Group Embedding Mode
(8 x 4) †
 SDI channels conveying Dolby E must be locked to the Video Reference since non-PCM
data cannot be sample-rate-converted (the Framesync option is required for
transferring non-PCM data from input to output clock domain by dropping/repeating
frames).
PT-FSDMX-IBG with Frame Sync Option

Frame sync is a licensable option. To acquire a Frame Sync license, contact your Customer
Service representative. Use the License Key parameter to add a license to the module.
Modules with the optional Frame Sync license have these additional features:
 Video Frame Synchronizer and Delay

 Audio Synchronizer
Modules with the Frame Sync license installed operate in the following modes:
 Framesync mode—SDI channels are genlocked to a common reference source, which

can be either NTSC, PAL or TriLevel. Your video reference has to be the same frame rate
as your input. The input channels can be asynchronous to each other.
 Delay mode—SDI channels will be processed in their recovered input clock domain. In
Delay mode, some restrictions apply to the processing of Audio data. See Table 3-68
for more details.
 Mixed operation—Some channels run in Framesync mode while others run in Delay
mode.
When operating the Frame Sync in Delay mode, the audio embedders are automatically
turned off. Any ancillary data will be passed unprocessed (aside from any video delay). ADS
Clean (wiping out the entire ancillary data space) can still be applied if the user wishes to do
so. If the input video frame rate does not match the genlock frame rate for a channel, that
channel is automatically placed into Delay Mode. This information is reflected in the Frame
Sync Status parameter.
Features based on Licensing

 FS=Framesync Mode with Framesync License
 DLY=Delay Mode with Framesync License.
 DMX=Demux-only Operation without Framesync License.
Table 3-68 Features Supported in Framesync Mode, Delay Mode, and Demux-Only Mode
Processing Feature Video Embedded Audio TDM Audio
Video Framesync FS
H/V Phase Control FS, DLY
Frame Offset FS, DLY
Freeze FS, DLY
Video ProcAmp FS, DLY, DMX
ASI Bypass FS, DLY, DMX
Audio Sample rate conversion FS, DMX FS, DLY, DMX

188 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-68 Features Supported in Framesync Mode, Delay Mode, and Demux-Only Mode
Audio Sync FS FS
Audio Delay FS, DMX FS, DLY, DMX
Audio ProcAmp FS, DMX FS, DLY, DMX
Bypass Mode FS, DLY, DMX
Upgrading the firmware on PT-FSDMX-IBG module takes approximately 50 minutes.

Multiple (identical) boards can be upgraded at once in batches of up to 16 boards (= one
'zone'). A 'batch' upgrade takes about as long as upgrading a single board.
Always wait for the 'Firmware upgrade successful' message before power-cycling the
system, exchanging boards, or carrying out any other maintenance work that could
interfere with the upgrade process. Do not interrupt the power supply or tamper with a
board while an upgrade is in progress. This could corrupt the firmware, necessitating a
restart of the upgrade process.
Note: If the Software Version shows 0.00, this indicates that the PT-FSDMX-IBG is in failsafe
mode. In this mode, the board will only support upgrade operations and basic control with
the Platinum Resource module. You can perform software upgrades as usual while the
module is in failsafe mode, but after the upgrade is completed, the module will need to be
hot-swapped in order to have the new firmware take effect.

This diagram shows the video and audio data paths for a single channel through the
module. This path is duplicated for each of the module’s eight channels.
PT-FSDMX-IBG Data Flow (firmware version 3.1 or higher)

Processing FPGA (one channel shown)
PT-FSDMX-IBG Data Flow (V6 Rev 3.03 or later)

Processing FPGA (Virtex 6 XC6VLX195T) – one channel shown
Simple
TSG
DDR2
Memory
FrmRst
Detect
Video Frame Video DL
Mux
Synchronizer* ProcAmp A2B
DL
Mux
B2A
*
PT-FSDMX-IBG requires license key
(Electrical Back Module ) DL
SDI Rx Demux
Deserializer Clock
Cable Descrambler Transfer Bypass
EQ Reframer
CRC/EDH Monitoring FIFO
SDI Format Detection
ASI Detection Link A Link B
or
ASI Flag
Test Tone DL
SFP Rx Generator Delay
Non-PCM Data
PT-FSDMXO-IBG
(Fiber Optical Back Module ) Loss -of-Video
SDI Tx
Primary Audio Audio
Audio Sample Rate Audio Audio Multiplexer DL CRC Insertion Backplane SDI Out
Post
Mux
Mux
Demultiplexer PCM Synchronizer & LineNum Insertion
Fade Conversion ProcAmp (Embedder) Mux Driver (to WB X-Point)
(De-Embedder) Delay Scrambler
Serializer
Bypass Mux for ASI
ASI Flag
DDR2 EmbChEn
Memory
C-Bit &
Dolby-E/D
Dolby-E/D PCM and non-PCM Audio
Header Secondary Audio
Dmx Audio PCM / non -PCM Flag Header Data (Dolby-E/D) will be in
Detector Demultiplexer
Detector the same clock domain at
(De-Embedder)
this point
‘non-Audio’ Channel Status Bit
CUVZ Correction
FsMode = '1'
FsMode = '0'
TDM Audio Audio TDM TDM Out

8 x 16Ch TDM
from other Transmitter (to Audio X-Point)
Channels
Figure 3-70 PT-FSDMX-IBG Functional Block Diagram
Controllable Parameters (PT-FSDMX-IBG and its variants)

Table 3-51 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-FSDMX-IBG and its variants. In
Table 3-69 PT-FSDMX-IBG and Variants - Controllable Parameters List

[RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection; † = Frame Sync License enabled only
Path Parameter Name Description Options
Number of input [RO] 8

Number of Output [RO] 0
General
Serial Number [RO] Displays the module’s <String>
unique identifier
License Key Activates the Frame Sync <String>
option
Licensed Options [RO] Displays activated options  None
 Frame Sync
190 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Table 3-69 PT-FSDMX-IBG and Variants - Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Parameter Update Rate Defines the rate at which  Slow

parameters are updated  Medium
 Fast
Control Status [RO]  Please Wait
 Ready to Set
Temperature (x 2) [RO] Indicates the temperature <string> in Degrees Celcius
of the FPGA
Fan Status [RO] Indicates proper  Bad
functioning of the module’s  Good
fan unit
FPGA (x 2) DDR Memory Indicates proper  Bad
Status (x 2) [RO] functioning of the DDR  Good
memory
Genlock
Sync Select Selects which physical sync  1
port the module uses as a  2
reference
 3
 4
Genlock Video Present [RO] Reports the presence of the  No
reference video signal  Yes
Genlock Video Locked [RO] Reports the locked status of  No
the reference video signal  Yes
Genlock Standard [RO] Indicates the video standard  Unknown  1080p 24
detected on the genlock  525i 59.94  1080p 29.97
input
 625i 50  1080p 30
 720p 25  1080p 25
 720p 29.97  1080i 50
 720p 30  1080i 59.94
 720p 50  1080i 60
 720p 59.94  1080sF 23.98
 720p 60  1080sF 24
 1080p 23.98
Input > Optical
Input Optical Power [RO] Reports input optical signal  Too Low
power level  -32 - 1 dBm
This parameter appears for
 Too High
PT-FSDMX-IBG Optical
modules only.

SFP Type [RO] Shows the type of optical  Unknown

receiver installed  N/A
This parameter appears for
 (G)Dual-Rx PIN
PT-FSDMX-IBG Optical
modules only.
Input > Video
SDI Video Standard (x Displays the SDI video  Unknown  1080p 30
8)[RO] signal standard  525i 59.94  1080p 25
 625i 50  1080i 50
 720p 25  1080i 59.94
 720p 29.97  1080i 60
 720p 30  1080p 50
 720p 50  1080p 59.94
 720p 59.94  1080p 60
 720p 60  1080p 50 DL
 1080p 23.98  1080p 59.94 DL
 1080p 24  1080p 60 DL
 1080p 29.97  1080sF 23.98
 1080sF 24
Signal Presence (x 8)[RO] Reports the presence of the  No
SDI input video signal  Yes
EDH Present (x 8) [RO] Reports the presence of  No
EDH in the input SDI signal  Yes
CRC/EDH Error Counter (x Reports the number of 0 to 65535
8) [RO] chrominance CRC/EDH
errors that have occurred
CRC/EDH Error Clear (x 8) Clears all CRC/EDH error  No
counters  Yes
Input > Embedded Audio Status
Group Presence (8 x 4) [RO] Reports the presence of the  No
specified audio group in the  Yes
SDI signal
Group Active Channels (8 x Indicates which channels  None/Unknown  CH4
4) [RO] are active  CH1  CH14
 CH2  CH24
Note: If SDI source is SD
(525, 625), this parameter  CH12  CH124
will show None/Unknown  CH3  CH34
due to the missing Audio
 CH13  CH134
control packets in SD
modes.  CH23  CH234
 CH123  CH1234
192 Chapter 3
Input Modules

Group Sampling Rate (8 x 4) Reports the sampling rate  48.0 kHz

[RO] from the control packet of  44.1 kHz
the specified audio group
 32.0 kHz
 N/A
 FreeRun
Audio Format (8 x 16) [RO] Reports the AES format  PCM
(PCM/non-PCM) of  Non-PCM
specified output embedded
audio channel
Processing > Embedding
Group Embedding Mode (8 Selects the embedding  Off
x 4) † mode for the specified  Append
audio group
 OverWrt
 Auto
Processing > Audio
V-Bit Mute Enable Enables automatic muting  No
of audio outputs when the  Yes
V-bit is set
Muting on a detected V-Bit
applies to PCM audio
channels only. Non-PCM
audio channels will not be
muted.
SRC Control (8 x 8) Engages or disengages the  Auto
sample rate converter  Enable
 Bypass
Tone (8 x 16) Selects the tone level for  Off
the specified audio channel  400 Hz
 1 KHz
 2 KHz
 4 KHz
Level Adjust (8 x 16) Adjusts the audio level -18 dB - 18 dB (0) in 0.1 dB steps
(gain) for each
audio channel
Polarity Reversal (8 x 16) Specifies whether the audio  No
channel should be inverted  Yes
Audio Mute (8 x 16) Enables muting for the  Off
specified output channel  On

Summing (8 x 8) Specifies whether to sum  None

the audio within a pair  Right to left
Left to Right - the
 Left to right
summed audio is placed in
the right channel  Both
Right to Left - the
summed audio is placed in
the left channel
Both - the summed audio
is placed in both left and
right channels
Swap/Copy (8 x 8) Specifies whether to swap  No Swap
or copy the audio within a  Swap
pair; able to swap left and
 Right to left
right channels, copy left
channel to the right  Left to right
channel, and copy the right
channel to the left
Fade Rate (x 8) Specifies the fade rate 0 - 10 (10) s, in 1-second steps
Word Length (x8) Specifies the audio word  16 bits
length for all audio  20 bits
channels within the SDI
 24 bits
stream
Processing > Deembedding > Group Deembed Control
Group Deembed Control (8 Controls the audio option  Mute
x 4) when the specified  Repeat
demuxed audio group is
present with an error
Processing > Audio Sync

Audio Ch Pair Delay Track By toggling one of the  Reset Toggle A
(8 x 8) † eight Reset Toggle A / Reset  Reset Toggle B
Toggle B parameters of the
selected SDI channel
instance, Audio Rd/Wr
pointers in the Audio
Synchronizer, affecting all
eight Stereo pairs of the
selected SDI channel, will
be reset.
See Audio
Synchronization
Audio Channel Delay (8 x Selects the amount of delay
16) applied to the audio 0 - 3000 ms in 1 ms steps
channel
194 Chapter 3
Input Modules

Processing > Video Proc Amp

Y Gain (x 8) Adjusts gain for the Y -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
channel
Cb Gain (x 8) Adjusts gain to the Cb color -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
difference component
Cr Gain (x 8) Adjusts gain to the Cr color -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
difference component
Y Offset (x 8) Adjusts offset for the Y ±100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
channel
Cb Offset (x 8) Adjusts offset for the Cb ±100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
channel
Cr Offset (x 8) Adjusts offset for the Cr ±100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
channel
White Clip Enable (x 8) Controls level clipping  Disable
according to the White Clip  Enable
Level control
White Clip Level (x 8) Sets the white clip level 636.9 to 763.1 mV (700 mV) in 0.8 mV
increments
Black Clip Enable (x 8) Controls level clipping  Disable
according to the Black Clip  Enable

Level control
Black Clip Level (x 8) Sets the black clip level -47.9 to +47.9 mV (0.0 mV) in 0.8 mV
increments
Hue (x 8) Adjusts the hue of the -180 to +180° (0°)
incoming digital video
signal

Processing > Frame Sync

Horizontal Phase (x 8) † Adjusts the horizontal  0.000 us to 29.616 us (1080p 30,
timing 1035i 60)
 0.000 us to 14.808 us (1080p 60,
Note: The usable range 1080p 60 DL)
depends on the video
standard.
 0.000 us to 29.646 us (1080p 29,
1080i 59)
 0.000 us to 14.823 us (1080p 59,
1080p 59.94 DL)
 0.000 us to 35.542 us (1080p 25,
1080i 50)
 0.000 us to 17.771 us (1080p 50,
1080p 50 DL)
 0.000 us to 37.024 us (1080p 24,
1080sF 24)
 0.000 us to 37.061 us (1080p 23.98,
1080sF 23.98)
 0.000 us to 31.987 us (1080i 50_295)
 0.000 us to 22.209 us (720p 60)
 0.000 us to 22.231 us (720p 59.94)
 0.000 us to 26.653 us (720p 50)
 0.000 us to 44.431 us (720p 30)
 0.000 us to 44.475 us (720p 29)
 0.000 us to 53.320 us (720p 25)
 0.000 us to 63.518 us (525i 59.94)
 0.000 us to 63.963 us (625i 50)
†  0–1124 lines (1080p/I/sF)
Vertical Phase (x 8) Adjusts the vertical timing
 0–1249 lines
Note: The usable range (1080i 50 SMPTE 295M)
depends on the video
standard.
 0–749 lines (720p)
 0–524 lines (525i 59.94)
 0–624 lines (625i 50)
†
Frame Offset (x 8) Determines the number of 0 - 17 frames (Delay mode)
frames the video is offset 0 - 16 frames (Sync mode)
Force Freeze (x 8) † Enables video freeze  No
 Yes
Force Freeze Mode (x 8) † Specifies the type of freeze,  Field 1 (1080i/525i 59.94/625i 50/
field 1, field 2 or frame 1080sF)
 Field 2
 Frame (1080p/720p)
196 Chapter 3
Input Modules

Loss of Video Mode † Selects the output video  Pass

mode when the input video  Black
is disrupted
 Freeze
Fast Switch (x 8) † Enable fast switching  No
See Fast Video Switch  Yes
Frame Sync / Demux Mode (x 8) † Sets the operational mode  FS: Sync mode
of the frame sync, delay or  FS: Delay mode
sync.
 Demux
With the Framesync option,  Bypass
user selectable choices are:
- FS: Sync mode
- FS: Delay mode
- Bypass
Without the Framesync

option (Demux-only), user
selectable choices are:
- Demux
- Bypass
See Video Frame

Synchronization
Frame Sync Status (x 8) † Indicates whether the  FS: Ext Lock
frame sync is locked, and  FS: Delay Forced
what it is locked to
 FS: Local Lock
 FS: Delay Rate
Mismatch
 Demux: Locked
 Demux: Unlocked
 Bypass
 Invalid/No Input
Version
Software Version Indicates software version <string>
Control FPGA version Indicates firmware version <string>
Processing FPGA version Indicates firmware version <string>
Notes:
ADS Clean
In all modes of operation (Framesync/Delay/Demux-only mode), ADS Clean set to Yes
wipes out all HANC data with the exception of EDH (SD only).
When a channel is operated in Framesync mode or if a board without a Framesync

license (Demux-only) has the ingested SDI signal already locked to the reference signal
applied to the board, the Audio Embedder re-populates the HANC space with Audio
data coming from the Audio processor. In order for the Audio Embedder to re-populate
empty HANC space, the group embedding mode has to be set to either ‘Auto’ or
‘Append’. Overwrite only applies if there is ’something’ to overwrite.
When operating a channel in Framesync mode, use ADS Clean with extra caution
because it wipes out any non-PCM Audio data (Dolby E/D) which is lost forever.
Non-PCM Audio data is not re-embedded by the Audio Embedder, since all non-PCM
data bypasses the Audio processor altogether. With ADS Clean set to ‘Yes’, non-PCM
Audio data will no longer appear in the outgoing SDI stream or show up in the TDM
stream going to the Audio crosspoint. To counter this, a new Audio Synchronizer IP is
required where the clock domain transfer of Dolby data (by dropping or repeating a
frame worth of Dolby data) happens in the Audio Synchronizer’s memory rather than in
the Video Frame-synchronizer’s memory.
Word Length
The Word Length (x8) parameter can be set through the Audio section of the GUI to
16, 20, or 24 bits on a per SDI channel basis. 20 bits is the default and is applicable
when the video standard is SD-SDI (525/625).
If the SD-SDI Video has extended Audio packets (which can apply to any of up to four
groups of embedded Audio), Audio data embedded in such group(s) should have a
word length of 24 bits. When the processed audio data word length is 20 bits
(determined by parameter ‘Word Length' parameter), the Audio Embedder cannot
overwrite existing extended Audio packets. There are 2 options in this case:
 Turn on ADS Clean prior to re-embedding new Audio data, to wipe out any
existing Audio packets (regular and extended).
 Set the Word Length (x8) parameter for the SDI channel in question to match the
word length of the Audio data embedded in the incoming SDI stream.
The Word Length bits for processed Audio data are not auto-detected (based on the
detected word length of the embedded Audio data) and set. This is to allow the
flexibility for users to steer the word length of the re-embedded Audio data such that it
matches the word length of Audio data that originates from a different source (for
example, Audio received via TDM).
Group Active Channels

Due to the absence of audio control packets in SD-SDI modes, there is no (easy) way for
the Audio De-embedder to figure out whether channels within any of the present
groups are active or not. This is why in SD-SDI modes, even if audio channels are active,
their presence is reported as 'None/Unknown'. There is not enough room in the control
space to extend the number of choices in order to notify the user that the information
is not available because of the SD format.
198 Chapter 3
Input Modules
Video Frame Synchronization

The frame synchronizer offers two modes of operation: Delay mode and Synchronizer
(Sync) mode. These modes can be chosen using the Frame Sync / Demux Mode (x 8)
†parameter.
 In FS: Delay mode mode, the output video is synchronized to the input video.
 In FS: Sync mode mode, the output video is synchronized to the reference video.
The reference standard you can use depends on the output video standard you
have set.
Table 3-70 Supported Reference and Output Video Standard Combinations in Sync Mode
Reference Output Video Reference Output Video
Standard Standard Standard Standard
525i 59.94  1080i 59.94 1080i 60  1080i 60
 1080p 59.94 1080p 30  1080p 60
 1080p 29.97  1080p 30
 720p 59.94  720p 60
 525i 59.94  1080p 60 DL
 1080p 59.94 DL
625i 50  1080i 50 1080i 59.94  1080i 59.94
 1080p 50 1080p 29.97  1080p 29.97
 1080p 25  1080p 59.94
 720p 50  720p 59.94
 625i 50  525i 59.94
 1080p 50 DL  1080p 59.94 DL
720p 60  720p 60 1080i 50  1080i 50
 1080p 60 1080p 25  1080p 50
 1080p 25
 720p 50
 625i 50
 1080p 50 DL
720p 59.94  720p 59.94 1080p 24  1080p 24
 1080p 59.94 1080sF 24  1080sF 24
720p 50  720p 50 1080p 23.98  1080p 23.98
 1080p 50 1080sF  1080sF 23.98
23.98
In both Sync mode and Delay mode, PT-FSDMX provides several controls to manipulate
the output video signal:
 Horizontal timing
 Vertical timing
 Adjustable frame delay
Manually freeze output video on first or second field (interlaced standards), or on the
whole frame (all standards)
Audio Synchronization
By default, PT-FSDMX-IBG and its variants synchronize de-embedded audio with timing
information from the video frame synchronizer prior to re-embedding the audio.
When operating an SDI channel in Frame Sync mode (FS license must be installed) and
if the ingested signal qualifies for Framesync operation (frame-rate matches the
frame-rate of the selected Reference signal), the de-embedded audio will be
automatically delayed to match the video delay. Additionally, up to three seconds of
delay can be added through the Audio Channel Delay see Audio Channel Delay (8
x 16)) parameter.
Group (1-4) Deembedding Control

The following are options for the Group (1–4) Deembedding Control (Group
Deembed Control (8 x 4)) parameter.
Table 3-71 Deembedding Control Options

Item Description
Repeat Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder
repeats the last good AES sample.
Mute Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder
mutes the current outgoing AES sample.
Audio Test Tones

The following frequency levels of audio output test tones are available as a selection
from the Output Ch (1–16) Source Select parameters:
Table 3-72 Audio Test Tones

Test Tone Frequency
Test Tone 1 400 Hz
Test Tone 2 1 kHz
Test Tone 3 2 kHz
Test Tone 4 4 kHz
Fast Video Switch

When input video is switched between two sources while both sources are within
vertical blanking, use the Fast Switch (see Fast Switch (x 8) †) parameter to enable
fast video switching between the sources. In this mode, output video is not frozen
when both sources are within the vertical blanking area when the switch takes place.
Audio Embedding Modes

Each video channel has an audio embedder component composed of several smaller
subcomponent blocks:
 One ancillary data stripper (ADS)
 Four audio embedding subcomponents
200 Chapter 3
Input Modules
The first subcomponent is an ancillary data stripper (ADS). This block removes all
ancillary data packets in the input SDI stream, prior to embedding. Following the ADS
block are four separate audio-embedding subcomponents. Each subcomponent has the
ability to operate on only one audio group, either appending or overwriting a
predetermined group onto the SDI stream.
The audio embedding modes are Audio Group (1–4) Embedding Mode parameters.
Table 3-73 briefly describes the Append, OverWrite, and Auto options available from
each of the embedding modes.
Table 3-73 Embedding Mode Options

Options Description
Append Attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately
following the last existing audio data/control packet in the horizontal
ancillary region (See Append Embedding)
OverWrite Attempts to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the same
group number with the new audio data (See Overwrite Embedding)
Auto Attempts first to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the
same audio group number; failing that, it appends the new audio data and
control packets immediately following the last existing audio data/control
packet (refer to the Audio Group (1–4) Exists parameters to determine
what audio groups are already present in the incoming SDI signal)
Off Disables embedding of audio data and control packets on a per group
basis.
Append Embedding
When you select Append embedding, the module attempts to insert the audio data
and control packets immediately following the last existing data/control packet in the
horizontal ancillary data space (ADS). Append embedding is only valid if the audio
group to be embedded does not already exist.
Figure 3-71 shows how append embedding will appear in the ancillary data space
when there is no previous audio or other data.
ADS before embedding

Other Other
EAV auxilliary data
A
auxilliary data
B
ADS after embedding group

1
EAV Group1
Figure 3-71 Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When No Other Data Present
When auxiliary data exists in the ancillary data space, appended audio appears
following that data, as shown in Figure 3-72.

EAV

1 Other Other
EAV auxilliary data auxilliary data
A B Group1
Figure 3-72 Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When Auxiliary Data Present
If you attempt to insert audio into Group 1 when Group 1 audio data already exists in
the ancillary data space, no audio will be embedded, as shown in Figure 3-73.

EAV Pre- existing
Group1
ADS after attempting to embed group1

EAV Pre- existing
Group 1
No audio is embedded
Figure 3-73 Append Embedding Mode - Adding Group 1 and a Group 1 Already Exists
If you insert Group 2 audio when there is pre-existing Group 1 audio in the ancillary
data space and no Group 2 audio, the Group 2 audio will be inserted following the
Group 1 audio, as shown in Figure 3-74.
EAV GROUP 1
ADS after embedding group 2
EAV GROUP 1 GROUP 2
Figure 3-74 Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 2 Following Group 1

202 Chapter 3
Input Modules

EAV GROUP 2
EAV GROUP 2 GROUP 1
An audio group cannot be divided. In Append embedding, the audio group is always
added following the last block in the ADS. If there is not enough room to append the
audio group following the last block of auxiliary data or audio in the ADS, no audio will
be embedded, as shown in Figure 3-76.

Other Other Other
EAV auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
data data data
ADS after attempting to embed group 1

Other Other Other
data data data
Result: No audio is appended
Figure 3-76 Append Embedding Mode Fails to Append When Auxiliary Data Exists in
all Audio Groups
Overwrite Embedding
When you select Overwrite embedding, the module attempts to overwrite any existing
audio data and control packets of the same group number with the new audio data.
This setting is valid only if the audio group to be embedded already exists. If the new
sample distribution does not exactly match the existing audio data packet sample
distribution, the embedder will mark some audio data packets for deletion (DID word
will be set to 180h).When you attempt Overwrite embedding and there is no previous
audio (as in Figure 3-77), no audio is embedded because there is nothing to overwrite.

EAV

EAV
Figure 3-77 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is No Pre-existing Audio
Figure 3-78 shows how overwrite embedding will appear in the ancillary data space
when there is auxiliary data where Group 1 should be inserted.

other other
EAV auxilliary data
A
auxilliary data
B

other other
A B
Figure 3-78 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Auxiliary Data on Group 1
when there is pre-existing Group 1 audio. This operation is successful.

EAV Pre-existing Group1
ADS after embedding group 1 (with overwrite group specified as Group 1)

EAV Group 1
Figure 3-79 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Group 1 Audio in the Group 1
Space
204 Chapter 3
Input Modules
LED
Indicators
Figure 3-80 PT-FSDMX Card-Edge LED Indicators
The Power, ACT CTRL, ACT In, and signal presence LEDs are described in Input Module
General Description. The LEDs described in Table 3-74 are specific to PT-FSDMX-IBG and
its variants.
Table 3-74 LEDs specific to PT-FSDMX-IBG (and variants)

LED Function
Channel Status
Ch (1 - 8) Red: Power on test failed
FPGA Temp
FPGA Temp (A - B) Red: Above temperature limit
Power-Up sequence
Due to the complexity of the board and its parameter list, it takes about 2.5 minutes (for
PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG) and 3 minutes (for PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG/PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG)
after power-cycling a board before it is fully operational. About 30 seconds after
power-cycling, a board is ready to detect input signals, but it outputs a 75% color bar test
pattern of the same video standard as the detected input signal until the PT-RES Resource
Card has completed uploading the previously used configuration (parameters). The
readiness of the board is reflected by the read-only Control Status [RO] parameter.
Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image

The PT-FSDMX-IBG board is equipped with a non-volatile Flash Memory, which stores
multiple revisions (at least two) of the FPGA(s) bitfile(s). The Flash Memory, which is
attached to and controlled by the MicroBlaze CPU (Xilinx Spartan6), can be upgraded
entirely or partially through the PIPE interface.
If the upgrade procedure of the currently used revision fails because of unexpected power
failure, brownout or system instability whilst the upgrade was in progress, the CPU will
automatically revert to the ‘known-good-working’ revision, next time the FPGAs get
reloaded. The last ‘known-good-working’ revision becomes the new ‘golden’ revision,
which must not be overwritten next time a firmware upgrade is initiated. This ‘ping-pong’
upgrade scheme guarantees that there is always an uncorrupted and working image of the
FPGA bitfile stored in Flash Memory.
The modules maintain a backup image of the last working firmware at all times. In the
event of an upgrade failure, the module will revert back to its backup image to maintain
operation on the board. You can verify the version that is current running on the module by
looking at the version parameters: Software Version, Control FPGA version and
Processing FPGA version.
If Software Version shows 0.0, this means that the module is in failsafe mode
206 Chapter 3
Input Modules
207
4 Output Modules
output modules available for the Platinum router. A General Description section provides a
generic view of how a Platinum output module operates. Each output module is further
described in terms of its individual operation, controllable parameters, installation,
configuration, functional block diagram, and specifications. Where appropriate, a module’s
corresponding output monitoring, submodules, and back panel I/O modules are identified.
 Output Module General Description on page 209

 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules on page 252
 PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules on page 252
 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules with
TDM Capability on page 258
 PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules with TDM Capability on
page 258
 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules on
page 271
 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules
with TDM Capability on page 278
 PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules on page 265
 PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules with Dual
Output on page 265
 PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Transmitter Module on
page 286
 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output
Modules on page 213
 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on
page 218
 PT-HSRO-OB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video
Transmitter Module on page 224
 PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR8O-OBG+: Fiber Optical 3G/1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI
Serial Video Transmitter Module With Power Saving on page 224
 PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on
page 232
 PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output
Modules on page 232
 PT-HSRMX8C/PT-HSRMX8O-OBG Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output
Module on page 309 (NEW)
208 Chapter 4
Output Modules
 PT-MUX: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI
 PT-MUX-3G: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability on
page 291
 PT-MADI4X-OBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI)
Output Module on page 299 (NEW)
 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on page 242
 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on
page 238
 PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on page 247
 PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB: SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules on
page 247
Output Module General Description

Signal output connectors
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Card-edge
connector
Control Power
Power
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VL
+24V
GND
+5V
?V
?V
?V
?V
?V
Test points
System Signal Presence
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 7
OUTPUT 8
ACT CTRL
ACT OUT
POWER
Handle cutout
System Signal
LEDs Presence
LEDs
Figure 4-1 Typical Platinum Output Module
An output module accepts 32 signals from the crosspoint matrix. A secondary switching
circuit then selects 8 of these 32 signals to be driven out of the output module. Each output
channel also contains an output monitoring path which feeds the output signal seen on any
channel back to the crosspoint matrix for output monitoring. The output monitoring signal
is then fed to an optional rear-mounted output monitoring card. The output monitoring
matrix is controlled though the system controller. The TDM matrix allows an audio output
module to drive 16 outputs.
 The green LED labelled “POWER” is the power supply indicator. It shows that +24V is
210 Chapter 4
Output Modules
 The yellow LED labeled “ACT OUT” is the active output warning. It shows that an
active input signal is being switched to this output module.
 The LED labeled “ACT CTRL” is the control system acknowledgment. The LED shows a
The green LEDs located on the front of the card, one for each output, indicate its associated
output has a valid signal present. One small red LED located on top of the PCB is illuminated
briefly during power up (or module insertion into a powered frame), and indicates that
configuration of the control interface FPGA is in process.
On PM-FO-OB and PT-HSR1310S-OB modules, channel status LEDs are bicolor (green and
red). See Table 4-38 on page 287 for descriptions.
Test points for power and GND are located near the front edge of the card. There are no
user-settable switches or controls on this module. All settings for this module are set
through the system controller.
Controllable Parameters Lists

marked with the [RO] designator are “read-only.” Output module parameters lists are
Table 4-1 Output Module Parameters Lists

Parameter List
Module Name
Location
PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules Page 254
PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules with Page 260
TDM Capability
PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules with Page 260
TDM Capability
PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules Page 254
PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Page 273
Modules
PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Page 279
Output Modules with TDM Capability
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules Page 267
PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules Page 267
with Dual Output
PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Transmitter page 287
Module
1
Table 4-1 Output Module Parameters Lists (Continued)

Parameter List
Module Name
Location
PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking page 215
Output Modules
PT-HSRO-OB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Page 226
Serial Video Transmitter Module
PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR8O-OBG+: Fiber Optical 3G/1.5G HD-SDI, Page 226
and SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module With Power Saving
PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Page 235
Modules
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Page 235
Output Modules
PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules Page 239
PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules Page 243
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules Page 249
PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-DOB: SD with Reclocking and Dual Output Page 249
Modules
PT-MUX-3G: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Page 294
Capability
PT-MADI4X-OBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Page 306
Interface (MADI) Output Module
PT-HSRMX8C/PT-HSRMX8O-OBG Frame Synchronizer and Page 318
Mux Output Module
Submodules A variety of submodules are available for Platinum output modules. See the pertinent
output module section for a description of its associated submodules.
212 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Signal Flow Diagram
SD/HD × 8
PRTI (4) AutoManual × 8
Bypass × 8
FPGA AutoBypass × 8
SS[2..0] × 8
Lock Detect × 8
Reclockers × 8
Select
8 outputs XPT Card 1
8 outputs
MI connector

OM select
8 outputs
Cable drivers
×8
1 output (OM) 8:1 mux
PIPE (2)
I/O micro ASI/177
ENET
Figure 4-2 Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum Output Module (Showing Reclocking)
PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output

Modules
Operation
Figure 4-3 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ Module
The PM-HSR-OBG+ and PT-HSR-OBG+ are HD-SDI/SD-SDI output modules with reclocking.
These modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s) from the
crosspoint matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock SMPTE as well as ASI (270 Mb/s)
signals, and send them to the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital
signal between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s, with reclocking for the most common SMPTE data
rates in this range. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass,
and mute. These modes are described in Table 4-2 on page 214. An 8×1 differential
crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.
The OBG+ modules provide power saving features not available in previous OB+ modules.
Individual channels are automatically powered down when no signal is present, or when the
output is not terminated. These features can save up to 2.7 Watts on each output module
214 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-2 Reclocker Operating Modes

Mode Name Description Note
Automatic The reclocker attempts to reclock the received data at its data rate if the Default
received data rate is 270 Mb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, 1.485 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s, or 2.970
Gb/s. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is
illuminated and the reclocked rate is reported.
270 Mb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 270Mb/s only. If Manual
this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is mode
illuminated.
1.485 Gb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 1.4835 Gb/s or Manual
1.485 Gb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal mode
presence LED is illuminated.
Automatic If reclocking is not successful, received data appears at the output of the Default
bypass reclocker without any reclock processing. The corresponding signal presence
LED is turned off.
Forced bypass The received data bypasses the reclock processing and appears at the output —
of the reclocker, regardless of whether the data is reclockable. The
corresponding signal presence LED is turned off.
Automatic mute No data appears at the output of the reclocker if the signal on the Default
corresponding input is absent, or this output channel is not selected. The
corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. (This mode can be disabled if
necessary.)
Forced mute No data appears at the output of the reclocker regardless of the system switch —
setting, data status, or other setting of the reclocker.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+

The PT-HS-BP+ back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HSR-OBG+ and PT-HSR-OBG+
modules.

The optional PT-HSR-OM and PT-HSRAEC-OM modules provides output monitoring for the
PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OBG+ modules.
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PM-HSR-OBG+ and PT-HSR-OBG+
Note: Modules marked as PM-HSR-OBG+DX are PM-HSR-OBG+ modules equipped with

PT-MX-SB submodules. Modules marked as PT-HSR-OBG+DX are PT-HSR-OBG+ modules
equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules.
Installation
Output Module Installation

All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Special Pre-Installation
for field expansion or replacement of output modules. If you need to purchase additional

Department.
Output Monitoring Module Installation

All output monitoring modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing
Output Monitoring Modules on page 376 for the procedure for field expansion of
output monitoring modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact
your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
Table 4-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HSR-OBG+ and PT-HSR-OBG+
216 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-3 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List

Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Reports if data is re-locked by  Not locked
reclocking stage  Locked
Signal Type (1-8) [RO] Displays detected slew rate of  HD
incoming signal  SD
Data Rate (1-8) [RO] Displays clocked data rate at the  270 Mb/s
(1-8) reclocking stage  1.48 Gb/s
 2.97 Gb/s
 Unknown
Mute (1-8) Mutes specified output channel  Mute on
 Mute off
Reclocker Mode (1-8) Sets the reclocker mode to  Auto
autodetect or to lock to a particular  270 Mb/s
rate
 1.48 Gb/s
 2.97 Gb/s
Green Mode Enables or disables power-saving  Disabled
feature  Enabled
Bypass (1-8) Enforces reclocking bypass function  Auto bypass
 Enforced bypass
Enforced Slew Rate (1-8) Sets slew rate for output signal  HD
 SD
 Auto (use detected data rate
from Signal Type parameter)
Output Mode (1-8) Determines if output signal comes  Main module
from the main module or  Submodule
submodule (if installed)
Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the  Sync 1
module uses as a reference  Sync 2
 Sync 3
 Sync 4
Figure 4-4 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-4 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Output connector 75 BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
3.0 Gb/s
218 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-4 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ Specifications

Reclocking  Automatic for 2.970 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s,
1.485 Gb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, and 270 Mb/s
 Bypass for all other rates between 3 Mb/
s and 3.0 Gb/s
Jitter < 0.2 UI @ frequency tested
Output amplitude 800 mVp-p ± 10%
DC offset 0V ± 0.5V
Rise/fall times 400 ps – 1500 ps, for SMPTE 259M data
rates
< 135 ps, for SMPTE 424M and 292M data
rates
Overshoot < 10% of amplitude
PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output

Modules
Operation
Figure 4-5 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Module

The PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ are HD-SDI/SD-SDI output modules with reclocking.
These modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s) from the
crosspoint matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock SMPTE as well as ASI (270 Mb/s)
signals, and send them to the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital
signal between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s, with reclocking for the most common SMPTE data
rates in this range. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass,
and mute. These modes are described in Table 4-2 on page 214. An 8×1 differential
crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.

received data rate is 270 Mb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, 1.485 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s, or 2.970
Gb/s. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is
illuminated and the reclocked rate is reported.
270 Mb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 270Mb/s only. If Manual
illuminated.
LED is turned off.
necessary.)
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+
modules.
Output Monitoring Module

PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ modules.
220 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+
Note: Modules marked as PM-HSR-OB+DX are PM-HSR-OB+ modules equipped with

PT-MX-SB submodules. Modules marked as PT-HSR-OB+DX are PT-HSR-OB+ modules
Installation


Department.

Configuration
Table 4-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+
Table 4-6 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ User-Controllable Parameters List

Signal Type (1-8) Displays detected slew rate of  HD
incoming signal  SD
Mute (1-8) Sets mute for any data passing  Muted
reclocking stage  Unmuted
Reclocker Mode (1-8) Sets the reclock mode to manual or  Manual
automatic  Auto
Auto Bypass (1-8) Enables or disables the reclock  Off
automatic bypass function  On
Bypass (1-8) Sets reclocking bypass function  Off
 On
Enforced Slew Rate (1-8) Sets slew rate for output signal  HD
 SD
 Auto (use detected data rate
from Signal Type parameter)
Input EQ (1-8) Sets input EQ setting for onboard  12 dB
switchers  5 dB
Data Rate (1-8) Sets the reclock rate  270
 1483.5/1485
 2967/2970
Sync Type Selects which physical sync port the  Sync1
module uses as a reference  Sync2
 Sync3
 Sync4
PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ module
222 Chapter 4
Output Modules

Reclocker Cable
4:1 mux with driver
1:2 fanout HD/SD
A output 1
B
HD/SD
input 1 C
•
D
• 8:1 mux
• Optional
•
processing
•
ROF
2:1 mux
submodule
•
(single to diff.)
• •
• Reclocker
•
•
HD/SD
4:1 mux with
output 8
1:2 fanout
A Cable
B driver
HD/SD
input 8 C
D
Sync inputs
OB2OB
TDM input Ethernet
+3.3 V +1.2 V +24 V fused
+24 VA Output driver 1-8 slew rate/mute

+24 VB Mux control
voltage monitoring
+5 VL DA core FPGA Reclocker 1-8 control
Reclocker 1-8 reporting
SLID
PIPE CPLD
PRTI
Figure 4-6 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-7 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Impedance 75
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
3.0 Gb/s
Table 4-7 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Specifications

Reclocking  Automatic for 2.970 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s,
1.485 Gb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, and 270 Mb/s
s and 3.0 Gb/s
Jitter < 0.2 UI @ frequency tested
rates
< 135 ps, for SMPTE 424M and 292M data
rates
224 Chapter 4
Output Modules
PT-HSRO-OB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI

Serial Video Transmitter Module
PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR8O-OBG+: Fiber Optical 3G/1.5G HD-SDI, and

SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module With Power Saving
Note: The PT-HSRO-OBG+ and the PT-HSR8O-OBG+ are identical except for the SFP
types that they are configured for.
The PT-HSRO-OBG+ module is pre-configured for 1310 SFP support.

See OP+SFP+TT+1310 Specifications on page 228.
If you need to use a different (dual output CWDM) SFP flavor, the PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+
module needs be to ordered.
See OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy Dual Output CWDM Transmitter Specifications on page 229
Operation
Note: The PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules provide power saving features that are not available in
previous PT-HSRO-OB+ modules. Individual channels are automatically powered down
when no signal is present. These features can save up to 2.7 Watts on each output module.
Figure 4-7 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ Module (with PT-SFP2X4+BM Back Module)
The PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ fiber optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI serial
video transmitter module has 8 SFP-type fiber optical transmitters that transmit 3 Gb HD,
1.5 Gb HD, or SD serial digital video data out of a LC type fiber socket. Four SFP modules,
each contains two channels, are mounted on the metal back panel of the back module. The
SFP module can be replaced or changed from the back of the frame without removing the
front module or disturbing traffic other than that on the SFP.
The front module receives 32 serial digital video signals from the crosspoint matrix, provides
secondary switching, reclocks SMPTE as well as DVB-ASI (270 Mb/s) signals, and sends them
to the SFP fiber optical transmitters. An 8×1 crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.
PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules have the capability to support a variety of optional

submodules.
The SFP modules provide laser status report and SFP wavelength identification. LEDs on the
back panel indicate laser output on/off status.
Back Panel I/O Module

The PT-SFP2X4+BM back module corresponds to the PT-HSRO-OB+, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and
PT-HSR8O-OBG+ modules.
Figure 4-8 PT-SFP2X4+BM Back Connector Module

PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ module.
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PT-HSRO-OB+/ PT-HSRO-OBG+
Note: Modules marked as PT-HSRO-OB+MX and PT-HSRO-OBG+MX are PT-HSRO-OB+ and

PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules, respectively.
226 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Installation Output Module Installation

All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Input and
Output Modules on page 367 for the procedure for field expansion of PT-HSRO-OB+/
PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules. (Also, see Appendix B, Laser Safety Guidelines on page 463,
for more information about lasers.) If you need to order additional components, please
Note: Module fuses are designed to operate throughout normal operations. In the unlikely
event that a fuse fails, return the module to Imagine Communications Engineering for
diagnostic testing. Please contact Customer Service to obtain a return authorization
number, and then refer to page xxii for information about returning a product

Department.
Configuration
Table 4-8 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-HSRO-OB+/ PT-HSRO-OBG+/
PT-HSR4OCG-OBG modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or
CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module
Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode,
double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that device’s parameter
list.
Table 4-8 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List

Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the  0
module uses as a reference  1
 2
 3
Main Module ID [RO] Displays the Module Hardware ID.
Wavelength [RO] Reports wavelength of fiber optical  1XXX nm
output  N/A
Table 4-8 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

SFP(1-4) Type [RO] Reports type of SFP that plugged in  OP+SFP+TT+13+13
back module See OP+SFP+TT+1310
Specifications.
 OP+SFP+TT+27+29
 OP+SFP+TT+31+33
 OP+SFP+TT+35+37
 OP+SFP+TT+43+45
 OP+SFP+TT+47+49
 OP+SFP+TT+51+53
 OP+SFP+TT+55+57
 OP+SFP+TT+59+61
See OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy Dual
Output CWDM Transmitter
Specifications.
 Unknown
 Invalid SFP
Laser Status [RO] Reports laser status  Normal
 Failed
 Disabled
 N/A
Mute Sets mute for any data passing  On
reclocking stage  Off
Laser Enable Enables or disables fiber optical  Yes
output  No
Lock Detect [RO] Reports if data is locked by  Yes
reclocking stage  No
Reclocker Mode Sets reclock mode to automatic or  Auto
to one of three manual fixed rates  270 Mb/s
 1.48 Gb/s
 2.97 Gb/s
Auto Bypass Enables or disables reclock  Off
(always enabled on PT-HSRO-OBG+, automatic bypass function  On
parameter not displayed)
Bypass Sets reclocking bypass function  Off
 On
228 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-8 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Rate Detect [RO] Detects data rate  SD
 HD
 Unknown
HD is displayed for both 1.48 &

2.97 Gbps rates and SD is displayed
for 270 Mbps.
Input EQ Sets input EQ setting for onboard  12 dB
(not available on PT-HSRO-OBG+) switchers  5 dB
Output Mode Determines if output signal comes  Main module
from main module or submodule (if  Submodule
installed)
SFP Specifications
Ensure that you upgrade to the latest firmware version (3.4 or later) before installing an SFP.
 OP+SFP+TT+1310 Specifications
 OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy Dual Output CWDM Transmitter Specifications
OP+SFP+TT+1310 Specifications
Note: These specs apply to the PT-HSRO-OBG+ module which is pre-configured for the
1310 SFP.

Number of LC 2x2
connector outputs
Peak wavelength 1280 nm 1310 nm 1340 nm Measured at
25°C
Spectrum width (RMS) - 1.5 nm 3 nm
Average output power -5 dBm -2 dBm 0 dBm
Optical rise/fall time - 105/120 ps 165/180 ps
(3G HD-SDI)
Extinction ratio 7 dB - -
Jitter - 45 ps 70 ps 3 Gb/s
Pathological
- 60 ps 100 ps 1.5 Gb/s
Pathological

- 110 ps 180 ps 270 MHz
Pathological
Laser safety level Class 1
Standards  3G: SMPTE 424M
 HD: SMPTE 292M
 SD: SMPTE 259M
OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy Dual Output CWDM Transmitter Specifications

Note: These specs apply to the PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+ module which can be pre-configured
(on request) for the dual output CWDM SFPs.
Table 4-9 OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy specs

connectors
Peak wavelength c -5.5nm c c +7.5nm ITU-T G.694.2
CWDM
wavelength
from 1470 nm
to 1610 nm,
each step 20 nm
Spectrum width (RMS) - - 1 nm
Average output power 0 dBm - 4 dBm
Optical rise/fall time - - 135 ps 2.97 Gb/s*
(3G HD-SDI)
Laser safety level Class 1
Standards  3G: SMPTE 424M
 HD: SMPTE 292M
 SD: SMPTE 259M
230 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Figure 4-9 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ Functional Block Diagram

Specifications
Table 4-10 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ Specifications*

Item Specification
Connector LC
Number of outputs 8
*
For optical output performance specifications (Peak Wavelength, Output Power, Extinction
Ratio, etc.) please refer to individual SFP module specification datasheets.
Datasheets of customer-replaceable optical SFP parts are available by request.

Please contact your Customer Service representative for more information.
232 Chapter 4
Output Modules
PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output

Modules
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking and

Dual Output Modules
Operation
Figure 4-10 PM-HSR-OB/PT-HS-OB Module
Figure 4-11 PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB Module

The HD-SDI/SD-SDI digital multirate output module comes in these variations:
 The PM-HSR-OB and PT-HSR-OB are HD-SDI/SD-SDI output modules with reclocking.
 The PM-HSR-DOB and PT-HS-DOB are HD-SDI/SD-SDI output modules with reclocking
and dual outputs. They are functionally identical to the PM-HSR-OB and PT-HSR-OB;
however, the PM-HSR-DOB and PT-HS-DOB have two outputs for each channel and
each PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB module occupies two slots.
The PT-HSR-OB/PT-HS-DOB digital multirate output module receives 32 digital differential

signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s) from the crosspoint matrix, provides secondary switching,
reclocks the SMPTE and ASI signals, and sends them to the drivers designed to drive 75
loads. It supports any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s, with reclocking for
standard SMPTE data rates in this range. The reclocker works in one of four modes:
automatic, manual, bypass, and mute. These modes are described in Table 4-11. An 8×1
differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.

received data rate is one of 143 Mb/s, 270 Mb/s, 360 Mb/s, 540 Mb/s and
1.485 Gb/s. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence
LED is illuminated and the reclocked rate is reported.
143 Mb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 143 Mb/s only. If Manual
illuminated.
illuminated.
illuminated.
illuminated.
illuminated.
1.485 Gb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 1.485 Gb/s only. If Manual
illuminated.
LED is turned off.
234 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-11 Reclocker Operating Modes (Continued)

necessary.)
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB and

PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB
The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HSR-OB, PM-HSR-DOB,
PT-HSR-OB, and PT-HS-DOB modules.

PM-HSR-OB, PM-HSR-DOB, PT-HSR-OB, and PT-HS-DOB modules.
Installation

Output Modules on page 367 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of
output modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer
or our Sales Department.

Department.

Configuration
Table 4-12 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HSR-OB and PT-HSR-OB
Table 4-12 PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB User-Controllable Parameters List

automatic  Auto
Autobypass (1-8) Enables or disables the reclock  Off
Bypass (1-8) Sets bypass for reclocking function  Off
 On
 177
 270
 360
 540
 1483.5/1485
Signal Type (1-8) Determines slew rate of incoming  SD
signal  HD
 Sync3
 Sync4
236 Chapter 4
Output Modules

IN1A OUT1
IN1B
IN1C Reclocker Driver
IN1D
IN2A OUT2
IN2B
IN2D
IN3A OUT3
IN3B
IN3D
IN4A OUT4
IN4B
IN4D
IN5A OUT5 Monitoring M-OUT

IN5B Switch
IN5D
IN6A OUT6
IN6B Driver rate
IN6C Reclocker Driver control
System
IN6D Microprocessor control
&
IN7A OUT7 FPGA
Reclocker
IN7B control
IN7D
IN8A OUT8
+3.3V
IN8B Power supply +24V
IN8D +3.3VL +5VL
Power supply
Figure 4-12 PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB Functional Block Diagram

Specification Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

s Table 4-13 PM-HSR-OB/PM-HSR-DOB and PT-HSR-OB/PT-HS-DOB Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs
PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB 8
16
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB
Impedance 75
DVB-ASI
1.5 Gb/s
Reclocking Reclockable for all data rates defined by
SMPTE 292M/259M/344M, DVB-ASI except
177Mb/s
> 16 dB, 540 MHz to 1.5 GHz
Jitter < 0.2UI @ frequency tested
rates
< 270 ps, for SMPTE 292M data rates
238 Chapter 4
Output Modules
PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules
Operation
in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames
Figure 4-13 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ Module
The PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OBG+ are digital multi-rate output modules with reclocking. These
modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s) from the crosspoint
matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock the SMPTE and ASI signals, and send them to
the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s
and 540 Mb/s with no reclocking. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic,
manual, bypass, and mute.
 Automatic mode: automatically detects and reclocks at a 270 Mb/s data rate (this mode
is the default mode)
 Manual mode: manually sets a 270 Mb/s rate for reclocking
 Bypass mode: data bypasses the PLL
 Mute mode: no output at the output pins of the reclocker
Output data from the reclocker is fed to a 75 output driver feeding the 75 BNC.
An 8×1 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.
The OBG+ modules provide power saving features not available in previous OB+ modules.
Individual channels are automatically powered down when no signal is present, or when the
output is not terminated. These features can save up to 2.7 Watts on each output module
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-SR-OBG+ and PT-SR-OBG+
modules.
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PM-SR-OBG+ and PT-SR-OBG+
Note: Modules marked as PM-SR-OBG+DX are PM-SR-OBG+ modules equipped with

PT-MX-SB submodules. Modules marked as PT-SR-OBG+DX are PT-SR-OBG+ modules
Installation


Department.
Configuration
Table 4-14 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-SR-OBG+ and PT-SR-OBG+
240 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-14 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List

Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Reports if data is locked at  Not locked
Signal Type (1-8) [RO] Displays detected slew rate of  SD
incoming signal
Data Rate (1-8) Displays locked data rate at the  270 Mb/s
reclocking stage  Unknown
Mute (1-8) Mutes specified output channel  Mute on
 Mute off
Reclocker Mode (1-8) Sets the reclock mode to lock at the  270 Mb/s
specified rate
Green Mode Enables or disables power saving  Disabled
feature  Enabled
Bypass (1-8) Enforces reclocking bypass function  Auto bypass
 Enforced bypass
Enforced Slew Rate (1-8) Sets slew rate for output signal  SD

Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the  Sync1
 Sync3
 Sync4
Figure 4-14 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-15 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Impedance 75
540 Mb/s
242 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-15 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ Specifications

Item Specification
Reclocking  Automatic for 270 Mb/s
s and 540 Mb/s
DC offset 0 V ± 0.5 V
Rise/fall times 400 ps – 1500 ps
PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules
Operation
Figure 4-15 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Module
The PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ are digital multi-rate output modules with reclocking. These
modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s) from the crosspoint
matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock the SMPTE and ASI signals, and send them to
the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s
and 540 Mb/s with no reclocking. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic,
 Automatic mode: automatically detects and reclocks at a 270 Mb/s data rate (this mode
is the default mode)
 Manual mode: manually sets a 270 Mb/s rate for reclocking

Output data from the reclocker is fed to a 75 output driver feeding the 75 BNC. An 8×1
differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-SR-OB+ and PT-SR-OB+ modules.
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PM-SR-OB+ and PT-SR-OB+
Note: Modules marked as PM-SR-OB+DX are PM-SR-OB+ modules equipped with

PT-MX-SB submodules. Modules marked as PT-SR-OB+DX are PT-SR-OB+ modules equipped
with PT-MX-SB submodules
Installation


Department.
Configuration
244 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-16 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-SR-OB+ and PT-SR-OB+
Table 4-16 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ User-Controllable Parameters List

Mute_ (1-8) Sets mute for any data passing  Muted
automatic  Auto
Auto Bypass (1-8) Enables or disables the reclock  Off
Bypass (1-8) Sets bypass for ignoring reclocking  Off
function  On
Input EQ (1-8) Sets input EQ setting for onboard  12 dB
switchers  5 dB
Data Rate (1-8) Sets the reclock rate  270 Mb/s

 Sync3
 Sync4
PM-SR-OB+ or PT-SR-OB+ module

Reclocker Cable
4:1 mux with driver
1:2 fanout SD
A output 1
B
SD
input 1 C
•
D
• 8:1 mux
• Optional
•
processing
•
ROF
2:1 mux
submodule
•
(single to diff.)
• •
• Reclocker
•
•
SD
4:1 mux with
output 8
1:2 fanout
A Cable
B driver
SD
input 8 C
D
Sync inputs
OB2OB
TDM input Ethernet
+3.3 V +1.2 V +24 V fused
+24 VA Output driver 1-8 slew rate/mute

+24 VB Mux control
voltage monitoring
+5 VL DA core FPGA Reclocker 1-8 control
Reclocker 1-8 reporting
SLID
PIPE CPLD
PRTI
Figure 4-16 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-17 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Impedance 75
540 Mb/s
246 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-17 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Specifications

Item Specification
Reclocking  Automatic for 270 Mb/s
s and 540 Mb/s
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules
PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB: SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output

Modules
Operation
Figure 4-17 PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB Module
Figure 4-18 PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB Module
The SD digital multi-rate output module comes in these variations:

248 Chapter 4
Output Modules
 The PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB are SD output modules with reclocking.

 The PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB are SD output modules with reclocking and dual outputs.
The PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB digital multi-rate output modules

receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s) from the crosspoint matrix,
provide secondary switching, reclock the SMPTE and ASI signals, and send them to the
drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and
540 Mb/s with no reclocking. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic,
 Automatic mode: automatically detects and reclocks at an input SMPTE data rate (this
mode is the default mode)
 Manual mode: manually sets a SMPTE rate for reclocking
Output data from the reclocker is fed to a 75 output driver feeding the 75 BNC.
An 8×1 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB and PM-SR-DOB/

PT-SR-DOB
The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-SR-OB, PM-SR-DOB, PT-SR-OB,
and PT-SR-DOB modules.
Installation


Department.
Configuration
Table 4-18 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-SR-OB, PM-SR-DOB, PT-SR-OB,
and PT-SR-DOB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS
Table 4-18 PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB, PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB User-Controllable Parameters List

automatic  Auto
Autobypass (1-8) Enables or disables the reclock  Off
Bypass (1-8) Sets bypass for ignoring reclocking  Off
function  On
 177
 270
 360
 540
 Sync3
 Sync4
250 Chapter 4
Output Modules

IN1A OUT1
IN1B
IN1D
IN2A OUT2
IN2B
IN2D
IN3A OUT3
IN3B
IN3D
IN4A OUT4
IN4B
IN4D
IN5A OUT5 Monitoring M-OUT

IN5B Switch
IN5D
IN6A OUT6
IN6B Driver rate
IN6C Reclocker Driver control
System
IN6D Microprocessor control
&
IN7A OUT7 FPGA
Reclocker
IN7B control
IN7D
IN8A OUT8
+3.3V
IN8B Power supply +24V
IN8D +3.3VL +5VL
Power supply
Figure 4-19 PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-19 PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB 8
16
PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB
Impedance 75
540 Mb/s
Table 4-19 PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB Specifications

Item Specification
Reclocking Reclockable for all signals defined by SMPTE
259M/344M, DVB-ASI except 177 Mb/s
252 Chapter 4
Output Modules
PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules
PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules
Operation
Figure 4-20 PT-AEB-OB Module
Figure 4-21 PT-AEC-OB Module
The AES output module allows for the connection of 8 or (optionally) 16 output channels of
AES digital audio, using either a balanced or coaxial back module within the Platinum
platform, and is available as a 16-channel card supporting Time Division Multiplexed (TDM)
AES routing.
The module receives 32 balanced low voltage differential signals (LVDS) from the crosspoint
matrix, which are presented to 8 separate 4×1 multiplexers that determine the final routing
of the signal to its destined output channel. Along with the octal 4×1 muxes, signal level
conversion and presence detection are handled within an FPGA-based circuit. The
16-channel TDM version uses only one high speed LVDS signal to receive the various AES
signals for presentation at the outputs.
The AES output module also provides output presence detection and true output
monitoring on each of the 8 (or 16) channels.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB and

PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB
The PT-AEB-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEB-OB and the PT-AEB-OB
output modules. The PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEC-OB
and PT-AEC-OB output modules. DB-25 connectors are used on the PT-AEB-OBP and
PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the
PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-OBP for connection to coaxial
cables.

PM-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB, PT-AEB-OB, and PT-AEC-OB modules.
Installation

254 Chapter 4
Output Modules

Department.

Configuration
Table 4-20 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB,
PT-AEB-OB, and PT-AEC-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via either
parameter list.
Table 4-20 PM-AEB-OB/PM-AEC-OB and PT-AEB-OB/PT-AEC-OB

User-Controllable Parameters List
Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Indicates the presence or absence of  Signal absent
a valid signal  Signal present
Back Module Type Reports coax or balanced back  PT-AEBT-BMO
module  PT-AECT-BMO
 PT-AEB-BMO
 PT-AEC-BMO
 Sync3
 Sync4
FPGA- FPGA-
Input 1A based Input 5A based
Input 1B signal Output 1+ Input 5B signal Output 5+
presence Output 1- presence Output 5-
Input 1C detect & Input 5C detect &
Input 1D output Monitor 1 Input 5D output Monitor 5
switching switching
FPGA- FPGA-
switching switching
FPGA- FPGA-
switching switching
FPGA- FPGA-
switching switching
Internal
control
busses
Bidirectional frame
control signals
+24VA In +5V
from frame Back panel ID
+3.3V Control
+24VB In On Board +2.5V Logic PIPE
from frame Supply PRTI
+1.5V Card health and
+5VL In -5V signal presence LEDs
from frame
Figure 4-23 PM-AEB-OB/PM-AEC-OB and PT-AEB-OB/PT-AEC-OB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-21 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB Pinout Information
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8- 1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
J2 DB-25 Pin No. Not Used

(Outputs 1 – 8)
256 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-21 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB Pinout Information

1+ 13
1- 12
1 Gnd 25
2+ 24
2- 23
2 Gnd 11
3+ 10
3- 9
3 Gnd 22
4+ 21
4- 20
4 Gnd 8
5+ 7
5- 6
5 Gnd 19
6+ 18
6- 17
6 Gnd 5
7+ 4
7- 3
7 Gnd 16
8+ 15
8- 14
8 Gnd 2
Spare Gnd 1
Specifications
Table 4-22 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB AES Balanced Digital Audio Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Output type Balanced, transformer coupled
Output connector DB-25
Impedance 110
Table 4-22 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB AES Balanced Digital Audio Output

Specifications(Continued)
Item Specification
Signal type AES3
Other 40% – 60% duty cycle digital signals
Jitter < 5ns
Output amplitude 5 Vp-p ± 1 V into 110 load
Rise/fall times 5 ns – 30 ns
Propagation delay < 170 ns
Table 4-23 PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB Coaxial Digital Audio Output Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Output connector 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adaptor)
Impedance 75
Jitter < 5 ns
Output amplitude 1.0 Vp-p ± 10% into 75 load
Rise/Fall times 30 ns – 44 ns
258 Chapter 4
Output Modules
PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules with

TDM Capability
PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules with

TDM Capability
Operation
Figure 4-24 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Module
Figure 4-25 PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Module

The AES TDM output module allows for the connection of 16 output channels of AES
digital audio, using either a balanced or coaxial back module within the Platinum platform,
and supports Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) AES routing.
Audio processing functions, as well as signal level conversion and presence detection, are
handled within an FPGA-based circuit. The 16-channel TDM output module uses only one
high speed LVDS signal to receive the various AES signals for presentation at the outputs.
The AES TDM output module also provides output presence detection and true output
monitoring on each of the 16 channels.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB and

PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB
The PT-AEB-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEBT-OB and the
PT-AEBT-OB output modules. The PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the
PM-AECT-OB and PT-AECT-OB output modules. DB-25 connectors are used on the
PT-AEB-OBP and PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC
interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-OBP for
connection to coaxial cables.
Installation

Output Modules on page 367 for the procedure for field expansion of output modules. If
Department.
260 Chapter 4
Output Modules

Department.
Configuration
Table 4-24 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEBT-OB, PM-AECT-OB,
PT-AEBT-OB, and PT-AECT-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via either
parameter list.
Table 4-24 PM-AEBT-OB/PM-AECT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB User-Controllable

Parameters List
Back Module Type Reports coax or balanced back  PT-AEBT-BMO
module  PT-AECT-BMO
 PT-AEB-BMO
 PT-AEC-BMO
 500 Hz
 1K
Disconnect State Select whether to transmit AES  Silence
silence or a DC level when signal  DC
presence is lost
Phase Alarm (1-16) Alarm set if right and left channels  No phase error
Table 4-24 PM-AEBT-OB/PM-AECT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB User-Controllable

Parameters List (Continued)
Audio Level Adjustment (1-32) Indicates gain/attenuation applied 1 0dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB
amplitude
Audio Mute (1-16) Sets mute for any data passing  Muted
 Left to right
 Both
source  Sync 3
 Sync 2
 Sync 1
Transition (1-16) Determines type of transition on a  Quiet switch
given destination  V-fade
 Fade/cut
 Cut/fade
 Synchronous switch
Duration (1-16) Determines transition length  No duration
 Shortest
 Short
 Medium short
 Medium
 Medium long
 Long
 Longest
 Sync3
 Sync4
262 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Input 1A
Input 1B
Input 1C
Input 1D
Input 2A AES output 1
Input 2B
Input 2C Monitor 1
Input 2D
Input 3A AES output 2
Input 3B Monitor 2
Input 3C
Input 3D AES output 3
Input 4A
Input 4B Monitor 3
Input 4C •
Input 4D •
Input 5A
Input 5B •
Input 5C FPGA-based signal •
Input 5D presence detection and •
Input 6A
Input 6B internal distribution •
Input 6C •
Input 6D
Input 7A •
Input 7B •
Input 7C AES output 16
Input 7D
Input 8A Monitor 16
Input 8B
Input 8C
Input 8D
TDM input
Internal control bus
+24VA in Card status and

from frame +5V signal presence
+24VB in On-board +3.3V LEDs
from frame supply PIPE
+2.5V Control logic
Back module
+5VL in +1.2V ID signals PRTI
from frame
Figure 4-27 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB/PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-25 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Pinout Information
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8- 1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
DB-25 DB-25
J2 (Outputs 1 – 8) J1 (Outputs 9 – 16)
Pin No. Pin No.
1+ 13 9+ 13
1- 12 9- 12
1 Gnd 25 9 Gnd 25
2+ 24 10+ 24
2- 23 10- 23
2 Gnd 11 10 Gnd 11
3+ 10 11+ 10
3- 9 11- 9
3 Gnd 22 11 Gnd 22
4+ 21 12+ 21
4- 20 12- 20
4 Gnd 8 12 Gnd 8
5+ 7 13+ 7
5- 6 13- 6
5 Gnd 19 13 Gnd 19
6+ 18 14+ 18
6- 17 14- 17
6 Gnd 5 14 Gnd 5
7+ 4 15+ 4
7- 3 15- 3
7 Gnd 16 15 Gnd 16
8+ 15 16+ 15
8- 14 16- 14
8 Gnd 2 16 Gnd 2
Spare Gnd 1 Spare Gnd 1
264 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Specifications
Table 4-26 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB AES Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs 16
Output type Balanced, transformer coupled
Impedance 110
Signal type AES3
Jitter < 5ns
Output amplitude 5 Vp-p ± 1 V into 110 load
Rise/fall times 5 ns – 30 ns
Table 4-27 PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Specifications

Item Specification
Output connector 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adaptor)
Impedance 75
Jitter < 5 ns
Output amplitude 1.0 Vp-p ± 10% into 75 load
Rise/Fall times 30 ns – 44 ns
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules
PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules

with Dual Output
Operation
Figure 4-28 PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB Module

266 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Figure 4-29 PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB Module
The SD to analog video encoder module comes in these variations:
 The PM-ENC-OB and PT-ENC-OB are SD-to-analog video encoder output modules.
 The PM-ENC-DOB and PT-ENC-DOB are SD-to-analog video encoder output modules
with dual outputs.
The PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB SD-to-analog video encoder modules convert a block of eight

serial SD digital signals to composite NTSC or PAL video signals.
The PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB modules accept 32 serial digital (SD) video signals from the
crosspoint module, which are presented to four FPGA-based deserializer chips. Within each
of the deserializer chips are two 4×1 multiplexers that switch the signals to the receiver
blocks.
The two receiver blocks within each of the deserializer chips perform the functions of
extracting and locking all conversion functions to the bit-serial clock. To do this they
 Use the internal and external PLL circuitry to descramble the SMPTE non-return to zero
(NRZI) SDI stream
 Find the “x3FF” start of active video/end of active video (EAV / SAV) frame boundaries
 Load the decoded data stream into a “serial in/parallel out” (SIPO) shift register for
exporting the data in 10-bit parallel form
The 10-bit parallel data is loaded into the encoder chip on the rising edge of a 27 MHz
pipeline clock, where it is processed for digital noise reduction (DNR) to reduce
low-amplitude, high-frequency noise. Gamma correction, sub-alias filtering (SAF), and
user-based color adjustments are performed in the “parallel CCIR-601” domain. The signal
is then separated into its chrominance and luminance components, sent through the
low-pass filters (LPF) to reduce aliasing effects incurred as a process of encoding the signal,
and resampled at 2X to further reduce aliasing. The oversampled parallel signal is finally
converted to analog composite video within the 10-bit DAC stage, sent through a 4-pole
low pass filter, and buffered for presentation to the output BNC connector.
Through the control system, you can control the low-pass and notch filter selection, NTSC
or PAL video standard, video pedestal, internal test signal generator, chrominance level and
hue (NTSC only), brightness, sharpness, and digital noise reduction.
You must be careful when implementing the notch and low pass filters, as a “tradeoff”
between frequency response and out of band noise often takes place.
Each of the eight channels provide standard reporting of signal presence via card-edge
mounted LEDs (Output 1 – Output 8) and via the control system. Additional system LEDs
indicate the following:
 The power supply indicator (POWER) shows that +24V is present on the module.
 The control system acknowledgment indicator (ACT CTRL) shows that the control
system is communicating with the module.
 The Output Active warning indicator (ACT OUT) indicates that a valid input signal has
been switched to an output on this module.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB and

PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB
The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ENC-OB, PM-ENC-DOB,
PT-ENC-OB, and PT-ENC-DOB modules.

PM-ENC-OB, PM-ENC-DOB, PT-ENC-OB, and PT-ENC-DOB modules.
Installation


Department.

Configuration
Table 4-28 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-ENC-OB, PM-ENC-DOB,
PT-ENC-OB, and PT-ENC-DOB modules. These parameters are accessible via either
parameter list.
268 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-28 PM-ENC-OB/PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-DOB User-Controllable

Parameters List
Chrominance Filter Type (1-8) Sets chrominance filter type  1.3 MHz
 0.65 MHz
 1 MHz
 2 MHz
 Reserved
 CIF
 QCIF
 3 MHz
Luminance Filter Type (1-8) Enables or disables luminance filter  NTSC low pass
type  PAL low pass
 NTSC notch
 PAL notch
 Extended
 CIF
 QCIF
 Reserved
Video Standard (1-8) Sets video standard  NTSC
 PAL-B/D/G/H/I
 PAL-N
Pedestal Enable (1-8) Enables 7.5 IRE video setup level  Enable
 Disable
DNR (1-8) Enables or disables digital noise  Enable
reduction  Disable
Brightness (1-8) Sets brightness level –7° to 22°
Contrast (1-8) Sets contrast level 0-192
Chrominance Saturation (1-8) Sets chrominance saturation level 0-1255
Chrominance Hue (Tint) (1-8) Sets chrominance hue level –22° to 22°
Lock Detect (1-8) Reports presence or absence of  Signal absent
 Sync3
 Sync4
Figure 4-30 PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB Functional Block Diagram

270 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Specifications
Table 4-29 PM-ENC-OB/PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-DOB Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB 8
16
PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB
Impedance 75
Signal type NTSC, PAL
Output amplitude 1.0Vp-p ± 10%
Return loss > 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz
Filtering CCIR-601 compliant
Resolution 10 bits
Frequency response ± 0.05 dB to 5.2 MHz
Differential gain < 0.8%
Differential phase < 0.6 
Bulk delay < 80 s
Signal to noise ratio (RMS) > 65 dB unified - weighting
PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output

Modules
Operation
Figure 4-31 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Module
The PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB audio D/A output module provides the platform for AES
digital to analog audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. This option provides
8 channels of conversion with basic Platinum I/O module features. The PT-DACT-OB option
provides greater conversion capacity, made available via Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).
This option provides 16 channels of conversion using the same front and back module
combinations. See page 278 for more information.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-DAC-OB and the PT-DAC-OB
272 Chapter 4
Output Modules

The optional PT-HSR-OM and PT-HSRAEC-OM modules provides output monitoring of AES
signals for the PM-DAC-OB and PT-DAC-OB modules.
Installation


Department.

Configuration
Table 4-28 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-DAC-OB and PT-DAC-OB
Table 4-30 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB User-Controllable Parameters List

Lock Detect (1-8) Reports presence or absence of  Signal absent
valid input signal  Signal present
Mute (1-8) Mutes audio  Mute on
 Mute off
Vol A (1-8) Attenuate the audio signal in 1 dB  –127 dB - 0 dB
increments
 Sync3
 Sync4
274
OM A
Serial clock
Left right clk

Receiver DAC
Chapter 4
Serial data Output

OM B
1
Module
Output Modules
I2C Bus I2C

[1 of 4] Control Bus [1 of 8]
Output driver control
/4
I2C
Pipe I2C
Output /8
AES input Output cell 2
1A-1D 2 OM cntrl
Frame control
A Output
Output cell 3 B 3 PWR
monitoring
AES input Output +17VA
Output cell 4
2A-2D 4 +24VA -17VA
+5V
Output +24VB +3.3V
Output cell 5 +2.5V
5 +1.5V
Frame power
AES input Output

Output cell 6
3A-3D 6
Output Output
Output cell 7
7 A monitoring
B
OM 1
AES input Output
FPGA
Output cell 8 •
4A-4D 8
• ROF+
ROF-
•
•
A
AES input
OM 8
5A-5D B
OM cntrl
AES input
6A-6D
Figure 4-33 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Functional Block Diagram

AES input
7A-7D
AES input
8A-8D
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-31 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Pinout Diagram
Outputs DB-44 Outputs DB-44 Not Used

1–4 Pin No. 5–8 Pin No.
1A+ 15 5A+ 8
1A- 30 5A- 7
1A Gnd 44 5A, 6A 22
Gnd
1B+ 43 5B+ 36
1B- 28 5B- 21
1B Gnd 42 5B Gnd 35
2A+ 14 6A+ 6
2A- 13 6A- 5
2A Gnd 29 6B+ 34
2B+ 41 6B- 19
2B- 26 6B, 7A 20
Gnd
2B Gnd 40 7A+ 4
3A+ 12 7A- 3
3A- 11 7B+ 32
3A Gnd 27 7B- 17
3B+ 24 7B Gnd 33
3B- 39 8A+ 1
3B, 4A 25 8A- 2
Gnd
4A+ 10 8A, 8B 18
Gnd
4A- 9 8B+ 31
4B+ 23 8B- 16
4B- 38
4B Gnd 37
276 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Specifications
Table 4-32 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output – Standard Version

Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz AES frame rate.
Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Output type Balanced
Impedance 66
Maximum output amplitude +28 dBu
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in 1 dB steps,
± 0.5 dB
Conversion type 128x over sampling, fifth-order,
delta-sigma
Resolution 24 bits
AES frame rates 32 kHz – 192 kHz
Linearity deviation < ±0.5 dB
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +23 dBu
Idle channel noise < -100 dBFS CCIR-RMS
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS
hostile, typical
–1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 4-33 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output – 600 Version

Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Impedance 600
Maximum output amplitude +22 dBm
Conversion type 128x oversampling, fifth-order, delta-sigma
Resolution 24 bits
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +17 dBm
Idle channel noise < –100 dBFS CCIR-RMS
hostile, typical
–1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
278 Chapter 4
Output Modules
PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter

Output Modules with TDM Capability
Operation
Figure 4-34 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Module
The PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB audio D/A output module provides the platform for AES
digital to analog audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. The TDM option
provides 16 channels of conversion with enhanced Platinum I/O module features. The
PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB provides greater conversion capacity, made available via Time
Division Multiplexing (TDM).
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-DACT-OB and the PT-DACT-OB
Installation Output Module Installation


Department.
Configuration
Table 4-34 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-DACT-OB and PT-DACT-OB
280 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-34 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List

 500Hz
 1K
Phase Alarm (1-16) Alarm set if right and left channels  No phase error
0dBFS Setting Sets 0 dBFS level for digital to 13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB increments
analog conversion
Audio Level Adjustment (1-32) Indicates gain/attenuation applied 1 0dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB
amplitude
Audio Mute (1-16) Sets mute for any data passing  Muted
 Left to right
 Both
source  Sync 3
 Sync 2
 Sync 1
Table 4-34 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Sync Select Selects one of the four sync inputs  Sync 4
as the external reference  Sync 3
 Sync 2
 Sync 1
Transition (1-16) Determines type of transition on a  Quiet switch
given destination  V-fade
 Fade/cut
 Cut/fade
 Synchronous switch
Duration (1-16) Determines transition length  No duration
 Shortest
 Short
 Medium short
 Medium
 Medium long
 Long
 Longest
282
OM A
Serial clock
AES input Left right clk

Receiver DAC
Chapter 4
1A-1D A
Serial data Output
OM B
B 1
Module
Output Modules
I2C Bus I2C

[1 of 4] Control Bus [1 of 8]
Output driver control
AES input /4
I2C
2A-2D Pipe I2C
A Output /8
Output cell 2
B 2 OM cntrl
Frame control
A Output
AES input Output cell 3 B 3 PWR
3A-3D monitoring
A Output
Output cell 4 +17VA
B 4 +24VA -17VA
+5V
A Output +24VB +3.3V
Output cell 5 +2.5V
AES input B 5 +1.5V
Frame power
4A-4D
A Output
Output cell 6 B 6
A Output Output
Output cell 7 B
AES input 7 A monitoring
5A-5D
A B
OM 1
Output
FPGA
Output cell 8 •
B 8
• ROF+
A Output • ROF-

B 9 •
6A-6D A
A Output
Output cell 10
B 10 B
OM 16
A Output
B 11 OM cntrl
7A-7D
A Output
Output cell 12
B 12
A Output
B 13
Figure 4-36 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Functional Block Diagram

8A-8D
A Output
Output cell 14
B 14
A Output
Output cell 15
B 15
TDM input A Output
Output cell 16
B 16
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-35 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Pinout Information
Outputs DB-44 Outputs DB-44 Outputs DB-44 Outputs DB-44

1–4 Pin No. 5–8 Pin No. 9 – 12 Pin No. 13 – 16 Pin No.
1A+ 15 5A+ 8 9A+ 15 13A+ 8
1A- 30 5A- 7 9A- 30 13A- 7
1A Gnd 44 5A, 6A 22 9A Gnd 44 13A, 22
Gnd 14A Gnd
1B+ 43 5B+ 36 9B+ 43 13B+ 36
1B- 28 5B- 21 9B- 28 13B- 21
1B Gnd 42 5B Gnd 35 9B Gnd 42 13B Gnd 35
2A+ 14 6A+ 6 10A+ 14 14A+ 6
2A- 13 6A- 5 10A- 13 14A- 5
2A Gnd 29 6B+ 34 10A Gnd 29 14B+ 34
2B+ 41 6B- 19 10B+ 41 14B- 19
2B- 26 6B, 7A 20 10B- 26 14B, 15A 20
Gnd Gnd
2B Gnd 40 7A+ 4 10B Gnd 40 15A+ 4
3A+ 12 7A- 3 11A+ 12 15A- 3
3A- 11 7B+ 32 11A- 11 15B+ 32
3A Gnd 27 7B- 17 11A Gnd 27 15B- 17
3B+ 24 7B Gnd 33 11B+ 24 15B Gnd 33
3B- 39 8A+ 1 11B- 39 16A+ 1
3B, 4A 25 8A- 2 11B, 12A 25 16A- 2
Gnd Gnd
4A+ 10 8A, 8B 18 12A+ 10 16A, 16B 18
Gnd Gnd
4A- 9 8B+ 31 12A- 9 16B+ 31
4B+ 23 8B- 16 12B+ 23 16B- 16
4B- 38 12B- 38
4B Gnd 37 12B Gnd 37
284 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Specifications
Table 4-36 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Digital to

Analog Audio Output – Standard Version
Item Specification
Impedance 66
Maximum output amplitude +28 dBu
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in 1 dB steps,
± 0.5 dB
Resolution 24 bits
Linearity deviation < ±0.5 dB
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz,
-1 dBFS = +23 dBu
hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at –1
dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 4-37 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Digital to

Analog Audio Output – 600 Version
Item Specification
Impedance 600
Maximum output amplitude +22 dBm
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in 1 dB steps,
± 0.5 dB
Resolution 24 bits
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz,
-1 dBFS = +17 dBm
hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at –1
dBFS = +17 dBm)
286 Chapter 4
Output Modules
PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Transmitter

Module
Operation
Figure 4-37 PT-HSR1310S-OB Module (PT-FO-BMO Back Panel I/O Module Attached)
The PT-HSR1310S-OB is a fiber optical HD/SD serial video transmitter module. Each module
has eight fiber optical transmitter receptacles mounted on the metal back panel of the back
module. A switched video data stream by the crosspoint module enters the front module. A
4×1 mux in the reclocker integrated circuit serves as a secondary switcher for the entire
switching matrix. The selected data is processed by the reclocker. The reclocker provides
three processing modes: Reclocking (automatic, manual); Bypass (automatic, enforced); and
Mute.
The processed data stream then enters a 1×2 buffer. One of the outputs is fed to the back
module for E/O conversion. The second output is used for system monitoring.
An E-O converter is installed in each channel on the back module. It converts electrical data
processed by the reclocker to optical data. This conversion stage also provides alarm and
auto-protection functions.
The control circuit consists of an FPGA and serial-to-parallel shift registers. In addition to
common functions (PIPE port, PRTI port, slot ID, and power start trigger), this FPGA and
associated circuits also control video monitoring and data loss of the reclockers, laser
failure, and back module identification.
On PT-HSR1310S-OB modules, the channel status LEDs are bicolor, as follows:
Table 4-38 PT-HSR1310S-OB Channel Status LEDs

Channel Status
Meaning
LED Color
Off (no color) Data is not reclocked, laser diode is still functional (no data
is output or the output data bypasses the re-clocking
circuit)
Green Data is detected and reclocked, laser diode is functional
Red Laser diode is deactivated, regardless of whether or not
data is reclockable
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-HSR1310S-OB

The PT-FO-BMO back module corresponds to PT-HSR1310S-OB modules.
Installation

All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Specialized Installation
and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB
Fiber Optical Modules on page 371 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement
of PT-HSR1310S-OB modules. (Also, see Appendix B, Laser Safety Guidelines on
page 463, for more information about lasers.) If you need to order additional components,

Department.
Configuration
Table 4-39 on page 288 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-HSR1310S-OB
288 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-39 PT-HSR1310S-OB User-Controllable Parameters List

Lock detect Indicates a signal is present on the  No
output  Yes
Laser failure [RO] Indicates an output laser driver has  No
failed  Yes
Mute Indicates that an output is muted or  Mute
unmuted  Unmute
Reclocker mode When active, the standard is  Manual
automatically detected from the  Auto
input data rate
Autobypass Automatically bypasses the  Off
reclocker stage when the PLL is not  On
locked
Bypass For signals routed to wideband  Off
crosspoint only - tells control to  On
make switch regardless of signal
presence
Laser enable Enables the output laser  On
 Off
Enforced slew rate Forces the slew rate on the output  HD
signal  SD
ASI/177 select Disables 177 Mbps data rate in the  177
AUTO data rate detection circuit  ASI
(prevents a false lock to 177 Mbps
when using DVB/ASI)
Input EQ Sets input EQ setting for onboard  12 dB
switchers  5 dB
Data rate Sets the data reclock rate  143
 177
 270
 360
 540
 1483.5/1485
Sync select Determines which reference signal  Sync1
the board uses to switch  Sync2
 Sync3
 Sync4
Figure 4-38 PT-HSR1310S-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-40 PT-HSR1310S-OB Specifications

Item Specification
Connector ST
Return loss 20 dB
Mode Single-mode (9 m)
Laser FP
Wavelength 1310 nm ± 40 nm
or
1550 nm ± 40 nm
Maximum spectral line width 10 nm
Maximum output power < -7.5 dBm
Minimum output power > -9.5 dBm
290 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-40 PT-HSR1310S-OB Specifications (Continued)

Item Specification
Rise time and fall time <1.5 nS for SD
<270 pS for HD
Extinction ratio > 6.6 (8.2 dB)
Jitter < 0.2 UI
PT-MUX-3G: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability
PT-MUX: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI

and SD-SDI Capability
Operation
Figure 4-39 PT-MX-SB Submodule
Figure 4-40 PT-MX-SB Submodule Installed on a Platinum Output Module

292 Chapter 4
Output Modules
When installed on PM-HSR-OBG+, PT-HSR-OBG+, PM-HSR-OB+, PT-HSR-OB+,

PT-HSRO-OB+, PT-HSRO-OBG+, PM-SR-OBG+, PT-SR-OBG+, PM-SR-OB+ or PT-SR-OB+, the
PT-MX-SB submodule operates as an audio embedder1. It muxes up to 4 groups (16
channels) of audio into each SDI path, and receives up to 128 channels from the Platinum
audio TDM crosspoint2.
 Each SDI channel supports the following video processing standards:

 SD-SDI
 525i 59.94
 625i 50
 1.5 HD-SDI
 720p 25
 720p 29.97
 720p 30
 720p 50
 720p 59.94
 720p 60
 1080p 23.98
 1080p 24
 1080p 29.97
 1080p 30
 1080p 25
 1080i 50
 1080i 59.94
 1080i 60
 1035i 59.94
 1035i 60
 1080sF 23.98
 1080sF 24
 3.0 HD-SDI3
 1080p 50
 1080p 59.94
 1080p 60
 Each SDI channel supports the following audio functionality:

 Embedded 4 groups (16 mono channels)
 Embedded audio at 48 kHz sample rate
 Audio Proc (gain, invert, mute)
 Audio Swap with quiet switching
 Audio Sum
 Option available to remove/clean embedded audio
 Each submodule operates in either 3 Gb/s, HD, or SD mode, although not more than 1
format simultaneously on the same module
1 All audio to be embedded must be locked to the reference that is applied to the Mux.
2
All 128 channels of audio from the audio TDM crosspoint already must be locked to this reference.
3 3G HD-SDI is available as a licensed option.
 All SDI inputs are genlocked to the same video reference

 Provides a simple test pattern generator (full field color bars)
Operation Notes
A Genlock reference must be applied to the PT-MX-SB.
All SDI channels applied to the PT-MX-SB must be locked to the applied Genlock Reference.
All SDI channels applied to the PT-MX-SB must be of the same data rate (SD, 1.5G HD, or
3G HD) and must have the same frame rate.
The module will determine its data rate by the Input Rate parameter.
The user can specify it to be SD, 1.5HD or 3G HD. If set to Auto, the data rate is determined
by the first detected SDI signal. (For example, if signals are applied to SDI 1-8, the data rate
is determined by SDI1. If SDI1 is removed, then SDI2 determines the data rate.)
The PT-MX-SB will automatically bypass a specific SDI channel under the following
conditions:
 No signal is detected and LOV mode is set to Pass Input

 The signal is not locked to the reference and Unlocked SDI Bypass is enabled
 The signal data rate does not match the module’s data rate

3 Sum
4 Swap/Copy
5 Mute (if enabled)
Note: All video channels need to be either SD, 1.5 G HD-SDI, or 3.0 G HD-SDI. All video
channels must operate at the same frame rate (for example, 29.97Hz or 25Hz, and so
forth), and must be genlocked.
Installation
This option is not user-upgradeable. For further assistance regarding PT-MX-SB hardware/
firmware requirements installation, please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
294 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-41 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-MX-SB modules. These
Note: Because the PT-MX-SB parameter list has multiple levels, Table 4-41 includes a Tree
View Location column. This column indicates the parameter’s location on the Navigator
parameter tree list.
Table 4-41 PT-MX-SB User-Controllable Parameters List

RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection
Parameter Tree View No. of Instance Description Options
Name Location Instances Type
GenLock Video Genlock 1 Indicates if a GenLock reference signal • Yes
Present is detected • No
GenLock Video Genlock 1 Indicates if the module is locked to the • Yes
Locked GenLock reference • No
GenLock Standard Genlock 1 Indicates the video standard of the • Unknown
GenLock reference • 525i 59.94
• 625i 50
• 720p 25
• 720p 29.97
• 720p 30
• 720p 50
• 720p 59.94
• 720p 60
• 1080p 23.98
• 1080p 24
• 1080p 29.97
• 1080p 30
• 1080p 25
• 1080i 50
• 1080i 59.94
• 1080i 60
• 1080p 50
• 1080p 59.94
• 1080p 60
• 1035i 59.94
• 1035i 60
• 1080sF 23.98
• 1080sF 24
Audio Format (1-8) Input > Audio > Audio 16 Audio Indicates if the audio channel is PCM or • PCM
Format Channels 1-16 non-PCM audio • Non-PCM
Audio Presence (1-8) Input > Audio > Audio 16 Audio Indicates if audio is being received • Yes
Presence Channels 1-16 from the audio TDM crosspoint • No
Input Rate Input > Video 1 Specifies at which data rate the • Auto
module should operate: if set to Auto, • SD
the data rate is determined by the first
detected input • 1.5 HD
For proper operation, all SDI channels • 3.0 HD
must operate at the same data rate
(SD, 1.5G HD, or 3G HD) and must be
locked to the applied Genlock
reference
Table 4-41 PT-MX-SB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

SDI Video Std. Input > Video > SDI 1 Indicates the detected video standard • Unknown
Feedback (1-8) Video Std. Feedback • 525i 59.94
• 625i 50
• 720p 25
• 720p 29.97
• 720p 30
• 720p 50
• 720p 59.94
• 720p 60
• 1080p 23.98
• 1080p 24
• 1080p 29.97
• 1080p 30
• 1080p 25
• 1080i 50
• 1080i 59.94
• 1080i 60
• 1080p 50
• 1080p 59.94
• 1080p 60
• 1035i 59.94
• 1035i 60
• 1080sF 23.98
• 1080sF 24
SDI Video Present Input > Video > SDI 1 Indicates if the SDI signal is present • Yes
(1-8) Video Present • No
EDH Present (1-8) Input > Video > EDH 1 Indicates if EDH is present (applies to • Yes
Present 525i 59.94 and 625i only) • No
Y CRC Error Counter Input > Video > Y CRC 1 Displays the number of luminance (Y) 0-255
(1-8) Error Counter CRC errors that have been detected
C CRC Error Counter Input > Video > C CRC 1 Displays the number of chrominance 0-255
(1-8) Error Counter (C) CRC errors that have been detected
EDH Error Counter Input > Video > EDH 1 Displays the number of EDH errors that 0-32767
(1-8) Error Counter have been detected
CRC/EDH Error Clear Input > Video > CRC/ 1 Clears the Y and C CRC Error and EDH • Yes
(1-8) EDH Error Clear Error counters • No
Loss of Video (1-8) Processing > Video 1 Specifies whether to continue to pass • Pass
-Loss of Video the input or switch to black on the loss • Black
of video
TSG Override Processing > Video > 1 Enables and disables TSG Override • Yes
TSG mode • No
This mode of operation is used when
the PT-MUX is meant to operate as a
standalone TSG; that is, no SDI signals
are applied
When enabled, the data rate and
frame rate is determined by the TSG
Standard 1
For example, if TSG Standard 1 is
720p60, the data rate is 1.5G HD and
the frame rate is 60Hz
This data rate and frame rate apply for
all 8 SDI channels; however, for 1.5G
data rates it is possible to mix 1080i
and 720p standards (for example, some
can be 720p60 and others 1080i60)
You cannot mix SD, 1.5G HD and 3.0G
HD data rates
You cannot mix 50Hz, 59.94Hz and
60Hz modes; all standards need to be
either 1/1 or 1/1.001
This mode should be used with
caution; it is intended for use when the
system is being tested or commissioned
296 Chapter 4
Output Modules

TSG Enable (1-8) Processing > Video > 1 Enables and disables the TSG • Yes
TSG Enable • No
TSG Standard (1-8) Processing > Video > 1 Selects the video standard for the TSG • Follow RX
TSG Standard (default is to follow the detected • 525i 59.94
standard)
• 625i 50
• 720p 25
• 720p 29.97
• 720p 30
• 720p 50
• 720p 59.94
• 720p 60
• 1080p 23.98
• 1080p 24
• 1080p 29.97
• 1080p 30
• 1080p 25
• 1080i 50
• 1080i 59.94
• 1080i 60
• 1080p 50
• 1080p 59.94
• 1080p 60
• 1035i 59.94
• 1035i 60
• 1080sF 23.98
• 1080sF 24
TSG Pattern (1-8) Processing > Video > 1 Selects the test pattern for the TSG • Bar 75
TSG Pattern • Bar 100
• Eq. Test
• PLL Test
ADS Clean (1-8) Processing > 1 Enables and disables the cleaning of • Yes
Embedding > ADS the Ancillary Data Space before • No
Clean embedding audio
Group Append Error Processing > 4 Audio Groups Indicates if there is an error with • Yes
(1-8) Embedding > Group 1- 4 appending the embedded audio • No
Append Error An error will occur if the audio
embedder cannot insert the specified
audio group in the SDI stream
Group OverWrite Processing > 4 Audio Groups Indicates if there is an error with • Yes
Error (1-8) Embedding > Group 1- 4 overwriting the embedded audio • No
OverWrite Error An error will occur the audio
embedder is not able to overwrite the
specified audio group in the SDI stream
Group Embedding Processing > 4 Audio Groups Specifies the audio embedding mode • Off
Mode (1-8) Embedding > Group 1- 4 for each audio group • Auto
Embedding Mode If set to auto, it will overwrite if the
audio group is already present, or • Append
append if the audio group is not • Overwrite
present
Audio Level Adjust Processing > Audio > 16 Audio Adjusts the audio level (gain) for each -18 dB to +18 dB in 0.1
(1-8) Level Adjust Channels 1-16 audio channel dB steps (0 dB)
Swap/Copy (1-8) Processing > Audio > 8 Audio Pairs 1-8 Specifies whether to swap or copy the • No Swap
Swap_Copy audio within a pair • Swap
Able to swap left and right channels,
copy left channel to the right channel, • Left to Right
and copy the right channel to the left • Right to Left
Word Length (1-8) Processing > Audio > 1 Specifies the audio word length for all • 16 bits
Word Length audio channels within the SDI stream • 20 bits
• 24 bits
Polarity Reversal (1-8) Processing > Audio > 16 Audio Specifies whether the audio channel • Yes
Polarity Reversal Channels 1-16 should be inverted • No

Audio Mute (1-8) Processing > Audio > 16 Audio Specifies whether the audio channel • On
Mute Channels 1-16 should be muted • Off
Fade Rate (1-8) Processing > Audio > 1 Specifies the fade rate 0 - 10 s, in 1 s steps (1
Fade Rate s)
Summing (1-8) Processing > Audio > 8 Audio Pairs 1-8 Specifies whether to sum the audio • None
Summing within a pair • Left To Right
Left to Right - the summed audio is
placed in the right channel • Right To Left
Right to Left - the summed audio is • Both
placed in the left channel
Both - the summed audio is placed in
both left and right channels
Tones (1-8) Processing > Audio > 16 Audio Enables tones for the audio channels • Pass Input
Tones Channels 1-16 There are two tone frequencies to • 500 Hz
choose from
Note that the tones are at 0 dBFS by • 1 kHz
default
Unlocked SDI Bypass Output 1 When enabled, if a video input is not • Yes
locked to the applied Genlock • No
reference, this video path will be
automatically bypassed
Sub Module Bypass Output > Sub Module 1 Status indication of the bypass state for • Yes, No Input
(1-8) Bypass each SDI channel • Yes, Not Locked
• Yes, Rate
Mismatch
• No
Parameter Update General 1 Defines the rate at which parameters Slow
Rate are updated Medium
Fast
Module ID General 1 Indicates the module serial number String
License Key General 1 Enter license key to enabled licensed String
options
Licensed Options General 1 Indicates which licensed options are String
available
Temperature General 1 Indicates the temperature of the FPGA String
H/W Version General 1 Indicates the hardware version String
SDI IN De-serializer
Video Mux
From Crosspoint
Embedder Serializer SDI OUT
TSG
Audio Audio
Audio TDM Audio
Invert & Swap/
Crosspoint Sum
Scale Copy
Figure 4-41 PT-MX-SB Functional Block Diagram

298 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Specifications
Table 4-42 PT-MX-SB Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Quantization 10 bits
Standard
3.0 HD-SDI SMPTE 424M, 1080p 50, 1080p 59.94,
1080p 60
SMPTE 292M, 720p 25, 720p 29.97, 720p
1.5 HD-SDI 30, 720p 50, 720p 59.94, 720p 60, 1080p
23.98, 1080p 24, 1080p 29.97, 1080p 30,
1080p 25, 1080i 50, 1080i 59.94, 1080i
60, 1035i 59.94, 1035i 60, 1080sF 23.98,
1080sF 24
SMPTE 259M-C, 525i 59.94, 625i 50
SD-SDI
Timing jitter
3.0 HD-SDI < 2 UI p-p, from 10 Hz and up
< 1 UI p-p, from 10 Hz and up
1.5 HD-SDI < 0.2 UI p-p, from 10 Hz and up
SD-SDI
Alignment jitter
3.0 HD-SDI < 0.2 UI p-p, from 1 kHz and up
< 0.2 UI p-p, from 100 kHz and up
1.5 HD-SDI < 0.2 UI p-p, from 100 kHz and up
SD-SDI
Power consumption 30 W
Max. operating temperature 104°F (40°C)
PT-MADI4X-OBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface

(MADI) Output Module
MADI (Serial Multichannel Audio Digital Interface) is an industry-standard electronic
communications protocol that defines the data format and electrical characteristics of an
interface carrying multiple channels of digital audio. MADI supports multi-channel audio
transmission through copper (coaxial) cable or multi mode fiber cable.
MADI is widely used in the audio industry, especially in the professional sector. Its
advantages over other audio digital interface protocols and standards are support of a
greater number of channels per line.
Platinum now offers MADI support enabling seamless integration of Audio Consoles and
other third party Audio equipment with MADI I/O into the Imagine Communications Audio/
Video routing framework. MADI support is offered through the following standard full
length Platinum boards:
 A four channel MADI input board and electrical or optical back module.
See PT-MADI4X-IBG MADI Input Module on page 157.
 A four channel MADI output board and electrical or optical back module
See PT-MADI4X-OBG Output Module on page 300.
MADI Input AES Audio Embedded Audio Analog Audio

PT-AECT Input PT-FSDMX Input PT-ADCT Input

PT-MADI4X-IBG Input Module
Up to 128 mono channels mapped to TDM

(unused channels muted)
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels
PT-AECT Output PT-MUX Output PT-DACT Output

MADI Output AES Output SDI Output Analog Output
Platinum Frame
Figure 4-42 MADI Input and Output Modules (and other audio routing options) in a Platinum Frame
300 Chapter 4
Output Modules

The PT-MADI4C-OBG / PT-MADI4O-OBG output module is an AES10-2008 (MADI)
compliant audio output board that supports two MADI formats: 56 and 64 channels. Audio
data is encapsulated into the MADI transport stream at a sample rate of 48kHz and typically
locked to the same Reference as the TDM Receiver.
The PT-MADI4X-OBG output module can encode up to128 TDM audio channels into up to
4 MADI outputs, with each output capable of up to 64 channels each (or 32 AES stereo
pairs) of PCM Audio or non-PCM data, such as Dolby-E or Dolby-D.
Electrical Back Module

The PT-MADI4C-OBG output module has a built-in electrical back module that provides 4
BNC connectors (there are a total of 8 connectors but the last 4 are unused and covered).
Figure 4-43 PT-MADI4C-OBG Output Module
Optical Back Module

The PT-MADI4O-OBG Optical (Multi-mode Fiber) SFP Back Module is same one used for
the MADI Optical Input Module; break away tabs determine if the back module is to be
used as input or output. The Back Module hosts the cages for up to four Dual-Rx Small
Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Fiber Optic Modules (Rx or Tx). Only two of the four ‘cages’ will
be used. The back module has to be mounted onto the Platinum frame and the Front
Module detaches from the Back Module when the Front Module is pulled out from the
frame.
The PT-MADI4O-OBG comes pre-fitted with one MADI compliant, Dual-Tx SFP module. See
Specifications for details.
Figure 4-44 PT-MADI4O-OBG Output Module
Figure 4-45 PT-MADI40-OBG Back Module
Controlling the MADI Output Module through Navigator

You can access and control PT-MADI4x-OBG parameters through Navigator. Follow these
steps to discover your module:
302 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Discovery
1 Start Navigator. Ensure you are in Build Mode (File > Operational Mode > Build).
2 Click Tools > Discovery and then click the Options button.
3 Click the Add button and provide the IP address to the (Platinum) frame that contains your
PT-MADI4C-OBG module. Ensure you place a check beside the appropriate checkbox in the
Select Products for Discovery section.
4 Click OK and then OK again. Click the Start button to start the Discovery.
5 Once Discovery is complete, click the Save button.
Using Navigator Control Mode

1 Switch to Control Mode (File > Operational Mode > Control).
Note: If you do not want to use Navigator Control mode (available in the 30 day trial
version and the paid version of Navigator), you can also control your MADI module through
the Build mode (see Using Navigator Build Mode).
2 In the Navigation pane, expand the contents of the Discovery Folder and drill down to your
PT-MADI4X-OBG module under Output Cards in the Platinum frame.
3 Double click the PT-MADI4X-OBG Module to open up the Parameters.
For more details on the parameters, see PT-MADI4X-OBG Parameters on page 306.
Using Navigator Build Mode

Once you discover your PT-MADI4x-OBG module and save the results of your discovery (see
Steps 1-5 in Controlling the MADI Output Module through Navigator), follow these
steps:
1 in the Navigation pane expand the Routing Group<Your Platinum Frame IP> icon, then
double click the Platinum Frame icon.
2 This opens up the Edit Platinum Frame dialog. Go to the Detected Matrices tab.
3 A list of Input and Output modules are displayed on the right of the dialog.Right click the
MADI option under the Output column and select the View Output Module option.
4 The Module Parameters dialog displays a list of all output parameters.
Figure 4-46 Module Parameters for PT-MADI4C-OBG
Read only parameters show their status in Gray, for example, the TDM Reference Present
parameter. All other parameters can be set by double clicking and selecting options from
the popup that is displayed. For example, in the PT-MADI4C-OBG, if you double click the
MADI Reference Source parameter, a popup dialog enables you to select Same as TDM
Ref, Sync1, Sync2, or Sync3.
Figure 4-47 MADI Reference Source Parameter

304 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Reference Locking
Reference locking is controlled by the following parameters:
 TDM Reference Source in the TDM Locking category

(options are Sync1, Sync2, or Sync3)
 MADI Reference source in the MADI Locking category
(options are Sync1, Sync2, Sync3, or Same as TDM Ref.)
By default, audio encapsulated into the MADI transport stream is locked to the same
reference as the TDM receiver.
Using the TDM reference for MADI (default option)
If you select the same reference for MADI as for TDM (“Same as TDM Ref” option),
non-PCM data such as Dolby-E or Dolby-D can also be encapsulated into the MADI
transport stream.
Using a separate (non-TDM) reference for MADI
If the reference signal for MADI is different than the one used for TDM locking, channels
conveying non-PCM data (such as Dolby-E/D) are destroyed. Non-PCM data becomes
unusable because of a sample-rate conversion process that transfers received TDM data into
a new clock domain (MADI). As a workaround - for example, when you need to lock the
TDM data to a video reference - lock the MADI audio data to an unrelated 48kHz DARS
reference.
TDM Input
The TDM Input section reports on audio presence and format for each of the 128 mono
audio channels that can be received by the TDM receiver. Possible Audio formats are PCM,
non-PCM, Dolby-E, and Dolby-D.
TDM Output Mapping

You can map portions of the TDM stream to one or more of the four MADI outputs. The
MADI Output Format section provides mapping options for each of the 4 MADI Outputs.
You can map predefined channel ranges in chunks of 56 or 64 channels. The following
options are available:
 TDM 1-56 (56 channels)

Table 4-43 Supported TDM Reference/MADI Reference combinations

TDM MADI
Any of the supported DARS Ref. Same as TDM Ref. (= DARS Ref.)
Rates
Any of the supported DARS Ref. Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates (can be
Rates unrelated and asynchronous to TDM DARS Ref.)
Any of the supported DARS Ref. Any of the supported Video Ref. Standards
Rates
Any of the supported Video Ref. Same as TDM Ref. (= Video Ref.)
Standards
Any of the supported Video Ref. any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates
Standards
Note: The use of two different Video Ref. Standards (for example, TDM:525 and
MADI:625) is not supported.
Supported DARS Ref. Rates are 192kHz, 96kHz, 48kHz, 32kHz.

Supported Video Ref. Standards are 525, 625, HD tri-level sync (various formats).
Specifications
Table 4-44 Electrical Output Specifications

Item Specification
Number of Outputs 4
Impedance 75 Ohm
Output Level 600mV
Return Loss NA
Table 4-45 Optical Output Specifications

Item Specification
Number of Outputs 4
Fiber Type Multi-mode (works with 50/125um or 62.5/125um
cables)
Package 2x Dual Channel Transmitter SFP Modules
Connector LC with PC/UPC polish
Center Wavelength 1300nm
Output Power -19dBm to -12dBm
Distance up to 2000m
Extinction Rate 8.2dB (min)
306 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Table 4-45 Optical Output Specifications

Item Specification
Qualified Devices Optoway SPM-3102W-2TG
Laser Safety Class 1 Laser Product
Power Consumption
Around 22W (includes front module and back module) for the PT-MADI4C-OBG module.
Around 25W (includes front module and back module - 2x Dual Tx SFPs) for the
PT-MADI4O-OBG module.
PT-MADI4X-OBG Parameters
Note: SFP Parameters are applicable to the Optical module only.
You can access MADI parameters through Navigator. Start Navigator and ensure you are in
Build mode. Enter the IP Address of the Platinum frame that contains your PT-MADI
module. Start the Discovery and save the Discovery results. You can control the parameters
either through Build Mode (Using Navigator Build Mode on page 302) or Control mode
(See Using Navigator Control Mode on page 302).
Table 4-46 PT-MADI4X-OBG Output parameters

General
Serial Number (RO) Displays the module's <String>
unique identifier.
Submodule Temperature (RO) Indicates the temperature <String> in
of the FPGA Degrees Celsius
TDM Error Enable For in-field diagnostics No
only Yes
TDM Error Count (RO) For in-field diagnostics TDM Error count
only
Submodule Firmware Version (RO) Indicates MC software <String>
version
Submodule FPGA Version (RO) Indicates FPGA firmware <String>
version
SFP Wavelength <1-4> Reports wavelength of  N/A
fiber optical output  1300
Laser Status <1-4> Reports laser status  Enabled
 Disabled
 N/A
 Normal
 Failed

Laser Enable <1-4> Enables or disables fiber  Yes
optical output  No
SFP Type <1-2> Reports type of SFP  OP+SFP+MADI+2
plugged in TX
 Unknown
 NO SFP
TDM Locking TDM Reference Source Selects which physical sync Sync1
port the module uses for Sync2
the TDM reference Sync3
TDM Reference Present (RO) Reports the presence of No
the reference signal Yes
TDM Reference Locked (RO) Reports the locked status No
of the reference signal Yes
TDM Reference Standard (RO) Indicates the reference Unknown
standard detected on the 525i 59.94
genlock input. 625i 50
720p 25
Reference standards 720p 29.97
marked with an asterisk 720p 30
can be detected, but they 720p 50
cannot be used in 720p 59.94
connection with the 720p 60
PT-MADIxx-OBG, since the 1080p 23.98
output sample rate is 1080p 24
always 48kHz. 1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
DARS 192kHz
DARS 96kHz
DARS 88.2kHz*
DARS 48kHz
DARS 44.1kHz*
DARS 32kHz*
MADI Locking MADI Reference Source Selects which physical sync Sync1
port the module uses for Sync2
the TDM reference Sync3
Same as TDM
Ref.
MADI Reference Present (RO) Reports the presence of No
the reference signal Yes
MADI Reference Locked (RO) Reports the locked status No
of the reference signal Yes
308 Chapter 4
Output Modules

MADI Reference Standard (RO) Indicates the reference Unknown
genlock input. 625i 50
720p 25
Reference standards 720p 29.97
marked with an asterisk 720p 30
can be detected, but they 720p 50
cannot be used in 720p 59.94
connection with the 720p 60
PT-MADIxx-OBG, since the 1080p 23.98
output sample rate is 1080p 24
always 48kHz. 1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
DARS 192kHz
DARS 96kHz
DARS 88.2kHz*
DARS 48kHz
DARS 44.1kHz*
DARS 32kHz*
TDM Input TDM Audio Format (x128) (RO) Indicates the format of PCM
each of the 128 Audio Non-PCM
mono channels received by Dolby-E
the TDM Receiver Dolby-D
TDM Audio Present (x128) (RO) Indicates the presence of No
each of the 128 Audio Yes
mono channels received by
the TDM Receiver
MADI Output MADI Output Format (x4) Selects which portion of TDM 1 - 56 (56
the TDM stream gets Channels)
encapsulated into the
MADI transport stream. TDM 33- 88 (56
Channels)
TDM 65- 120 (56

Channels)
TDM 1 - 64 (64
Channels)
TDM 33- 96 (64

Channels)
TDM 65 - 128 (64

Channels)
PT-HSRMX8C/PT-HSRMX8O-OBG Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output

Module
The PT-HSRMX8C/8O-OBG is an 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output Board
that provides Video and Audio processing in the Platinum Frame.
Video and Audio Frame Synchronizers are available for each of the 8 SDI channels in
addition to Audio Mux functionality. Each SDI path is processed independently with support
for SD, 1.5 Gb/s HD, 3 Gb/s HD, and 3 Gb/s Dual Link formats. ASI signals are reported and
processing stages are automatically bypassed. Framesync and Delay modes are available. For
more details, see Audio Processing, Video Processing, and Operation Modes.
The PT-HSRMX8C/8O-OBG consists of a front module and different back module options.
The Front Module accommodates all active components, such as CPU, Processing FPGAs,
DDR2 Memory, Clocking and Genlock circuits and POL (Point-of-Load) power supplies.
The PT-HSRMX8C/8O-OBG boards consume up to 65 watts per board, depending on

operating conditions. Ensure that the Platinum frame system has a sufficient number of
power supplies to meet the demand resulting from the actual number of boards installed.
Two Back Module variants (electrical and optical) provide external connectivity through
electrical (BNC) or fiber optic outputs.
PT-HSRMX8C-OBG Electrical Output Module

The PT-HSRMX8C-OBG is a Platinum SD/HD/3G Mux Output module with 8 BNC
connectors. This back module stays affixed to the front module when pulling it out of the
frame.
See Electrical Output (Back Module with 8 BNCs) for specifications.
Figure 4-48 PT-HSRMX8C-OBG (Electrical)

310 Chapter 4
Output Modules
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8
Figure 4-49 PT-HSRMX8C-OBG electrical back module
PT-HSRMX8O-OBG Optical Output Module

The PT-HSRMX8O-OBG is a Platinum SD/HD/3G Mux Output module with 8 LC-type Fiber
connectors (4 Dual Tx SFP modules). The fiber back module gets mounted into the rear of
the frame and is secured with screws. The front module detaches from the back module
when the front module is pulled from the frame.
See Optical Output (Fiber Back Modules with 4 SFPs) for specifications.
Figure 4-50 PT-HSRMX8O-OBG (Optical)
OUT 1/2 OUT 3/4 OUT 5/6 OUT 7/8
Figure 4-51 PT-HSRMX8O-OBG fiber back module
Power-Up sequence
Due to the complexity of the board and its parameter list, it takes about 2 minutes after
power-cycling a board before it is fully operational.About 10 seconds after power-cycling, a
board is ready to detect input signals, but the outputs will not become active until the
PT-Resource card has completed uploading the previously used configuration (parameters).
The readiness of the board is reflected by the read-only Control Status parameter. See the
Control Status parameter for details.
Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image

The PT-HSRMX8C-OBG and PT-HSRMX8O-OBG modules maintain a backup image of the
last working firmware at all times. In the event of an upgrade failure, the module will revert
back to its backup image to maintain operation on the board. You can verify the version
that is currently running on the module by looking at the version parameter Version
(MK20_App_S6_V6)
Upgrading the firmware on PT-HSRMX8C-OBG and PT-HSRMX8O-OBG modules takes

approximately 30 minutes. Multiple (identical) boards can be upgraded at once in batches
of up to 16 boards (= one 'zone'). A 'batch' upgrade takes about as long as upgrading a
single board.
Always wait for the 'Firmware upgrade successful' message before power-cycling the
system, exchanging boards, or carrying out any other maintenance work that could
interfere with the upgrade process. Do not interrupt the power supply or tamper with a
board while an upgrade is in progress. This could corrupt the firmware, necessitating a
restart of the upgrade process.
After a successful firmware upgrade, the upgraded board(s) will automatically reboot and
will start unpacking the newly installed firmware components. This process can take up to 2
minutes and should not be interrupted. In case the board is removed from the frame or a
power outage happens whilst the board is preparing the newly installed firmware, it will
retry as soon as the board is plugged back into the frame or power is resumed.
Operation Modes
There are different operation modes available, depending on whether or not you have a
Framesync license:
Operation Mode Option

MUX only mode (Without Framesync License) MUX: Auto Detect
MUX: Always On
Bypass Mode
Framesync Mode and Delay Mode (with Framesync License) Frame Sync: Sync Mode
Frame Sync: Delay Mode
Bypass Mode
MUX only mode (Without Framesync License)

For proper audio muxing operation, each SDI channel destined for Audio MUX must be
locked to the Reference signal provided to the board. While SDI channels can be of different
data rates (e.g. SD SDI, HD, HD 3G), their field/frame-rates need to match the those of the
applied Reference.
In the Frame Sync / Mux Mode menu, the following modes of operation can be selected on
a per SDI channel basis:
 MUX: Auto Detect

 MUX: Always On
 Bypass Mode
312 Chapter 4
Output Modules
MUX: Auto Detect

Note: MUX: Auto Detect is the recommended operation mode for boards without a
framesync license.
This mode auto checks if SDI channels are locked to the Reference signal provided to the
board.
 For Locked SDI channels:

 All supported Audio muxing operations are applicable
 Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports locked channels as Mux: Locked
 CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge
will be lit green
 For Unlocked SDI channels:
 No Audio muxing will be performed and the channel will bypass all processing
stages on the board, including TSG operation
 Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports unlocked channels as Bypass
 CHANNEL STATUS LED at the front card edge associated with the SDI channel
will be off
MUX: Always On
Note: For channels that are asynchronous to the Reference, re-embedded Audio will suffer
disturbances.
In this mode, SDI channels are processed (audio muxing operations are supported),
regardless of whether the channel is locked to the Reference signal.
 For Locked SDI channels:

 Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports locked channels as Mux: Locked
will be lit green
 For Unlocked SDI channels:
 Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports unlocked channels as Mux:
Unlocked
will be lit Red
Bypass Mode
In Bypass mode:
 SDI channels bypass all processing stages including TSG operation
 No Audio muxing takes place when operating a channel in Bypass mode
 Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports channels operating in Bypass mode as
Bypass
Framesync Mode and Delay Mode (with Framesync License)

Framesync is a licensable option. If you do not have the Framesync license, this feature will
not be available. To acquire a Framesync license, contact your Customer Service
representative. A license can be added for the module using the License Key parameter.
Framesync is required if the incoming SDI data is asynchronous to the reference signal
applied to the board. With Framesync (PT-FSOB-OPT) installed, incoming SDI data does not
need to have a common data rate to be processed (muxing audio back into SDI streams). A
mix of SD, HD, 3G, 3G DL is supported for channels with the same frame rate. If the input
signal and reference signal have different frame rates, inputs are processed in Delay mode
(no audio muxing) See Frame Sync: Delay Mode.
In the Frame Sync / Mux Mode menu, the following operation modes can be selected (on a
per SDI channel basis):
 Frame Sync: Sync Mode

 Frame Sync: Delay Mode
 Bypass Mode
Frame Sync: Sync Mode

An SDI channel qualifies for Frame Sync: Sync Mode if its field or frame rate matches that
of the Reference signal provided to the board.
 If no Reference is present but the operation mode is set to Frame Sync: Sync Mode
 The outgoing signal will be locked to a local and fixed 27MHz high precision
Reference.
 The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame Sync: Sync
Mode as Frame Sync: Local Lock.
 If an external Reference signal is applied to the frame (e.g. 525 or 625 Black, HD
tri-level Sync), if the proper Reference Input has been selected for the board, if the
Reference is being detected as ‘Present’ and ‘Locked’ and if the SDI channel’s field-or
frame-rate matches the rate of the Reference signal
 Video- and embedded Audio-data will be processed and synchronized to the
applied Reference.
Mode as Frame Sync: Ext Lock.
 If a Reference is present and locked, but the SDI channel’s field or frame rate doesn’t
match the rate of the Reference signal
 The channel will be automatically forced into Delay mode.
Mode as Frame Sync: Delay Rate Mismatch.
Frame Sync: Delay Mode

Note: In ‘Delay’ mode, only a restricted set of processing features can be applied to an SDI
channel.
314 Chapter 4
Output Modules
When operating the Frame Sync in Delay mode, the audio embedders are automatically
turned off. Any ancillary data will be passed unprocessed (aside from any video delay).
If the input video frame rate does not match the genlock frame rate for a channel, that
channel is automatically placed into Delay Mode. This information is reflected in the Frame
Sync Status parameter (see Frame Sync / Mux Status (1-8)).
 An SDI channel can be forced into Delay mode operation by setting it to Frame Sync:
Delay Mode.
 Channels set to Frame Sync: Delay Mode will be reported as Frame Sync: Delay Forced
by the Frame Sync / Mux Status menu.
Bypass Mode
In Bypass mode, the SDI channel will bypass all processing stages, including TSG operation.
 No Framesync operation and no Audio muxing takes place when operating a channel in
Bypass mode.
 The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports channel forced to operate in Bypass
mode as Bypass.
Features
Key processing features for each channel are:
 Video Frame Synchronizer and Delay

 SMPTE 352M Video Payload: Detection, Insertion
 Simple Test Signal Generator
 Audio De-Embedder: 4 groups, 4 mono channels per group
 Audio Sample Rate Conversion (SRC) after de-embedding (PCM data only)
 Audio Synchronizer and Delay (arbitrary Audio delay for PCM data only)
 Audio Test Tone Generator
 Audio ProcAmp: Gain, Mute, Invert, Sum, Swap
 Audio Embedder with Append/Overwrite mode
 Supports mix of embedded PCM and non-PCM (Dolby-E/D) data
Note: The availability of some features depends on the Framesync license. Refer Table 4-47
for details.
Features based on Licensing

Framesync/Delay Mode requires a Framesync License - See Framesync Mode and Delay
Mode (with Framesync License) on page 313.
Mux Mode (See MUX only mode (Without Framesync License) on page 311) is
available on boards without the Framesync license installed.
Table 4-47 Features Supported in Framesync Mode, Delay Mode, and Mux Only Mode
Video Framesync FS Mode
H/V Phase Control FS Mode, DLY Mode
Frame Offset FS Mode, DLY Mode
Freeze FS Mode, DLY Mode
Video ProcAmp FS Mode, DLY Mode, Mux Mode *
TSG FS Mode, DLY Mode, Mux Mode *
ASI Bypass FS Mode, DLY Mode, Mux Mode *
Audio Sync (Sample FS Mode

rate conversion)
Audio Delay FS Mode, Mux Mode* FS Mode, Mux Mode*
Audio ProcAmp FS Mode, Mux Mode* FS Mode, Mux Mode*
Dolby E Header FS Mode, Mux Mode*
Alignment
Note: In Mux Mode, SDI channels must be locked to the external reference for proper
operation.
Audio Processing
The PT-HSRMX8C/8O-OBG output card is equipped with an Audio TDM Receiver that
supports a TDM data rate of 344 Mb/s and 128 channels of TDMed audio.
The following audio functionality is supported per SDI channel
 De-embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio prior to the Frame/Audio

Synchronizer
 Sample Rate Conversion (with bypass capability on a per stereo-pair basis) - Embedded
Audio only
 Audio Synchronizer - Embedded Audio only
 Audio Delay (> 3000ms / mono channel)
 Audio Proc (Gain, Mute, Invert)
 Audio Sum (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a predefined list of Sums)
 Audio Swap (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a predefined list of Swaps)
 Audio Test Tone Generator (Off, 400Hz, 2kHz, 4kHz)
 Dolby-E Header alignment (for Dolby-E data received via TDM only)
 Embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio after the Frame/Audio Synchronizer.
 Automatic Audio selection from video source (embedded audio) or associated 16
channels of Audio received via TDM.
 TDM Audio channels if present (i.e. routed from the Audio crosspoint) take precedence
over channels de-embedded from the video source.
316 Chapter 4
Output Modules
 Fixed mapping of Audio channels received via TDM and the eight SDI streams
(e.g. TDM1-16 -> SDI1, TDM17-32 -> SD).
Notes
 For De-embedding, audio must be embedded synchronously at a sample rate of 48kHz.
 Embedded Dolby-E frames must be properly aligned with the Video frame in order to
be transferred from the Frame Synchronizer’s input clock domain into the output clock
domain. Proper alignment (position of guard-band) is important since Dolby-E frames
can be dropped or repeated alongside the active video content.
 All Audio channels received from the Audio crosspoint via TDM are assumed to have a
48kHz sample rate and locked to the same Video reference applied to the board.
 Automatic Dolby-E header alignment supported for Dolby-E data received via TDM,
where Audio data (PCM or non-PCM) is expected to be already synchronous to the
reference applied to the board. When receiving Dolby-E data via TDM, alignment with
the actual Video data is unknown and it is therefore important to have the Dolby- E
data automatically re-aligned prior to muxing it back into the SDI stream.
 Sample Rate Conversion can only be applied to de-embedded Audio data, but not to
TDM Audio data. The downstream clock for the SRCs will be locked to the applied
Video reference. Non-PCM Audio data (such as Dolby-E/D) cannot be sample rate
converted, and is transferred from the input clock domain to the output clock domain
by dropping or repeating a full frame of non-PCM data, every time the Video Frame
Synchronizer reaches its roll-over point.
Video Processing
 SD-SDI (270Mb/s) standards - 525, 625
 HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s) standards - 720p50, 720p59, 720p60, 1080i50, 1080i59.94,
1080i60, 1080psF24, 1080psF23
 HD-SDI (3Gb/s) standards – SMPTE425 Level A, SMPTE 372M Dual Link
 Framesync mode or Delay mode
 Freeze modes: Frame, Field1, Field2
 High noise immunity (TRS error resilience) and glitchless processing (fast switching
without freeze) of input feeds, that were asynchronously switched on the
recommended switching point (as defined in SMPTE RP168)
 Video Frame Synchronizer with H,V Phase control and fixed frame delay on top of
variable delay
 Video Frame Delay: up to 16 Frames (all standards)
 SMPTE 352M Video Payload: Detection, Insertion (HD and 3G only)
 Simple Test Signal Generator: 75% Color Bars, 100% Color Bars, SDI Pathologicals
Notes
 VANC/HANC data other than embedded Audio is not processed. Closed Captioning
data, Teletext data or SMPTE 12M Timecode (LTC, VITC), for instance, will be dropped
or repeated together with the active video content, every time the Frame Synchronizer
drops or repeats a frame.
 For channels operating in Delay mode, all VANC/HANC data (including embedded
Audio) is passed through the delay memory unprocessed. Ancillary data remains
untouched. The absolute delay from In to Out can be changed arbitrarily within the
predefined limits (e.g. from 3us up to 16 frames + 3us).
 Support for SMPTE 372M Dual-Link formats, with 16 (mono) channels of Audio
processed. Processed Video/Audio data exits the board as a single 3Gb/s stream.
 Non-PCM Audio data (Dolby-E or Dolby-D) is not processed by the Audio Synchronizer /
Audio Delay / Audio ProcAmp processing blocks. It is passed alongside the active video
content through the Video Frame Synchronizer memory and a frame's worth of
non-PCM data is dropped or repeated - together with the active video content every
time the Video Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame.
Support for Quiet Audio Switching

Switching between two sources of the same data- and frame-rate in the serial domain, e.g.
on a router’s crosspoint board, can cause momentary discontinuities in the SDI stream. It
doesn’t matter whether the two sources are asynchronous or not, a temporary glitch in the
resulting SDI stream can cause downstream equipment to generate an erroneous output.
The PT-HSRMXxx-OBG can absorb such glitches and will provide not only a continuous and
uninterrupted stream of video, it will also handle the transitioning of embedded Audio from
one source to another in a ‘quiet’ manner.
In order to accomplish that, the following conditions must be met:
1 The two video sources, that get switched upstream, must be of the same data- and
frame-rate. They can be asynchronous with respect to each other and with respect to the
reference signal, that is applied to the board.
2 The channel that is supposed to produce a clean and quiet output must be operated in
Frame Sync mode (Frame Sync license is required).
3 ADS Clean must be turned on.
Note: ADS Clean ON will wipe out any embedded non-PCM audio data, such as Dolby-E. If
a quiet audio transition between two sources, which contain a mix of PCM and non-PCM
audio data, is desired, it is recommended to bring in the non-PCM data via TDM.
LED Indicators
LED Indicators on the board signal the following:
 Power Good
 Power On Self Test Passed
 Temperature Alarm
 Communication Activity
 SDI Signal Presence (8 LEDs, 1 per output)
 Status LEDs for Status and Diagnostics
318 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Jumpers and DIP Switches

This board has no user configurable jumpers.
The two DIP Switches, labeled SW1 and SWC2, must remain in their factory set default
positions - OFF.
Failsafe Module Upgrade

The Flash Memory can be partially or entirely upgraded through the PIPE interface. In case
of upgrade issues due to power failures or system instability during upgrade, the last known
good working version is automatically reverted to.

GENERAL
General Serial Number Displays the module’s <String>
unique identifier
License Key Activates the Frame Sync <String>
option
Licensed Options Displays activated options None
Frame Sync
Parameter Update Rate Defines the rate at which Slow
parameters are updated Medium
Fast
Control Status Please Wait
Ready to Set
Version (MK20_App_S6_V6) Lists version numbers of <String>
individual firmware
components.
Laser Enable (1-8) Enables/Disables Laser Yes
Transmitter. No
(8O version only)
Laser Status (1-8) Indicates status of Laser Normal
Transmitter device (SFP Tx Failed
(8O version only) Module) Disabled
No SFP
General > Temperature Indicates the temperature <String> in
Temperature Degrees Celsius
General > Fan Fan Status (1-2) Indicates proper Bad
Status functioning of the Good
module’s fan unit
General > Output Output Swing (1-8) Set output swing of SDI 800mV (default)
Swing signal for passive output 1600mV
combining.
(8C version only)

General > Output Output Mute (1-8) Enables/Disables electrical Yes
Mute (BNC) output. No
(8C version only)

GENLOCK
Genlock Sync Select Selects which physical sync 1
port the module uses as a 2
reference 3
4
Genlock Video Present Reports the presence of No
the reference video signal Yes
Genlock Video Locked Reports the locked status No
of the reference video Yes
signal
Genlock Standard Indicates the video Unknown
genlock input 625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
INPUT
320 Chapter 4
Output Modules

Video Status SDI Video Standard Displays the SDI video Unknown
signal standard 525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080p 50
1080p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 50 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
1080p 60 DL
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
ASI
Signal Presence (1-8) Indicates presence of SDI No
or ASI signal. ASI signals Yes
will automatically bypass
all processing stages.
EDH Present Reports the presence of No
EDH in the input SDI signal Yes
CRC/EDH Error Counter Reports the number of 0 to 65535
chrominance CRC/EDH
errors that have occurred
CRC/EDH Error Clear Clears all CRC/EDH error No
counters Yes

Embedded Audio Group Presence (1-8) Indicates which audio None
Status groups are present Group 1
Group 2
Group 12
Group 3
Group 13
Group 23
Group 123
Group 4
Group 14
Group 24
Group 124
Group 34
Group 134
Group 234
Group 1234
Group Active Channels (1-8) Indicates which channels None
are active. CH1
CH2
Note: When operating
with SD-SDI modes, this CH12
parameter will return CH3
"None" due to the lack of CH13
Audio Control packets. CH23
CH123
CH4
CH14
CH24
CH124
CH34
CH134
CH234
CH1234
Audio Format (1-8) Indicates format of TDM PCM
channels (e.g. PCM Non-PCM
Audio).
TDM Audio Status TDM Presence (1-128) Indicates presence of TDM No
Audio Channels. Yes
TDM Format (1-128) Indicates format of TDM PCM
channels (e.g. PCM Non-PCM
Audio).
PROCESSING
322 Chapter 4
Output Modules

Embedding TDM Audio (1-8) Enables embedding of Yes
Audio Channels received No
from the ATDM board.
Each instance of this

control applies to all 16
Mono Channels of Audio
(or 8 Stereo pairs) of an
SDI stream. If set to 'Yes',
only those TDM channels,
which are connected in the
Audio cross-point's matrix,
will be embedded into the
outgoing SDI stream.
Disconnected Stereo-pairs
will be automatically
replaced by whatever has
been de-embedded from
the incoming SDI stream.
Group Embedding Mode (1-8) Selects the embedding Off
mode for the specified Append
audio group OverWrite
Auto
ADS Clean (1-8) Enables and disables the Yes
cleaning of the Ancillary No
Data Space before
embedding audio
Dolby E Auto Align Enables Dolby-E Header Yes
alignment of Dolby-E data No
received via TDM (from
ATDM cross-point).
Dolby E Start Line Determines the Dolby-E Range is mode
start line. specific and
complies with
Dolby-E
specification
AUDIO
SRC Control (1-8) Sets the SRC to on/bypass/ On
auto Bypass
Auto
V-Bit Mute Enable Enables automatic muting No
of audio outputs when the Yes
V-bit is set Muting on a
detected V-Bit applies to
PCM audio channels only.
Non-PCM audio channels
will not be muted.

Tone (1-8) Enables Tones Off
400 Hz
2 kHz
4 kHz
Level Adjust (1-8) Adjusts the audio level -18 dB - 18 dB (0)
(gain) for each in 0.1 dB steps
audio channel
Polarity Reversal (1-8) Specifies whether the No
audio channel should be Yes
inverted
Audio Mute (1-8) Enables muting for the Off
specified output channel On
Summing (1-8) Specifies whether to sum None
the audio within a pair Right to left
Left to right
Left to Right - the summed Both
audio is placed in the right
channel
Right to Left - the summed

audio is placed in the left
channel
Both - the summed audio

is placed in both left and
right channels
Swap/Copy (1-8) Specifies whether to swap No Swap
or copy the audio within a Swap
pair; able to swap left and Right to left
right channels, copy left Left to right
channel to the right
channel, and copy the
right channel to the left
Fade Rate Fade rate applies to all 16 0 - 10 s, in 1 s
audio channels in a video steps (1 s)
stream
Word Length Specifies the audio word 16 bits
length for all 16 channels 20 bits
in a video stream. 24 bits
See Word Length

Parameter.
DEEMBEDDING
324 Chapter 4
Output Modules

Group DeEmbed Control (1-8) Specifies the operation of Mute
the audio de-embedder Repeat
when an error occurs; it
will either repeat the last
audio sample or mute
when an error occurs.
See Group DeEmbed

Control (1-8)
VIDEO
TSG Pattern Selects the test pattern for 75% Bars
the test signal generator 100% Bars
EQ Test
PLL Test
TSG Standard Selects the video standard Follow RX
for the TSG (default is to 525i 59.94
follow the detected 625i 50
standard) 720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 25
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 50
1080p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 50
1080p 59.94
1080p 60 DL
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
TSG Enable Enables and disables the No
test signal generator Yes
AUDIO SYNC
Audio Ch Pair Delay Track (1-8) No Tracking / Sync No Tracking
Tracking - per stereo pair Sync Tracking
See Audio
Synchronization.

Audio Channel Delay (1-8) Specifies audio delay - per 0 - 3000 ms in 1
mono channel ms steps
See Audio
Synchronization.
PROC AMP
Y Gain Adjusts gain for the Y -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0
channel dB) in 0.1 dB steps
Cb Gain Adjusts gain to the Cb -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0
color difference dB) in 0.1 dB steps
component
Cr Gain Adjusts gain to the Cr -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0
color difference dB) in 0.1 dB steps
component
Y Offset Adjusts offset for the Y ±100.6 mV (0 mV)
channel in 0.8 mV
increments
Cb Offset Adjusts offset for the Cb ±100.6 mV (0 mV)
channel in 0.8 mV
increments
Cr Offset Adjusts offset for the Cr ±100.6 mV (0 mV)
channel in 0.8 mV
increments
White Clip Enable Controls level clipping Disable
according to the White Enable
Clip Level control
White Clip Level Sets the white clip level 636.9 to 763.1 mV
(700 mV) in 0.8
mV increments
Black Clip Enable Controls level clipping Disable
according to the Black Clip Enable
Level control
Black Clip Level Sets the black clip level -47.9 to +47.9 mV
(0.0 mV) in 0.8 mV
increments
Hue Adjusts the hue of the -180 to +180° (0°)
incoming digital video
signal
FRAME SYNC
326 Chapter 4
Output Modules

Horizontal Phase Adjusts the horizontal 0.000 us to 29.616
timing us (1080p 30,
1035i 60)
0.000 us to 14.808
us (1080p 60,
1080p 60 DL)
0.000 us to 29.646
us (1080p 29,
1080i 59)
0.000 us to 14.823
us (1080p 59,
1080p 59.94 DL)
0.000 us to 35.542
us (1080p 25,
1080i 50)
0.000 us to 17.771
us (1080p 50,
1080p 50 DL)
0.000 us to 37.024
us (1080p 24,
1080sF 24)
0.000 us to 37.061
us (1080p 23.98,
1080sF 23.98)
0.000 us to 31.987
us (1080i 50_295)
0.000 us to 22.209
us (720p 60)
0.000 us to 22.231
us (720p 59.94)
0.000 us to 26.653
us (720p 50)
0.000 us to 44.431
us (720p 30)
0.000 us to 44.475
us (720p 29)
0.000 us to 53.320
us (720p 25)
0.000 us to 63.518
us (525i 59.94)
0.000 us to 63.963
us (625i 50)
Vertical Phase Adjusts the vertical timing 0–1124 lines
(1080p/I/sF)
0–1249 lines
(1080i 50 SMPTE
295M)
0–749 lines (720p)
0–524 lines (525i
59.94)
0–624 lines (625i
50)

Frame Offset Determines the number of 0 - 17 frames
frames the video is offset (Delay mode)
0 - 16 frames
(Sync mode)
Force Freeze Enables video freeze No
Yes
Force Freeze Mode Specifies the type of Field 1
freeze, field 1, field 2 or Field 2
frame Frame
Loss of Video Mode Specifies operation on loss Pass
of video, pass, black or Black
freeze. Freeze
Fast Switch Enable fast switching. No
Yes
See Fast Video Switch.
FRAME SYNC / MUX MODE
Frame Sync / Mux Mode (1-8) Sets the operational mode FS: Sync Mode
of the frame sync, delay or FS: Delay Mode
sync. Mux: Auto Detect
Mux: Always On
See Video Frame Bypass
Synchronization
FRAME SYNC / MUX STATUS
Frame Sync / Mux Status (1-8) Reflects operational mode FS: Ext Lock
status based on license, FS: Local Lock
mode of operation, FS: Delay Forced
presence, and rate of FS: Delay Rate
Reference signal. Mismatch
Mux: Locked
Mux: Unlocked
ASI
TSG
Bypass
Output Off (LOV)
Output Off (User)
Invalid
328 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Notes:
Word Length Parameter

The Word Length parameter can be set through the Audio section of the GUI to 16,
20, or 25 bits on a per SDI channel basis. 20 bits is the default and is applicable when
the video standard is SD SDI (525/625).
If the SD SDI Video has extended Audio packets (which can apply to any of up to four
groups of embedded Audio), Audio data embedded in such group(s) should have a
word length of 24 bits. When the processed audio data word length is 20 bits
(determined by parameter ‘Word Length' parameter), the Audio Embedder cannot
overwrite existing extended Audio packets. There are 2 options in this case:
 Turn on ADS Clean (See ADS Clean (1-8)) prior to re-embedding new Audio data,
to wipe out any existing Audio packets (regular and extended).
 Set the Word Length parameter for the SDI channel in question to match the
word length of the Audio data embedded in the incoming SDI stream.
The Word Length bits for processed Audio data are not auto-detected (based on the
detected word length of the embedded Audio data) and set. This is to allow the
flexibility for users to steer the word length of the re-embedded Audio data such that it
matches the word length of Audio data that originates from a different source (for
example, Audio received via TDM).
Fast Video Switch

When input video is switched between two sources while both sources are within
vertical blanking, use the Fast Switch parameter to enable fast video switching
between the sources. In this mode, output video is not frozen when both sources are
within the vertical blanking area when the switch takes place.
TSG Operation
If the boards boots up with no active (and valid) SDI signal(s) presented to its input(s)
(i.e. nothing is routed from the wide-band crosspoint), enabling the TSG will not
produce an output when the TSG Standard parameter it set to Follow Rx, which is
the default setting. This is the expected behavior. Under such operating conditions, the
user has to manually select the desired Video Output Standard for the TSG (e.g.
1080i59).
Once an active and valid SDI signal has been applied, the TSG will automatically follow
the detected input standard. The SDI signal can now be removed, the TSG however will
continue working in the same standard that was detected before, provided that the
TSG Standard parameter remains set to Follow Rx.
Group DeEmbed Control (1-8)

The following are options for the Group (1–8) Deembedding Control parameter.
Table 4-48 Deembedding Control Options

Item Description
Repeat Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder
repeats the last good AES sample.
Mute Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder
mutes the current outgoing AES sample.
Audio Embedding Modes

Each video channel has an audio embedder component composed of several smaller
subcomponent blocks:
 One ancillary data stripper (ADS)
 Four audio embedding subcomponents
The first subcomponent is an ancillary data stripper (ADS). This block removes all
ancillary data packets in the input SDI stream, prior to embedding. Following the ADS
block are four separate audio-embedding subcomponents. Each subcomponent has the
ability to operate on only one audio group, either appending or overwriting a
predetermined group onto the SDI stream.
The audio embedding modes are Audio Group (1–4) Embedding Mode parameters.
Table 4-49 briefly describes the Append, OverWrite, and Auto options available from
each of the embedding modes.
Table 4-49 Embedding Mode Options

Options Description
Append Attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately
following the last existing audio data/control packet in the horizontal
ancillary region (Append Embedding on page 329)
OverWrite Attempts to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the
same group number with the new audio data (see Overwrite
Embedding on page 331)
Auto Attempts first to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of
the same audio group number; failing that, it appends the new audio
data and control packets immediately following the last existing audio
data/control packet (refer to the Audio Group (1–4) Exists parameters
to determine what audio groups are already present in the incoming SDI
signal)
Append Embedding
When you select Append embedding, the module attempts to insert the audio data
and control packets immediately following the last existing data/control packet in the
horizontal ancillary data space (ADS). Append embedding is only valid if the audio
group to be embedded does not already exist.
Figure 4-52 shows how append embedding will appear in the ancillary data space
when there is no previous audio or other data.
330 Chapter 4
Output Modules

1
EAV Group1

EAV
Figure 4-52 Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When No Other Data Present
When auxiliary data exists in the ancillary data space, appended audio appears
following that data, as shown in Figure 4-53.

Other Other
EAV auxilliary data
A
auxilliary data
B

1 Other Other
EAV auxilliary data
A
auxilliary data
B Group 1
Figure 4-53 Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When Auxiliary Data Present
If you attempt to insert audio into Group 1 when Group 1 audio data already exists in
the ancillary data space, no audio will be embedded, as shown in Figure 4-54.

EAV Pre-existing
Group 1

EAV Pre-existing
Group 1
Figure 4-54 Append Embedding Mode - Adding Group 1 and a Group 1 Already Exists
EAV GROUP 1
EAV GROUP 1 GROUP 2

Other Other
EAV auxilliary data
A
auxilliary data
B

1 Other Other
EAV auxilliary data
A
auxilliary data
B
Group 1
An audio group cannot be divided. In Append embedding, the audio group is always
added following the last block in the ADS. If there is not enough room to append the
audio group following the last block of auxiliary data or audio in the ADS, no audio will
be embedded, as shown in Figure 4-57.

Other Other Other
data data data

Other Other Other
data data data
Figure 4-57 Append Embedding Mode Fails to Append When Auxiliary Data Exists in
all Audio Groups
Overwrite Embedding
When you select Overwrite embedding, the module attempts to overwrite any existing
audio data and control packets of the same group number with the new audio data.
This setting is valid only if the audio group to be embedded already exists. If the new
sample distribution does not exactly match the existing audio data packet sample
distribution, the embedder will mark some audio data packets for deletion (DID word
will be set to 180h).When you attempt Overwrite embedding and there is no previous
audio (as in Figure 4-58), no audio is embedded because there is nothing to overwrite.
332 Chapter 4
Output Modules

EAV

EAV
Figure 4-58 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is No Pre-existing Audio
when there is auxiliary data where Group 1 should be inserted.

other other
EAV auxilliary data
A
auxilliary data
B

other other
A B
Figure 4-59 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Auxiliary Data on Group 1
when there is pre-existing Group 1 audio. This operation is successful.

Other Other Other
data data data

Other Other Other
data data data
Figure 4-60 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Group 1 Audio in the Group 1
Space
Audio Synchronization
By default, PT-HSRMX8C-OBG and PT-HSRMX8O-OBG synchronize de-embedded audio
with timing information from the video frame synchronizer prior to re-embedding
audio. When Audio Ch Pair Delay Track (1-8) is set to sync tracking, the audio will be
automatically delayed to match the video delay. Additionally, up to three seconds of
delay can be added through the Audio Channel Delay (1-8) parameter.
Video Frame Synchronization

The Frame synchronizer offers two modes: Delay mode and Synchronizer (Sync)
mode. These modes can be chosen using the Frame Sync / Mux Mode (1-8)
parameter.
 In Delay mode, the output video is synchronized to the input video.

 In Sync mode, the output video is synchronized to the reference video. The
reference standard you can use depends on the output video standard set.
Table 4-50 Supported Reference and Output Video Standard Combinations in Sync Mode
Reference Output Video Reference Output Video
Standard Standard Standard Standard
525i 59.94  1080i 59.94 1080i 60  1080i 60
 1080p 59.94 1080p 30  1080p 60
 1080p 29.97  1080p 30
 720p 59.94  720p 60
 525i 59.94  1080p 60 DL
 1080p 59.94 DL
625i 50  1080i 50 1080i 59.94  1080i 59.94
 1080p 50 1080p 29.97  1080p 29.97
 1080p 25  1080p 59.94
 720p 50  720p 59.94
 625i 50  525i 59.94
 1080p 50 DL  1080p 59.94 DL
720p 60  720p 60 1080i 50  1080i 50
 1080p 60 1080p 25  1080p 50
 1080p 60 DL  1080p 25
 720p 50
 625i 50
 1080p 50 DL
720p 59.94  720p 59.94 1080p 24  1080p 24
 1080p 59.94 1080sF 24  1080sF 24
 1080p 59.94 DL
720p 50  720p 50 1080p 23.98  1080p 23.98
 1080p 50 1080sF  1080sF 23.98
23.98
 1080p 50 DL
In both Sync mode and Delay mode, several controls are available to manipulate the
output video signal:
 Horizontal Phase - To adjust the horizontal timing.
 Vertical Phase - To adjust the vertical timing.
 Frame Offset - Adjustable frame delay.
 Force Freeze - To manually freeze output video on first or second field (interlaced
standards), or on the whole frame (all standards).
334 Chapter 4
Output Modules
Block Diagram
Simple
TSG
DDR2
Memory
FrmRst
Detect
Video Frame Video DL
Mux
Synchronizer * ProcAmp A2B
DL
Mux
B2A
*
requires license key
DL
SDI Rx Demux
Deserializer Clock
Descrambler
‘SDI In’ Reframer Transfer Bypass
CRC/EDH Monitoring FIFO
SDI Format
Detection
ASI Detection Link A Link B
Test Tone DL
ASI Flag
Generator Delay
Non-PCM Data
SDI Tx
Audio
Audio Audio CRC Insertion
Demultiplexer Sample Rate Audio DL LineNum
Mux
(De- PCM Synchronizer & Multiplexer Insertion

Conversion ProcAmp Mux
Embedder) Delay (Embedder) Scrambler
‘SDI Out’
Serializer
Bypass Mux for (to Cable
ASI Driver)
Dolby-E/D DDR2 EmbChEn

ASI Flag
Header Memory
Detector
Dmx Audio PCM / non-PCM Flag
‘non-Audio’ Channel Status Bit
C-Bit &
Dolby-E/D TDM Audio PCM / non -PCM Flag
Header
Detector C-Bit &
Pt-TDM Dolby-E/D
128 Channels Header
Detector
Encapsulated Audio
Audio data is TDM TDM16 Audio to other Audio
expected to be
Receiver Processors in same FPGA
synchronous to
Video Reference Source Select
(Embedded or PT -TDM)
Figure 4-61 PT-HSRMX8C/8O-OBG block diagram

Specifications
Electrical Output (Back Module with 8 BNCs)

Table 4-51 Electrical Output
Item Specification
Number of Outputs 8 (standard BNC)
Impedance 75 ohms
ASI (270 Mb/s)
SD SDI (270 Mb/s) SMPTE 259M
Format 525i59.94, 625i50
Return Loss > 15 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
HD SDI (1.5 Gb/s) SMPTE 292M
Format and Image Sample SMPTE274M (1080i, 1080psF, 1080p)
Structure SMPTE296M (720p)
Return Loss > 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
HD SDI (3 Gb/s)
Format and Image Sample SMPTE 425M Level A
Structure SMPTE 372M
Return Loss > 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
> 10 dB (typical) from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz
Optical Output (Fiber Back Modules with 4 SFPs)

Table 4-52 Optical Output
Item Specification
Number of Outputs 8
Package Dual Channel Transmitter SFP Modules
Connector LC with PC/UPC polish (single mode fiber)
Wavelengths 1310nm, 1550nm (single mode fiber)
Output Power -5 dBm min, 0 dBm max (Gennum GF2922)
Supported Video rates 270Mb/s, 1.5Gb/s, 3Gb/s
Supported Formats and ASI, SD SDI, HD SDI, 3G SDI
Sampling Structures
Bit Error Rate Complies with SMPTE 297-2006
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption is 65 watts (3 Gb/s) - this is when all 8 fiber outputs are
running at 3 Gb/s.
336 Chapter 4
Output Modules
337
5 Crosspoint Modules
crosspoint modules available for the Platinum router. A General Description section provides
a generic view of how a Platinum crosspoint module operates. Each crosspoint module is
further described in terms of its individual operation, controllable parameters, installation,
configuration, and functional block diagram.
 Crosspoint Module General Description on page 338

 PM-40×32-3G5: 40x32 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules on page 342
 PM-64x64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9: 64x64 Crosspoint Modules on page 344
 PM-72×64-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules on page 346
 PT-128x256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28: 128x256
Crosspoint Module on page 350
 PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/
PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint Modules on
page 352
338 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
Crosspoint Module General Description

The crosspoint module plugs into the module interconnect backplane via a high-density,
high-speed connector. Switching is performed in a three-stage “make before break”
process that eliminates unnecessary signals on the MI, while continually providing the
output module reclocker IC a valid source so that the reclocker remains locked:
1 The crosspoint module is switched so that the previous and next sources are both active on
the output module reclocker input.
2 The output module reclocker is switched to the next source.
3 The crosspoint module switches off the previous source.
All settings for the crosspoint circuitry are reset on module insertion within one frame (per
sync present) of when the resource module detects card presence.
 The green LED labelled “POWER” is the power supply indicator. It shows that +24V is
 The LED labelled “ACT CTRL” is the control system acknowledgment. The LED shows a
 The LED labelled “ACT XPT” is the active crosspoint indicator. It indicates which
crosspoint card is active in redundant configurations.
Along with these LEDs, there are power and ground test points accessible on the front
portion of the board for troubleshooting and verification.
Temperature sensing circuits are present on the crosspoint module, so that the internal
frame temperature can be monitored.
Controllable Parameters Lists

marked with the [RO] designator are “read-only.” Crosspoint module parameters lists are
Table 5-1 Crosspoint Modules’ User-Controllable Parameters Lists
Module Name Parameter

List Location
PM-40×32-3G5: 40x32 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules page 343
PM-64x64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9: 64x64 Crosspoint Modules Page 345
PM-72×64-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules page 347
PM-72×64-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules Page 349
PT-128x256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/ Page 351
PT-128×256-3G28: 128x256 Crosspoint Module
PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/ Page 355
PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint
Modules
340 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
Signal Flow Diagram
Destination
outputs
Crosspoint
Source inputs Auxiliary
outputs
CPB
Aux inputs
Destination
outputs
Crosspoint
Auxiliary
MI connector
MI connector
outputs
parallel bus
ENET Crosspoint
XPT Micro XPT FPGA PRTIX
PIPE
Figure 5-1 Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum Crosspoint Module
64TDM 64TDM 64TDM 64TDM

signals TDM signals signals signals
buffers TDM
buffers
TDM XPT module connector

FPGA/
microprocessor(s)
TDM XPT
TDM “inputs” TDM “outputs”
ENET
CIS(2)
PRTI
Sync(3)
Select
Sync 4 Sync
Sync separator
Sync 3
4:1 mux
Sync 2
Sync 1
Note: The TDM “inputs” and TDM “outputs” may be bidirectional. The terms “inputs” and “outputs” refer to the
general case.
Figure 5-2 Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum TDM Crosspoint Module
342 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
PM-40×32-3G5: 40x32 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules
Operation
PM-40×32-3G5 modules operate in 5RU frames only.
Figure 5-3 PM-40×32-3G5 Module
The PM-40×32-3G5 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and
distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals.
The PM-40×32-3G5 crosspoint matrix contains a 40×32 I/O signal switch fabric as well as
additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability.
Figure 5-1 on page 340 shows the basic signal flow of the Platinum crosspoint module.
Installation All crosspoint modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Special
Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint
Module Firmware on page 363 and Installing Crosspoint Modules on page 369 for the
procedure for field expansion of these crosspoint modules. If you need to purchase
Configuration This module requires no additional configuration procedures besides those described for
Table 5-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-40×32-3G5 modules. These
Table 5-2 PM-40×32-3G5 User-Controllable Parameters List

(* denotes default value; [RO] denotes read-only value)
Temperature Reading [RO] Monitors internal frame -55°C – 125°C in 0.5°C increments
temperature

See Figure 5-1 on page 340.
Specifications There are no separate specifications associated with this module.

344 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
PM-64x64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9: 64x64 Crosspoint Modules
Operation
PM-64x64-X9 and PM-64×64-3G9 modules operate in 9RU frames only.
Figure 5-4 PM-64x64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9 Module
The PM-64x64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input

modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals.
The PM-64x64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9 crosspoint matrix contains a 64×64 I/O signal switch

fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability.
procedure for field expansion of crosspoint modules. If you need to purchase additional
Table 5-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-64x64-X9 and PM-64×64-3G9
Table 5-3 PM-64x64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9 User-Controllable Parameters List

temperature


346 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
PM-72×64-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules
Operation
PM-72×64-3G5 modules operate in 5RU frames only.
Figure 5-5 PM-72×64-3G5 Module
The PM-72×64-3G5 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and
distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals.
The PM-72×64-3G5 crosspoint matrix contains a 72×64 I/O signal switch fabric as well as
additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability.
Table 5-4 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-72×64-3G5 modules. These
Table 5-4 PM-72×64-3G5 User-Controllable Parameters List

temperature


348 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
PM-128x128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9: 128x128 Crosspoint Module
Operation
PM-128x128-X9 and PM-128×128-3G9 modules operate in 9RU frames only.
Figure 5-6 PM-128x128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9 Module
The PM-128x128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from

input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary
signals.
The PM-128x128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9 crosspoint matrix contains a 128×128 I/O signal

switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability.
Table 5-5 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-128x128-X9 and
PM-128×128-3G9 modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or
CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module
Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode,
double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that device’s parameter
list.
Table 5-5 PM-128x128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9 User-Controllable Parameters List

temperature


350 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
PT-128x256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/
PT-128×256-3G28: 128x256 Crosspoint Module
Operation
PT- series crosspoint modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
Figure 5-7 PT-128x256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28

Module
The PT-128x256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28 crosspoint

module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to
output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. This crosspoint module can be used in
9RU, 15RU, or 28RU frames.
The PT-128x256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28 crosspoint

matrix contains a 128×256 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint
switch capability.
Table 5-6 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-128x256-X15,
PT-128×256-3G15, PT-128x256-X28, and PT-128×256-3G28 modules. These parameters
are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are
found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In
Table 5-6 PT-128x256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28

User-Controllable Parameters List
temperature


352 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/
PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint Modules
Operation
Figure 5-8 PM-ATDM9-X5 Module
Figure 5-9 PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/

PT-ATDM64-X28 Module
The advanced TDM crosspoint module switches audio signals from input modules and
distributes them to output modules, via a proprietary time-division multiplexed transport
scheme. It offers advanced parametric transition type functions such as quiet switching,
V-fade, fade-cut, cut-fade, and synchronous switching. (The cut associated with the
fade-cut and cut-fade settings are minimum duration fades to eliminate audible switching
artifacts.) It also allows for certain audio effects for a given destination. With the exception
of PM-ATDM9-X5, all TDM crosspoints require the PT-SYNC module to function correctly.
Platinum routers support all types of audio including Dolby E and AC3. Since processing
functionality such as quiet switching and gain controls can cause data corruption with
non-PCM audio, Platinum routers support a pass-through mode for these non-PCM
sources.
When incoming audio is embedded within a video source, that audio is passed through the
wideband crosspoint without any processing. The embedded audio, and all ancillary data, is
presented at the output exactly as it entered the router.
When using the Mux/Demux technology within the router, the audio package is analyzed as
it is demultiplexed. When the system identifies a non-PCM audio source, all processing
functionality is disabled. This allows the non-PCM audio data to pass through the router
without being corrupted.
The quiet switch capability of the TDM Crosspoint within Platinum routers is active as a
default. Since the quiet switch capability can cause corruption for non-PCM audio at the
switchpoint, the capability can be turned off for each output of the router. This setting is
accomplished through the database editor within Navigator.
See page 50 for a description of the sync module operation.
The advanced TDM crosspoint module is available in the following sizes:
 PM-ATDM9-X5
The PM-ATDM9-X5 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules
and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The
PM-ATDM9-X5crosspoint matrix contains a 9×8 I/O signal switch fabric as well as
additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. This crosspoint module can be used in
5RU frames only.
On 5RU Platinum frames with TDM, the sync capability is built into the crosspoint
module, so a separate sync module is not required. Sync module operation is the same
as that of the PT-SYNC module used with other Platinum frames.
 PM-ATDM16-X9
The PM-ATDM16-X9 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules
PM-ATDM16-X9 crosspoint matrix contains a 16×16 I/O signal switch fabric as well as
9RU frames only.
354 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
 PT-ATDM16-X15
The PT-ATDM16-X15 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules
PT-ATDM16-X15 crosspoint matrix contains a 16×16 I/O signal switch fabric as well as
additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability This crosspoint module can be used in
15RU or 9RU frames.
 PT-ATDM32-X15
15RU or 9RU frames.
 PT-ATDM32-X28
 PT-ATDM64-X28
Table 5-7 on page 354 shows specific features for advanced TDM crosspoint modules.
Table 5-7 PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X15/

PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28 Special Features
Feature Description
Audio processing Processes on 16-bit, 20-bit or 24-bit audio
samples; the number of bits per sample can
be detected automatically by the module
Mono/stereo switching Allows switching of mono inputs, stereo
pairs, and “breakaway” of stereo inputs
Table 5-7 PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X15/

PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28 Special Features (Continued)
Feature Description
Synchronous switching Performs switching of AES streams
synchronously with a reference signal such
that switching occurs at an AES frame
boundary
Transitions Supports audio transitions with variable
duration when switching between two
audio signals; transitions supported include
 V Fade
 Fade Cut
 Cut Fade
 Cut (fast transition)
Transition type and duration are assigned
on a per-output basis
Quiet switching Supports quiet switching between two
audio signals as a predefined transition type
(quiet switching is implemented as a V-fade
of two signals with minimum duration)
The Platinum frame includes two slots for TDM crosspoint modules. One slot holds the
primary, or active, crosspoint module. The second slot holds an optional secondary, or
“shadow” module, which shadows all operations of the active module so as to allow it to
become active in case the active module is removed or halted due to error. The shadow
module sets its outputs to a high-impedance state until it becomes active, but otherwise
performs all operations in parallel with the primary crosspoint module.
The TDM crosspoint modules, in conjunction with the Platinum resource module, determine
which slot contains the active module. The modules report their current status (primary or
secondary) to the control system. Appropriate watchdog circuitry on the module and/or
status monitoring on the resource module will monitor the status of the primary module. It
is not necessary to remove the primary module to cause the secondary module to become
active.
Installation All crosspoint modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Crosspoint
Modules on page 369 for the procedure for field expansion of crosspoint modules. If you
need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales
Department.
This module has no controllable parameters.
356 Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
64TDM 64TDM 64TDM 64TDM

signals TDM signals signals signals
buffers TDM
buffers

FPGA/
microprocessor(s)
TDM XPT
TDM “inputs” TDM “outputs”
ENET
CIS(2)
PRTI
Sync(3)
Select
Sync 4 Sync
Sync separator
Sync 3
4:1 mux
Sync 2
Sync 1
Note: The TDM “inputs” and TDM “outputs” may be bidirectional. The terms “inputs” and “outputs” refer to the
general case.
Figure 5-10 PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/
PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28 Functional Block Diagram

357
6 Controlling Modules
Controlling Modules through Navigator

You can access and control parameters for Platinum Input (see Input Modules for details on
all supported input modules) and Output modules (see Output Modules for details on all
supported output modules) through Navigator.
Navigator Build Mode v/s Control Mode

Navigator Build Mode is freely available. The Control Mode is available with the 30 day trial
version of Navigator, and as a licensed option. After the initial 30-day trial period, the
Navigator install reverts to a Build mode state.
You can tell what mode you’re currently in by looking in the bottom right hand corner of the
Navigator application. Right click on the current mode to switch to the other mode.
Figure 6-1 Build/Control Mode in Navigator
You can control parameters on Platinum Modules in both Build Mode and Control Mode,
but in different ways. Follow these steps:
1 Create a new Routing System Via Poll

2 Choose to:
 Control your Module in Navigator Build Mode
OR
 Control your Module in Navigator Control Mode
358 Chapter 6
Controlling Modules
Create a new Routing System Via Poll

1 Start Navigator.
2 In the Navigation pane on the left, create a new Routing System by right clicking the
Routers folder and clicking Create > Routing System...
3 In the Create Routing System dialog that is displayed, enter a Name for the new Routing
system, select the Perform System Poll checkbox, set connection to TCP/IP, and provide the
IP Address of the Platinum frame to poll.
Figure 6-2 Navigator - Create Routing System
4 Click OK. A message will confirm that a routing configuration operation is in progress.
Once complete, you will see the newly created Routing System under the Routers folder in
the Navigation pane.
Control your Module in Navigator Build Mode

1 In the Navigation pane, expand the Routers folder, then expand the newly created Routing
Group, then expand the Routers folder below that
2 Double click the Platinum Frame icon. This opens up the Edit Platinum Frame dialog.
3 Go to the Detected Matrices tab.
A representation of the Platinum Frame is displayed to the right of the dialog, with
Output Modules on the left and Input Modules on the right. Modules are displayed in
slots where they are present.Modules are indicated functionally, for example, HD-SDI.
To see what specific module is in that slot, hover over it and the module name will be
displayed (for example, PT-HS-IB).
Figure 6-3 Navigator Build Mode - Frame/Modules representation
4 To view/control parameters, right click a module and select View Input Module
5 The Module Parameters dialog displays a collapsible list of all parameters for the module.
To set the value of a parameter, double click it and then select the desired option from the
drop-down or enter it into the text-box (as applicable).
Figure 6-4 Navigator Build Mode - Module Parameters

360 Chapter 6
Controlling Modules
Control your Module in Navigator Control Mode

1 In the Navigation pane, expand the Routers folder, then expand the newly created Routing
Group, then expand the Routers folder below that
2 Expand the Platinum Frame icon, then expand the module category below that (for
example, Input Cards or Output Cards)
Figure 6-5 Navigator Control Mode - Module Tree View
3 Double click the Module to control

4 A dialog displays all parameters for that module with a collapsible tree view on the left and
options on the right.
Figure 6-6 Navigator Control Mode - Module Parameters

361
7 Installation
WARNING: Potentially lethal voltages are present within the Platinum frame
during normal operation. Disconnect all power cords from the frame before you
remove the top panel. Do not apply power to the frame while the top is open
unless the unit is being serviced by properly trained personnel.
This chapter provides information specific to the installation of the Platinum router. All
modules and power supplies ordered will be installed in the Platinum frame before it is
shipped. For field expansion and/or replacement installation information, see the following
topics covered in this chapter:
 Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum Components on page 390

 Installing Alarm Modules on page 377
 Installing a Platinum Frame on page 388
 Installing Back Panel Modules on page 378
 Replacing Fans on page 385
 Installing Input and Output Modules on page 367
 Installing Resource Modules on page 379
 Replacing Resource Module Firmware on page 379
 Installing Output Monitoring Modules on page 376
 Installing Power Supplies on page 383
 Installing Sync Modules on page 376
 Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB,
PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules on page 371
CAUTION: We recommend that you test your system before its final installation.
Make sure you verify its configuration, cabling, and proper system operation.
Observe proper anti-static and grounding procedures while handling loose boards
and servicing the equipment.
362 Chapter 7
Installation
Before You Begin

Review these general rules of thumb before you begin performing any installations or field
upgrades of your Platinum routing system:
 A Platinum router is heavy. Do not attempt to lift a populated frame yourself.

 The Platinum module and connector layout was designed to make sense from the
BACK — numbering is from left to right, etc.
 Use a static strap or heel strap when handling modules. See Preventing Electrostatic
Discharge on page 455 for instructions.
 Do not stack modules directly on top of one another; solder joints and components on
the edges of modules can be damaged this way. Use a slotted card carrier to stack a
quantity of modules.
 Modules need to be properly and completely seated for correct operations.
 Edge connectors on the modules have tight tolerances. Avoid bending or forcing
modules when installing them.
 Take care not to let upper modules drop onto lower modules when inserting or
removing them from the frame. Use the module guides to prevent this.
 The Output Monitoring module slots face alternate directions (up/down/up/down)
 Verify termination on all video, sync, or X-Y lines.
 Verify that the frame is well grounded. KEEP THE FRAME GROUND IN PLACE when
servicing the frame.
 Platinum’s power supply architecture is configurable, allowing from one to four power
supplies per zone on the router. Depending on configuration and module population of
each zone, two power supplies may be required for normal operation of the zone.
 Platinum’s internal power supply may be reconfigured or reallocated to other zones.
Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input,

Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware
If your 3 Gb modules were installed at the manufacturing facility you do not need to
perform this step.
Before you install your Platinum 3 Gb input, output, and/or crosspoint modules, you must
make sure that you have upgraded the firmware. This section provides the information you
need to successfully perform the upgrade.
The following modules are affected:
 Input modules
 PM-HS-IB+
 PM-S-IB+
 PT-HS-IB+
 PT-S-IB+
 PT-HSO-IB+
 Output modules
 PM-HSR-OB+
 PM-SR-OB+
 PT-HSR-OB+
 PT-SR-OB+
 PT-HSRO-OB+
 PT-HSRO-OBG+
 Crosspoint modules
 PM-40×32-3G5
 PM-72×64-3G5
 PM-64×64-3G9
 PM-128×128-3G9
 PT-128×256-3G15
 PT-128×256-3G28
This discussion presupposes that you have a working knowledge of Navigator or

RouterMapper and have used its other capabilities. If not, please refer to the pertinent
software application user manual e to familiarize yourself with its functions before you
continue the upgrade procedure.
To perform this upgrade, you must use either Navigator version 4.5 or
RouterMapper v.6.04.11 or higher.
Your software application’s Platinum Firmware tab allows you to quickly upgrade to the
most current Platinum firmware versions for detected, selected modules; or for all detected,
installed modules.
364 Chapter 7
Installation
To upgrade the firmware for a Platinum module, follow these steps:

1 Download the firmware upgrade to the PC where the upgrade procedure will be
performed. You can check for the most current firmware upgrades at the Imagine
Communications Customer Support website.
We recommend that you download the upgrade to <drive>\Leitch\RtrWrks\ bin32\Firmware
(or if you have NAV installed, to C:\Program Files\ Harris\ RtrWrks\ bin32\ Firmware), as this
is the location where RouterMapper first looks for firmware upgrade files.
2 Perform a Poll on the selected Platinum frame to obtain the latest detected modules and
firmware versions.
3 At the main window, double-click the name of the frame that contains the modules you
want to upgrade, and then select the Firmware tab.
4 From the selected matrix list, click on the modules you want to upgrade. Multiple modules
may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys to select multiple modules). A quick way to determine the installed firmware
version is to “hover” the mouse over the module icon to the right of the module name.
Figure 7-1 Selected Matrix List
5 Right-click the mouse to bring up the pop-up menu, and then click Assign. The selected
module names will appear in the firmware upgrade list.
Notice that in the firmware upgrade list, the slot location and name of the module appear,
as well as the installed firmware version of that module and the version number for any
known upgrades.
6 Highlight the board you want to upgrade (if you have banks of the same boards you may
highlight all of them at the same time), right-click, and then select the menu option
“Change Firmware.”
Figure 7-2 Change Firmware Menu Option
7 A browser window will open. Default locations are as follows:

 (NAV not installed) C:\Program Files\Leitch\RtrWrks\bin32\Firmware
 (NAV installed) C:\Program Files\Harris\RtrWrks\bin32\Firmware
Figure 7-3 Browser Window
8 In the firmware list, click on the module you want to upgrade, and then click Upgrade.
Alternatively, click Upgrade All to upgrade all of the modules at once.
If you do not want to upgrade certain modules, click on the module you do not want to
upgrade, and then select either Delete or Delete All.
366 Chapter 7
Installation
9 The Firmware Upgrade message window will appear. The steps in the upgrade process will
be listed as they occur.
If you need to stop the upgrade procedure at any time, click Cancel. The window will
display a message that says “Aborting firmware upgrade...Please wait.” The upgrade will
continue until the firmware upgrade process is in a safe place to stop.
10 When all of your boards successfully upgrade (the upgrade process tries to perform the
upgrade up to three times each before declaring an upgrade a total failure) you will see a
“Firmware Upgrade Successful” message in the upgrade dialog box.
Figure 7-4 Successful Firmware Upgrade Message
11 When the process is complete, click OK or click the Close (X) box in the upper right corner
of the Firmware Upgrade message window.
12 Click OK to return to the main window.
Installing Input and Output Modules

For installation procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB and PT-HSR1310S-OB fiber optical modules,
see page 371.
To install or replace input and output modules, follow these steps.

1 Remove the blank cover of the appropriate slot on the rear of the frame (a #1 Phillips-head
screwdriver is required).
2 Replace the blank cover with the back panel connector assembly, and tighten screws, then
loosen them slightly (about ¼ turn).
3 Open the I/O Guide door.
Input modules are inserted into the slots on the right side of the frame only. Output
modules are inserted into the slots on the left side of the frame only.
4 From the front of the frame, insert the module into the appropriate slot; be very careful to
align the module in the guide notches on the frame (Figure 7-5) and on the guide door
(Figure 7-6 on page 368).
5 Slide the module into the frame until it is flush with the module guide edge and the
extractor handle closes.
Make sure that the module is fully seated, and the module’s inserter/extractor lever is fully
seated.
6 Tighten the two screws on the rear of the back panel; then, recheck by pressing firmly on
the inserter/extractor to insure that the module is still fully seated in the frame.
7 Close and lock the I/O Guide door.
Figure 7-5 Aligning Module with Frame Guide Notches

368 Chapter 7
Installation
Figure 7-6 Aligning Module with Guide Door Guide Notches

Installing Crosspoint Modules
Module Placement
On 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU frames with one crosspoint module (no redundant module) the
crosspoint module can be inserted into either slot 1 or slot 2.
See Figure 1-2 on page 4 for the location of slots 1 and 2 for 9RU frames. See Figure 1-3
on page 5 for the location of slots 1 and 2 for 15RU frames.
On 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU frames with one crosspoint module and one redundant module,
the primary module should be inserted into slot 1 and the redundant module should be
inserted into slot 2.
On 15RU frames with two crosspoint modules and two redundant modules, the first
primary module should be inserted into slot 1, the first redundant module should be
inserted into slot 2, the second primary module should be inserted into slot 3, and the
second redundant module should be inserted into slot 4. See Table 7-1 for information on
which inputs and outspeaks are controlled by which crosspoint module location/slot. See
Figure 1-3 on page 5 for an illustration of the location of slots 1 through 4 for 15RU
frames.
Table 7-1 Crosspoint Input/Output Control for 15RU Frames

Crosspoint/
Slot Inputs Outputs
Crosspoint slot 1 1 - 128 1 - 256

On 28RU frames, crosspoint module placement is determined by which inputs and outputs
will be controlled. See Table 7-2 for information on which inputs and outspeaks are
controlled by which crosspoint module location/slot. See Figure 1-4 on page 6 for the
location of slots 1 through 8 for 28RU frames.
Table 7-2 Crosspoint Input/Output Control for 28RU Frames

Crosspoint/ Crosspoint/
Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs
Slot Slot
Crosspoint slot 1 1 - 128 1 - 256 Crosspoint slot 5 1 - 128 257 - 512
370 Chapter 7
Installation
Installing Modules
Installation procedures are the same for all Platinum crosspoint modules.
To install a Platinum module, follow these steps:

1 Make sure that the I/O Guide doors are fastened shut.
2 From the front of the frame, insert the module into the desired vertical slot; be very careful
to align the module in the guide notches on the frame.
 If you insert a crosspoint module into the right vertical slot (that is, slots 1, 3, 5, and 7),
make sure the top of the module faces toward the frame’s input modules (see
Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7 Crosspoint Module Orientation for Right Vertical Slot
 If you insert a crosspoint module into the left vertical slot (that is, slots 2, 4, 6, and 8),
make sure the top of the module faces toward the frame’s output modules
3 Slide the module into the frame until it is flush with the module guide edge and the
extractor lever closes.
You may have some resistance from the module’s inserter/extractor lever bumping up
against the frame. If so, fully extend the extractor lever and guide the module into place.
Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB,

PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules
Installing Modules
PT-HS1310S-IB modules are inserted into the slots on the right side of the frame only.
PT-HSRO-OBG+ and PT-HSR1310S-OB modules are inserted into the slots on the left side of
the frame only.
PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB fiber optical modules have plastic

caps that protect the fragile laser connections from damage. You must remove these
protective covers before you install the back and front modules (see Figure 7-8 on
page 371).
Figure 7-8 on page 371 shows a typical fiber optical module. Your module’s appearance
may differ slightly from the one shown; however, the protective covers are positioned
identically and must be removed according to the instructions provided. The installation
instructions that follow will prompt you as to when you should remove the protective
covers.
In addition, all fiber optic connections must be inspected and cleaned before they are
assembled. Carefully follow the inspection and cleaning steps described in the next pages.
Additional safety information begins on Laser Safety Guidelines on page 463.
CAUTION: Ensure that you remove the fiber optic protective covers from the front
and back modules before installation. Take care to avoid touching the fiber optic
connections. Thoroughly clean the connections before installation. Remove power
from the frame before installing or removing back modules.
Remove these
protective covers
Remove these protective

covers
Figure 7-8 Protective Covers for Laser Connectors

372 Chapter 7
Installation
Back Module Installation

1 Remove a blank back plate from the frame. Do not discard the blank back plates. They may
be needed for future configurations.
2 On the side of the back module that inserts into the front module, remove the inner
protective cap from the fiber connection (see Figure 7-8 on page 371).
CAUTION: Microscopic dust or other contaminants can seriously impair or disable

a fiber optic network. Observe strict cleaning procedures. Do not touch the end of
the fiber.
3 Follow the inspection and cleaning procedure that begins on page 373.
4 If it is already installed, remove the front module from the slot.
5 Install the new back module by inserting the bottom lip into the required frame slot, and
then screwing it into place.
6 Apply the adhesive label to the back module if it is supplied separately.
Front Module Installation

1 Remove the blank cover of the appropriate slot on the rear of the frame (a #1 Phillips-head
screwdriver is required).
2 Replace the blank cover with the back panel connector assembly, and tighten screws, then
loosen them slightly (about ¼ turn).
3 On the side of the back connector that inserts into the module, remove the inner protective
cap from the laser insertion slot. See Figure 7-8 on page 371 for its location.
CAUTION: Microscopic dust or other contaminants can seriously impair or disable

a fiber optic network. Observe strict cleaning procedures. Do not touch the end of
the fiber.
4 Install the new back module by inserting the bottom lip into the required frame slot, and
then screwing it into place.
5 Gently remove the outer and inner protective caps from the laser. See Figure 7-8 on
page 371 for their locations.
CAUTION: Do not touch the end, edge, or tip of the laser. This sensitive piece of
equipment is susceptible to damage or misalignment if touched.
6 Follow the fiber cleaning instructions that begin on page 373.

7 Ensure that your front module matches with a corresponding back module of the same
name, and then slide the module into the guides on the frame floor.
8 When the module edge is flush with the guide, close the extractor handle. The module is
properly seated when its edge is flush with the guide edge and the extractor handle closes.
9 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation. To prevent overheating, keep the
front panel closed and all back module plate slots covered during operation.
Removing Modules
Front Module Removal
2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module, and then pull the module out of its slot;
use the handle as a lever.
3 Close the I/O Guide door to ensure proper frame ventilation.
Back Module Removal

1 Remove the front module, as described above.
2 Unscrew the top of the corresponding back module, and then tip it towards you.
3 Pull the bottom lip of the back module from its slot.
4 Reinstall a new or blank back plate in the empty slot to ensure proper frame ventilation.
5 Reinstall the front module, and then repower the frame.
Inspecting and Cleaning Fiber Optic Connections

Small amounts of microscopic dust or other contaminants can seriously impair or disable a
fiber optic network. To ensure that your network operates reliably, you must carefully
inspect and clean each connection when installing fiber optical products.
Table 7-3 lists some typical contaminants of a fiber optic connection. The inspection and
cleaning procedure begins on page 374.
Table 7-3 Typical Contaminants

Contaminant Comments
Dust particle, 1 micron Can block up to 1% of the light transmission,
creating a loss of 0.05 dB
Dust particle, 9 Although microscopic, the particle can
microns completely block the fiber core
Human hair Typically 50 to 75 microns in diameter
Oil Frequently caused by touching
Film residues Can accumulate from vapors or smoke
Powdery coatings Can be left behind after water or other solvents
evaporate
Important Points
 Before you begin cleaning, always inspect the fiber connections.
 Inspect and clean both fiber ends every time you make a connection.
 Keep a protective cap on unplugged fiber connectors.
 Do not touch the end of a fiber.
 Store unused protective caps in a clean resealable container, located nearby for easy
access.
 Do not reuse cleaning tissues or swabs.
 Do not allow alcohol or another wet cleaning agent to dry on a fiber end.
 Never touch the dispenser tip of an alcohol bottle or any clean portion of a tissue or
swab.
 Use care when handling the fiber; do not twist or pull.
374 Chapter 7
Installation
 Keep your cleaning fluids away from open flame or spark.
Figure 7-9 describes the acceptable limits of defects in a fiber connection.
Zone 1
Scratches and dust (0 to 20 micron diameter)
No scratches or digs are allowed
Zone 2
(20 to 50 micron diameter)
Maximum of 3 scratches <1.0 micron width is acceptable;
Maximum 1.0 micron light dig is acceptable
Zone 3
(50 to 126 micron diameter)
Maximum 25 micron dig is acceptable;
Maximum scratch size of 1.0 micron is acceptable
Maximum 25 micron diameter dig is acceptable
Figure 7-9 Fiber Optic Cross-Section
Inspecting and Cleaning Fibers

1 Ensure the fiber is not “live.”
WARNING: Eye damage may occur if an optical instrument such as a microscope,

magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to stare at an energized fiber end.
2 Inspect the fiber endface with a fiberscope.

3 If the fiber endface is clean, return to the installation instructions on page 372 for back
modules or page 372 for front modules.
If the connector is dirty, proceed to the dry cleaning instructions below.
Dry Cleaning
If you are using cartridge or pocket-style dry cleaning tools, follow the
manufacturer’s directions. If you are using lint-free wipes, follow these steps:
1 Fold the lint-free wipe four to eight times into a square, taking care to avoid touching the
cleaning surface of the wipe.
2 Lightly wipe the fiber tip in the central portion of the lint-free wipe.
CAUTION: Do not scrub the fiber. Excessive rubbing will leave scratches.
3 Repeat the wiping action on another clean section of the wipe or a new wipe.
4 Inspect the connector again with the fiberscope.
5 If the connection is clean, return to the installation steps on page 372 for back modules, or
page 372 for front modules.
If the connector is still dirty, proceed to the wet cleaning instructions.
Wet Cleaning
Using 99% isopropyl alcohol and lint-free wipes, follow these steps to wet clean
the fiber:
1 Fold the wipe into a square, about 4 to 8 layers thick.
2 Moisten one section of the lint-free wipe with one drop of 99% alcohol, ensuring that a
portion of the wipe remains dry.
3 Lightly wipe the fiber end in the alcohol-moistened portion of the lint-free wipe.
4 Immediately repeat the wiping action on the dry section of the wipe, removing any residual
alcohol.
5 Inspect the fiber endface again, and if necessary, repeat the wet cleaning with another
clean section of the lint-free wipe.
CAUTION: Do not scrub the fiber. Excessive rubbing will leave scratches.
6 Dry clean any remaining residue, and then inspect the connector again.
7 If the contamination persists, repeat the dry and wet cleaning procedure until the endface is
clean.
If the fiber end still remains dirty after repeated cleaning attempts, call Customer Service for
further instructions.
If the fiber end is clean, return to the installation instructions on page 372 for back
modules, or page 372 for front modules.
376 Chapter 7
Installation
Installing Output Monitoring Modules

To install or replace the optional output monitoring module, follow these steps.
1 On the rear of the Platinum frame, remove the two screws holding the option slot cover
plate. (A standard Phillips-head screwdriver is required.) Do not discard these screws, as you
will need them again.
2 Align the rear of the output monitoring module in the guide notches on either side of the
frame opening.
3 Noting the alignment of the module’s mating connector inside the frame, slide the module
into the frame.
4 Re-install the two cover plate screws at either end of the output monitoring module rear
panel.
5 Configure the starting control level, destination, and source as described in your Navigator
or RouterMapper user manual.
Installing Sync Modules

To install or replace sync modules, follow these steps.
2 Locate the appropriate slot for the sync module, above the resource module (see Figure 1-7
on page 9).
3 Align the sync module in the guide notches on either side of the frame opening.
4 From the front of the frame, slide the module into the slot; then, make sure it is fully seated
into the SYNC-MI module.
5 Ensure that the module’s inserter/extractor lever is fully seated.
Installing Alarm Modules
3
2
Figure 7-10 Installing PT-ALARM Module
Make sure that the electrical connections are seated correctly on insertion (see
Figure 7-10):
 A 28RU frame uses the connections labeled 1, 2, and 3:

 Connection 1 interconnects with the top fan module.
 Connection 2 interconnects with the bottom fan module.
 Connection 3 interconnects with the MI module.
 A 9RU or a 15RU frame uses the connections labeled 1 and 3:
 Connection 1 interconnects with the top fan module.
 A 5RU frame uses the connections labeled 2 and 3.
 Connection 2 interconnects with the fan module.
378 Chapter 7
Installation
Installing Back Panel Modules

CAUTION: Properly match the back panel I/O modules with the proper input and
output modules.
One or more back panel I/O modules correspond to each input and output module installed
in an Platinum frame. Back panel I/O modules are easily attached with two screws to the
rear of the frames. Back panel I/O modules and their corresponding input and output
modules are listed in Table 7-4.
Table 7-4 Back Panel I/O Modules with Corresponding Input and Output Modules
Input Module Back Panel I/O Output Module Back Panel I/O
Module Module
PM-HS-IB PT-V-BP PM-HSR-OB PT-V-BP
PM-HS-IB+ PM-HSR-DOB*
PT-HS-IB PM-HSR-OB+
PT-HS-IB+ PT-HSR-OB
PT-HSR-DOB*
PT-HSR-OB+
PM-S-IB PT-V-BP PM-SR-OB PT-V-BP
PM-S-IB+ PM-SR-DOB*
PT-S-IB PM-SR-OB+
PT-S-IB+ PT-SR-OB
PT-SR-DOB*
PT-SR-OB+
PM-AEB-IB PT-AEB-IBP PM-AEB-OB PT-AEB-OBP
PM-AEBT-IB PM-AEBT-OB
PT-AEB-IB PT-AEB-OB
PT-AEBT-IB PT-AEBT-OB
PM-AEC-IB PT-AEC-IBP PM-AEC-OB PT-AEC-OBP
PM-AECT-IB PM-AECT-OB
PT-AEC-IB PT-AEC-OB
PT-AECT-IB PT-AECT-OB
PM-ADC-IB PT-A2-BP PM-DAC-OB PT-A2-BP
PM-ADCT-IB PM-DACT-OB
PT-ADC-IB PT-DAC-OB
PT-ADCT-IB PT-DACT-OB
PM-DEC-IB PT-V-BP PM-ENC-OB PT-V-BP
PT-DEC-IB PM-ENC-DOB*
PT-ENC-OB
PT-ENC-DOB*
PT-HS1310S-IB PT-FO-BMI PT-HSR1310S-OB PT-FO-BMO
PT-HSO-IB+ PT-SFP2X4+BM PT-HSRO-OB+ PT-SFP2X4+BM
PT-HSRO-OBG+
* Requires two PT-V-BP modules
Installing Resource Modules

One resource module comes standard with every Platinum frame. You may add an
additional resource module to the frame as a redundant option.
To install or replace resource modules, follow these steps.

2 Insert the resource module into the appropriate slot from the front of the frame. Be very
careful to align the module in the guide notches on the frame (Figure 7-5) and on the
guide door (Figure 7-6).
3 Make sure that the module is fully seated, and the inserter/extractor lever is fully seated.
Replacing Resource Module Firmware

Periodically you may need to replace or update the resource module firmware versions
available for PT-RES modules. You will need RouterMapper, RouterWorks, and a terminal
emulation package such as HyperTerminal to successfully perform these tasks.
Use Cases The following use cases describe different scenarios that require different procedures for
completion of firmware and module replacements. Review the scenarios that appear at the
beginning of each procedure to see what steps you need to take to perform module
replacement properly and completely.
The following sections presuppose that you have a working knowledge of Navigator or
RouterMapper, and RouterWorks, and have used their other capabilities. If not, please refer
to the appropriate software application user manual to familiarize yourself with their
functions before you continue the firmware replacement process.
Scenario 1: Platinum router contains one resource module; two modules (one
PFM64 flash module and one MRAM module) received.
1 Back up the Navigator or RouterMapper database, and then back up current crosspoints to
a RouterWorks salvo.
2 Using the Platinum Firmware tab in Navigator or RouterMapper, upgrade the existing
resource module to the same resource module version1 as the new flash and MRAM
modules.
3 After the upgrade is complete, execute the salvo via a serial cable (or open Navigator or
RouterWorks, and then verify that the salvo is active).
4 Remove the existing resource module from the Platinum frame.
Insert the PFM64 flash module (with its module identifier facing down) into the SU2 slot on
the resource module.
1
Module version information appears on labels affixed to the resource and flash modules.
380 Chapter 7
Installation
The PFM64 module identifier is shown in Figure 7-11.
PFM64 flash module
Figure 7-11 PFM64 Flash Module Identifier Location
5 Insert the MRAM module (with its module identifier facing up) into SU3 slot on the resource
module.
The MRAM module identifier is shown in Figure 7-12.
MRAM flash module
Figure 7-12 MRAM Module Identifier Location
6 Reinstall the resource module back into the Platinum frame.

7 Using Hyperterminal, execute the Information command to verify that no tasks are
suspended.
8 Verify that Navigator or RouterMapper can “talk” to the resource module over Ethernet,
and then download the appropriate database to the resource module.
9 After downloading the database, perform a poll to verify data integrity.
10 Using Hyperterminal, execute the ~#i command to verify that no tasks are suspended.
11 Using Navigator or RouterWorks, verify that the salvo is “active.”
Scenario 2: Platinum router contains two resource modules; four modules

(including two PFM64 flash and two MRAM modules) received.
a RouterWorks salvo.
resource modules to the same resource module version1 as the new flash and MRAM
modules.
4 Remove the existing “passive” resource module from the Platinum frame.
5 Insert the PFM64 flash module (with its module identifier facing down) into the SU2 slot on
the extracted resource module. The PFM64 module identifier is shown in Figure 7-11.
Insert the MRAM module (with its module identifier facing up) into SU3 slot on the
extracted resource module. The MRAM module identifier is shown in Figure 7-12.
1
6 Reinstall the extracted resource module back into the Platinum frame. The existing module
remains the “active” resource module and the new resource module becomes the
“passive” resource module.
7 Verify that files copy properly from the active to the passive resource module.
8 Verify that Navigator or RouterMapper can “talk” to the resource modules over Ethernet,
and then download the appropriate database to the active resource module.
12 Remove the active card, and then wait for the passive card to become active.
13 Insert the PFM64 flash module (with its module identifier facing down) into the SU2 slot on
the extracted resource module. The PFM64 module identifier is shown in Figure 7-11.
14 Insert the MRAM module (with its module identifier facing up) into SU3 slot on the
extracted resource module. The MRAM module identifier is shown in Figure 7-12.
15 Reinstall the extracted resource module, and then verify that files copy properly from the
active to the passive resource module.
Scenario 3: Platinum router contains two resource modules; two new resource
modules with the new MRAM flashes and code received.
a salvo.
modules.
4 Remove the old “passive” resource module, and then install the first new resource module.
This module becomes the “passive” resource module.
7 Remove the old “active” resource module and insert the second new resource module. This
module becomes the “passive” resource module.
8 Verify that files copy properly from the active to the passive resource module.
Alternative - backup to USB by performing the following command:
~#UpgradeTestSysConfigMessage("BACKUPUSBALL","vflash:",
"DirectoryName",1) )
1
382 Chapter 7
Installation
Scenario 4: One resource module in field; new resource module with MRAM flash
(to make a redundant resource module system) received.
a salvo.
modules.
4 Insert the new resource module, and then allow the modules to sync up.
10 Perform failover to new MRAM resource module (verify no signal loss, and so on)
11 Reinsert the existing resource module, and then verify that the files sync up properly.
Scenario 5: From RouterMapper, upgrade to the latest resource module code with
old resource module, flash, and MRAM modules.
a salvo.
resource modules to the new code made available.
Scenario 6: Two new modules installed; everything works for a week or two;
suddenly, system crashes; so new flashes are replaced with old flash modules from
old resource modules.
The system should work properly utilizing the old SRAM, as long as both boards are
programmed with the older BSP and application code that are compatible with the older
flashes.
1
Installing Power Supplies

One power supply module is included as standard equipment in the PM-FR-5 and PM-FR-9
Platinum frames; two power supply modules are included as standard equipment in the
PT-FR-15 Platinum frames; four power supply modules are included as standard equipment
in the PT-FR-28 Platinum frames. Adding more power supply modules provides redundancy.
No configuration settings are needed for the power supply module(s). See Installing a
Platinum Frame on page 388 for information concerning the appropriate power cords to
use for AC and DC power supplies.
To install a power supply, follow these steps:

1 Slide the power supply into the appropriate opening in the frame. (You may feel some
resistance as the module engages the mating connector; this is normal.) Ensure that the
module is fully seated in the slot.
2 Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. The power supply voltage and fan display
lights will illuminate.
3 If you want to lock the power supply in place, push the lock screw to the left, then tighten
the lock screw.
Power distribution information is shown in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5 Platinum Power Distribution Information

Frame No. of Zones
PM-FR-5 1
PM-FR-9 1
PT-FR-15 2
PT-FR-28 4
Table 7-6 Platinum Power Distribution by Zones

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
Resource module 1 Resource module 2
Sync module
OM module 1 OM module 3
OM module 2 OM module 4
Alarm module
Fan module (top) Fan module
(bottom)
TDM crosspoint TDM crosspoint
module 1 module 2
PM-5-X1
PM-5-X2
PM-9-X1
PM-9-X2
PT-15-X1 PT-15-X3
384 Chapter 7
Installation
Table 7-6 Platinum Power Distribution by Zones (Continued)

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
PT-15-X2 PT-15-X4
PT-28-X1 PT-28-X3 PT-28-X5 PT-28-X7
PT-28-X2 PT-28-X4 PT-28-X6 PT-28-X8
IB: 1-128 IB: 129-256 IB: 257-384 IB: 385-512
OB: 1-128 OB: 129-256 OB: 257-384 OB: 385-512
Replacing Fans
A fan module is supplied with every Platinum frame (two fan modules are supplied with the
28RU frame). In case of a fan failure, only individual fans will need replacement; the entire
fan module will not need to be replaced. However, the locking 3-pin connectors must be
disconnected from the fans when removing a fan, and must be reconnected when installing
a fan.
To replace a fan, follow these steps:

1 Remove the fan cover panel to allow clear access to the fan unit requiring replacement.
2 Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the four fan mounting screws of fan requiring
replacement. Put the mounting screws aside, as you will need them to properly install the
replacement fan.
Figure 7-13 Removing Fan Mounting Screws
3 Move the fan unit away so as to allow access to the fan cable connector.
4 Using side snips, cut off the fan cable lock of the fan requiring replacement.
386 Chapter 7
Installation
Figure 7-14 Cutting Off Fan Cable Lock
5 Unplug the fan cable connector from the circuit board.
Figure 7-15 Unplugging Connector
6 Plug the replacement fan’s cable connector from the circuit board. make sure the lock
mechanism is engaged.
Figure 7-16 Plugging In Connector
7 Put the replacement fan in place on the fan module.

8 Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, reattach the fan with the four fan mounting screws from
the old fan.
Figure 7-17 Reattaching Fan Mounting Screws
9 Replace the fan cover panel.

10 If desired, adjust the fan noise settings. On PM-FAN-5 modules, fan noise settings are
adjusted via the PM-ALARM-5 module. (See Controlling Fan Speed on page 31 for more
information.) On PM-FAN-8, PT-FAN-14, or PT-FAN-16 modules, fan noise may be reduced
by adjusting the potentiometer at each fan location. This will reduce air flow through the
frame. (This is not recommended in some applications. Please contact Customer Service for
more detailed information.)
388 Chapter 7
Installation
Configuration See page 30 for fan speed and alarm configuration settings needed for PM-FAN-5 modules.
There are no configuration settings needed for PM-FAN-8, PT-FAN-14, or PT-FAN-16
modules.
Installing a Platinum Frame

Each Platinum frame is shipped fully populated (based on customer’s configuration) and
pre-configured from our manufacturing facility.
The Platinum system can be installed anywhere within a routing system and can be
controlled in a variety of ways. Because the flexibility of the Platinum setup allows for many
possible configurations, the installation procedures will depend on the desired configuration
and system design. General installation procedures are outlined below.
1 Install the Platinum frame in a restricted access area, so that only qualified personnel have
access to it.
2 An optional Platinum support tray may be purchased to make installation easier.
3 Lift the Platinum frame into place and install rack screws.
4 Use power cords of adequate wire gauge when connecting the Platinum frame to the
facility’s electrical power source.
 Platinum frames labeled to operate on 100 to 240 VAC should be connected using AC
power cords that are no smaller than 14 gauge.
 Platinum frames labeled to operate from -40 to -60 VDC should be connected using
cables no smaller than 12 gauge with ring terminals attached to the terminal blocks.
DC Platinum frames should be grounded using eight-gauge stranded copper wire

crimped to the dual lug compression terminal provided on the frame.
Common Issues and Things to Check

 Verify serial port settings from card edge control (defaults are 38400, n, 8,1)
 Verify IP address settings (double-check subnet mask)
 Verify that all modules are properly seated
 Reseat modules when in doubt! Confirm that the card-edge LED for ACT-CTL
eventually turns green
 Verify that a valid X-Y signal is attached to X-Y ports on the router (not Sync), and that
a valid Sync is connected to the Sync connectors
 Verify correct termination (75) on Sync and X-Y lines
 Verify state of Safe Hub mode on X-Y bus (this may be disabling second port)
 Confirm that all power supplies are cabled, turned on, and functional
 Confirm version of Platinum firmware on the resource module
Commonly Performed Procedures

 Firmware Upgrade Procedure
 Via FTP or via flash card replacement
 May be done with router powered up
 No switching possible while PT-RES is removed, unless you have a redundant PT-RES
installed
 Flash Module Upgrade Procedure
 Attach anti-static strap
 Remove PT-RES module
 Remove flash module from PT-RES and replace with new flash
 Reinstall PT-RES
 Firmware Upgrade Procedure, crosspoint module — Replace onboard EEPROM
 Module firmware upgrade procedure — Replace onboard EEPROM
390 Chapter 7
Installation
Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum Components

See the following sections for the procedures for field expansion and/or replacement of
Platinum components. (If a component is not listed, then it is not field-upgradeable. If you
need to upgrade or replace such a module, please contact your Customer Service
representative.)
To purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Table 7-7 Field-Upgradeable Modules and Components

Module/Component Installation Explanation Section (Page)
Alarm module  Installing Alarm Modules on page 377
Back panel module  Installing Back Panel Modules on page 378
Crosspoint module  Installing Input and Output Modules on page 367

 Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading
3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware
on page 363*
Fan  Replacing Fans on page 385
Fiber optical module  Installing Input and Output Modules on page 367
 Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for
PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB
Fiber Optical Modules on page 371
 Laser Safety Guidelines on page 463
Input module  Installing Input and Output Modules on page 367
on page 363†
Output module  Installing Input and Output Modules on page 367
on page 363‡
Output monitoring  Installing Output Monitoring Modules on page 376
module
Power supply  Installing Power Supplies on page 383
Resource module  Installing Resource Modules on page 379
Sync module  Installing Sync Modules on page 376

* PM-40×32-3G5, PM-72×64-3G5, PM-64×64-3G9, PM-128×128-3G9, PT-128×256-3G15,
PT-128×256-3G28 only
† PM-HS-IB+, PM-S-IB+, PT-HS-IB+, PT-S-IB+ only
‡ PM-HSR-OB+, PM-SR-OB+, PT-HSR-OB+, PT-SR-OB+ only
391
8 Configuration
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltages are present within the Platinum frame during normal
operation. Disconnect all power cords from the frame before you remove the top
panel. Do not apply power to the frame while the top is open unless the unit is
being serviced by properly trained personnel.
You can configure Platinum modules via several different methods: card-edge controls, local
and remote panels, and certain GUI-based software applications. This chapter describes the
configuration tools and procedures for configuring a Platinum router via card-edge controls
and Navigator or RouterMapper configuration utility software. The following topics are
covered in this chapter:
 Card-Edge Controls on page 392

 Frame Controllable Parameters on page 394
 Configuring via Navigator or RouterMapper on page 398
 Configuring Sync Reference Switch Points on page 404
 Configuring TDM Audio Matrices on page 411
CAUTION
We recommend that you test your system before its final installation. Make sure
you verify its configuration, cabling, and proper system operation. Observe proper
anti-static and grounding procedures while handling loose boards and servicing the
equipment.
392 Chapter 8
Configuration
Card-Edge Controls
Using the Card-Edge Controls
Figure 8-1 Card-Edge Control Display
The card-edge controls for Platinum modules are located just behind the front panel of the
frame. The controls consist of these items, from left to right:
 Display screen
 Escape button
 Nav+ (up)/Nav- (down) toggle switch
 Enter button
Whether you use the card edge, a software control application, or a control panel, the
options and variable values on Platinum modules are known as parameters.
Read-Only and Adjustable Parameters

The Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) screens on Platinum modules show two types of
controllable parameters:
 Read-only parameters provide status information, but cannot be changed.

 Adjustable parameters can be modified using card-edge controls.
Read-Only Parameters
Since you cannot change read-only parameters using card-edge controls, a lock icon
appears beside them on the display screen.
Adjustable Parameters
You can change two types of adjustable parameters using the card-edge controls: numeric
parameters and selectable parameters
Numeric parameter changes are always immediate. You can make selectable parameters
either Delayed or Immediate. When set to Delayed, the parameter changes will not take
effect until you press the Enter button.
Because of the small size of the card-edge display screen, only two lines of information
appear at any time. When an up or down arrow appears in the display screen, it indicates
that there are more items in the list. When both an up and down arrow appear, there are
list items both above and below the displayed items.
Once you scroll to the end of a list, the items will wrap to the top or bottom and begin the
list over again. Wrapping is only available from the card edge. Parameters that normally
wrap when adjusted via the card edge will clip when adjusted using a control software
application.
Operation Notes
When using a Platinum module, observe the following operation notes:
 Although the effect of a parameter change may appear to be immediate, the module
requires 20 seconds to save the latest change. If another change is made during these
20 seconds, the first parameter change and the second parameter change will not be
saved until 20 seconds after the second parameter change. There is no limit to the
number of changes that can be made within 20 seconds of each other. However, none
of these changes will be saved until 20 seconds after the last parameter change.
 Each module automatically sets its parameters to the ones saved last.
CAUTION
Failure to observe these Operation Notes will result in accidental changes to the
module’s parameter settings.
Card-Edge Screen Saver

After 20 minutes of inactivity, the VFD on a Platinum module automatically shuts off. To
reactivate the VFD, press any button or toggle switch on the module. The screen saver
mode is a step; therefore, no parameter changes will take effect when you “awaken” the
VFD using one of the card-edge controls. However, the parameter changes will take effect if
you press the Enter button twice while the display is being awakened.
Controllable Parameters List Appearance

The Controllable Parameters list is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available
parameters, arranged into groupings. Parameters with the abbreviation [RO] are
“read-only.”
 Platinum frame default settings are listed on page 394.

 Platinum application parameters are listed on page 395.
 Platinum fail-safe parameters are listed on page 395.
 Parameters lists for each individual module are listed with the module’s detailed
description.
Navigating the Parameters List

Note: If you do not want to make changes to your settings, return to the previously
selected item in the list, and then press Escape to move up a level.
To navigate, and then view or change a parameter, follow these steps:

1 Open the front panel of the frame.
2 Press any card-edge control button or the toggle switch to turn on the VFD display. The
module name will appear as the banner on the card-edge display screen.
394 Chapter 8
Configuration
3 Press Select.
The first two items in the Level One list appear.
4 Click Nav- (down) on the Nav-/Nav+ switch to view more items in the list.
5 Choose the desired item in the list, then press Select.
The Level Two list will appear.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to view more items in Levels Two, Three, and Four.
7 If the parameter is numeric, slide the bar to the desired parameter using the Nav+/Nav-
switch; or, choose the desired item in the Level Four list, and then press Select.
8 Once you have set or viewed the parameter, you can leave it in its current state or return to
the card-edge display banner.
To return to the card-edge display banner, repeatedly press Escape.
9 Close the front panel of the frame to ensure the cooling system continues to operate
properly.
Frame Controllable Parameters

The card-edge controllable parameters listed below are specific to a Platinum frame. Frame
controllable parameters available through Navigator or RouterMapper are shown in Table
8-4 on page 400. Controllable parameters specific to a particular module are listed with the
module’s detailed description.
Default Settings
Table 8-1 Platinum Default Settings

Item Default Setting
IP address 192.168.100.250
Gateway 192.168.100.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Serial baud rate 38400 baud
Serial mode RS-232
Telnet On
FTP On
VXY Server On
# of users= 4
Application Parameters
Table 8-2 Card-Edge Application Parameters
Menu Item 1 Menu Item 2 Menu Item 3 Description
COMMS SERIAL (Serial 1 and Serial 2) Allows viewing and control of settings
affecting serial ports 1 and 2
SUMMARY Displays a summary of the selected
serial port’s settings (mode, baud)
MODE Chooses either RS-232 or RS-422 mode
for the selected serial port
BAUD Chooses baud rate for the selected
serial port; available settings are 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200
ENET (Enet 1 and Enet 2) Allows viewing and control of settings
affecting Ethernet ports 1 and 2
SUMMARY Displays a summary of the selected
Ethernet port’s Address, gateway and
Netmask settings
ADDRESS Allows setting the Ethernet port’s IP
address
GATEWAY Allows setting the Ethernet port’s
Default Gateway address
NETMASK Allows setting the Ethernet ports
network mask
STATUS FAN Indicates if there is an active fan alarm
in the system
PSU Indicates if there is an active Power
supply unit alarm in the system
OPERATIONS SERVICE SNAPSHOT Causes an updated copy of the system
snapshot file to be written to the flash
file system
SYSTEM FRAME ID Allows assignment of the frame’s
system ID
REBOOT NORMAL Restarts the Platinum system normally
FAILSAFE Restarts the system in Failsafe mode
(normally used only during installation
and/or by service personnel for low-level
diagnostics, system settings or
upgrading resource card components)
DEFAULTS Restores resource card communications
and operation settings to factory default
state
Fail-Safe Parameters
Fail-safe parameters are normally used only during installation and/or by service personnel
for low-level diagnostics, system settings, or upgrading resource card components.
396 Chapter 8
Configuration
Table 8-3 Card-Edge Fail-Safe Interface Parameters

Menu Item 1 Menu Item 2 Menu Item 3 Options / Results
Communications Network1 Network 1 Up/Down
IP Address (displayed XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
on second line: current (Default IP address: 192.168.100.250)
status)
Gateway (displayed on XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
second line: current (Default Gateway: 192.168.100.1)
status)
Subnet Mask (displayed XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
on second line: current (Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0)
status)
Enable
Disable
Network 2 Network 2 Up/Down
IP Address XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
(Displayed on second Default IP address: 192.168.100.250
line: current status)
Gateway XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
(Displayed on second Default Gateway: 192.168.100.1
Subnet Mask XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
(Displayed on second Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Enable
Disable
Serial 1 Status Display Serial Info
Baud Rate  9600
(Scroll on second line:  19200
Parity = None
 38400
Number of Stop Bits =
1  57600
Number of Bits=8  115200
Mode  RS232
 RS422
Enable
Disable
Table 8-3 Card-Edge Fail-Safe Interface Parameters (Continued)

Serial 2 Enable/Disable
(displayed on second
line: current status -
enabled or disabled Baud Rate  9600
(Scroll on second line:  19200
Parity = None
 38400
Number of Stop Bits =
1  57600
Number of Bits=8  115200
Mode  RS232
 RS422
USB 1 Enable/Disable
USB 2 Host/Filesystem
Protocols Ftp FTP Enable/Disable Selection
Telnet1 # of connections (displayed on second
line: current status
Port number (displayed on second line:
current status)
Telnet2 Telnet -Enable/Disable Selection
# of connections
Port number
File System List Directory tree
Format Fs Format Files system
Detect Fs Mount File system
Erase Fs Delete File System
Delete Delete Files
Diagnostics Ping Option Ping XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
HW Test Perform hardware test
Memory Test Perform memory test
Flash Test Perform flash test
Restore Defaults Reset Frame to Define items affected to default:
Factory Defaults Y/N? Comm Setting
IP
gateway
subnet
ftp = on
telnet = on
Any Files- like sysconfig.xml?
398 Chapter 8
Configuration
Table 8-3 Card-Edge Fail-Safe Interface Parameters (Continued)

Boot From Network1 Find matching files from IP address
XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
Network 2 Find matching files from IP address

XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
Flash
Card 1
Card 2
Time/Clock Time server to Displays current time/date scroll on
connect to bottom
Set Time Enter Time

Set Mode Synchronize with NTP
Set Time Server IP Address of Server
XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
Set Timezone GMT ± etc.
Server Connection
Timeout (ms)
About Product name
Software Versions
HW Version
Copyright Leitch Inc
Serial Number
International Services
Update Update Rom
Update App
Create Im
Reboot Reboot System Safe
Mode Y/N?
Configuring via Navigator or RouterMapper

Note: This section presupposes that you have a working knowledge of Navigator or
RouterMapper configuration utility and have used the software’s other capabilities. If not,
please refer to the pertinent software application user manual to familiarize yourself with its
functions before you continue the Add process
The information below provides you the different methods by which you can add the
Platinum router to a configuration utility database. It does not go into detail about any of
these methods or about other aspects of editing a router. For more information on editing
routers, please refer to the pertinent configuration utility software application user manual.
You can download a copy of the most current edition from our website.
To add a Platinum router, you must use Navigator version 4.5 or higher, or RouterMapper
v.6.01 or higher (v.6.03 or higher to add Platinum with CENTRIO).
Adding Platinum Frames by Polling

The Poll option is used to query the control system for any programmable devices that may
be present in the system. Polling will obtain information about the current configuration of
each physical device, and will compare it to the information found in the database to
determine if the database information matches the actual configuration.
Adding Platinum Frames by Discovering

The Discovery option is a quick way to allow the configuration utility software to search
the control system for any programmable devices that may be present in the system. Unlike
the Polling option, the Discovery option will not obtain information about current
configurations; however, it will allow you to select discovered devices to add to the device
list.
Adding Platinum Frames using the Create or Add Command

An alternative to polling the system for, or discovering, devices is to create the device
definitions via Navigator’s Create or RouterMapper’s Add function. Adding a Platinum
frame to the RouterMapper database is a multi-step process that requires you to select a
frame size, set up a matrix, select monitoring (if you have optional monitoring modules as
part of your system), and set up controls.
Frame Application Parameters Available Through Navigator or RouterMapper

Whenever a system poll is initiated, Navigator or RouterMapper will query all devices
attached to the system to determine the configuration of each. The properties of the
detected frame will be displayed on the Detected Matrices tab. This information is read-only
(it cannot be edited). However, certain application parameters can be edited via the Module
Parameters list box for frames. To access this list box, at the Detected Matrices tab, position
the screen cursor above the resource module entry in the Control Components section,
right-click the mouse button, and then select View Frame Settings. The Module Parameters
list box will appear.
400 Chapter 8
Configuration
The parameters listed in the Module Parameters list box are user-controllable. Selections
that are greyed out are read-only and cannot be changed. Table 8-4 lists frame parameters,
descriptions, and options.
Table 8-4 Application Parameters Available Through Configuration Utility Software

(* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter)
Frame Type [RO] Programmed frame size  PM-FR-5
 PM-FR-9
 PT-FR-15
 PT-FR-28
Detected Frame Type [RO] Actual, physical frame size  PM-FR-5
 PM-FR-9
 PT-FR-15
 PT-FR-28
Frame Id Number assigned to frame from 0 - 127
application software to allow it to
participate in the control system
Frame Name Alphanumeric string used in 23 characters
application software to allow
user-friendly naming of the
Platinum frame; it shows in the
hardware list
CPU Id [RO] PT-RES serial number; allows 12 characters
licensing for options such as SNMP
Sync Mode1 Specifies sync settings for sync ports  Auto
• (see the software application  Standard
• manual for descriptions of these
 Advanced
Sync Mode4 settings)
Table 8-4 Application Parameters Available Through Configuration Utility Software (Continued)
Sync Reference1 Only used if sync mode is  None*
• “Standard” (see the software  1280×720/50P Line 7
• application manual for a description
 1280×720/60P Line 7
Sync Reference4 of this setting)
 1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/24P Line 7
 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
 1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/25P Line 7
 1920×1080/30P Line 7
 1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/50I Line 7
 1920×1080/60I Line 7
 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
 Analog 525/60 Line 10
 Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
Detected Reference1 [RO] Sync reference that is automatically  None*
• detected by PT-RES (this is the sync  1280×720/50P Line 7
• reference used when Sync Mode
 1280×720/60P Line 7
Detected Reference4 [RO] parameter is set to Auto)
Four concurrent available sync  1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
references are allowed  1920×1080/24P Line 7
If an external sync reference is
 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
removed from the frame, the Sync
Presence parameter will indicate  1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
that it is not present; however, the  1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
Detected Reference parameter will
 1920×1080/25P Line 7
continue to show the previous
detected reference to prevent  1920×1080/30P Line 7
interruption in switching operations  1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
 1920×1080/50I Line 7
 1920×1080/60I Line 7
 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
 Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
402 Chapter 8
Configuration
Redundancy Mode Instructs PT-RES to automatically  Manual
switch crosspoints from a crosspoint  Auto
module to its redundant crosspoint
module when the active one is
removed.
This feature is not available for

frames that do not have redundant
crosspoint modules; when set to
Manual, you must switch each
crosspoint to the redundant card by
setting it to Active by using the
crosspoint active parameter
Redundant Switch Mode Instructs PT-RES to switch all Switch All
currently active crosspoints to the
redundant crosspoint module when
the active one is removed.
External Temperature [RO] Specifies external operating –128° to 120°C
temperature in degrees Celsius
General Alarm1 [RO] Alarm relay on PT-RES  No Alarm
•  Alarm
•
General Alarm3 [RO]
Alarm Enable1 Enables/disables General Alarm  Enable
• parameter  Disable
•
Alarm Enable3
Active Crosspoint1 For frames that support redundant  On
• crosspoints, this parameter allows  Off
• you to set the currently active
Active Crosspoint8 crosspoint module
If Redundant Switch Mode is set to
Switch All” all active crosspoints will
switch through the set crosspoint
module and the corresponding,
previous active crosspoint module
will become inactive
For all frames the value of this
parameter indicates whether the
crosspoint module installed is active
(present and allowing switched)
Sync Enable1 Allows you to select which sync  On
• references can trigger crosspoint  Off
• switches
Sync Enable4
Sync Presence1 Indicates which sync reference is  On
• presently detected by PT-RES  Off
• If an external sync reference is
Sync Presence4 removed from the frame, the Sync
Presence parameter will indicate
that it is not present; however, the
Detected Reference parameter will
continue to show the previous
detected reference to prevent
interruption in switching operations
Active TDM Crosspoint1 Allows you to set the currently  On
•Active TDM Crosspoint2 active TDM module  Off
Active Sync Module1 Allows you to set the currently  On

• active sync module  Off
•
Active Sync Module2
Internal Network1 Used with CENTRIO, sets the 192.168.101.000*
• network address for internal
• Ethernet for each bank of CENTRIO
Internal Network4 modules
frames that do not have CENTRIO
modules installed
Double Density Mode Used when a CENTRIO double  7+1
density submodule is installed on a  8+1
Platinum IB+ module
 None*
frames that do not have CENTRIO
modules installed
Temperature Threshold Indicates the temperature threshold 60°C* (-127° to +127°C)
for all the temperature sensors in/on
a Platinum frame
When a change in any external or
internal temperature sensor
readings rises to the same value or
greater than the temperature
threshold value, the frame
generates an alarm on the PT-Alarm
module
When a change in any external or
internal temperature sensor value
results in all temperature values
drop to less than the temperature
threshold, the alarm indicator will
be cleared
404 Chapter 8
Configuration
Configuring Sync Reference Switch Points

Platinum frame switch point configuration is one of the easiest and most flexible found in
the industry. It can be plug-and-play or provide granular adjustments to meet the most
complex requirements.
In most configurations, the default settings do not require any additional setup. For more
complex systems, there are two main steps to configure the correct switch point for the
signals being routed:
1 Configure the switch timing for the sync inputs connected to the frame. Platinum supports
up to four sync inputs.
By default, the inputs are configured for Auto mode and base switch timing on the
reference inputs per SMPTE RP-168. See page 404 for more information on switch modes.
2 Assign output modules to one of the four switch configurations (Platinum automatically
defaults all outputs to use Sync Input 1).
The explanation below is for informational purposes. It does not provide details of the steps
involved in setting up sync references. You can configure the Platinum sync via Navigator or
RouterMapper.
Sync Reference Switch Modes

Three modes are available for configuring each sync reference switch point (up to four
supported in Platinum: Auto Mode (default), Standard Mode, and Advanced Mode.
Auto Mode
Auto Mode is the default setting for all switch point configurations within Platinum (up to
four, associated with the four reference inputs). When in Auto Mode, the outputs assigned
to that Sync will switch relative to what reference is detected on the Sync Input.
For example, if NTSC ‘House Black’ is detected on Sync Input 1, the switch point will be line
10 relative to the reference (per SMPTE RP-168).
Auto Mode is the desired mode for all configurations where the signals being routed are
based on the same timing as the reference signal and the user wants to switch per SMPTE
RP-168 (this is the majority of use cases).
Standard Mode
Standard Mode allows you to use a different sync reference than the signals being routed
and still switch in the correct place relative to the routed signals (as long as the reference
and signals are based on the same timing).
This selection requires you to configure the switch point for one of the sync reference inputs
by choosing an I/O type from the drop-down list box (see Figure 8-2). The system then
calculates the proper timing for the switch point by using a look-up between the detected
reference signal on the selected sync reference input and the signal type selected from the
drop-down list box.
Figure 8-2 Standard Mode Signal Type Selection
Standard Mode is mostly used when using a single reference for switching different signals
within the frame. A common example is when switching both standard SD and HD formats
based on the same sync input. This feature allows Platinum not to require a Tri-Level HD
reference to switch at the correct place within the signal even when using a standard
‘House Black’ reference.
Example Configuration
House Black NTSC Reference when switching both SD (NTSC) and HD (1080i 59.9) signals.
1 Attach House Black sync reference to both sync 1 and sync 2 inputs on the back of the
frame.
2 In Navigator or RouterMapper, navigate to the Platinum Control Settings tab, and then click
the Change Sync Settings Sync... button.
The Configure I/O Sync dialog box opens.
3 Set Sync 1 switch configuration to Auto (should be configured already by default).
406 Chapter 8
Configuration
Figure 8-3 Step 3: Sync 1 Switch Configuration to Auto Mode
4 Set Sync 2 switch configuration to Standard, and then select 1920x1080/59.94I from the
I/O Type drop-down list box.
Figure 8-4 Step 4: Sync 2 Switch Configuration to Standard Mode
5 Switch to the Platinum Configured Matrices tab, and then configure each HD output
module to use Sync 2 for proper switch point timing.
Figure 8-5 Step 5: Configure HD Output Module

Advanced Mode
Advanced Mode allows you to configure a Platinum router to switch at any point relative to
the detected reference signal’s sync pulse in microsecond delay increments. Use this
configuration primarily with a non-standard reference, or when you choose not to follow
SMPTE RP-168 switching guidelines.
On Platinum systems with resource module version 3.9 or lower, the use of Advanced mode
is required to meet the SMPTE RP-168 specifications for switch points in which the sync
reference is not the same standard as the signal type.
Some formats (for example, 1080i/50) do not switch at the correct line using Auto Mode.
Using the Advanced Mode setup can address these issues as well.
Resolution
Note: Navigator version 4.5 or RouterMapper version 6.12 is required for proper Advanced
Mode operation.
Advanced Mode allows you to configure the Platinum to switch at the right line within the
video signal.
For delay values for standard video timing, refer to the values provided in Table 8-5,
Table 8-6, and Table 8-7. The bright green blocks indicate the reference type connected to
the sync input and the light green blocks indicate the signal type. Gray blocks are not
supported.
Table 8-5 Standard Video Time Delay Values: Analog 525/60, Analog 525/60/1.001, Analog 625/50,
1920×1080i/60, 1920×1080p/60, 1920×1080i/60/1.001, 1920×1080p/60/1.001
Reference Types
1920×1080p/60/1.001
Analog 525/60/1.001
1920×1080i/60/1.001
1920×1080p/60
Analog 525/60
Analog 625/50
1920×1080i/60
Signal Type Switch Point
Analog 525/60 Line 10 384 383 383

Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10 384 384 384
Analog 625/50 Line 6 326
1920×1080/60I Line 7 164 163 163
1920×1080/60P Line 7 67 67 67
1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7 164 163 163
1920×1080/60P/1.001 Line 7 68 67 67
1920×1080/50I Line 7 205
1920×1080/50P Line 7 89
1920×1080/30P Line 7
1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/25P Line 7
1920×1080/24P Line 7
1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
1920×1080/24P Line 7
408 Chapter 8
Configuration
Table 8-5 Standard Video Time Delay Values: Analog 525/60, Analog 525/60/1.001, Analog 625/50,
1920×1080i/60, 1920×1080p/60, 1920×1080i/60/1.001, 1920×1080p/60/1.001 (Continued)
1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
1280×720/60P Line 7 115 115 115
1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7 116 115 115
1280×720/50P Line 7 147
Table 8-6 Standard Video Time Delay Values: 1920×1080i/50, 1920×1080p/50, 1920×1080p/30,
1920×1080p/30/1.001, 1920×1080p/25, 1920×1080p/24, 1920×1080p/24 sF
Reference Types
1920×1080p/30/1.001
1920×1080p/24 sF
1920×1080p/50
1920×1080p/30
1920×1080p/25
1920×1080p/24
Signal Type Switch Point 1920×1080i/50

Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
Analog 625/50 Line 6 317 317
1920×1080/60I Line 7
1920×1080/60P Line 7
1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/60P/1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/50I Line 7 196 196
1920×1080/50P Line 7 80 80
1920×1080/30P Line 7 163
1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7 163
1920×1080/25P Line 7 196
1920×1080/24P Line 7 204
1920×1080/24PsF Line 7 204
1920×1080/24P Line 7
1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
1280×720/60P Line 7
1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
1280×720/50P Line 7 138 138
Table 8-7 Standard Video Time Delay Values: 1920×1080p/24/1.001, 1920×1080/24 PsF/1.001, 1280×720/60P,
1280×720/60P/1.001, 1280×720/50P
Reference Types
1920×1080/24 PsF/1.001
1920×1080p/24/1.001
1280×720/60P/1.001
Signal Type Switch Point
1280×720/60P
1280×720/50P
Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10 392
1920×1080/60I Line 7 171
1920×1080/60P Line 7 75
1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7 171
1920×1080/60P/1.001 Line 7 75
1920×1080/50I Line 7 205
1920×1080/50P Line 7 89
1920×1080/30P Line 7
1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/25P Line 7
1920×1080/24P Line 7
1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
1920×1080/24P Line 7 204
1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7 204
1280×720/60P Line 7 123
1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7 123
1280×720/50P Line 7 146
Example Configuration
House Black NTSC Reference when switching both SD (NTSC) and HD (1080i 59.9) signals.
1 Attach House Black sync reference to both sync 1 and sync 2 inputs on the back of the
frame.
2 In Navigator or RouterMapper, navigate to the Platinum Control Settings tab, and then click
the Change Sync Settings Sync... button.
The Configure I/O Sync dialog box opens.
3 Set Sync 1 switch configuration to Auto (should be configured already by default).
410 Chapter 8
Configuration
Figure 8-6 Step 3: Sync 1 Switch Configuration to Auto Mode
4 Configure Sync 2 switch configuration to Advanced, and then enter the sync pulse delay, as
shown in Figure 8-7.
Note: See Table 8-5, Table 8-6, and Table 8-7 for standard video timing delay values.
The example presumes selection of an Analog 525 reference with 1920×1080i/60 signals,
which has a video time delay value of 164.
Figure 8-7 Step 4: Sync 2 Switch Configuration to Advanced Mode
5 Switch to the Platinum Configured Matrices tab, and then configure each HD output
module to use Sync 2 for proper switch point timing.
Figure 8-8 Step 5: Configure HD Output Module
Configuring TDM Audio Matrices

Adding a TDM matrix to a Platinum or Platinum MX router provides you with an incredibly
powerful way to switch audio. Because there are several different implementations of audio
routing within facilities, configuring an audio matrix will depend on several factors.
Therefore, this section highlights the different use cases that a customer may have and gives
step by step instruction on how to configure a TDM matrix for a Platinum or Platinum MX
routing system.
Routing Configuration (Analog Stereo/AES/Multiplex)
 Adding a TDM Matrix to the Database

 Configuring Outputs for Audio Partitions
 Editing the Logical Database
Adding a TDM Matrix to the Database

1 To determine the total number of (Stereo/AES/Multiplex) inputs required in your router, add
up the total number of (Stereo/AES/Multiplex) outputs on all devices and equipment you
will have feeding signals into the router.
Note: If you have devices or equipment with other types of audio signals, please add them
to your system separately.
2 To determine the total number of (Stereo/AES/Multiplex) outputs required in your router

add up the total number of (Stereo/AES/Multiplex) inputs on all devices and equipment the
router will be feeding signals to.
3 In the Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 8-10), choose TDM (time division multiplex)
from the Matrix Type drop-down list box. The Add TDM Matrix dialog box opens.
412 Chapter 8
Configuration
Figure 8-9 Add TDM Matrix Dialog Box
4 In the Name field, enter a name that identifies this particular TDM matrix.
5 Choose the appropriate (AES/Analog Audio/Multiplex Audio) matrix format from the
Format drop-down list.
6 In the Level box, select a number that corresponds to the same level number the
corresponding video matrix will occupy in the routing system.
7 Choose the appropriate number of inputs from the # of Physical INs drop-down list box.1
(You cannot type information into this field.)
8 Choose the appropriate number of outputs from the # of Physical OUTs drop-down list
box.2 (You cannot type information into this field.)
9 If you have configured another matrix in the frame already (such as video), decide whether
you would like to leave built-in expansion slots for that matrix before starting the audio
matrix in the next available slot (default selection; see step 10 for an explanation for Auto).
If you would like to leave room for expansion, edit the starting slot number for your audio
matrix to leave the appropriate room for expansion (see step 10 for an explanation for
Manual).
1 If you make changes to the # IN Slots selection, any changes you make will be reflected in the # of
Physical INs selection. If you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, do not change the
# IN Slots selection.
2 If you make changes to the # OUT Slots selection, any changes you make will be reflected in the
# of Physical OUTs selection. If you do not want to change the number of physical outputs, do not
change the # OUT Slots selection.
Figure 8-10 Add TDM Matrix Dialog Box
10 The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slot assignments for your I/O modules.
 Click the Auto radio button if you want to automatically assign slots for the I/O
modules. If you select this option, you will not be able to change the Input Card Type,
Starting IN Slot, or # In Slots list box. (This is the default setting.)
 Click the Manual radio button if you want to assign starting slots for the I/O modules
yourself. If you select slot assignments that are incompatible with other settings,
appropriate error messages are displayed.
a Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type list box. Make sure
you select modules that begin with “PT” if you are using a 15RU or 28RU frame, “PM”
if you are using a 5RU or a 9RU frame.
b Select the starting slot for your input modules from the Starting IN Slot drop-down list
box.
c Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # IN Slots drop-down list
box1. The software application automatically calculates the number of physical inputs
you will have for the number of modules you selected.
d Select the desired type of output module from the Output Card Type drop-down list
box. Make sure you select modules that begin with “PT” if you are using a 15RU or
28RU frame, “PM” if you are using a 5RU or a 9RU frame.
e Select the starting slot for your output modules from the Starting OUT Slot
drop-down list box.
f Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # OUT Slots drop-down
list box.2 The software application automatically calculates the number of physical
outputs you will have for the number of modules you selected. Changing this selection
may change the number of physical outputs required; if you do not want to change the
number of physical outputs, do not change this entry.
1
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs required; if you do not want to
change the number of physical inputs, please do not change this entry.
2 Changing this selection may change the number of physical outputs required. If you do not want to
change the number of physical outputs, do not change this entry.

414 Chapter 8
Configuration
11 The Options box allows you to set up audio types for audio format selections. Since you
selected “TDM” as your matrix type, the Audio Type drop-down list box will be enabled.
Select Stereo to always route a stereo pair (two channels) of audio together.
Select Mono to to route independent mono audio channels.
12 Decide whether you will need the capability to switch the audio signals independently from
video signals (that is, breakaway routing of audio; only applicable in systems with both
video and audio signals).
Note: Not applicable in case of MADI (Multiplex Audio).
a If you do not want the capability to switch audio independent of the video, uncheck
the Breakaway audio from video check box, and then click OK.
Figure 8-11 Breakaway Audio from Video with Check Box Deselected
b If you do want the capability to switch audio independent of the video, leave the
Breakaway audio from video check box checked.
Figure 8-12 Breakaway Audio from Video with Check Box Selected
c If you have more than one stereo pair and would like the ability to breakaway the
individual stereo pairs from each other, check the Breakaway individual stereo pairs
box.
Figure 8-13 Breakaway Individual Stereo Pairs
d If you require the capability to breakaway the individual left and/or right channels of a
stereo pair, check the Breakaway individual audio channels box, and then click OK.
416 Chapter 8
Configuration
Figure 8-14 Breakaway Individual Audio Channels
Configuring Outputs for Audio Partitions

Once you click OK at the Add TDM Matrix window, if your system has devices that have
more than one stereo pair, you will need to configure the size of the outputs for each of the
audio partitions.
To do this, follow these steps.

1 Determine the number of audio inputs for each device that is being fed with a router
output, and then group the devices based on number of audio inputs. (Example: You have
30 devices with (2) stereo pairs of audio, 80 devices with 1 stereo pair, and 18 devices with
a single mono input.
2 Highlight the desired matrix, then click the Advanced button on the Configured Matrix
window.
Figure 8-15 Configured Matrix Window
3 Select the Physical Output View tab. You will see that the system by default has divided
your outputs into four equal partitions. Each colored circle represents a single mono
channel of audio. In this example, the maximum number of AES streams / stereo audio
channels in any device being fed from the router was two).
Figure 8-16 Physical Output View Tab

418 Chapter 8
Configuration
4 If all devices have the same number of audio inputs, you are finished. Click OK.
5 To modify the partition assignment of a single output or group of outputs, click on the
desired circle (you can use the <Ctrl> key + left mouse button or the <Shift> key + left
mouse button to select groups).
6 Once the desired output(s) are selected, right-click, and then select Unassign from
[matrix].
Figure 8-17 Unassigning Selections from a Matrix
7 The selected outputs are no longer assigned to any matrix.

Figure 8-18 Unassigned Selection Results
8 Select the partition you want to assign those outputs to, click on the output or group of
outputs you desire, right-click, and then select Assign to [Partition].
9 Notice the result has increased the output size of the second partition and has reduced the
size of the third partition.
The following illustrations provide examples of a partitioned system: In each illustration,

observe how the system has changed the partition sizes to reflect the desired configuration.
 30 devices with 2 stereo pairs (Figure 8-19)

 60 devices w/1 stereo pair (Figure 8-20)
 16 devices w/1 mono input (Figure 8-21)
 30 devices with 2 AES streams (Figure 8-22)
420 Chapter 8
Configuration
 16 devices with 1 AES mono channel (Figure 8-23)
Figure 8-19 Partitioned System: 30 Devices with 2 Stereo Pairs
Figure 8-20 Partitioned System: 60 Devices with 1 Stereo Pair of Audio

Figure 8-21 Partitioned System: 16 Devices with 1 Mono Channel of Audio
Figure 8-22 Partitioned System: 30 devices with 2 AES streams

422 Chapter 8
Configuration
Figure 8-23 Partitioned System: 16 Devices with 1 AES Mono Channel
10 If the configuration is correct, click OK. You are now ready to configure the logical
database.
Editing the Logical Database

After the hardware has been configured, complete the following steps to create the logical
database.
1 Click on the Sources button on the main window to get access to the database editor (see
Figure 8-24).
Figure 8-24 Sources Button
2 Click on the first name in the source list, type the name of the first source in the database
for example “VTR 1”.
3 If you configured the system to not breakaway audio, notice that under the first level the
first physical video and audio sources are assigned the same logical input. As you add
sources and destinations the database will use the next available video and audio sources.
Figure 8-25 First Physical Video and Audio Source Assignments
4 Once you are done with the sources, click on the Logical Destinations tab, and then
repeat the same steps for destinations.
5 Once finished with the destinations, click OK to accept the changes and return to the main
window.
6 To download the configured matrix to the Platinum hardware, select the desired frame,
right-click on it, and then select Download. At the About to Download window, choose
Selected Devices.
424 Chapter 8
Configuration
Figure 8-26 Downloading Selected Devices
Breakaway Individual Stereo Pairs

1 If you have chosen to breakaway individual mono channels within AES streams or stereo
pair(s), enter the name of the desired logical source; for example “VTR 1.”
Figure 8-27 Entering Logical Source Names
2 Create a source name for each stereo pair of audio that source has. In this example, this
source has two stereo outputs, so a total of two names will need to be created (see
Figure 8-28).
Figure 8-28 Creating Source Names for Stereo Pairs
3 Assign the physical source input you want associated with that input name for each level by
clicking on the top number and selecting the appropriate input number.
Figure 8-29 Assigning Physical Source Inputs
4 Select the physical source name for each of the different audio levels. This will allow you to
switch any AES/Stereo input of audio to any destination. (This source will be the same
across all levels.)
426 Chapter 8
Configuration
Figure 8-30 Selecting Physical Source Names
5 When all sources have been configured, select the Logical Destinations tab to add
destinations.(Additional source names are not required in this step.)
Figure 8-31 Adding Destinations
6 When destination naming has been completed, click OK to accept the changes and return
to the main window.
Selected Devices.
Breakaway Mono Channels in an AES/Stereo Pair

1 If you have chosen to breakaway individual mono channels with in an AES stream or stereo
pair(s), enter the name of the desired logical source; for example, “VTR 1.”
Figure 8-33 Entering Logical Source Names
2 Create a source name for each mono channel of audio that source has. For a source with
two AES/stereo outputs, a total of four names will need to be created. See Figure 8-34.
428 Chapter 8
Configuration
Figure 8-34 Creating Source Names for Mono Channels
3 Assign the physical source input you want associated with that input name for each level by
clicking on the top number and selecting the appropriate input number.
Figure 8-35 Assigning Physical Source Inputs
4 Select the physical source name for each of the different audio levels. What this will allow
you to do is switch any mono input of audio to any destination. Note, this source will be the
same across all levels.
Figure 8-36 Selecting Physical Source Names
5 Once all sources have been configured, select the Logical Destinations tab to add
destinations. (Additional source names are not required in this step.)
Figure 8-37 Adding Destinations
6 Once destination naming has been completed, click OK.

Selected Devices.
430 Chapter 8
Configuration

431
9 Output Monitoring Modules
output monitoring modules available for the Platinum router. A General Description section
provides a generic view of how a Platinum output monitoring module operates. Each
output monitoring module is further described in terms of its individual operation,
controllable parameters, installation, configuration, functional block diagram, and
specifications.
 Output Monitoring Module General Description on page 432

 PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module on page 437
 PT-HSRAEC-OM: 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI Serial Video Output Monitoring
Module on page 441
432 Chapter 9
Output Monitoring Module General Description

The output monitoring module allows output monitoring of any output in the Platinum
frame. The signal can be either a copy of the signal that is currently being sent to a
particular output (virtual output monitoring), or a signal taken directly from the output itself
(real output monitoring). The monitoring output signal is distributed to the output BNCs on
the module, eliminating the need for external distribution. The output monitoring module
automatically passes all data types, and no format selection or configuration is required. An
additional input connector is provided on the output monitoring module for remote
monitoring capabilities.
Figure 9-1 on page 432 through Figure 9-4 on page 435 are block diagrams of the overall
output monitoring architecture for the different frame sizes.
Real output feedback
OM signal
Baseband signal
OM Distribution
Remote OM input
Xpt module (1)
8 ROF
Inputs 1-72
X
Xpt module (2) 2 OM Output module
Driver
X Outputs 1-64
2 OM 4×1
rclk
1 OM
HS OM module 4×1 1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk
Figure 9-1 Platinum 5RU Frame Output Monitoring Architecture

OM signal
Baseband signal
OM Distribution
Remote OM input
Xpt module (1)
Inputs 1-128
16 ROF
X
16 ROF Driver
X Outputs 1-128
4 OM 4×1
rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk

434 Chapter 9
OM signal
Baseband signal
OM Distribution
Remote OM input
Xpt module (1)
Inputs 1-128
16 ROF
X
Driver
X Outputs 1-128
4 OM 4×1
rclk
Xpt module (3)
Inputs 129-256
16 ROF
X
Xpt module (4) 4 OM
X
4 OM
Output module
Driver
HS OM module 4×1
1 OM
1 OM
Outputs 129-256
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
4×1
rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
1 OM
2×1 1 OM
rclk 1 OM

OM signal
Baseband signal
OM Distribution
Remote OM input
Xpt module (1)
16 ROF
Inputs 1-128
X
Driver
Inputs 257-384
X 4 spare Outputs 1-128
outputs 4×1
rclk
Xpt module (3)
16 ROF
Inputs 129-256
X
Xpt module (4) 4 OM
Inputs 385-512 4 spare

X
outputs
Output module
Driver
HS OM module
4×1
1 OM
1 OM
Outputs 129-256
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM 4×1
rclk
HS OM module 1 OM
4×1 1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
HS OM module 1 OM
4×1 1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
HS OM module 1 OM
Output module
4×1 1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM Driver
Outputs 257-384
Xpt module (5) 4×1
rclk
Inputs 1-128
4 spare
Xpt module (6)
X outputs
Inputs 257-384 16 ROF
X
4 OM
Xpt module (7)

Output module
Inputs 129-256 4 spare Driver
X outputs Outputs 385-512
Xpt module (8)
4×1
16 ROF rclk
Inputs 385-512
X
4 OM

436 Chapter 9
Controllable Parameters List

marked with the [RO] designator are “read-only.” Output monitoring module parameters
lists are provided on the following pages:
Table 9-1. Output Monitoring Module Parameters Lists

Parameter List
Module Name
Location
PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module Page 438
PT-HSRAEC-OM: 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI Serial Video Output Page 445
Monitoring Module
Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 9-5 Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum Output Monitoring Module
PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module
Operation
Figure 9-6 PT-HSR-OM Module
The PT-HSR-OM HD/SD output monitoring module is designed to provide HD and SD serial
video outputs for monitoring purposes, as well as other types of signals handled by
Platinum (such as AES audio). This rear-loading module fits into any one of four output
monitoring module slots (two slots in 5RU frames).
Output monitoring is classified into two categories: real output monitoring and virtual
output monitoring.
Real Output Monitoring

Real output monitoring provides the output signal from the final stage of the output. For
example, the secondary output from each output amplifier in a PT-HSR-OB module is used
for monitoring. The eight monitoring output signals in a PT-HSR-OB module are applied to
an 8×1 switch. The selected monitoring output is then fed to a crosspoint module. Each
crosspoint module receives up to 16 output monitoring signals from PT-HSR-OB modules,
and switches the selected signal to be monitored to the output monitoring module(s).
If you are monitoring an output of a power-saving output module and there is no

termination on that output, the output will not be displayed on the output of the
PT-HSR-OM. You must either terminate the output on the output module or turn off its
Green Mode parameter.
438 Chapter 9
Virtual Output Monitoring

The output monitoring signal can also be a copy of the input signal being sent to a
particular output. Since this type of monitoring signal comes directly from the crosspoint
rather than from the output module itself, it is referred to as a virtual output monitoring
signal.
Corresponding Output Module

The PT-HSR-OM monitors the output from the PM-HSR-OB/PT-HS-OB, PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB,
PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB/ PT-AEC-OB, PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB, or PM-ENC-OB/
PT-ENC-OB output modules.
The PT-HSR-OM does not monitor output from TDM modules.
Installation All output monitoring modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing
Table 9-2 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-HSR-OM modules. These
Table 9-2 PT-HSR-OM Parameters List

Internal/External Signal Select Signal source  External
 Internal
External Input Signal Presence [RO] Reports presence or absence of  Signal absent
EQ_Bypass Bypasses the EQ stage  EQ bypass

 Equalized
Reclocker_Bypass Bypasses the reclocker stage  Off
 On
Autobypass Reclock automatic bypass;  Reclocker bypass
automatically bypasses the reclocker  Reclocked
stage when the PLL is not locked
Table 9-2 PT-HSR-OM Parameters List (Continued)

Reclocker_Mode Reclock mode  Manual
 Auto
Data Rate Reclock data rate (active only when  143
RCLK_Mode is set to Manual)  177
 270
 360
 540
 1483.5/1485
Mute Mutes the Reclocker outputs  Off
 On
ASI/177 Disables 177Mbps data rate in the  Off
AUTO data rate detection circuit  On
Lock Detect [RO] Lock detect (high when the PLL is  Not locked
locked)  Locked
Signal Type Output slew rate control  SD

 HD
Board Level Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for all parameters  0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
that require it

Specifications Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 9-3 PT-HSR-OM Specifications

Item Specification
Number of external inputs 1
Number of outputs 3 (duplicated and polarity correct signals)
Connector 75 BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75
DVB-ASI
Most other <1 Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to
1.5 Gb/s
Nominal internal input amplitude 800 mVp-p ± 10%
440 Chapter 9
Table 9-3 PT-HSR-OM Specifications (Continued)

Item Specification
External input equalization Automatic
984 ft (300 m) Belden 1694A for 270Mb/s
data rate
492 ft (150 m) Belden 1694A for 1.485Gb/s
data rate
Reclocking Automatic for SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI except 177 Mb/s
Bypass for all nonstandard rates
Output amplitude 800mVp-p ± 10%
Rise/fall times 400 ps – 1500 ps for SMPTE 259M data
rates
< 270 ps for SMPTE 292M data rates
PT-HSRAEC-OM: 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI Serial Video

Operation
Side View Front View
Figure 9-7 PT-HSRAEC-OM Module
The PT-HSRAEC-OM is a 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI output monitoring module for the Platinum

Frame. The module is designed to provide an output interface to monitor an output stream
or preview an input stream as selected by the control system.
The PT-HSRAEC-OM occupies control slots 6 through 9 at the rear of the Platinum Frame
(when PX-RES is used in Platinum) and control slots 8 through11 (when PT-RES is used in
Platinum). You can have up to 4 output monitoring modules.
The PT-HSRAEC-OM provides one SMPTE-SDI video input for cascade monitoring. (Its main
use is to monitor channels from another router, but it is equipped with cable EQ so it can
accept SMPTE-SDI compliant inputs from other devices as well for fan-out or monitoring.)
The PT-HSRAEC-OM has BNC ports for external interconnect, video in, and video out. Using
the VIDEO IN BNC connector, the PT-HSRAEC-OM selects between the internal and
external video sources.
The video streams connect to this module through a board edge connector at the MI
module. Internal video sources include the following:
442 Chapter 9
 Video selected from input 1-128, or output 1-128

(Applies to PT-RES in 5/9/15/28 RU Platinum frames and PX-RES in a 9/15 RU Platinum
frames)
(Applies to PT-RES in 5/9/15/28 RU Platinum frames and PX-RES in 9/15 RU Platinum
frames)
(Applies to PT-RES in 28 RU Platinum frames)
(Applies to PT-RES in 28 RU Platinum frames)
External video sources include video from another frame.The external input is coupled to
this module through a rear BNC connector. It allows for monitoring of other SDI signals.
Using the VIDEO OUT BNC connector, the selected signal is sent to the re-clocking section.
The reclocking circuit retimes the data stream and removes jitter from the stream. Some
signal stream parameters (such as data bit rate, re-lockability, 3G/HD/SD, bypassing, etc) are
checked and reported. The signal from the reclocking stage is coupled to the output driver.
The output is in-polarity with the input data.
Various LEDs report status on the PT-HSRAEC-OM as follows
Table 9-4 PT-HSRAEC-OM LEDs and Descriptions

LED Color Meaning
CTRL Green/Red Control system acknowledgment
EXT IN Green External video input presence
LOCK Green Reclocked
PWR Green Power supply input
Notes
 PT-HSRAEC-OM modules have 1 monitoring port per slot
 Each PT-HSRAEC-OM module can only monitor one output at a time from an
output card on the same router
Monitoring
The PT-HSRAEC-OM uses these two classification categories: real output monitoring and
virtual output monitoring.
Real Output Monitoring

With real output monitoring, the output is routed after the final active stage of the video
channel. This type of monitoring provides the highest level of confidence possible that the
signal seen at the monitoring point is the same signal that will be seen “on-air.”
Note: If you are monitoring an output of a power-saving output module and there is no
termination on that output, the output will not be displayed on the output of the
PT-HSRAEC-OM. You must either terminate the output on the output module or turn off its
Green Mode parameter.
Virtual Output Monitoring

Not all types of output modules are able to provide a digital output signal for monitoring
use at its final stage. For example, some types of output modules have analog outputs
which can not be handled directly by the main crosspoint. In this situation, the Platinum
control system checks which input signal has been switched to the output destination
needed for monitoring. Then, this input is sent to the PT-HSRAEC-OM module for
monitoring purposes. Physically, this input signal is routed out two paths of the main
crosspoint.
Note: PT-HSRAEC-OM does not monitor output from TDM modules. Non TDM audio
modules can be monitored, for example, PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB/ PT-AEC-OB,
PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-O output modules. This applies in a PT-RES system. PX-RES does not
support these modules.
Installation All output monitoring modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing
Configuration This section applies if the Platinum Frame (that your PT-HSRAEC-OM module is in) is
controlled by a PX-RES Resource Module. In which case, you can configure the module
using the IP3 Controller web interface invoked from within Magellan CCS Navigator.
Note: If your Platinum frame is controlled by a PT-RES Resource Module, you will need to
configure output monitoring using Magellan CCS Navigator. Refer to the Magellan CCS
Navigator user manual, Volume 6 Routing Components, Select Matrix Monitoring.
The following is an example that describes how to:
1 Configure Output Monitoring Destinations

See Add PT-HSRAEC-OM Destinations
2 Add Output Monitoring External Sources/Inputs
See Add PT-HSRAEC-OM External Sources/Inputs
3 Add Router Destinations for monitoring
See Add Monitoring Router Destinations
Note: Before you start this process, it is presumed you have your routing system set up, with
your Platinum frame added into your routing system via the web based Controller. And that
you discover your Controller (that has the Platinum frame added in) via Magellan CCS
Navigator, so that you can launch the IP3 Database Editor to add sources and destinations.
444 Chapter 9
Launch the IP3 Database Editor

1 Launch Magellan CCS Navigator
2 Go to your routing system and open up the IP3 Database Editor
The Database Editor screen should be displayed.
Add PT-HSRAEC-OM Destinations

1 Go to the Destinations tab.
2 Click the Add button to add the External Output Monitoring Destinations.
3 Enter 1 as number of Destinations to create
4 (Recommended) Change the name in the Name Prefix field to visually distinguish this from
other (non-monitoring) destinations. For example, include MON OUT in the name prefix.
5 Select a Video Device Type and select the appropriate Frame
6 Select Slot as Slot 6, Port as Port 1
Note: This is to map the VIDEO OUT port
7 Set Location Type to MON. Adjust the Slot, Port, Channel, Max No of Ports per
module, and Max No of Channels per port fields as required
8 Click Add Rows
You will see 1 monitoring destination added at Slot 6 (port 1).
Note: If you have more than one output monitoring module, follow the same steps as
outlined above, adjusting the slot number accordingly.
Add PT-HSRAEC-OM External Sources/Inputs

1 Go to the Sources tab.
2 Click the Add button to add the External Output Monitoring Sources/Inputs.
3 Add 1 source at Slot 6. Enter 1 as the Number of Sources to create
4 Change the name in the Name Prefix field to distinguish as a monitoring output; for
example, include MON IN
6 Set Location Type to EXT. Adjust the Slot, Port, Channel, Max No of Ports per module,
and Max No of Channels per port fields as required
7 Click Add Rows.
Note: If you have more than one output monitoring module, follow the same steps as
outlined above, adjusting the slot number accordingly.
Add Monitoring Router Destinations

1 In the Sources tab, click the Add button
2 Enter 16 as number of Sources to create
3 (Recommended) Change the name in the Name Prefix field to visually distinguish this from
other sources. For example, include OM in the name prefix.
5 Set Location Type to OUT
6 Select Slot as Slot 1, Port as Port 1
Note: This is to map the Slot 1 (OUT 1-8 ports) and Slot 2 (OUT 1-8 ports).
7 Click Add Rows

You will see 8 destinations for monitoring added at slot 1 and slot 2 (ports 1-8) respectively.
Save and Validate Database Matrix

1 Click Save to save the database matrix.
2 Click Validate to validate it; there should be no errors.
3 Click the X at the top to close.
4 Open the DBEditor window under Control Views.
5 Click Publish to send the Database configuration to the Controller. Click Start Transfer.
Route Outputs
1 Launch and log in to the Router Soft Panel by going to http://<IPAddress>/panel
2 To monitor a router Destination:
 Route any of the Destinations (created in Add Monitoring Router Destinationsfrom
the source list to one of the monitoring outputs (created in Add PT-HSRAEC-OM
Destinations).
3 You can monitor Router Sources/Inputs in the same way.
4 To view any of the external PX-HSRAEC-OM inputs:
 Route the MON Input created in Add PT-HSRAEC-OM External Sources/Inputs to
the corresponding monitoring Output created in Add PT-HSRAEC-OM
Destinations.
Note: You can only monitor 1 channel from any given Output module. If you choose to
monitor another channel from a given Output module, it will only be allowed if that
channel is routed to monitoring port OUT 1.
Table 9-2 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-HSRAEC-OM modules. These
Table 9-5 PT-HSRAEC-OM Parameters List

Parameters Description Options
Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the  Sync 1
module uses as a reference  Sync 2
 Sync 3
 Sync 4
446 Chapter 9
Table 9-5 PT-HSRAEC-OM Parameters List (Continued)

Parameters Description Options
Index Light Mode BNC light source (LED) control  Off
 In Auto mode, the LED of the  On
Video Input BNC turns on if no  Auto
cable is applied, so that you can
find the BNC easily; it turns off to
save power if signal applied
 In Auto mode, the LED of the
Video Output BNC turns on if
output is enabled; it turns off if
output is muted
Board Level Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
needing it
Mute Mutes specified output channel  Mute on
 Mute off
Video Output Rate Video cable driver slew rate select  SD (700ps)
 When Reclocker Bypass is set to  HD (100ps)
No and input is locked, the video
output rate is automatically
determined by software based on
input rate.
 When input is not locked, or
Reclocker Bypass is set to Yes,
this parameter can be used to set
the preferred output slew rate
Green Mode Enables or disables power-saving  Disabled
feature  Enabled
External Video Presence [RO] Reports presence or absence of  Signal absent

EQ Bypass Enables or disables bypass cable  Disabled

equalization  Enabled
Lock Detect [RO] Reports if data is relocked by  Not locked

Reclocker Mode Sets the reclock mode to automatic  1.48 Gb/s

or to one of three manual fixed  2.97 Gb/s
rates  270 Mb/s
 Auto
Locked Data Rate [RO] Detects data rate  1.48 Gb/s
 2.97 Gb/s
 270 Mb/s
 Auto
Reclocker Bypass Enforces reclocking bypass function  Auto bypass
 Enforced bypass
Ext. video monitoring

Cable EQ
Video
input
2:1 Cable
reclocker driver
Int. video monitoring
Mon In1 Video
output
Mon In2
4:1
System MI
EQ
Mon In3
Mon In4
Controls and statuses
FPGA
+3.3V +2.5V +1.2V
+24VA Power conversion Power

+24VB and good
voltage monitoring DA
+5VL core
SLID
PIPE
PRTI
Figure 9-8 PT-HSRAEC-OM Functional Block Diagram

448 Chapter 9
Specifications Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 9-6 PT-HSRAEC-OM Specifications

Item Specification
Number of external inputs 1
Number of outputs 1
Coaxial connector 75 BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
3Mb/s to 3Gb/s
Nominal internal input amplitude 800 m Vp-p ± 10%
External input amplitude 800 mV ± 10%
*  Up to 984 ft (300 m) for SD-SDI (270Mb/
Max. external input cable length (1694A)
s)
 Up to 492 ft (150 m) for HD-SDI
 Up to 230 ft (70 m) for 3 Gb/s
Reclocking Automatic for data rates defined by SMPTE
424/259/292/344, DVB-ASI
Bypass for all nonstandard rates
Return loss  15 dB, up to 1.5 GHz
 10 dB from 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz
Output jitter  <0.2UI 270 Mbps and 1.5 Gbps
 <0.3UI 3 Gbps
DC offset 0V ± 0.5 V
Rise/fall times  400 ps – 1500 ps for SD-SDI
 < 270 ps for HD-SDI
 <135 ps for 3 Gb/s
*
Measured with Belden 1694A or equivalent
449
10 Terminal Operation
A separate serial control port is used to control a Platinum router from an external computer
or automation system. The serial port may be used to monitor the system matrix
configuration, determine the current status of crosspoint connections, change crosspoint
connections in any matrix, and setup pre-programmed crosspoint takes sequences, or
salvos. These (and other) operations are assigned to the serial port via a series of commands
called “terminal operation” commands. You can find a list of the terminal commands
available for the Platinum router starting on page 451.
Establishing Terminal Operations Session

Before you configure your Platinum product, you will need to initiate a terminal operation
session. You need to determine which type of setup you will use:
 For a standalone or network system with serial connections, see Establishing

Terminal Operation Sessions for Serial Control Interface Products on page 450.
 For a standalone or network system with Ethernet connections, see Establishing
Telnet Sessions for Ethernet Control Interface Products on page 450.
450 Chapter 10
Terminal Operation
Establishing Terminal Operation Sessions for Serial Control Interface

Products
1 Configure a host machine (such as a PC with HyperTerminal1 installed) for serial port
communication at a baud rate of 38400 with these settings: Data on the serial control port
is encoded as 8N1:
 8
 None
 1
 No flow-control
2 Connect a null modem serial cable from a PC serial port to the serial port on the back of the
Platinum frame.
3 Connect the X-Y to the router network.
CAUTION: Make sure the X-Y network is terminated appropriately.
4 Start up both PC and terminal emulation application.

5 Apply power to the Platinum frame.
6 At the host machine keyboard, enter the letter “Q.” The Command Summary screen should
appear on the PC screen.
Establishing Telnet Sessions for Ethernet Control Interface Products

Follow these steps to establish a Telnet session to the Platinum frame if the Telnet
application is resident on a PC:
1 Connect an Ethernet crossover cable between the 10Base-T connector on a PC to the
10Base-T connector on the Platinum frame.
2 Change the IP address of your PC to a static IP address compatible with the Platinum IP
address.
Invoking Telnet commands requires a valid username and password. The default username
is leitch and the default password is leitchadmin.
3 At a DOS prompt, enter the word “telnet” and the IP address of the Platinum frame (for
example, telnet 100.200.50.10).
4 Press <Enter>.
The Telnet screen will appear.
5 Enter your login, and then press <Enter>.
6 Enter your password, and then press <Enter>.
7 The startup screen and the message “Type Q for menu...” will appear.
1 HyperTerminal, a product of Hilgraeve Inc., is a communications applet that ships with Windows 95/
98 and Windows NT 4.0.
8 Type in the letter “Q” (it will not appear on the screen), and then press <Enter>.
The Command Summary screen will appear.
Once a Telnet session is established, you will have access via the Telnet interface to the
commands listed in this section.
Protocol Support for Platinum Routers

Table 10-1 Platinum Router Protocol Support Commands
Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
BUFFER BUFFER [#] [OFF|CLEAR] # = Buffer number Depending on the input
or F = Off parameter:
B [#] [F|C] C = Clear  Causes a salvo buffer to be
selected and automatically
sets the Buffer mode ON
 Turns buffer OFF;
subsequent crosspoint
connection requests will be
taken at the end of
command line processing
 Clears the contents of a
salvo buffer
CLEAR CLEAR # [,#,#,...#] # = Destination Cancels crosspoint or clears
or numbers in currently crosspoint request
C # [,#,#,...#] selected level
DESTINATION DESTINATION #[,#,...] # = Destination number Completes crosspoint
or operations after the level
D# number and the source
number have been set
INFORMATION INFORMATION None Provides information on the
or overall system as seen from
I the connection to the X-Y bus
LEVEL LEVEL # #=Level number Sets the level number for a
or router that is connected to an
L# active system
POLL POLL # #=Source number to be Determines which
or searched; may be any destinations are connected to
P# number 1 to 12 a specific source number
QUERY QUERY None Provides a list that includes a
or basic command syntax and
Q brief description of each
command
452 Chapter 10
Terminal Operation
Table 10-1 Platinum Router Protocol Support Commands (Continued)

Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
READ READ None Lists all crosspoints within a
or frame in order by level
R numbers, and then by
destination numbers that
show which source is
assigned to each of the
destinations on that level
Each crosspoint connection is
represented by a numeric pair
separated by a semicolon and
a space: the first number is
the destination number; the
second number is the source
number that is connected to
that destination
SOURCE SOURCE # # = Source number; can Sets the desired source
or range from 1 to the number
S# maximum number of
sources on that level, or
“X” for disconnect
TERMINAL TERMINAL [ON|OFF] ON = Turns on Echo  When ECHO mode is ON,
or mode all the characters sent are
T[/F] OFF = Turns off Echo “echoed” to the terminal
mode  When ECHO mode is OFF,
messages sent are not
“echoed” to the terminal
VERIFY VERIFY # # = desired salvo buffer Shows current crosspoint
or number (ranges from 1 requests stored in a particular
V# to the maximum salvo buffer
number of buffers
available)
XPOINT XPOINT [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, .. ] [#L:]= Level number The crosspoint is executed
(combines operations or [#S] = Source number (you can use a READ
of the LEVEL, X [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, ... ] [#D,...] = Destination command to confirm the
SOURCE, and number crosspoint connection)
DESTINATION
commands into one
command; and
allows multiple
crosspoint
connection requests
in one command)
ZERO ZERO None The device is restarted and
or status is cleared
Z
453
A Safety Precautions, Certifications,
Compliances
Consignes de sécurité,
certifications, conformités
Carefully observe the safety alert symbols below for dangers, warnings, and cautions. They
alert installers and operators of possible dangers or important information contained in this
manual.
Obervez précautionneusement les symboles de sécurité ci-après indiquant des dangers, des
avertissements, et des précautions. Ils alertent les installateurs et opérateurs des possibles
dangers ou des importantes informations contenues dans ce manuel.
Keep in mind, though, that warnings alone do not eliminate hazards, nor are they a
substitute for safe operating techniques and proper accident prevention measures.
Gardez à l'esprit cependant que ces avertissements à eux seuls n'éliminent pas les risques et
ne sont pas un remplacement aux techniques d'utilisation sécuritaire et aux mesures de
prévention des accidents.
IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. The Platinum
should be installed in a restricted access area, so that only qualified personnel have access
to it.
IMPORTANT! Seulement un personnel qualifié devrait effectuer les procédures de

remplacement.
454 Appendix A
Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual

Termes de sécurité et symboles utilisés dans ce manuel
WARNING: Statements identifying conditions or practices that may result
in personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is present.
AVERTISSEMENT: Message identifiant des conditions ou opérations qui

peuvent résulter en des blessures corporelles ou la perte de la vie. Une
haute tension est présente.
CAUTION: Statements identifying conditions or practices that can result

in damage to the equipment or other property.
ATTENTION: Message identifiant des conditions ou opérations qui

peuvent résulter en des dommages à l'appareil ou aux installations.
Safety Terms and Symbols on the Product

Termes de sécurité et symboles sur l'appareil
DANGER: High voltage and indicates a personal injury hazard immediately
accessible as one reads the marking.
DANGER: Haute tension et indique un risque de blesssures corporelles
immédiatement accessible dès qu'une personne lit ce symbole.
WARNING: Indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible as one
reads the marking.
AVERTISSEMENT: Indique un risque de blesssures corporelles qui n'est pas
immédiatement accessible dès qu'une personne lit ce symbole.
CAUTION: Indicates a hazard to property, including the product, or to pay
attention and refer to the manual.
ATTENTION: Indique un risque aux installations, incluant l'appareil, ou de faire
attention et de se referer au manuel.
Protective ground (earth) terminal.
Borne de terre de protection
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

Prévention des décharges électro-statiques
Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices.
Prendre des précautions durant la manipulation d'appareils sensibles aux charges
électro-statiques.
CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage components in the product. To

prevent ESD, observe these precautions when directed to do so:
ATTENTION: Les décharges électro-statiques peuvent endommager les composants de
l'appareil. Pour prévenir ces décharges, observez ces précautions lorsque le manuel le
demande
1 Use a ground strap. Wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap to discharge the static voltage
from your body while installing or removing sensitive components.
Utiliser une connection de mise à la terre. Porter un bracelet anti-statique connecté à
une borne de mise à la terre pour décharger la tension électro-statique de votre corps
durant l'installation ou l'enlèvement des composants sensibles.
2 Use a Safe work area. Do not use any devices capable of generating or holding a static
charge in the work area where you install or remove sensitive components. Avoid handling
sensitive components in areas that have a floor or benchtop surface capable of generating a
static charge.
Utiliser une zone de travail sécuritaire. N'utiliser aucun appareil capable de générer ou
retenir une charge statique dans la zone de travail où vous installez ou remplacez des
composants sensibles
3 Handle components carefully. Do not slide sensitive components over any surface. Do
not touch exposed connector pins. Handle sensitive components as little as possible.
Manipuler les composants avec précautions. Ne pas glisser des composants sensibles
sur aucune surface. Ne pas toucher les contacts des connecteurs qui sont exposés.
Manipuler les composants sensibles le moins souvent possible.
4 Transport and store carefully. Transport and store sensitive components in a

static-protected bag or container.
Transporter et ranger avec précautions. Transporter et ranger les composants sensibles
dans un sac anti-statique ou une boîte.
Injury Precautions
Précautions contre les risques de blessures
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltages are present within the frame during normal
operation. The AC power cord must be disconnected from the frame before the
top panel is removed. (In frames with multiple power supplies, remove ALL
power cords.) Power should not be applied to the frame while the top is open
unless properly trained personnel are servicing the unit.
Pull out the plug(s) from the main socket before the removal of a cover.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des tensions mortelles peuvent être présentes à l'intérieur d'un chassis durant
son utilisation normale. Le cordon d'alimentation doit être déconnecté du
chassis avant d'enlever le panneau supérieur. Dans les chassis ayant des
alimentations multiples, enlever tous les cordons d'alimentation. Le chassis ne
devrait pas être sous tension lorsque le panneau supérieur est enlevé, sauf si un
personnel qualifié est en train de faire l'entretien de l'unité.
Retirer le cordon d'alimentation de la prise située sur le chassis avant d'enlever
un panneau de protection.
Przod zdjeciem pokrywy wyciagnac wtyczke z gniazda sieciowego.
WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD - DO NOT OPEN.
AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE - NE PAS OUVRIR.
INSTALLER SUR SUPPORT DE MONTAGE SEULEMENT (BAIE DE MONTAGE).
Use proper power cord
Utiliser un cordon d'alimentation convenable
To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this product.
Afin d'éviter les risques d'incendie, utiliser seulement le cordon d'alimentation
spécifié pour cet appareil.
Do not operate without covers
Ne pas utiliser sans les panneaux de protection
To avoid electrical shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product with covers
or panels removed.
Pour éviter les risques de choc électrique ou d'incendie, ne pas utiliser cet
appareil avec les panneaux de protection enlevés.
Do not operate in wet/damp conditions
Ne pas utiliser dans des conditions humides
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in wet or damp
conditions.
Pour éviter les risques de blessures ou d'incendie, ne pas utiliser cet appareil
dans des conditions humides.
Ground the product

Connecter l'appareil à la terre
This is a Safety Class 1 product and is electrically grounded through the
grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock, the
grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground. Before making
connections to the product’s input or output terminals, ensure the product is
properly grounded.
Cet appareil appartient à la classe 1 des normes de sécurité Il est relié à la terre
au moyen du conducteur de mise à la terre faisant partie du cordon
d'alimentation. Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, le connecteur de mise
à la terre doit être relié à une borne de terre. Avant de faire les connections aux
connecteurs d'entrées et de sorties, s'assurer que l'appareil est correctement
relié à la terre.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE GROUNDED.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
AVERTISSEMENT: CET APPAREIL DOIT RELIE A LA TERRE.
VARNING: APPARATEN SKALL ANSLUTAS TILL JORDAT UTTAG NÄR DEN
ANSLUTS TILL ETT NÄTVERK.
Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere
Ne pas utiliser dans une atmostphère explosive
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an
explosive atmosphere.
Pour éviter les risques de blessures ou d'incendie, ne pas utiliser cet
appareil dans une atmosphère explosive.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry
Eviter les circuits exposés
To avoid injury, remove jewelry such as rings, watches, and other metallic
objects. Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is
present.
Pour éviter les risques de blessures, enlever les bijoux tels qu'anneaux, montres,
et autres objets métalliques. Ne pas toucher les composants et connections
exposées lorsque l'alimentation est présente.
458 Appendix A
Product Damage Precautions

Précautions pour éviter les dommages à l'appareil
Use Proper Power Source
Utiliser une source d'alimentation appropriée
Do not operate this product from a power source that supplies more than the
specified voltage.
Ne pas utiliser cet appareil avec une source d'alimentation fournissant un
voltage supérieur à celui requis.
Provide Proper Ventilation
Fournir une correcte ventilation
To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.
Pour prévenir une surchauffe de cet appareil, fournir une correcte ventilation.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures
Ne pas utiliser un appareil défectueux
If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified
service personnel.
Si vous suspectez que cet appareil est endommagé, faites-le inspecter par un
personnel d'entretien qualifié.
CAUTION: This unit can have more than one power supply cord. To
de-energize the internal circuitry, you have to disconnect all power cords.
ATTENTION: Cette unité peut avoir plus d'un cordon d'alimentation. Pour
enlever toute source de voltage sur les circuits internes, vous devez enlever
tous les cordons d'alimentation.
ADVARSEL: Utstyret kan ha mere ennn en tilførselsledning. For å gjore interne
deler spennigsløse må alle tilførselsledningene trekkes ut.
VARNING: Denna apparat har mer än en nätanslutning. Samtliga nätkablar
måste bortkopplas för att göra de interna kretsarna spänningsfria.
FUSE: REPLACE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.
FUSIBLE: REMPLACER AVEC LE MEME TYPE ET CALIBRE DE FUSIBLE.
CAUTION: REPLACE WITH SAME TYPE FUSE.
ATTENTION: UTILISER UN FUSIBLE DE RECHANGE DE MÊME TYPE.
CAUTION: DISCONNECT SUPPLY CORD BEFORE CHANGING FUSE.
ATTENTION: DÉBRANCHER AVANT DE REMPLACER LE FUSIBLE.
ACHTUNG: VOR AUSWECHSELN DER SICHERUNG IST DAS GERÄT VOM NETZ
ZU TRENNEN.
Use Proper Power Source
Utiliser une source d'alimentation appropriée
Do not operate this product from a power source that supplies more than the
specified voltage.
Ne pas utiliser cet appareil avec une source d'alimentation fournissant un
voltage supérieur à celui requis.
CAUTION
ATTENTION
This equipment has more than one power supply cord. To reduce the risk of
electric shock, disconnect all power cords before servicing.
Cet appareil possede plus d'un cordon d'alimentation Afin de reduire les
risques de chocs electriques, enlever tous les cordons d'alimentation avant de
faire l'entretien.
CAUTION
ATTENTION
DC Platinum frames shoud be grounded using eight-gauge stranded copper
wire crimped to the dual lug compression terminal provided on the frame.
Les chassis Platinum alimentès par courant continu devraient être mis à la terre
par un fil conducteur multibrins en cuivre, de calibre 8, serti sur la cosse de
connection à deux vis fournie avec le chassis.
460 Appendix A
EMC and Safety Standards

Normes de sécurité et de compliance électro-magnétique (EMC)
This product has been tested and found to comply with the following IEC, FCC, UL, ICES,
and CSA standards, per the provision of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/
336/EEC of 3 May 1989 as amended by 92/31EEC of 28 April 1992 and 93/68/EEC, Article
5 of 22 July 1993, and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973.
Cet appareil a été vérifié et trouvé conforme avec les normes CEI, FCC, UL, NMB, et CSA, et
les dispositions de la Directive sur la compatibilité électro-magnétique 89/336/EEC du 3 Mai
1989 et de ses amendements 92/31/EEC du 28 avril 1992 et 93/68/EEC, article 5, du 22
juillet 1993, et la Directive sur les basses tensions 73/23/EEC du 19 février 1973.
These devices are for professional use only and comply with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1 These devices may cause interference to radio and TV receivers in residential areas.
2 These devices will accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operations.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Imagine Communications, the party
responsible for compliance to the FCC Part 15 Rule, could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment legally in the United States.
These devices do not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus as set out in the interference standard entitled “Digital apparatus,” ICES-003,
from Industry Canada.
Cet appareil est pour usage professionnel seulement et est conforme avec la Partie 15 des
réglements de la FCC. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes
1 Cet appareil peut causer des interférences aux récepteurs radio et TV situés dans des zones
résidentielles.
2 Cet appareil acceptera toute interférence reçue, incluant les interférences qui peuvent
affecter son utilisation.
Les remplacements ou modifications qui ne sont pas approuvées par Imagine
Communications, la compagnie responsable pour la conformité avec la Partie 15 des
réglements de la FCC, peuvent annuler l'autorisation de l'utilisateur à utiliser cet appareil
légalement aux Etats-Unis.
Cet appareil n'excède pas les limites de la Classe A pour les perturbations radio-électriques
provenant d'appareils numériques telles que décrites dans la Norme sur le Matériel
Brouilleur NMB-003, intitulée “Appareils numériques” et publiée par Industrie Canada.
Additional EMC Information

Compatibilité électro-magnétique (CEM) - Information additionnelle
This device is for professional use in a controlled EMC environment, such as purpose-built
broadcast studios.
Cet appareil est conçu pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement rencontrant les
normes de CEM, tel que des studios de diffusion spécialement construits à cet effet.
EMC regulations require that the radiation emitted from this unit does not exceed certain
limits. These limits are only met when the front panel is closed and secured.
Les réglements concernant la CEM exigent que les radiations émises à partir de cette unité
n'excèdent pas certaines limites. Ces limites sont seulement rencontrées lorsque le panneau
frontal est fermé et les deux écrous de fixation serrés.
Compliance to the EMC regulations is also dependent on the use of suitably shielded
(screened) cables. Coax cables should be of the double-shielded (screened) variety. Unused
BNCs should be fitted with 75 terminations.
La conformité avec les réglements de CEM depend aussi de l'utilisation de câbles

convenablement blindés. Les câbles coaxiaux devraient avoir un double blindage. Les
connecteurs BNC non utilisés devraient être terminés avec une charge de 75 Ohms.
All audio cables should be screened with the shield (screen) making good contact with the
metallic parts of the cable connectors.
Tous les câbles audio devraient être blindés avec le blindage ayant un bon contact avec les
parties métalliques du connecteur utilisé pour ces câbles.
D-type connectors used with this unit should always have metallic shells with the shield
(screen) of the cable mechanically bonded to the metal shell. It is further recommended that
the D-type cable connectors be of the “dimple” variety. These connectors make a better
contact and consequently improve EMC performance.
Les connecteurs de type D utilisés avec cette unité devraient toujours avoir des coquilles
métalliques et le blindage du câble attaché mécaniquement à la coquille métallique. Il est de
plus recommandé que ces connecteurs de type D soient d'une variété “avec empreinte”.
Ces connecteurs permettent un meilleur contact et ceci améliore la performance de la CEM.
Table A-1 Harmonized and Reference IEC Safety and EMC Standards
Harmonized Reference IEC
Standard Standard Description
UL 60950-1/ IEC 60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment for North

CSA-C22.2 America and Canada, with Certified Body (CB) Report with
all country deviations
EN55103-1, 2 EN55103-1, 2 FCC Part 15 regulations and European EMC standards for
application of the CE Mark
462 Appendix A
463
B Laser Safety Guidelines
General Laser Information

WARNING: Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified
in this document may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similar operating
systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR) light at wavelengths
between approximately 800 nanometers and 1600 nanometers. The emitted light is above
the red end of the visible spectrum, which is normally not visible to the human eye.
Although radiant energy at near-IR wavelengths is officially designated invisible, some
people can see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levels several orders of
magnitude below any that have been shown to cause injury to the eye.
Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light. (The term
“monochromaticity” means a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visible or
invisible to the eye.) A conventional laser produces a small-sized beam of light, and because
the beam size is small the power density (also called “irradiance”) is very high.
Consequently, for their safe operation, lasers and laser products are subject to federal and
applicable state (USA) regulations, as well as international standards.
A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very well
“collimated”; thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant over distance.
Lasers used in lightwave systems, however, have a large beam divergence, which is typically
10 to 20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the inverse square law (doubling the distance
reduces the irradiance by a factor of 4) and rapidly decreases over distance.
464 Appendix B
Laser Safety Guidelines
Lasers and Eye Damage

The optical energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs in the 400-1400 nm range may
cause eye damage. When a beam of light enters the eye, the eye magnifies and focuses the
energy on the retina magnifying the irradiance. The irradiance of the energy that reaches
the retina is approximately 105 or 100,000 times more than at the cornea and, if sufficiently
intense, may burn the retina.
The damage mechanism at the wavelengths used in an optical fiber telecommunications is

thermal in origin, i.e., damage caused by heating. A specific amount of energy is required
for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue. Damage to the retina occurs only when
you look at the light sufficiently long that the product of the retinal irradiance and the
viewing time exceeds the damage threshold. Optical energies above 1400 nm cause corneal
and skin burns but do not affect the retina. The thresholds for injury at wavelengths greater
than 1400 nm are significantly higher than for wavelengths in the retinal hazard region
Classification of Lasers
Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the U.S. are regulated by the Food and Drug
Administration’s Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH) under 21 CFR
1040. These regulations require manufacturers to certify each laser or laser product as
belonging to one of four major Classes: I, II, IIa, IIIa, IIIb, or IV.
The International Electro-Technical Commission is an international standards body that

writes laser safety standards under IEC-60825. Classification schemes are similar with
Classes divided into Classes 1, 2, 3A, 3B, and 4.
Lasers are classified according to the accessible emission limits and their potential for
causing injury. Optical fiber telecommunication systems are generally classified as Class I/1
because, under normal operating conditions, all energized laser transmitting modules are
terminated on optical fibers which enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheath forming a
protective housing.
Also, a protective housing/access panel is typically installed in front of the laser modules
frames. The modules themselves, however, may be FDA/CDRH Class I or IIIb; or IEC Class 1,
3A, or 3B.
Laser Safety Precautions for Optical Fiber Communication Systems

In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber communication system is totally enclosed and
presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I/1 system under the FDA and IEC classifications.
The fiber optic cables that interconnect various components of an optical fiber can
disconnect or break, and may expose people to laser emissions. Also, certain measures and
maintenance procedures may expose the technician to emission from the semiconductor
laser during installation and servicing.
Unlike more familiar laser devices, such as solid-state and gas lasers, the emission pattern of
a semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In a divergent beam, the
irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with distance. The greater the distance, the less
energy will enter the eye, and the less potential risk for eye injury.
Inadvertently viewing an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at
distances greater than 5 to 6 in. (127 to 152 mm) normally will not cause eye injury,
provided that the power in the fiber is less than a few milliwatts at the near IR wavelengths
and a few tens of milliwatts at the far IR wavelengths.
Laser Safety
WARNING: Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified
in this document may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Optical fiber telecommunication systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit
infrared light that is normally not visible to the human eye. Although a conventional laser
produces a small beam of light, the power density is very high, and it can damage your
eyes.
If a beam of laser light enters the eye, the eye magnifies and focuses the energy on the
retina. The energy that reaches the retina can be as much as 100,000 times more than at
the cornea and, as a result, it can burn the retina.
Laser transmission products are classified in four major groups (Class 1, 2, 3, and 4),
according to their emissions and potential for causing injury. Fiber optic transmitter modules
in this series are designated Class 1.
Precautions for Enclosed Systems

Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems are completely
enclosed; nonetheless, observe the following precautions:
1 Because of the potential for eye damage, technicians should not stare into optical
connectors or broken fibers.
2 Under no circumstance shall laser/fiber optic operations be performed by a technician
before satisfactorily completing an approved training course.
3 Since viewing laser emissions directly in excess of Class I/1 limits with an optical instrument
such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye damage, appropriate labels must
appear in plain view, in close proximity to the optical port on the protective housing/access
panel of the terminal equipment.
WARNING: Eye damage may occur if an optical instrument such as a microscope,

magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to stare at the energized fiber end.
466 Appendix B
Precautions for Unenclosed Systems

During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication system is
considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these practices:
CAUTION: Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service,

maintenance, and restoration.
1 Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical connectors at
close distances.
Laser modules associated with the optical ports of laser circuit packs are typically recessed,
which limits the exposure distance. Optical port shutters, Automatic Power Reduction
(APR), and Automatic Power Shut Down (APSD) are engineering controls that are also used
to limit the emissions. However, technicians removing or replacing laser modules should not
stare or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments or magnifying lenses.
(Normal eyewear or indirect viewing instruments such as Find-R-Scopes are not considered
magnifying lenses or optical instruments).
2 Ensure that only authorized, trained personnel use optical test equipment during
installation or servicing.
3 Turn off all laser sources before scanning a fiber with an optical test set.
4 Keep all unauthorized personnel away from the immediate area of the optical fiber systems
during installation and service.
For guidance on the safe use of optical fiber communication systems in the workplace,
consult ANSI Z136.2, American National Standard for Safe Use of Lasers in the U.S. or
outside the U.S., IEC-60825, Part 2.
Labels The Class 1 Laser Products label (see Figure B-1) is applicable to Class 1 laser products.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001
CAUTION:INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
Figure B-1 Label for Class 1 Laser Products
The Class 1M Laser Radiation label (see Figure B-2) is applicable to Class 1M laser products.
CAUTION: LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
CAUTION: CLASS 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
(magnifiers).
Figure B-2 Label for Class 1M Laser Radiation
Specifications
See page 119 for a list of optical specifications for PT-HS1310S-IB laser input modules.
See page 125 for a list of optical specifications for PT-HSO-IB+ laser input modules.
See page 255 for a list of optical specifications for PT-HSR1310S-OB laser output modules.
See page 197 for a list of optical specifications for PT-HSRO-OB+ and PT-HSRO-OBG+ laser
output modules.
468 Appendix B
469
Index
A PT-FO-BMO 15, 287, 378

PT-HS-BP+ 15, 214
Adding frames
PT-SFP2X4+BM 15, 135
Add command 399
PT-V-BP 15, 73, 78, 81, 86, 106, 219, 234, 239,
discovering 399 243, 248, 267, 378
polling 399 Block diagrams
Adjustable frame delay 199 crosspoint modules basic signal flow 340,
ADS (ancillary data stripper) 201, 329 341
Alarm module. See PM-ALARM-5; output module basic signal flow 212
PT-ALARM output monitoring module basic signal
Ancillary data 200, 329 flow 436
Append embedding 201, 202, 330 PM-128×128-3G9 340
Application parameters PM-128×128-X9 340
frame 395 PM-40×32-3G5 341
RouterMapper 400–403 PM-64×64-3G9 340
Architecture PM-64×64-X9 340
frame sizes 3 PM-72×64-3G5 341
matrix sizes 3 PM-ADC-IB 116
output monitoring PM-ADCT-IB 127
5RU 432 PM-AEB-IB 92
9RU 433 PM-AEB-OB 255
15RU 434 PM-AEBT-IB 100
28RU 435 PM-AEBT-OB 262
physical 4–6 PM-AEC-IB 92
Audio PM-AEC-OB 255
synchronization 200, 332 PM-AECT-IB 100
test tone 200 PM-AECT-OB 262
PM-ATDM16-X9 356
B PM-ATDM9-X5 356
PM-DAC-OB 274
B# command. See BUFFER command PM-DATC-OB 282
Back panel modules PM-DEC-IB 108
descriptions 14 PM-ENC-DOB 269
installation 378 PM-ENC-OB 269
PT-A2-BP 14, 110, 112, 121, 122, 271, 278, 378 PM-HS-IB+ 76, 80
PT-A2-DTB 14 PM-HSR-DOB 236
PT-AEB-IBP 14, 90, 97, 378 PM-HSR-OB 236
PT-AEB-OBP 15, 253, 259, 378 PM-HSR-OB+ 222
PT-AEC-BOC 15, 90, 97 PM-HSR-OBG+ 217
PT-AEC-IBP 15, 90, 97, 378 PM-S-IB 87
PT-AEC-OBP 15, 253, 259, 378 PM-S-IB+ 84
PT-AECT-IBP 15 PM-SR-DOB 250
PT-AECT-OBP 15 PM-SR-OB 250
PT-FO-BMI 15, 131, 135, 378
470 Index
PM-SR-OB+ 245 Commands

PM-SR-OBG+ 241 BUFFER 451
PT-128×256-3G15 340 CLEAR 451
PT-128×256-3G28 340 DESTINATION 451
PT-128×256-X15 340 INFORMATION 451
PT-128×256-X28 340 LEVEL 451
PT-ADC-IB 116 POLL 451
PT-ADCT-IB 127 QUERY 451
PT-AEB-IB 92, 100 READ 452
PT-AEB-OB 255 SOURCE 452
PT-AEBT-IB 100 TERMINAL 452
PT-AEC-IB 92, 100 VERIFY 452
PT-AEC-OB 255 XPOINT 452
PT-AECT-IB 100 ZERO 452
PT-ATDM16-X15 356 Common issues 388
PT-ATDM32-X15 356 Communications back panel. See
PT-ATDM32-X28 356 PM5-CBP; PT-CBP
PT-ATDM64-X28 356 Components
PT-DAC-OB 274 frames 10, 23–24, 24–27, 27–28, 30–??, 35,
PT-DACT-OB 282 ??–38, 39–41, 42–43, 44–45, 47–48
PT-DEC-IB 108 modules 11–15
PT-DMX 147 replacing 390
PT-DMX-3G 147 Configuration
PT-ENC-DOB 269 crosspoint modules 355
PT-ENC-OB 269 PM-128×128-X9 349
PT-FSDMX-IBG 190 PM-40×32-3G5 342
PT-FSDMXO-IBG 190 PM-64×64-3G9 345
PT-HS1310S-IB 133, 138 PM-64×64-X9 345
PT-HS-IB+ 76, 80 PM-72×64-3G5 346
PT-HSO-IB+ 138 PM-ADC-IB 113
PT-HSR1310S-OB 230, 289 PM-ADCT-IB 123
PT-HSR1D-IBG 154, 176 PM-AEB-IB 90
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 154, 176 PM-AEB-OB 254
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG 176 PM-AEBT-IB 98
PT-HSRAEC-OM 447 PM-AEBT-OB 260
PT-HSR-DOB 236 PM-AEC-IB 90
PT-HSR-OB 236 PM-AEC-OB 254
PT-HSR-OB+ 222 PM-AECT-IB 98
PT-HSR-OBG+ 217 PM-AECT-OB 260
PT-HSR-OM 436, 439 PM-DAC-OB 273
PT-HSRO-OB+ 230 PM-DACT-OB 279
PT-HSRO-OBG+ 230 PM-ENC-DOB 267
PT-MADI4C-OBG 299 PM-ENC-OB 267
PT-MUX 297, 447 PM-HS-IB 79
PT-MUX-3G 297, 447 PM-HS-IB+ 74
PT-S-IB 87 PM-HSR-DOB 235
PT-S-IB+ 84 PM-HSR-OB 235
PT-SR-DOB 241, 245, 250 PM-HSR-OB+ 220
PT-SR-OB 241, 245, 250 PM-HSR-OBG+ 215
PT-SR-OB+ 241, 245 PM-MI 24
PT-SYNC 53 PM-S-IB 86
TDM signal flow 356 PM-S-IB+ 82
BUFFER command 451 PM-SR-DOB 248
PM-SR-OB 248
PM-SR-OB+ 243
C PM-SR-OBG+ 239
Card-edge controls 392–394 PT-128×256-3G15 351
CLEAR command 451 PT-128×256-3G28 351
PT-128×256-X15 351 description 14, 348

PT-128×256-X28 351 installation 348, 369
PT-ADC-IB 113 operation 348
PT-ADCT-IB 123 parameters 349
PT-AEB-IB 90 specifications 349
PT-AEB-OB 254 upgrade procedures 363–366
PT-AEBT-IB 98 PM-128×128-X9
PT-AEC-IB 90 block diagram 340
PT-AEC-OB 254 configuration 349
PT-AECT-IB 98 description 13, 348
PT-DAC-OB 273 installation 348, 369
PT-DACT-OB 279 operation 348
PT-DEC-IB 106 parameters 349
PT-DMX 142 specifications 349
PT-DMX-3G 142 PM-40×32-3G5
PT-ENC-DOB 267 block diagram 341
PT-ENC-OB 267 configuration 342
PT-EXPS 45 description 13, 342–343
PT-HS1310S-IB 131 installation 342
PT-HS-IB 79 operation 342
PT-HS-IB+ 74 parameters 343
PT-HSO-IB+ 136 specifications 343
PT-HSR1310S-OB 226, 287 upgrade procedures 363–366
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 151 PM-64×64-3G9
PT-HSRAEC-OM 443 block diagram 340
PT-HSR-DOB 235 configuration 345
PT-HSR-OB 235 description 13, 344, 344
PT-HSR-OB+ 220 installation 344, 367
PT-HSR-OBG+ 215 operation 344
PT-HSR-OM 438 parameters 345
PT-HSRO-OB+ 226 specifications 345
PT-HSRO-OBG+ 226 upgrade procedures 363–366
PT-MI 24 PM-64×64-X9
PT-MUX 293 block diagram 340
PT-MUX-3G 293 configuration 345
PT-PD 43 description 13, 342, 344, 344, 346
PT-S-IB 86 installation 344, 367
PT-S-IB+ 82 operation 344
PT-SR-DOB 248 parameters 345
PT-SR-OB 248 specifications 345
PT-SR-OB+ 243 PM-72×64-3G5
PT-SR-OBG+ 239 block diagram 341
PT-SYNC 52 configuration 346
PT-SYNC-MI 54 description 13, 346–347
RouterMapper 398–403 installation 346
Sync reference points 404–411 operation 346
TDM audio matrices 412–?? parameters 347
Control packet 201, 329 specifications 347
Controls upgrade procedures 363–366
card-edge 392–394 PM-ATDM16-X9
features 17–20 block diagram 356
Crosspoint modules configuration 355
basic signal flow diagram 340 description 14, 352, 353
general description 338 installation 355, 369
installation 369 operation 352–355
PM-128×128-3G9 parameters 355
block diagram 340 special features 354–355
configuration 349 specifications 356
472 Index
PM-ATDM9-X5 special features 354–355

block diagram 356 specifications 356
configuration 355 PT-ATDM32-X28
description 14, 352, 353 block diagram 356
installation 355, 369 configuration 355
operation 352–355 description 14, 352, 354
special features 354–355 installation 355, 369
specifications 356 operation 352–355
PT-128×256-3G15 parameters 355
description 14, 350 PT-ATDM64-X28
installation 351, 369 block diagram 356
operation 350 configuration 355
parameters 351 description 14, 352, 354
specifications 351 installation 355, 369
upgrade procedures 363–366 operation 352–355
PT-128×256-3G28 parameters 355
description 14, 350 TDM signal flow diagram 341, 356
installation 351, 369
operation 350
parameters 351 D
specifications 351 D# command. See DESTINATION
upgrade procedures 363–366 command
PT-128×256-X15 De-embedder modules. See PT-DX-SB
block diagram 340 De-embedder modules. See PT-MXDX-SB
configuration 351 De-embedding control parameter 200, 329
description 14, 350 Delay mode 199, 333
installation 351, 369 Descriptions
operation 350 back panel modules 14
parameters 351 PT-A2-BP 14
specifications 351 PT-A2-DTB 14
PT-128×256-X28 PT-AEB-IBP 14
block diagram 340 PT-AEB-OBP 15
configuration 351 PT-AEC-BOC 15
description 14, 350 PT-AEC-IBP 15
installation 351, 369 PT-AEC-OBP 15
operation 350 PT-AECT-IBP 15
parameters 351 PT-AECT-OBP 15
specifications 351 PT-FO-BMI 15
PT-ATDM16-X15 PT-FO-BMO 15
block diagram 356 PT-HS-BP+ 15
configuration 355 PT-SFP2X4+BM 15
description 14, 352, 354 PT-V-BP 15
installation 355, 369 crosspoint modules 338
operation 352–355 PM-128×128-3G9 14, 348
parameters 355 PM-128×128-X9 13, 348
special features 354–355 PM-40×32-3G5 13, 342–343
specifications 356 PM-64×64-3G9 13, 344, 344
PT-ATDM32-X15 PM-64×64-X9 13, 342, 344, 344, 346
block diagram 356 PM-72×64-3G5 13, 346–347
configuration 355 PM-ATDM16-X9 14, 352, 353
description 14, 352, 354 PM-ATDM9-X5 14, 352, 353
installation 355, 369 PT-128×256-3G15 14, 350
operation 352–355 PT-128×256-3G28 14, 350
parameters 355 PT-128×256-X15 14, 350
PT-128×256-X28 14, 350 PT-AEB-OB 12, 252–257

PT-ATDM16-X15 14, 352, 354 PT-AEBT-OB 12, 258–264
PT-ATDM32-X15 14, 352, 354 PT-AEC-OB 12, 252–257
PT-ATDM32-X28 14, 352, 354 PT-AECT-OB 12, 258–264
PT-ATDM64-X28 14, 352, 354 PT-DAC-OB 12, 271–277
frame-specific modules 10, 23–24, 24–27, PT-DACT-OB 12, 278–285
27–28, 30–??, 35, ??–38, 39–41, 42, 44, PT-ENC-DOB 12, 265–270
47, 49, 54 PT-ENC-OB 12, 265–270
input modules 11–12, 57–58 PT-HSR1310S-OB 12, 286–290
PM-ADC-IB 11, 110–119 PT-HSR-DOB 12, 232–237
PM-ADCT-IB 11, 120–130 PT-HSR-OB 12, 232–237
PM-AEB-IB 11, 89–90 PT-HSR-OB+ 13, 218–223
PM-AEBT-IB 96–103 PT-HSR-OBG+ 13, 213–218
PM-AEC-IB 11, 89–90 PT-HSRO-OB+ 13, 224–231
PM-AECT-IB 96–103 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 13, 224–231
PM-DEC-IB 11, 104–109 PT-MUX 13, 291–298
PM-HS-IB 11, 77–80 PT-MUX-3G 13, 291–298
PM-HS-IB+ 11, 73–77 PT-SR-DOB 13, 247–251
PM-HSO-IB+ 11, 134–135 PT-SR-OB 13
PM-S-IB 12, 85–88 PT-SR-OB+ 13, 242–246
PM-S-IB+ 12, 81 PT-SR-OBG+ 13, 238–242
PT-ADC-IB 11, 110–119 output monitoring modules 14, 432–435
PT-ADCT-IB 11, 120–130 product description 1
PT-AEB-IB 11, 89–90 DESTINATION command 451
PT-AEBT-IB 11, 96–103
PT-AEC-IB 89–90
PT-AECT-IB 11, 96–103 E
PT-DEC-IB 11, 104–109 Electrical specifications 21
PT-DMX 11, 140–147 Embed mode parameters 201, 329
PT-DMX-3G 11, 140–147 Embedder
PT-FSDMX-IBG 178–?? ancillary data 200, 329
PT-FSDMXO-IBG 178–?? Embedder modules. See PT-MX-SB
PT-HS1310S-IB 11, 130–134 Establishing a Telnet session for Ethernet
PT-HS-IB 11, 77–80 control interface products 450
PT-HS-IB+ 11, 73–77 Establishing a terminal operation session
PT-HSO-IB+ 134–135 for serial control interface
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 148 products 450
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG 60, 66, 172 External power supply frame. See PT-EXPS
PT-MADI4C-IBG 156
PT-S-IB 12, 85–88
PT-S-IB+ 12, 81 F
output modules 12–13, 18–??, 209–210 Fail-safe parameters, frame 396–398
PM-AEB-OB 12, 252–257 Fan modules
PM-AEBT-OB 12, 258–264 PM-FAN-5 10, 47–48
PM-AEC-OB 12, 252–257 PM-FAN-8 10, 49
PM-AECT-OB 12, 258–264 PT-FAN-14 10, 49
PM-DAC-OB 12, 271–277 PT-FAN-16 10, 49
PM-DACT-OB 12, 278–285 Fast switch 200, 328
PM-ENC-DOB 12, 265–270 Features 2, 17–20
PM-ENC-OB 12, 265–270 Fiber optical modules
PM-HSR-DOB 12, 232–237 PT-HS1310S-IB
PM-HSR-OB 12, 232–237 back panel modules 131
PM-HSR-OB+ 13, 218–223 block diagram 133
PM-HSR-OBG+ 13, 213–218 configuration 131
PM-SR-DOB 13 description 11, 130–134
PM-SR-OB 13, 247–251 installation 131, 371–375
PM-SR-OB+ 13, 242–246 laser safety guidelines 463–467
PM-SR-OBG+ 13, 238–242 operation 130–131
474 Index
specifications 133 PM-FAN-5 47–48

PT-HSO-IB+ PM-FAN-8 49
back panel modules 135 PT-ALARM 35–38
block diagram 138 PT-CPB 24–27
configuration 136 PT-EXPS 44–45
description 11, 134–135 PT-FAN-14 49
installation 135–136 PT-FAN-16 49
laser safety guidelines 463–467 PT-MI-15 23
parameters 136 PT-MI-28 23
specifications 139 PT-PD 42–43
PT-HSR1310S-OB PT-PS 39–41
back panel modules 287 PT-RES 27–28
block diagram 289 PT-SYNC 50–54
configuration 287 PT-SYNC-MI 54
description 12, 286 parameters
installation 287, 371–375 application parameters 395
laser safety guidelines 463–467 fail-safe parameters 396–398
operation 286–287 sizes 3
parameters 288 specifications
specifications 289 electrical 21
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG mechanical 21
description 60, 66, 172
installation 173
parameters 174 H
PT-HSRO-OB+ 224–231 Horizontal timing 199
back panel modules 225
block diagram 230
configuration 226
I
description 13 I command. See INFORMATION command
laser safety guidelines 463–467 Indicators 15
operation 224–?? INFORMATION command 451
output monitoring modules 225 Injury precautions 456
specifications 231 Input modules
PT-HSRO-OBG+ 224–231 applications integration 58
back panel modules 225 control requirements 58
block diagram 230 general description 57–58
configuration 226 installation 367
description 13 LEDs 57–58
installation 371–375 PM-ADC-IB
operation 224–?? back panel modules 113
output monitoring modules 225 block diagram 116
specifications 231 configuration 113
Field upgrades 390 description 11, 110
Frame synchronization, video 199, 333 installation 113
Frames operation 110–112
adding frames 399 parameters 114–115
architecture 3–9 specifications 117–119
components 10, 23–24, 24–27, 27–28, 30– PM-ADCT-IB
??, 35, ??–38, 39–41, 42–43, 44–45, 47– back panel modules 123
48 block diagram 127
default settings 394 configuration 123
installing 388 description 11, 120
modules installation 123
crosspoint modules 337–356 operation 120–122
input modules 55–148 parameters 124–126
output modules 207–231 specifications 128–130
output monitoring modules 431–448 PM-AEB-IB
PM-ALARM-5 34–35 back panel modules 90
block diagram 92 PM-S-IB

configuration 90 back panel modules 86
description 11, 89 block diagram 87
installation 90 configuration 86
operation 89–90 description 12, 85
parameters 91 installation 86
specifications 94 operation 85
PM-AEBT-IB parameters 86–??
back panel module 97 specifications 88
block diagram 100 PM-S-IB+
parameters 98–99 installation 82
PM-AEC-IB parameters 82–83
back panel modules 90 specifications 85
block diagram 92 PT-ADC-IB
parameters 91 installation 113
PM-AECT-IB parameters 114–115
back panel modules 97 specifications 117–119
block diagram 100 PT-ADCT-IB
PM-DEC-IB parameters 124–126
block diagram 108 PT-AEB-IB
description 11, 104, 104–109 back panel modules 90
operation 104–106 block diagram 92, 100
parameters 106–107 configuration 90
specifications 109 description 11, 89
PM-HS-IB installation 90
back panel modules 78 operation 89–90
configuration 79 parameters 91
description 11 specifications 94
installation 78 PT-AEBT-IB
operation 77 back panel modules 97
parameters 79–?? block diagram 100
PM-HS-IB+ description 11, 96
back panel modules 73 installation 97
block diagram 76, 80 parameters 98–99
description 11 PT-AEC-IB
installation 74 back panel modules 90
operation 73 block diagram 92, 100
476 Index

operation 89–90 parameters 136
parameters 91 specifications 139
specifications 95 PT-HSR2D-IBG
PT-AECT-IB description 169
back panel modules 97 installation 171
block diagram 100 operation 169
description 11, 96 specifications 170
installation 97 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG
parameters 98–99 back panel modules 149, 173
specifications 103 block diagram 154, 176
PT-DEC-IB configuration 151
back panel modules 106 description 148
block diagram 108 Input Expansion 150
description 11, 104, 104–109 operation 148, 172
installation 106 parameters 151
operation 104–106 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG
parameters 106–107 block diagram 176
specifications 109 installation 173
PT-DMX parameters 174
description 11 specifications 176
PT-DMX-3G PT-MADI4C-IBG
description 11 back panel modules 158
PT-HS1310S-IB block diagram 156
block diagram 133, 138 operation 157
description 11, 130–134 Sample Mapping Scenarios 162
installation 131, 371–375 specifications 166
laser safety guidelines 463–467 TDM Mapping 161
operation 130–131 PT-S-IB
specifications 134, 139 back panel modules 86
PT-HS-IB block diagram 87
back panel modules 78 configuration 86
configuration 79 description 12, 85
description 11 installation 86
installation 78, 367 operation 85
operation 77 parameters 86–??
parameters 79–?? specifications 88
specifications 80 PT-S-IB+
PT-HS-IB+ back panel modules 81
back panel modules 73 block diagram 84
block diagram 76, 80 configuration 82
installation 74 operation 81
operation 73 parameters 82–83
parameters 74–75 specifications 85
specifications 77 Installation
PT-HSO-IB+ back panel modules 378
back panel modules 135 checklist 388
block diagram 138 crosspoint modules 355, 369
configuration 136 fans 385
description 11, 134–135 fiber optical modules 371–375
installation 135–136 frames 388
laser safety guidelines 463–467 input modules 367
output modules 367 PT-PS-DC 40, 383–384

output monitoring modules 376 PT-RES 28, 379
PM-AEB-OB 253–254, 367 PT-S-IB+ 82
PM-AEBT-OB 259–260, 367 PT-SR-DOB 243, 367
PM-AEC-OB 253–254, 367 PT-SR-OB 243, 367
PM-AECT-OB 259–260, 367 PT-SR-OB+ 243
PM-ALARM-5 33 PT-SYNC 52, 376
PM-ATDM16-X9 355, 369 PT-SYNC-MI 54
PM-ATDM9-X5 355, 369 Issues 388
PM-DAC-OB 272, 367
PM-DACT-OB 279, 367
PM-ENC-DOB 267, 367 L
PM-ENC-OB 267, 367 L# command. See LEVEL command
PM-FAN-5 48, 385 Lasers. See also Fiber optical modules
PM-FAN-8 49, 385 classifications 464
PM-HS-IB+ 74 eye damage 464
PM-HSR-DOB 234, 367–368 general information 463
PM-HSR-OB 234, 367–368 labels 467
PM-MI 24 precautions 371–375, 464–466
PM-S-IB+ 82 safety guidelines 463–467
PM-SR-DOB 248, 367 LED indicators 15
PM-SR-OB 248, 367 LEVEL command 451
PM-SR-OB+ 243
PT-AEB-OB 253–254, 367
PT-AEBT-OB 253, 367
M
PT-AEC-OB 253–254, 367 Main features 2
PT-AECT-OB 253, 367 Matrix
PT-ALARM 37, 377 functional arrangement 10–15
PT-ATDM16-X15 355, 369 sizes 3
PT-ATDM32-X15 355, 369 Mechanical specifications 21
PT-ATDM32-X28 355, 369 Module interconnect, sync module. See
PT-ATDM64-X28 355, 369 PT-SYNC-MI
PT-DAC-OB 272, 367 Module interconnect. See PM-MI, PT-MI
PT-DACT-OB 279, 367 Modules
PT-DMX 142 components 11–15
PT-DMX-3G 142 crosspoint modules
PT-ENC-DOB 267, 367 general description 338
PT-ENC-OB 267, 367 PM-128×128-3G9 14, 348
PT-EXPS 44 PM-128×128-X9 13, 348–349
PT-FAN 49, 385 PM-40×32-3G5 13, 342–343
PT-HS1310S-IB 131, 371–375 PM-64×64-3G9 13, 344
PT-HS-IB+ 74 PM-64×64-X9 13, 342, 344, 346
PT-HSO-IB+ 135–136 PM-72×64-3G5 13, 346–347
PT-HSR1310S-OB 226, 287, 371–375 PM-ATDM16-X9 14, 352–356
PT-HSR2D-IBG 171 PM-ATDM9-X5 14, 352–356
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 150 PT-128×256-3G15 14
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG 173 PT-128×256-3G28 14, 350–351
PT-HSRAEC-OM 443 PT-128×256-X15 14, 350–351
PT-HSR-DOB 234, 367 PT-128×256-X28 14, 350–351
PT-HSR-OB 234, 367 PT-ATDM16-X15 14, 352–356
PT-HSR-OM 376, 438 PT-ATDM32-X15 14, 352–356
PT-HSRO-OB+ 226 PT-ATDM32-X28 14, 352–356
PT-HSRO-OBG+ 226 PT-ATDM64-X28 14, 352–356
PTM-ATDM64-X28 355 de-embedder submodules
PT-MI 24 PT-DMX 140–147
PT-MUX 293 PT-DMX-3G 140–147
PT-MUX-3G 293 embedder submodules
PT-PS 40, 383–384 PT-MUX 291–298
478 Index
PT-MUX-3G 291–298 sync module 376

frame synchronizer submodules output modules
PT-FSDMX-IBG 178–?? general description 209–210
PT-FSDMXO-IBG 178–?? LEDs 209–210
Input PM-AEB-OB 12, 252–257
LEDs 61, 67 PM-AEBT-OB 12, 258–264
Specifications 63, 69 PM-AEC-OB 12, 252–257
input modules PM-AECT-OB 12, 258–264
applications integration 58 PM-DAC-OB 12, 271–277
control requirements 58 PM-DACT-OB 12, 278–285
general description 57–58 PM-ENC-DOB 12, 265–270
LEDs 57–58 PM-ENC-OB 12, 265–270
PM-ADC-IB 11, 110–119 PM-HSR-DOB 12, 232–237
PM-ADCT-IB 11, 120–130 PM-HSR-OB 12, 232–237
PM-AEB-IB 11, 89–95 PM-HSR-OB+ 13, 218–223
PM-AEBT-IB 11, 96–103 PM-HSR-OBG+ 213–218
PM-AEC-IB 11, 89–95 PM-SR-DOB 13, 247–251
PM-AECT-IB 11, 96–103 PM-SR-OB 13, 247, 247–251
PM-DEC-IB 11, 104–109 PM-SR-OB+ 13, 238, 242, 242–246
PM-HS-IB 11, 77–80 PM-SR-OBG+ 13, 238–242
PM-HS-IB+ 11, 73–77 PT-AEB-OB 12, 252–257
PM-S-IB 12, 85–88 PT-AEBT-OB 12, 258–264
PM-S-IB+ 12, 81–85 PT-AEC-OB 12, 252–257
PT-ADC-IB 11, 110–119 PT-AECT-OB 12, 258–264
PT-ADCT-IB 11, 120–130 PT-DAC-OB 12, 271–277
PT-AEB-IB 11, 89–95 PT-DACT-OB 12, 278–285
PT-AEBT-IB 11, 96–103 PT-ENC-DOB 12, 265–270
PT-AEC-IB 11, 89–95 PT-ENC-OB 12, 265–270
PT-AECT-IB 11, 96–103 PT-HSR1310S-OB 12, 286–290
PT-DEC-IB 11, 104–109 PT-HSR-DOB 12, 232–237
PT-DMX 11 PT-HSR-OB 12, 232–237
PT-DMX-3G 11 PT-HSR-OB+ 13, 218–223
PT-HS1310S-IB 11, 130–134 PT-HSR-OBG+ 13, 213–218
PT-HS-IB 11, 77–80 PT-HSRO-OB+ 13, 224–231
PT-HS-IB+ 11, 73–77 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 13, 224–231
PT-HSO-IB+ 11, 134–135 PT-MUX 13
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 148 PT-MUX-3G 13
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG 60, 66, 172 PT-SR-DOB 13, 247–251
PT-MADI4C-IBG 156 PT-SR-OB 13, 247, 247–251
PT-S-IB 12, 85–88 PT-SR-OB+ 238, 242, 242–246
PT-S-IB+ 12, 81–85 PT-SR-OBG+ 238–242
installation output monitoring modules
alarm modules 377 general description 432–435
back panel modules 378 PT-HSRAEC-OM 14, 441
fan modules 385 PT-HSR-OM 14, 437
fiber optical modules 371–375 sync modules. See also PM-40×32-3G5
input modules 367 PT-SYNC 50–54
output modules 367 PT-SYNC-MI 54
output monitoring modules 376
PM-FAN-5 385
PM-FAN-8 385 O
power supply 383–384 Operation
PT-ALARM 377 crosspoint modules
PT-FAN 385 PM-ATDM16-X9 352–355
PT-PS 383–384 PM-ATDM9-X5 352–355
PT-RES 379 PT-ATDM16-X15 352–355
PT-SYNC 376 PT-ATDM32-X15 352–355
resource module 379 PT-ATDM32-X28 352–355
PT-ATDM64-X28 352–355 PT-HS-IB 77

operation notes 393 PT-HS-IB+ 73
PM-128×128-3G9 348 PT-HSO-IB+ 134–135
PM-128×128-X9 348 PT-HSR1310S-OB 286–287
PM-40×32-3G5 342 PT-HSR1D-IBG 148, 172
PM-64×64-3G9 344 PT-HSR2D-IBG 169
PM-64×64-X9 344 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 148, 172
PM-72×64-3G5 346 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG 60, 66, 172
PM-ADC-IB 110–112 PT-HSRAEC-OM 441–??
PM-ADCT-IB 120–122 PT-HSR-DOB 232–234
PM-AEB-IB 89–90 PT-HSR-OB 232–234
PM-AEB-OB 252–253 PT-HSR-OB+ 218–219
PM-AEBT-IB 96–97 PT-HSR-OBG+ 213–214
PM-AEBT-OB 258–259 PT-HSR-OM 437–438
PM-AEC-IB 89–90 PT-HSRO-OB+ 224–??
PM-AEC-OB 252–253 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 224–??
PM-AECT-IB 96–97 PT-MADI4C-IBG 157
PM-AECT-OB 258–259 PT-MADI4C-OBG 300
PM-DAC-OB 271 PT-MI 23
PM-DACT-OB 278–279 PT-MUX 291
PM-DEC-IB 104–106 PT-MUX-3G 291
PM-ENC-DOB 265–266 PT-PD 42–43
PM-ENC-OB 265–266 PT-PS 39
PM-FAN-5 47–48 PT-PS-DC 39
PM-FAN-8 49 PT-S-IB 85
PM-HS-IB 77 PT-S-IB+ 81
PM-HS-IB+ 73 PT-SR-DOB 238, 242–243, 247–248
PM-HSR-DOB 232–234 PT-SR-OB 238, 242–243, 247–248
PM-HSR-OB 232–234 PT-SYNC 50–51
PM-HSR-OB+ 218–219 PT-SYNC-MI 54
PM-HSR-OBG+ 213–214 Operation notes 393
PM-MI 23 Optical specifications, laser modules 467
PM-S-IB 85 Output modules
PM-S-IB+ 81 general description 209–210
PM-SR-DOB 247–248 installation 367
PM-SR-OB 247–248 LEDs 209–210
PT-128×256-X15 350 PM-AEB-OB
PT-128×256-X28 350 back panel modules 253
PT-ADC-IB 110–112 block diagram 255
PT-ADCT-IB 120–122 configuration 254
PT-AEB-IB 89–90 description 12, 252
PT-AEB-OB 252–253 installation 253–254, 367
PT-AEBT-OB 258–259 operation 252–253
PT-AEC-IB 89–90 specifications 256, 264
PT-AEC-OB 252–253 PM-AEBT-OB
PT-AECT-OB 258–259 back panel modules 259
PT-DAC-OB 271 block diagram 262
PT-DACT-OB 278–279 configuration 260
PT-DEC-IB 104–106 description 12, 258
PT-DMX 140 installation 259–260, 367
PT-DMX-3G 140 operation 258–259
PT-ENC-DOB 265–266 parameters 260–261
PT-ENC-OB 265–266 PM-AEC-OB
PT-EXPS 44 back panel modules 253
PT-FAN 49 block diagram 255
PT-FSDMX-IBG 179, 180 configuration 254
PT-FSDMXO-IBG 179, 180 description 12, 252
PT-HS1310S-IB 130–131 installation 253–254, 367
480 Index
operation 252–253 description 12, 232–237

specifications 256, 264 installation 234, 367–368
PM-AECT-OB operation 232–234
back panel modules 259 parameters 235
block diagram 262 reclocker operating modes 233
description 12, 258 PM-HSR-OB+
installation 259–260, 367 back panel modules 219
operation 258–259 block diagram 222
PM-DAC-OB description 13, 218
back panel modules 271 installation 220, 367–368
block diagram 274 operation 218–219
configuration 273 parameters 220–221
description 12, 271 reclocker operating modes 219
installation 272, 367 specifications 222
operation 271 submodules 220
parameters 273 PM-HSR-OBG+
PM-DACT-OB back panel modules 214
block diagram 282 configuration 215
configuration 279 description 213
description 12, 278 installation 215, 367–368
installation 279, 367 operation 213–214
operation 278–279 output monitoring modules 214
parameters 280–281 parameters 216
PM-ENC-DOB reclocker operating modes 214
block diagram 269 submodules 214
configuration 267 PM-SR-DOB
description 12, 265 back panel modules 248
operation 265–266 configuration 248
parameters 268 description 13
PM-ENC-OB operation 247–248
configuration 267 PM-SR-OB
parameters 268 description 13, 247
PM-HSR-DOB operation 247–248
configuration 235 PM-SR-OB+
installation 234, 367–368 block diagram 245
parameters 235 description 13, 238, 242
reclocker operating modes 233 installation 243
PM-HSR-OB parameters 244
block diagram 236 submodules 243
configuration 235 PM-SR-OBG+
back panel modules 239 back panel modules 267

block diagram 241 block diagram 269
configuration 239 configuration 267
description 13 description 265
installation 239 installation 267, 367
operation 238 operation 265–266
parameters 239–240 parameters 267–268
specifications 241 specifications 270
submodules 239 PT-ENC-OB
PT-AEB-OB back panel modules 267
description 12, 252 installation 267, 367
installation 253–254, 367 operation 265–266
operation 252–253 parameters 267–268
parameters 254–?? specifications 270
specifications 256 PT-HSR1310S-OB
PT-AEBT-OB back panel modules 287
back panel modules 259 block diagram 230, 289
description 12, 258 configuration 226, 287
installation 253, 367 description 12
operation 258–259 installation 226, 287, 371–375
parameters 260–261 laser safety guidelines 463–467
PT-AEC-OB parameters 287
block diagram 255 PT-HSR-DOB
installation 253–254, 367 configuration 235
parameters 254–?? installation 234, 367
PT-AECT-OB parameters 235
back panel modules 259 reclocker operating modes 233
installation 253, 367 PT-HSR-OB
operation 258–259 back panel modules 234
PT-DAC-OB description 12, 232–237
back panel modules 271 installation 234, 367
block diagram 274 operation 232–234
description 12, 271 reclocker operating modes 233
installation 272, 367 specifications 237
operation 271 PT-HSR-OB+
parameters 273 back panel modules 219
PT-DACT-OB block diagram 222
block diagram 282 description 13, 218
configuration 279 installation 220, 367–368
description 12, 278 operation 218–219
installation 279, 367 parameters 220–221
operation 278–279 reclocker operating modes 219
PT-ENC-DOB submodules 220
482 Index
PT-HSR-OBG+ configuration 248

back panel modules 214 description 13, 247
block diagram 217 installation 239, 243, 243, 248, 367
configuration 215 operation 238, 242–243, 247–248
description 13, 213 parameters 244–249
installation 215, 367–368 specifications 241, 245, 250
operation 213–214 PT-SR-OB+
parameters 215–216 back panel modules 243
reclocker operating modes 214 block diagram 241, 245
submodules 214 description 238, 242
PT-HSRO-OB+ installation 243
block diagram 230 parameters 244
configuration 226 specifications 241, 245
description 13, 224 submodules 243
installation 226, 367–368 PT-SR-OBG+
laser safety guidelines 463–467 back panel modules 239
operation 224–?? configuration 239
output monitoring modules 225 installation 239
parameters 226–228 operation 238
specifications 231 parameters 239–240
submodules 225 submodules 239
PT-HSRO-OBG+ signal flow diagram 212
back panel modules 225 Output monitoring modules
block diagram 230 architecture
configuration 226 5RU 432
description 13, 224 9RU 433
installation 226 15RU 434
operation 224–?? 28RU 435
output monitoring modules 225 general description 432–435
specifications 231 PT-HSRAEC-OM 214
submodules 225 block diagram 447
PT-MADI4C-OBG configuration 443
operation 300 installation 443
parameters 306 operation 441–??
Reference Locking 304 parameters 445–446
TDM Input 304 PT-HSR-OM 214, 219, 234
TDM Output Mapping 304 block diagram 436, 439
PT-MUX configuration 438
description 13 description 437
PT-MUX-3G descriptionDescriptions
description 13 output monitoring
PT-SR-DOB modules 14
installation 376, 438
block diagram 241, 245, 250
operation 437–438
configuration 248
parameters 438–439
description 13
specifications 439
installation 239, 243, 243, 248, 367
signal flow diagram 436
operation 238, 242–243, 247–248
types
parameters 244–249
real 437, 442
specifications 241, 245, 250
virtual 438, 443
PT-SR-OB
back panel modules 248 Outputs
audio channel source 200
test tone 200 PT-ATDM32-X15 355

Overwrite embedding 203, 331 PT-ATDM32-X28 355
PT-ATDM64-X28 355
PT-DAC-OB 273
P PT-DACT-OB 280–281
P# command. See POLL command PT-DEC-IB 106–107
Parameters PT-DMX 142
frame-controllable PT-DMX-3G 142
application parameters 395 PT-ENC-DOB 267–268
default settings 394 PT-ENC-OB 267–268
fail-safe parameters 396–398 PT-FSDMX-IBG 190
PM-128×128-3G9 349 PT-FSDMXO-IBG 190
PM-128×128-X9 349 PT-HS-IB 79–??
PM-40×32-3G5 343 PT-HS-IB+ 74–75
PM-64×64-3G9 345 PT-HSO-IB+ 136
PM-64×64-X9 345 PT-HSR1310S-OB 287
PM-72×64-3G5 347 PT-HSR2D-IBG 171
PM-ADC-IB 114–115 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 151
PM-ADCT-IB 124–126 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG 174
PM-AEB-IB 91 PT-HSRAECAEC-OM 445–446
PM-AEBT-IB 98–99 PT-HSR-DOB 235
PM-AEBT-OB 260–261 PT-HSR-OB 235
PM-AEC-IB 91 PT-HSR-OB+ 220–221
PM-AECT-IB 98–99 PT-HSR-OBG+ 215–216
PM-AECT-OB 260–261 PT-HSR-OM 438–439
PM-ALARM-5 34–35 PT-HSRO-OB+ 226–228
PM-ATDM16-X9 355 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 226–228
PM-DAC-OB 273 PT-MADI4C-IBG 166
PM-DACT-OB 280–281 PT-MADI4C-OBG 306
PM-DEC-IB 106–107 PT-MUX 294
PM-ENC-DOB 268 PT-MUX-3G 294
PM-ENC-OB 268 PT-S-IB 86–??
PM-HS-IB 79–?? PT-S-IB+ 82–83
PM-HS-IB+ 74–75 PT-SR-DOB 244–249
PM-HSR-DOB 235 PT-SR-OB 244–249
PM-HSR-OB 235 PT-SR-OB+ 244
PM-HSR-OB+ 220–221 PT-SR-OBG+ 239–240
PM-HSR-OBG+ 216 PT-SYNC 52
PM-S-IB 86–?? RouterMapper-controllable application
PM-S-IB+ 82–83 parameters 400–403
PM-SR-DOB 249 Physical architecture
PM-SR-OB 249 128×128 4
PM-SR-OB+ 244 256×256 5
PM-SR-OBG+ 239–240 512×512 6
PT-128×256-X15 351 64×64 4
PT-128×256-X28 351 Pinouts
PT-ADC-IB 114–115 PM-ADC-IB 117
PT-ADCT-IB 124–126 PM-ADCT-IB 128
PT-AEB-IB 91 PM-AEB-IB 93
PT-AEB-OB 254–?? PM-AEB-OB 255
PT-AEBT-IB 98–99 PM-AEBT-OB 263
PT-AEC-IB 91 PM-ALARM-5 33
PT-AEC-OB 254–?? PM-DAC-OB 275
PT-AECT-IB 98–99 PT-ADC-IB 117
PT-AECT-OB 260–261 PT-ADCT-IB 128
PT-AETB-OB 260–261 PT-AEB-IB 93
PT-ALARM 38 PT-AEB-OB 255
PT-ATDM16-X15 355 PT-AEBT-OB 263
484 Index
PT-ALARM 37 back panel modules 113

PT-DAC-OB 275 block diagram 116
PM-128×128-3G9 configuration 113
description 14, 348 operation 110–112
operation 348 pinouts 117
parameters 349 specifications 117–119
specifications 349 PM-ADCT-IB
upgrade procedures 363–366 back panel modules 123
PM-128×128-X9 block diagram 127
description 13, 348 installation 123
parameters 349 pinouts 128
specifications 349 specifications 128–130
PM-40×32-3G5 PM-AEB-IB
block diagram 341 back panel modules 90
configuration 342 block diagram 92
description 13, 342–343 configuration 90
installation 342 description 11, 89
parameters 343 operation 89–90
specifications 343 parameters 91
upgrade procedures 363–366 pinouts 93
PM5-CBP specifications 94
description 10, 24–27 PM-AEB-OB
PM-64×64-3G9 block diagram 255
description 13, 344, 344 installation 253–254, 367
operation 344 pinouts 255
parameters 345 specifications 256, 264
specifications 345 PM-AEBT-IB
upgrade procedures 363–366 back panel modules 97
PM-64×64-X9 block diagram 100
description 13, 342, 344, 344, 346 installation 97
specifications 345 PM-AEBT-OB
PM-72×64-3G5 back panel modules 259
description 13, 346–347 description 12, 258
installation 346 installation 259–260, 367
operation 346 operation 258–259
parameters 347 parameters 260–261
specifications 347 pinouts 263
upgrade procedures 363–366 PM-AEC-IB
PM-ADC-IB back panel modules 90

configuration 90 installation 272, 367
description 11, 89 operation 271
installation 90 parameters 273
operation 89–90 pinouts 275
parameters 91 specifications 276–277
specifications 94 PM-DACT-OB
PM-AEC-OB back panel modules 278
specifications 256, 264 specifications 284–285
PM-AECT-IB PM-DEC-IB
description 11, 96 description 11, 104, 104–109
specifications 103 PM-ENC-DOB
PM-AECT-OB back panel modules 267
PM-ALARM-5 PM-ENC-OB
installation 33 block diagram 269
parameters 34–35 description 12, 265
pinouts 33 installation 267, 367
PM-ATDM16-X9 operation 265–266
description 14, 352, 353 PM-FAN-5
operation 352–355 installation 48, 385
special features 354–355 PM-FAN-8
specifications 356 description 10
PM-ATDM9-X5 installation 49, 385
configuration 355 PM-HS-IB
description 14, 352, 353 back panel modules 78
special features 354–355 installation 78
PM-DAC-OB parameters 79–??
block diagram 274 PM-HS-IB+
486 Index
block diagram 76, 80 configuration 86

installation 74 operation 85
operation 73 parameters 86–??
specifications 77 PM-S-IB+
PM-HSR-DOB back panel modules 81
installation 234, 367–368 operation 81
reclocker operating modes 233 PM-SR-DOB
specifications 237 back panel modules 248
PM-HSR-OB block diagram 250
block diagram 236 description 13
configuration 235 installation 248, 367
description 12, 232–237 operation 247–248
installation 234, 367–368 parameters 249
operation 232–234 specifications 250
parameters 235 PM-SR-OB
reclocker operating modes 233 back panel modules 248
specifications 237 block diagram 250
PM-HSR-OB+ configuration 248
back panel modules 219 description 13, 247
block diagram 222 installation 248, 367
configuration 220 operation 247–248
description 13, 218 parameters 249
installation 220, 367–368 specifications 250
operation 218–219 PM-SR-OB+
parameters 220–221 back panel modules 243
reclocker operating modes 219 block diagram 245
submodules 220 description 13, 238, 242
PM-HSR-OBG+ installation 243
description 213 submodules 243
installation 215, 367–368 PM-SR-OBG+
output monitoring modules 214 block diagram 241
parameters 216 configuration 239
reclocker operating modes 214 description 13
submodules 214 operation 238
PM-MI parameters 239–240
installation 24 POLL command 451
operation 23 Polling 399
PM-S-IB Power distribution module. See PT-PD
back panel modules 86 Power supply frame. See PT-EXPS
block diagram 87 Power supply module. See PT-PS
Precautions block diagram 127

injury 456 configuration 123
laser safety 371–375, 464–466 description 11, 120
product damage 458 installation 123
Preventing electrostatic discharge 455 operation 120–122
Procedures, commonly performed 389 parameters 124–126
Product damage precautions 458 pinouts 128
Product description 1 specifications 128–130
Protective laser connector covers 371 PT-AEB-IB
Protocol support 451–452 back panel modules 90
PT-128×256-3G15 block diagram 92, 100
operation 350 parameters 91
parameters 351 pinouts 93
upgrade procedures 363–366 PT-AEB-IBP 14, 90, 97, 378
PT-128×256-3G28 PT-AEB-OB
description 14, 350 configuration 254
installation 351, 369 description 12, 252
operation 350 installation 253–254, 367
specifications 351 parameters 254–??
upgrade procedures 363–366 pinouts 255
PT-128×256-X15 specifications 256
block diagram 340 PT-AEB-OBP 15, 253, 259, 378
configuration 351 PT-AEBT-IB
parameters 351 description 11, 96
PT-128×256-X28 parameters 98–99
configuration 351 PT-AEBT-OB
installation 351, 369 description 12, 258
operation 350 installation 253, 367
specifications 351 parameters 260–261
PT-A2-BP 14, 110, 112, 121, 122, 271, 278, 378 pinouts 263
PT-A2-DTB 14, 112, 122, 271, 278 specifications 264
PT-ADC-IB PT-AEC-BOC 15, 90, 97, 253, 259
back panel modules 113 PT-AEC-IB
configuration 113 block diagram 92, 100
operation 110–112 installation 90
parameters 114–115 operation 89–90
pinouts 117 parameters 91
specifications 117–119 specifications 95
PT-ADCT-IB PT-AEC-IBP 15, 90, 97, 378
back panel modules 123 PT-AEC-OB
488 Index

block diagram 255 PT-ATDM64-X28
installation 253–254, 367 description 14, 352, 354
operation 252–253 installation 355, 369
parameters 254–?? operation 352–355
PT-AEC-OBP 15, 253, 259, 378 special features 354–355
PT-AECT-IB specifications 356
back panel modules 97 PT-CBP
configuration 98 operation 24–27
description 11, 96 PT-DAC-OB
installation 97 back panel modules 271
PT-AECT-IBP 15 description 12, 271
PT-AECT-OB installation 272, 367
back panel modules 259 operation 271
description 12, 258 parameters 273
installation 253, 367 pinouts 275
operation 258–259 specifications 276–277
parameters 260–261 PT-DACT-OB
PT-AECT-OBP 15 block diagram 282
PT-ALARM configuration 279
description 10, 37 description 12, 278
installation 37, 377 installation 279, 367
operation 35–37 operation 278–279
parameters 38 parameters 280–281
pinouts 37 specifications 284–285
PT-ATDM16-X15 PT-DEC-IB
description 14, 352, 354 configuration 106
installation 355, 369 description 11, 104, 104–109
special features 354–355 parameters 106–107
PT-ATDM32-X15 PT-DMX
description 14, 352, 354 description 11
installation 355, 369 installation 142
operation 352–355 operation 140
parameters 355 parameters 142
special features 354–355 specifications 147
specifications 356 PT-DMX-3G
PT-ATDM32-X28 block diagram 147
description 14, 352, 354 installation 142
installation 355, 369 operation 140
special features 354–355 PT-DX-SB 73, 135
PT-ENC-DOB block diagram 76, 80

description 12, 265 operation 73
operation 265–266 specifications 77
parameters 267–268 PT-HSO-IB+
PT-ENC-OB block diagram 138
block diagram 269 description 11, 134–135
configuration 267 installation 135–136
description 12, 265 laser safety guidelines 463–467
specifications 270 PT-HSR1310S-OB
PT-EXPS back panel modules 287
description 44 configuration 226, 287
installation 44 description 12
operation 44 installation 226, 287, 371–375
PT-FAN laser safety guidelines 463–467
description 10, 47, 49 operation 286–287
installation 49, 385 parameters 287
operation 49 specifications 289–290
PT-FO-BMI 15, 131, 135, 378 PT-HSR1D-IBG 148
PT-FO-BMO 15, 287, 378 block diagram 154, 176
PT-FSDMX-IBG operation 148, 172
block diagram 190 PT-HSR2D-IBG
parameters 190 description 169
PT-FSDMXO-IBG installation 171
operation 179, 180 parameters 171
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 148
Distributing Outputs 182 block diagram 154, 176
PT-HS1310S-IB configuration 151
block diagram 133, 138 Input Expansion 150
description 11, 130–134 operation 148, 172
installation 131, 371–375 parameters 151
laser safety guidelines 463–467 specifications 155
operation 130–131 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG
specifications 134, 139 block diagram 176
PT-HS-BP+ 15, 214 installation 173
PT-HS-IB operation 60, 66, 172
description 11, 78 PT-HSRAEC-OM 214
parameters 79–?? description 14, 441
PT-HS-IB+ operation 441–??
back panel modules 73 parameters 445–446
490 Index

where used 214, 219, 225, 234, 253, 267, installation 226, 367–368
272 laser safety guidelines 463–467
PT-HSR-DOB operation 224–??
back panel modules 234 output monitoring modules 225
block diagram 236 parameters 226–228
installation 234, 367 PT-HSRO-OBG+
parameters 235 block diagram 230
reclocker operating modes 233 configuration 226
PT-HSR-OB installation 226
back panel modules 234 operation 224–??
block diagram 236 output monitoring modules 225
configuration 235 parameters 226–228
description 12, 232–237 specifications 231
installation 234, 367 submodules 225
operation 232–234 PT-MADI4C-IBG
parameters 235 back panel modules 158
reclocker operating modes 233 block diagram 156
specifications 237 Controlling through Navigator 159
PT-HSR-OB+ Build Mode 159
back panel modules 219 Control Mode 159
block diagram 222 Discovery 159
description 13, 218 MADI Presence 161
parameters 220–221 Sample Mapping Scenarios 162
reclocker operating modes 219 specifications 166
specifications 222 TDM Mapping 161
submodules 220 PT-MADI4C-OBG
PT-HSR-OBG+ block diagram 299
back panel modules 214 operation 300
configuration 215 Reference Locking 304
installation 215, 367–368 TDM Input 304
operation 213–214 TDM Output Mapping 304
parameters 215–216 PT-MI
reclocker operating modes 214 configuration 24
submodules 214 installation 24
PT-HSR-OM 214, 219 operation 23
block diagram 436, 439 PT-MUX
parameters 438–439 operation 291
where used 214, 219, 234, 253, 267, 272 specifications 298
PT-HSRO-OB+ PT-MUX-3G
back panel modules 225 block diagram 297, 447

operation 291 installation 239, 243, 243, 248, 367
specifications 298 operation 238, 242–243, 247–248
PT-MUX-3G parameters 294 parameters 244–249
PT-MXDX-SB 81, 239, 243 specifications 241, 245, 250
PT-MX-SB 214, 220, 225 PT-SR-OB+
PT-MX-SD back panel modules 243
specifications 298 block diagram 241, 245
PT-PD configuration 243
operation 42–43 operation 242–243
PT-PS parameters 244
description 10, 39 specifications 241, 245
installation 40, 383–384 submodules 243
operation 39 PT-SR-OBG+
specifications 40–41 back panel modules 239
PT-PS-DC configuration 239
specifications 40–41 submodules 239
PT-RES PT-SYNC
operation 27–28 description 10, 50–51
PT-SFP2X4+BM 15, 135 installation 52, 376
PT-S-IB operation 50–51
configuration 86 PT-SYNC-MI
parameters 86–?? operation 54
specifications 88 PT-V-BP 15, 73, 78, 81, 86, 106, 219, 234, 239,
PT-S-IB+ 243, 248, 267, 378
block diagram 84
configuration 82
Q
description 12, 81 Q command. See QUERY command
installation 82 QUERY command 451
operation 81
parameters 82–83 R
specifications 85
PT-SR-DOB R command. See READ command
back panel modules 248 READ command 452
block diagram 241, 245, 250 Real output monitoring 437, 442
configuration 248 Reclocker operating modes 214, 219, 233
description 13 Replacing components 390
installation 239, 243, 243, 248, 367 Resource module. See PT-RES
operation 238, 242–243, 247–248 RouterMapper configuration 398–403
parameters 244–249 RS-232 pin assignments 25
specifications 241, 245, 250 RS-422 pin assignments 26
PT-SR-OB
back panel modules 248 S
configuration 248 S # command. See SOURCE command
492 Index
s PM-AECT-IB PM-HSR-OB 237

back panel modules 97 PM-HSR-OB+ 222
Safety precautions PM-HSR-OBG+ 217
injury precautions 456 PM-S-IB 88
lasers 371–375, 464–466 PM-S-IB+ 85
classifications 464 PM-SR-DOB 250
eye damage 464 PM-SR-OB 250
general information 463 PM-SR-OB+ 245
labels 467 PM-SR-OBG+ 241
preventing electrostatic discharge 455 PT-ADC-IB 117–119
product damage precautions 458 PT-ADCT-IB 128–130
safety terms and symbols in this PT-AEB-IB 94
manual 454 PT-AEB-OB 256
safety terms and symbols on the PT-AEBT-IB 102
product 454 PT-AEBT-OB 264
Serial control pin assignments PT-AEC-IB 95
RS-232 25 PT-AEC-OB 256
RS-422 26 PT-AECT-IB 103
Settings PT-AECT-OB 264
application parameters 395, 400–403 PT-ATDM16-X15 356
default settings 394 PT-ATDM32-X15 356
fail-safe parameters 396–398 PT-ATDM32-X28 356
SNMP 18 PT-ATDM64-X28 356
SOURCE command 452 PT-DAC-OB 276–277
Special features PT-DACT-OB 284–285
PM-ATDM16-X9 354–355 PT-DEC-IB 109
PM-ATDM9-X5 354–355 PT-DMX 147
PT-ATDM16-X15 354–355 PT-DMX-3G 147
PT-ATDM32-X15 354–355 PT-ENC-DOB 270
PT-ATDM32-X28 354–355 PT-ENC-OB 270
PT-ATDM64-X28 354–355 PT-HS1310S-IB 134, 139
Specifications PT-HS-IB 80
frames 21 PT-HS-IB+ 77
laser modules optical 467 PT-HSO-IB+ 139
PM-128×128-3G9 349 PT-HSR1310S-OB 289–290
PM-128×128-X9 349 PT-HSR2D-IBG 170
PM-40×32-3G5 343 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 155
PM-64×64-3G9 345 PT-HSR8O1D-IBG 176
PM-64×64-X9 345 PT-HSRAEC-OM 448
PM-72×64-3G5 347 PT-HSR-DOB 237
PM-ADC-IB 117–119 PT-HSR-OB 237
PM-ADCT-IB 128–130 PT-HSR-OB+ 222
PM-AEB-IB 94 PT-HSR-OBG+ 217
PM-AEB-OB 256, 264 PT-HSR-OM 439
PM-AEBT-IB 101 PT-HSRO-OB+ 231
PM-AEC-IB 94 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 231
PM-AEC-OB 256, 264 PT-MADI4C-IBG 166
PM-AECT-IB 103 PT-MADI4C-OBG 305
PM-ATDM16-X9 356 PT-MUX 298
PM-ATDM9-X5 356 PT-MUX-3G 298
PM-DAC-OB 276–277 PT-MX-SD 298
PM-DACT-OB 284–285 PT-PS 40–41
PM-DEC-IB 109 PT-PS-DC 40–41
PM-ENC-DOB 270 PT-S-IB 88
PM-ENC-OB 270 PT-S-IB+ 85
PM-HS-IB 80 PT-SR-DOB 241, 245, 250
PM-HS-IB+ 77 PT-SR-OB 241, 245, 250
PM-HSR-DOB 237 PT-SR-OB+ 241, 245
PT-SYNC 53 Sync mode 199, 333

Submodules Sync module. See PT-SYNC
PT-DMX 140–147 Sync reference points configuration 404–
block diagram 147 411
configuration 142 Synchronization
installation 142 audio 200, 332
operation 140 video frame 199, 333
parameters 142
specifications 147
PT-DMX-3G 140–147
T
block diagram 147 T command. See TERMINAL command
configuration 142 TDM audio matrices configuration 412–??
installation 142 Terminal block adapter 113, 123
operation 140 TERMINAL command 452
parameters 142 Terminal operations
specifications 147 establishing a session for serial control
PT-DX-SB 73, 135 interface products 450
PT-FSDMX-IBG 178–?? establishing a Telnet session for Ethernet
block diagram 190 control interface products 450
operation 179, 180 establishing a terminal operation
parameters 190 session 449
PT-FSDMXO-IBG 178–?? Test tone frequencies 200
block diagram 190
operation 179, 180 U
parameters 190
PT-HSR1D-IBG Upgrade procedures for 3 Gb
block diagram 154, 176 modules 363–366
operation 148, 172
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG V
specifications 155
PT-MUX 291–298 V # command. See VERIFY command
block diagram 297, 447 VERIFY command 452
configuration 293 Vertical timing 199
installation 293 Video
operation 291 frame synchronization 199, 333
parameters 294 Video fast switch 200, 328
specifications 298 Virtual output monitoring 438, 443
PT-MUX-3G 291–298
block diagram 297, 447 X
configuration 293
X # command. See XPOINT command
installation 293
XPOINT command 452
operation 291
specifications 298
PT-MUX-3G parameters 294 Z
PT-MXDX-SB 81, 239, 243
Z command. See ZERO command
PT-MX-SB 214, 220, 225 ZERO command 452
specifications 298
494 Index

Platinum Frame and System EditionAD - 20160504

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Platinum Frame and System EditionAD - 20160504

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Installation and Operation Manual

Support Contact Information

Publication Information ................................................................................................ ii

About This Manual .............................................................................................. xvii

Chapter 1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1

CCS Control System Integration Requirements ......................................................... 18

Chapter 2 Frame Modules ....................................................................................................... 23

Chapter 3 Input Modules ........................................................................................................ 55

PT-HSR1D-IBG Input Module ..................................................................................149

Power-Up sequence ...............................................................................................205

Chapter 4 Output Modules ...................................................................................................207

Power-Up sequence ...............................................................................................310

Chapter 5 Crosspoint Modules ...........................................................................................337

Chapter 6 Controlling Modules ..........................................................................................357

Chapter 7 Installation ..........................................................................................................361

Installing Output Monitoring Modules ....................................................................376

Chapter 9 Output Monitoring Modules ..........................................................................431

PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module ....................................................437

Chapter 10 Terminal Operation ............................................................................................449

Appendix A Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances ...............................453

Appendix B Laser Safety Guidelines ..................................................................................463

About This Manual

Table P-1 Revision History of Manual (Continued)

Table P-1 Revision History of Manual (Continued)

AC February 2015  Support for PX-RES as the control module in a

 Updates and configuration information for the

Table P-2 Writing Conventions

Unpacking a Platinum Product

Returning a Platinum Product

 The packaging must be able to withstand the product’s weight.

Platinum Product Standards

PT-PS Power Supply

EMC Compliance Standards

Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance

Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance

Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem

IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.

Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual

CAUTION: Statements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage

This chapter covers the following topics:

 Control Features on page 17

The Platinum router is available in these frame sizes:

 The 5RU (PM-FR-5) frame supports matrices up to 72×64.

Table 1-1 Platinum Series Architectural Information

Architecture 5RU 9RU 15RU 28RU

Figure 1-1 72×64 Physical Architecture (Front View)

Output modules Input modules

Figure 1-2 128×128 Physical Architecture (Front View)

Output modules Input modules

Resource (2), TDM XPT (2), Sync (2), OM (4)

Figure 1-3 256×256 Physical Architecture (Front View)

Outputs 129-256 4 3 Inputs 129-256

Resource (2), TDM XPT (2),

Outputs 257-384 6 5 Inputs 257-384

Output modules Input modules

Outputs 385-512 8 7 Inputs 385-512

Figure 1-4 512×512 Physical Architecture (Front View)

 Detailed information about input modules (such as configuration, installation, block

Figure 1-5 Platinum 5RU Frame Modular Components

Figure 1-6 Platinum Frame Modular Components (15RU Shown)

Figure 1-7 Platinum 15RU Frame Showing Back Panel

Frame Matrix Functional Arrangement